Environmental and Social Impact Assessment (Draft) - Asian ...

Environmental and Social Impact Assessment (Draft) Project Number: 47929 September 2013

PAK: Gulpur Hydropower Project Prepared by Mira Power Limited

The environment and social compliance audit report is a document of the borrower. The views expressed herein do not necessarily represent those of ADB's Board of Directors, Management, or staff, and may be preliminary in nature. Your attention is directed to the “Term of Use” section of this website.

ESIA of 100MW Gulpur Hydropower Project (GHPP) Kotli, Azad Jammu and Kashmir

| P a g e

September 20, 2013

Kotli, Azad Jammu and Kashmir - Pakistan

Environmental and Social

Impact Assessment (ESIA)

and

Environmental and Social

Management and

Monitoring Plan (ESMMP)

100MW Gulpur Hydropower Project

Ref: D3V01ESIA


Environmental and Social Impact Assessment (ESIA) and

Environmental and Social Management and

Monitoring Plan (ESMMP)

of


Kotli, Azad Jammu and Kashmir, Pakistan

September, 2013


Environmental and

Social Impact

Assessment (ESIA)

Volume 1




Environmental and Social Impact Assessment (ESIA)

of



Volume 1

September, 2013


i

LIST OF ACRONYMS

ADB Asian Development Bank

AJK Azad Jammu & Kashmir

AJK-EPA Azad Jammu & Kashmir Environmental Protection Agency

AJK-EPC Azad Jammu & Kashmir Environmental Protection Council

AJK-HEB Azad Jammu & Kashmir Hydro Electric Board

BACT Best Available Control Technology

BOD Biochemical Oxygen Demand

BOOT Build, Own, Operate and Transfer

BP Bank Procedures

BPEO Best Environmental Practicable Option

CBD Convention on Biological Diversity

CCGT Combined Cycle Gas Turbine

CDM Clean Development Mechanism

CEMP Construction Environmental Management Plan

CEO Chief Executive Officer

CFC Chlorofluorocarbon

cfu Colony Forming Unit

CITES Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species

CMP construction management plan

CMS Conservation of Migratory Species

COD Chemical oxygen demand

COO Chief Operating Officer

CSC Construction Supervision Contractor

CSR Corporate social responsibility

Cumecs Cubic Meter per Second

DHQ District Headquarter

EHS Environment, Health and Safety

EIA Environmental Impact Assessment

El. Elevation

EMMP Environmental Management and Monitoring Plan

EOS Earth Observing System

EOSDIS Earth Observing System Data and Information System

EPA Environmental Protection Agency

EPC Environmental Protection Council

EPC Engineering, Procurement and Construction

EPRRP Emergency Preparedness, Response and Recovery Plan

ER Encounter Rate

ESIA Environmental and Social Impact Assessment

ESMMP Environmental and Social Management and Monitoring Plan

FAP First Aid Post

FCCC Framework Convention on Climate Change


ii

FGDs Focused Group Discussions

GCP Ground Control Points

GHG Green House Gas

GHPP Gulpur Hydropower Project

GIIP Good International Industry Practice

GIS Geo Information System

GoP Government of Pakistan

GWh Gigawatt Hour

HCFC Hydro Chlorofluorocarbon

HSE Health Safety Equipment/ Health, Safety and Environment

IDC Indirect Costs

IEE Initial Environment Examination

IFC International Finance Cooperation

IP Indigenous Peoples

IPP Independent Power Producer

IR Involuntary Resettlement

IUCN International Union for Conservation of Nature

KDA Kotli Development Authority

KOSEP Korea South East Power Company

LAA Land Acquisition Act

LAC Land Acquisition Collector

LARP Land Acquisition and Resettlement Plan

LDL Lowest Detection Limit

LOI Letter of Interest

LOS Letter of Service

LPDAAC Land Processes Distributed Active Archive Center

LPG Liquid Petroleum Gas

M&E Maintenance and Engineering

MAF Million Acre-Foot

MCH Mother Child Health Care

MCM Million Cubic Meters

MPL Mira Power Limited

MSDS Material Safety Data Sheet

MW Megawatt

NASA National Aeronautics and Space Administration’s

NCS National Conservation Strategy

NDVI normalized difference vegetation index

NEQS National Environmental Quality Standards

NESPAK National Engineering Services Pakistan

NOC No Objection Certificate

NOL Normal Operation Level

OM Operations Manual

OP Operational Policy

PIC Prior Informed Consent


iii

PM Particulate Matter/Project Manager

PPE Personal Protective Equipment

PPIB Private Power & Infrastructure Board

PS Performance Standard

PWD Population Welfare Department

RCC Reinforced Cement Concrete

SCP Spill Contingency Plan

SPA Share Purchase Agreement

SPS Safeguard Policy Statement

SR Safeguards Requirement

SSC Species Survival Commission

TBT Tool Box Talks

TDS Total Dissolved Solids

TNTC Too Numerous to Count

USBR United States Bureau of Reclamation

WAPDA Water and Power Development Authority

WCMC World Conservation and Monitoring Centre

WWF World Wildlife Fund


iv

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

Today Pakistan is facing multifarious problems and challenges. These challenges are not a product of

sudden incident; rather it is a cumulative outcome of lack of planning and misplaced priorities of the

state. Among these challenges, energy crises is the acute one as it is energy that derives the engine

of economy and overall functions of modern economic order. The power sector in Pakistan has been

facing shortages of electricity generating capacity due to low pace of development of new power

plants to meet the growing demand for electricity. This has been aggravated by the rising price of oil,

shortage of natural gas and lesser focus on hydropower development. The effect of the large gap

between demand and supply of electric power has led to massive load shedding in Pakistan and in

Azad Jammu and Kashmir. Due to the widening of this gap, all walks of life from industry to domestic

are being adversely affected.

The primary cause for this worse energy crisis among others is the expensive energy mix which is

predominantly fossil fuel based resulting heavy dependency on expensive oil imports and depleting

natural gas reserves. For the long term energy security of the country and to ensure sustainable

development of the country, hydropower development is considered as the most feasible option,

which is in abundance in Pakistan. Development of hydropower is also considered as attractive to

help improving the management of the national water resources which supports one of the largest

irrigation systems in the world, upon which agriculture of the country is heavily dependent. Given

the gravity of situation in energy sector and opportunities it provides for private sector to invest, a

100 MW Hydropower Project in Gulpur on the Poonch River is proposed by the Private Power &

Infrastructure Board (PPIB).

This study assesses the environmental and social impacts associated with the construction and

operation of the Gulpur Hydropower Project. The Environmental Social Impact Assessment (ESIA)

was performed in four main phases of scoping, baseline data collection, impact assessment and

documentation. Scoping phase entails project data compilations, review of published literature,

legislative review and identification of potential impacts. While preparing the report great attention

is paid to ensure that the ESIA process and results are prepared according to the relevant guidelines

set by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), ADB and IFC.

Policy, Legal and Administrative Framework

Any development initiative specially related to hydropower has to take into consideration the legal

responsibilities of the proponent in the context of the environment and sustainable development,

and the requirements of the institutions that may influence the environmental management of the

proposed project. The Pakistan National Conservation Strategy (NCS) that was approved by the

federal cabinet in March 1992 is the principal policy document on environmental issues in the

country as well as AJK (EUAD/IUCN, 1992). The core areas that are relevant in the context of the

proposed project are pollution prevention and abatement, restoration of rangelands, increasing

energy efficiency, conserving biodiversity, supporting forestry and plantations, and the preservation

of cultural heritage. The Government of Pakistan promulgated “Pakistan Environmental Protection

Act” in 1997. The same was adopted by the Government of AJK. However, this act was adapted to

meet the state’s requirements and notified in 2000 as Azad Jammu and Kashmir Environmental


v

Protection Act, 2000. Environmental Protection Agency headed by a Director General has the

responsibility for establishing Biodiversity Action Plan at a country level.

Under Section 11 of the 2000 Act, a project falling under any category (qualifying IEE or EIA) requires

the proponent to file IEE or EIA with the AJK-EPA. In the absence of AJK-EPA guidelines for

environmental assessment, those laid down by Pak- EPA have been followed. The Pak-EPA has

published a set of environmental guidelines for conducting environmental assessments and the

environmental management of different types of development projects. Other important policy

documents and legal requirements of the project are: National Environmental Quality Standards

(NEQS), National Resettlement Policy and Ordinance, The Land Acquisition Act, 1894, The Forest Act,

1927 and the Forest (Amendment) Act 2010, The Jammu and Kashmir Forest Regulations, 1930, The

AJK Wildlife (Protection, Preservation, Conservation and Management) Act, 1975, Azad Jammu and

Kashmir, Wildlife (Protection, Preservation, Conservation and Management) Ordinance, 2012, The

Antiquities Act, 1975, The Motor Vehicles Ordinance, 1965, and Rules, 1969, The Factories Act, 1934,

The Pakistan Penal Code, 1860, The Explosives Act, 1884

Owing to its magnitude the proposed project involves various stakeholders and institutions.

Therefore, it is indispensable to interaction with different agencies. This engagement will ensure

that the project complies with the laws and regulations controlling the environmental concerns of

dam construction and operation, and that all pre- construction requisites, such as permits and

clearances are met. Besides providing overview of Policy, Legal and Administrative Framework, the

section 2 also adumbrates guidelines of Asian Development Bank and requirements of IFC related to

the Project.

Project Description

The Gulpur Hydropower Project site is administratively located in Kotli District of Azad Jammu and

Kashmir. It is located at latitude 33°27’ and longitude 73°51’, which is about 5 km South of Kotli

Town. The site is approximately 167 km from Islamabad and 285 km from Lahore, and is accessible

directly from Islamabad and Lahore by a two-lane (and partially paved) mountainous road. The

proposed Gulpur Hydropower Project will exploit the water resources of the Poonch River for power

generation. It will comprise four main components, viz., Weir, Intake Structure, Power Tunnel and

Power House. The Weir will be located near Aghar Colony on the Poonch River at about 5 km

downstream of Kotli Town and about 250 m downstream of the confluence of Ban Nullah with the

river. The Intake Structure and intake portal of the Power Tunnel will be located on Ban Nullah about

2 km upstream of its confluence with the Poonch River. The Power House and outlet portal of the

Power Tunnel will be located on Poonch River about 6.5 km downstream of the Weir structure.

Land Acquisition requirements of the Project are directly related to the consideration of design

alternative to construct the earthen Dyke in the submerged area. The proponent has carried out

detailed analysis of land requirements and resettlement requirement under following the two

options. Under Option 1 an earthen Dyke shall be constructed in the submerged area to curtail the

land acquisition and land resettlement while under Option 2 “No Dyke” was proposed. Under the

selected Option 2 Under “No Dyke” option the project will consume 13% (113 Acres) of the total

area for building structures, reservoir, colony, and camp and approach roads. About 87 percent (804

Acres) of the land required for the proposed project will be utilized for the reservoir. In total the


vi

proposed project will required 920 Acres of land; major portion (74 percent) of this land is owned by

the Government while only 26 percent land in privately owned.

A 2-stage river diversion plan has been proposed for the construction of the Weir. The diversion will

be manipulated within the river section by constructing coffer dams. It is anticipated that the Project

would take about 45 months for its completion and commissioning.

It has been estimated that the project will employ about 700 skilled, semi-skilled and unskilled

workforces for its construction and commissioning. Majority of unskilled and to some extent semi-

skilled and skilled workforce will be employed from the local area. However, the contractor will

engage specialized workforce including engineers, geologists and construction management staff

from the outside area. The project falls in a terrain that is constituted of high hills having steep

slopes with narrow valleys in between. The contractor would need to develop access roads for all

the sites. The section on project description provides plan of alternative and access roads. The

Project will deploy various types of machineries for construction purposes. These will include

bulldozers, excavators, shovels, tunneling machine, dumpers, batching plant, tankers, trucks, etc.

The project cost will be approximately US$ 340.00 million.

Description of the Physical Environment

Baseline data on physical environment within the area of project influence has been compiled to

cover these areas: land, climate and meteorology, water (water resources, water quality, source of

pollution and hydrology and air Quality and Noise (noise levels). Some of these areas are directly

affected while others may be influenced indirectly. This section highlights the areas of most

concerns. Most of the potentially affected areas, except the ones related with the quarries, would

fall within a strip of about 4 km wide (on the average 2 km on either side of the Poonch River) and

about 10 km in length covering the river stretch from Kotli up to the Power House site.

The study area is a part of land formations developed at the foothills of Himalayan Ranges through

tectonic events subsequent to those that caused building of Himalaya. The Project area contains

middle Siwalik formations developed from the sedimentary deposits contributed by a number of

drainage channels from the uprising Himalayan Mountain Ranges. The rock formations include

extremely folded beds, having almost vertical dips, of various types of sandstones, clay-stones and

siltstones. Mostly the mountains are covered with primary soils, except along the river and nullahs

where the beds are almost devoid of soil material.

Major geological formations in the project area are; Pleistocene and Recent Deposits Overburden,

Secree, Talus and Vegetation, Classification of Rocks, Sandstone, and Clay stone/Siltstone. The

project area lies very close to the Riasi Thrust which is a branch of the Main Boundary Thrust (MBT).

Virtually, the former almost passes through or near to the course of the Poonch River, while the

latter bounds the Project area at a distance of about 5 km towards east. Consequently, the proposed

Project will be located in active seismic region that has experienced few large earthquakes with

magnitude greater than 7.

The towns of Poonch, Sehra, Tatta Pani and Kotli are situated on the banks of this river. It has two

major tributaries in Pakistan, Batar and Mendher. The Poonch River originates at an elevation of

more than 3500 m and traverses about 110 km from east to west up to the proposed weir site and


vii

fed by many big and small streams on both the banks. Most of the tributaries join the river on its

right bank. The relief in the catchment area of Poonch River varies from 200 m to 4500 m. This

elevation range was divided into 9 elevation bands with 500 m interval.

The texture of the primary soils varies from moderately fine to moderately coarse depending upon

the rock type from which these have developed. However, the secondary soils are mostly

moderately coarse textured. The soils of the raised terraces in floodplains are generally devoid of the

stony material. The soils of lower terraces generally contain varied quantities of pebbles, cobbles

and boulders.

Generally, the project area falls in sub-humid and sub-tropical zone. It has moderate summer and

cold winter. The climate is greatly influenced by monsoon in the months of July and August and

snowcapped mountains of Pir Panjal Range. The average annual precipitation in the area is 1,237

mm. Temperature in different parts of the tract varies according to the elevation. The data shows

that the average monthly mean maximum temperature varies from 17.6 °C in January to 38.4 °C in

June, whereas monthly mean minimum temperature ranges between 4.8 °C in January and 24.9 °C in

June.

Mean monthly discharges computed from the mean daily flows shows a minimum value of 12

cumecs observed in January 1966 and maximum value of 830 cumecs in September 1992. The data

depicts that mean monthly flows vary between 41 cumecs (106 MCM) in November to 279 cumecs

(746 MCM) in August.

Main water resources in the district Kotli are surface water and ground water. The microbiological

analysis of the water sample in the project area show that nearly every sample has some biological

contamination. Especially the drinking water in Jamal Pur and Aghar Colony has highest microbial

count. The analysis shows that hardness in all the samples ranged from 346 to 515 mg/l. Total

hardness of water as CaCO3 is within acceptable limits in most of the samples except for one.

No air quality monitoring data is available for the project area. In general there are no major sources

of air pollution, viz., industries, exist in the project area except road traffic in the valleys of Poonch

River and Nullahs. The ambient particulate matter PM10 was found 97.14 ug/m3 at proposed power

house site, 87.90 ug/m3 at proposed camp area, 75.19 ug/m3 at proposed weir site and 66.77ug/m3

at proposed batching plant are within standard value of 150 ug/m3.

The noise level was found in range of 59.7 to 68.1 (dBA) at proposed power house site, 37.0 to 57.0

(dBA) at proposed camp site, 37.3 to 54.8 (dBA) at proposed weir site and 35.9 to 48.9 (dBA) at

proposed batching plant.

Description of Biological Environment

The biological component of the study focused on the aquatic ecology, flora, mammals, birds, and

reptiles and amphibians. The forests of the area are characterized by the presence of subtropical

broad leaved vegetation and are fundamentally Chirpine forest type. These forests are mainly

dominated by Pinus roxburghii in an altitudinal range of 700-1800m. The sub-tropical forests of the

area were mainly dominated by Pinus roxburghii. But present figures show that Pinus-Themeda

community is becoming sparse which would eventually transform the area into a degraded scrub-


viii

land. Now, the area is characterized by the dominance of herb and shrub layer, comprising Themeda

anathera, Poa annua, Carissa opaca and Adhatoda vasica over Pinus roxburghii.

Most of the population of the area dwells in remote areas that are not easily accessible and thus left

with no other option but to rely on medicinal plants for general treatment. Notable among these

floras are Justicia adhatoda, Acacia nilotica, Calotropis procera, Ricinus communis, Morus nigra,

Dodonaea viscosa, Achyranthes aspera, Ipomoea carnea, Taraxacum officinale, Eriobotrya japonica,

Cissus carnosa, Melia azedarach, Eucalyptus citriodora and Ficus carica.

The data shows that these forests are faced with the problems of overgrazing and deforestation.

Regarding floral Diversity that a total of 186 vascular plant species were identified from the area

including 3 species of pteridophytes. The Leguminosae and Asteraceae were the largest families of

dicotyledons, whereas, Poaceae was largest of the monocotyledons. Biogeographically the area of

the Project falls into Irano-Turanian region Floristic region. The Himalayan endemics included 19

species, whose details are provided in the section. Among the rare species Fraxinus raiboearpa was

the plant that is confined to few localities in north Pakistan and Afghanistan. None of the species

found in GHPP study area is listed in the WCMC list in endangered categories.

The project area lies in the humid subtropical zone influenced by monsoon Mediterranean

disturbances as well. The forests can be grouped into and Subtropical Broadleaved Forest, and

Subtropical Pine Forests. The dominant land use at the project facilities will be

agriculture/settlements. Areas devoid of forest make about 25% of the land cover. Overall forest

cover is only 18 % that can be treated to be closest to primary; otherwise, the forest cover is not so

dense. Similarly for the direct impact areas (project facilities) the forest cover is around 35% with

only about 5% being dense.

River Poonch is generally rich in fish diversity and even 21 fish species have been recorded from a

stretch of about 10 km. This diversity is quite high for this small river stretch. Among the recorded

species, majority of fish fauna belongs to the family Cyprinidae which is comprised of 13 species.

Other 8 species are divided among seven families in such a way that five families are represented

only by one species and the rest two each by two species. Among the fish fauna of the project area,

two species are endemic in Pakistan including AJK, one is endangered, two are Vulnerable, and one

is Near Threatened. Quite a good number of species are commercially important. The species Tor

putitora and Clupisoma garua are considered among the esteemed fishes and have very high

commercial value.

The Project is located in the “Mahasher National Park” which was notified recently to protect the

Endangered Mahasher Fish (Tor putitora). The national park through relevant legislation restricts

various forms of species exploitation to ensure that the habitat remains pristine and congenial for

the indigenous species.

Thirty one families of macro-invertebrates were identified from 546 benthic macro-invertebrate

individuals collected during the whole study period. A number of mammalian species including

common leopard, black bear, barking deer, jackal, fox and rhesus monkey were reported from the

Kotli district of Azad Jammu and Kashmir in past. In order to assess human-wildlife interaction and

site two surveys were carried out. Jackal has highest annual sighting rate at 25 animals per


ix

respondent per year followed by fox; 4.7, and rhesus monkey; 2.8. Black bear, leopard cat and wild

boar have negligible sighting rates.

Only 12 cases of predation on livestock and poultry were recorded. Jackal was the main predator

responsible for almost 92% predations majority; 93%, of which was poultry while remaining were

goats. Goats were killed while grazing and poultry was capture from cage most of the time. Only one

case of common leopard depredation was reported in which predator attacked on a coral and killed

30 goats at a time.

Seventeen species of small mammals have been collected from the study area belonging to eleven

families and five orders. Among reptiles snakes and frogs of different are found in the area. Manzoor

et al. (2013) while assessing the biodiversity of the Pir Lasura National Park in District Kotli, Azad

Kashmir reported six amphibian and 24 reptilian species. No crocodilians and tortoises are found in

the study area; Kotli, AJK and the existing species in the study area include; freshwater turtles,

lizards and snakes. Some of the reptilian species are nocturnal in their feeding habits like gekkonid

lizards and elapide snakes whereas others are diurnal like agamid, lacertid, varanid and scincid

lizards, freshwater turtles and colubrine snakes. A number of surveys were carried out which

includes reptile and amphibian diversity survey. Total 21 species of herps including six amphibians

and 15 reptiles were recorded during the present study.

Analysis of data on residential status revealed that out of 61 bird’s species, 76% were year round

resident, remaining were summer breeders, winter visitors and passage migrant. In term of the

abundance of recorded species, the undisturbed area depicted the higher diversity of avian fauna.

The Habitat destruction, anthropogenic pressure in the form of tree cutting, firewood collection,

grass cutting, and cattle grazing were also observed in these study sites. Out of 21 species found in

Poonch River, 12 species are species of special importance. This section on Baseline Ecology provides

lists of the species.

Socio-Economic Environment

This section presents a description of the socioeconomic characteristics of the project area, and

where available utilizes national and regional level data for providing a more cogent understanding

of the context. Socio-economic survey in the project area covered 8 villages/settlements namely 1)

Aghar, 2) Barali, 3) Dharang and 4) Gulharin, 5) Hill Kalan, 6) Hill Khurd, 7) Jamal Pur and 8) Mandi.

The district Kotli is the second largest in terms of population in Azad Jammu and Kashmir. The

population of the district was 365,000 in 1981 and an increase of 54.37 percent was recorded over

the last seventeen (17) years i.e 1981-1998. The human habitation in district Kotli is predominantly

determined by its topography as the hilly mountainous terrain limits options for human habitation.

Hence, most of the human habitation in the project area is scattered.

Traditionally, the social set up of Kotli was largely based on kinship. The overall social arrangement

was based around different clans (baraderi). In the decades of 1960-70s migration of people to

abroad for earning shifted the basis of economy. With increasing exposure to market forces and

exogenous lifestyle the pattern of interface between different communities also witnessed drastic

changes. Despite modernization people still rely on pre-modernization social structure and social


x

interaction and politics is largely shaped by social dynamics and power relationships. However,

access of opportunities in the country and abroad enabled people to find increasing role in the

society. The major tribes residing in the district are Syed, Gujar, Jat, Rajput, Awan and Sudhan.

Hindko, Gojri and Pahari are the indigenous languages of the district.

Generally the area is peaceful as there are no chronic social and communal conflicts among the

communities living in the project area. Major crops are maize, wheat & rice whereas minor crops

include vegetables, grams, pulses (red lobia) and oil-seeds. Major fruits are apple, pears, apricot and

walnuts. The main economic activity in area remains in agriculture, livestock and service sectors. Of

the total land area of about 414,019 acres of Kotli District, 20% is available for cultivation while 80%

of the land bears forest, settlements, infrastructures or lie in the form of uncultivable waste land.

The survey results show that 11% of the male workforce is comprised of unskilled laborers, whereas

no female works as a laborer.

According to the information received from Department of Education AJK, apart from a campus of

University of Azad Jammu and Kashmir there is one post graduate college for men and 12 degree

colleges for men and women in the district. In the project area each settlement has primary level

government schools for boys and girls within an average distance of 2 km. Overall 27% of the

population falling above the eligible age of 10 years population is illiterate (20% men and 36%

women). Population Health Profile

There is one District Headquarter (DHQ) Hospital in District Kotli, three Rural Health centers, 20 First

Aid Posts (FAPs) and 16 Mother Child Health Care (MCH) Centers along with other health facilities at

grassroots level. The housing pattern is lavish in terms of size and construction as more than 88% of

the structures are pukka, made of cement and bricks with RCC structures. According to Government

of AJK, currently 80% of the urban population and 66% of rural population has been provided with a

piped water supply through house connections and public stands. The entire population (95%) in the

project area has access to drinking water in their houses. 23% use water from wells and 50% use

water from both wells and pipeline. 32% have facility of sewerage system, and 57% use septic tank.

7% percent use a pit latrine and 4% use open fields. The majority of households do not have

drainage facility (68%).

Electricity connection is available to all the households (100%) in the project area. The women have

no formal role in the authority structure of the nearby villages. They are about 48% of the

population in these villages; the literacy rate for above 10 years of female population is 67% (80% for

males). There is none falling under the category of ultra-poor as all the households have a monthly

income which is above PKR 5,000/- and expenditure accordingly. There are some shrines of saints.

Analysis of Alternatives

Alternatives are essentially, different ways through which the proponent can feasibly achieve

sustainable development by carrying out a different type of actions, choosing design alternatives or

adopting a different technology or design for the Project to create win-win scenario for all

stakeholders. Alternatives and mitigation, therefore, cover a spectrum ranging from a high level to

very detailed aspects of project design. This section of the report presents the analysis of the

alternatives considered for the proposed project. The different alternative proposed are: no project


xi

scenario, alternate methods of power generation, alternate location of the Project, design

alternatives and selection of access roads and alignment.

The “No Project” option is least considered option for Pakistan. The country is currently going

through the worse power crisis of the history. Energy crisis is considered as major development

hurdle in Pakistan and has resulted in massive load shedding in the country hugely deteriorating the

economic development and growth. In year 2012-13 reveal that the power shortfall touched the

figured of 6,390 MW with average shortfall of 3,886 MW. The total generation was 95,364 GWh

during year 2011-12 which represent only 47% capacity utilization. “No Project” scenario is

considered or adopted it would mean that the already power deficient economy would suffer even

more and at current rate if no power is added to the national grid. Given the gravity of energy crisis

and its repercussion on the economy, Pakistan cannot afford to deprive itself of a major project of

cheap source of electricity

There are different options available to generate electricity which include but are not limited to

production using furnace oil, natural gas, coal, solar and hydel. Out of total 95,364 GWh produced

during year 2011-12, only 30% has been generated by Hydel resources, 29% has been produced

using natural gas while the 35% generation was dependable on expensive furnace oil. The nuclear

energy contributed 5.5%, whereas a minor part of energy also came through diesel and coal.

Non-renewable options such as solar and wind are not brought into the national grid at any of the

location in Pakistan, however, few wind projects are at different stages of implementation/

construction. Pakistan imports oil from other countries to meet domestic needs whilst the gas

reserves of the country are fast depleting and hence cannot be presently considered as reliable

sources of power generation. The only coal used in Pakistan is imported from Indonesia and South

Africa. The Thar Coal resources are still in early stages of exploration and are yet to be further

evaluated for potential to generate electricity. Wind power is currently in the experimental stage

and few projects are under implementation and having lower efficiency and power potential cannot

be considered as a replacement or full time substitute of other sources of power generation.

Numerous perennial and seasonal rivers are flowing in the north south direction in Pakistan. Hence

Hydel power is considered a viable option for a country rich in surface water resources. For a

developing country like Pakistan minimum O&M cost makes the hydel power as a viable option.

Hydropower is the cheapest source of electricity in terms of per unit cost and maintenance of the

generation system when compared with other alternatives, such as the furnace oil or gas run power

plants. Hydropower requires significant initial investment compared with thermal options, however,

once the debts are paid back the cost of electricity generation reduces significantly resulting in long

term energy security of the country. A typical hydropower project in private sector has a levelized

cost around 8-9 US cents/KWh with a generation cost of about 3 US cents/KWh after debt

repayments are complete. In comparison the thermal projects (furnace oil based) currently have the

levelized cost of around 16.0 US cents/KWh and keep on increasing with time due to continuous

increase in oil prices.

In Pakistan the hydro power plants have a plant load factor in the tune of 50% - 60% which is slightly

lesser than that for conventional power generation sources with higher load factor of 60% - 80%.

However, it is higher than those of other renewable energy options such as wind and wave energy.


xii

The proposed project is located in a greener area where installation of a combustion based power

plant would only deteriorate the environment, while installation of hydro power station would not

have any greenhouse emissions from plant operations and the positive economic impact would help

reduce the pressure on the local natural resources. It is obvious that hydro power plants are the

lowest ranked in terms of greenhouse emissions into the environment while the coal power plants

are the most notorious when it comes to greenhouse gas emissions.

Series of technical feasibility studies have been carried out for the analysis of the optimum location

for the construction of the dam at Gulpur. Two alternative options were considered for possible

Poonch River development in two main combinations. Combination-A comprised four sites, which

include Sehra, Kotli, Barali and Rajdhani dam sites whereas Combination-B consisted of three sites

namely Sehra, Kotli and Gulpur dam sites. Further studies concluded that a new site, which is located

near Gulpur Village approximately 7 Km downstream of the Barali dam site which was different from

the earlier identified Gulpur site. During the initial stages of the feasibility study, it was noticed that

the reservoir level (El 475 m) of proposed Rajdhani Hydropower Project would submerge the newly

identified Gulpur site; therefore the site was shifted to an upstream location above the reservoir

level of Rajdhani Hydropower Project. During design stage, several locations were examined to find a

suitable site where a high storage dam could be built to maximize the power potential and final site

location will ensure that the Kotli and Rajdhani Dam can also be constructed along with the Gulpur

Dam. To ensure the natural and social environment are not disturbed numerous tweak in the design

are included.

During the finalization of the feasibility study of the Project Consultants initially recommended the

normal operating level (NOL) of reservoir at El. 550 m. The Project layout involved submergence of

about 646 houses and 1800 acres of inhabited area affecting nearly 5,000 people. In an effort to

reduce the environmental and social impacts three options were Option 1 was based on the earlier

concept where a 75m high dam with NOL at El. 550 m and an underground powerhouse was

proposed. Option 2 was essentially Option-1 but with a reduced dam height of 60 m and NOL at El.

535 m. Option 3 was based on the concept wherein the head is partly created by a weir and partly by

a tunnel utilizing the steep gradient of the river. Following the selection of Option 3 as the most

viable option, further design optimization and studies were based on such option under which

maximum reservoir level was fixed at El. 540.0 m to avoid submergence of surrounding villages and

Project was conceived as run-of river with small storage. In an effort to further curtail the

resettlement and minimizing environmental impacts for selected Option 3 (as explained above)

different options were further studied and it is proposed to build Earthen Protection dyke, Collection

Drain with Dewatering Arrangement were proposed in the expected resettlement area.

The EPC Contractor initially proposed the construction of temporary facilities and access roads at

those locations which were resulting in high resettlement in terms of houses, cultivable land and

other infrastructure and also having negative environmental impacts. The proponent and EPC

Contractor deliberated extensively on this matter to find the engineering solution which results in

lesser resettlement and lesser environmental impacts.


xiii

Stakeholder Consultations

Apart from gathering of quantitative data through household survey of the area of influence of the

project and 100% survey of project affected people a total of 16 consultations (qualitative) were

conducted with the affected persons and other local community to share the information about the

project and record their concerns/ feedback associated with this project. The consultation was in

two stages of scoping and stakeholder’s consultation. Consultative sessions discussed the topics

related to land acquisition and resettlement issues, employment and livelihoods of communities,

gender and women issues, contractor’s camp and access and environmental issues.

The section of stakeholder consultations provides details of outcomes of consultations and covers

issues and concerns showed by the stakeholders regarding land acquisition and resettlement. To

address the issues and concerns raised by the stakeholders a mitigation plan has been developed

and made part of the ESIA. The stakeholders supported the Gulpur Hydro Power project provided

that environmental and issues are addressed through mitigation measures. To address the issues an

ESIA and Land Acquisition and Resettlement Plan (LARP) are developed and shared with

stakeholders for their feedback and suggestions.

Impact Assessment and Mitigation

Environmental impacts have been and will continue to be considered, eliminated or reduced

throughout the lifecycle of the Project. The prediction and evaluation of impacts of the Project has

been considered against the baseline in the ESIA. The study has considered direct, indirect,

permanent and temporary impacts of the project. Each of the environmental impact are categorized

into two; beneficial and adverse impacts. Wherever, the Project is likely to result in unacceptable

impact on the environment, mitigation measures are proposed.

Potential impacts that may arise from the execution of the project activities can result in soil

contamination, soil erosion, water contamination, change in drainage pattern due to weir

construction, water resource depletion, fugitive dust emissions, vehicular and generator exhaust

emissions, damage to infrastructure due to blasting and noise nuisance due to blasting, drilling and

batching plant. To minimize the impact of environment the section on Impact Assessment and

Mitigation has identifies potential impacts and thorough suggested mitigation and good practice

measure, and monitoring.

The project area represents a human dominated landscape, and the vegetation has been subject to

human influence over a long period of time. There are no threatened plant species found in the

area. The dominant land use at the project facilities was agriculture/ settlements, and areas devoid

of forest make about 25% of the cover. Since the majority land cover impacted by the project will be

either cultivated land or sparse broad leave forest which already have poor ground cover, impacts of

the project on vegetation are anticipated to be minor.

Based on the factors described above other potential impacts identified are: land disturbance due to

construction and operation of project facilities resulting in disturbance, fragmentation, displacement

and direct loss of animal, plants, reptiles amphibian and birds; deterioration of area’s water

resources and river if pollutants are mixed with surface runoff during rain and, or if pollutants leach

into the ground or carried to River. Domestic waste (sanitary and kitchen discharge) or release of oil


xiv

and grease, fuel from project related machinery or equipment, and reduction in water flow beyond

weir, which can alter ecology of the area, and lead to decline in abundance of fishes, especially of

Mahasher, and imparts habitat fragmentation or affects connectivity of Mangla Reservoirs fishes to

Poonch River. To mitigate the threat a details measures and good practices has been suggested.

In order to minimize social impact of the projected it is suggested to appropriately follow the

operational manual and collaborate effectively with local communities in every phase of the project.

Operational impacts of the proposed project are associated with the movement of vehicular traffic

on it and allied activities. These include air and noise pollution, safety hazards and other similar

impacts. Potential socio-economic impacts that may arise from the execution of the project activities

are: provision of job opportunities, access to the health facilities, permanent acquisition of land and

non-land assets for the project, people lose their productive assets to the project, diseases

incidences, blockade of access of local community due construction activities, disturbance of privacy

and conflict between workers and local community.

Traffic Assessment Study

Currently the road(s) in the project area can cater for the needs of the traffic that is using these

approach roads but with the anticipated increase in heavy and light traffic there are likely to be

impacts on the existing road infrastructure. This study mainly focused on the routes that may be

used for project related traffic and the likely impacts that may be caused due to the proposed

project.

The site is located about 167 Km from Islamabad and 285 km from Lahore, it is directly approachable

from Islamabad and Lahore by a two-lane, all-weather paved road. Access to the Project site from

Islamabad is via Kahuta-Kotli to Gulpur. The other route is from Lahore via GT Road to Dina and then

to Gulpur via Mirpur. GT road is the main access route for all heavy transport vehicles for domestic

needs and also for transit trade with Afghanistan also is a main trade route for India and Indian held

Kashmir via AJK. Considering that most of the machinery and manpower would come from the

southern regions of the country and it would be easier for them to approach the project site via

Dina-Mangla-Mirpur-Kotli route. Machines for the proposed power plant would be imported via sea

and then transported by road from Karachi.

The study has not considered railway because AJK does not have railway track. This study advises on

the routes that are economic and time saving. The nearest international airport is located in

Islamabad that is around 150km (approx.). Traffic count surveys were conducted at three different

locations in and around Kotli. Data analysis of traffic reveals that the traffic activity varies with the

different times of the day starting from lower number of vehicle in early morning to gradually

increasing towards the mid-day and then there is a dip in the afternoon and then another rise in

traffic count in the evening and finally a drop towards the later of the evening and still lower in the

late night of the hours.

In terms of the traffic activity there are three main peaks first is around the 0900 hours which is

normally the time when people have to reach to the offices and business. Next surge is in the

afternoon lunch time around 1400 hours as that is lunch time in the offices and off time for

educational institutions and hence the greater activity. The last peak in the traffic activity is observed


xv

in the evening around the 1700 hours time mark because this is the time when people leave their

work places and rush towards their homes.

The traffic pattern in the opposite direction at the Gulpur Junction follows a slightly different pattern

in terms of the number of traffic peaks in which away traffic were three and here there are two clear

surges, one at the same time in the morning around the 1000 hours while the next one is observed

at around the 1600 hours.

If we compare the traffic patterns on two approach roads simultaneously it can be seen that the

volume of traffic attracted towards Gulpur and then traffic away from the Gulpur area is more or

less the same but the slight change is observed only in the timings of peak traffic hours. This is due

to the reason that people from the adjoining areas come to for business to Gulpur in the morning

and then go back and hence the greater activity in that direction.

The traffic counts may be higher for a hilly area but majority of the count accounts for motor bikes

which would, in the project scenario, be less of an issue with reference to the expected rise in traffic

volumes. Another important observation is that daily around 200 trucks are moving along the roads

which would be used for project activities, which means that the risks associated with the

movements of these vehicles are known to the people. Furthermore these roads are frequently used

by trucks so there would not be a need for roads improvement at least in the initial phases of the

project, in time if the requirement arises, different options can be assessed as per the demand of the

situation then.

The traffic baseline surveys and traffic assessment clearly suggest that the current road conditions

are appropriate for the project related traffic during the construction and operation. The traffic load

is also as calculated PCE values are very low in comparison to HCM 2000. With implementation of

the proposed mitigation measure and development and implementation of the project traffic

management plan the impact will be minimized.

Environmental and Social Management and Monitoring Plan

The section on Environmental and Social Management and Monitoring Plan (ESMMP) summarizes

the organizational requirements, management and monitoring plans. The environmental and social

management and monitoring plan (ESMMP) presented in this section is a component of the overall

environmental management that is particularly important with respect to this ESIA report as it

presents MPL’s commitments to address the impacts identified by the impact assessment process.

Effective implementation and functioning of the ESMMP depends on adequate human and financial

resources, clearly defined responsibilities for environmental and social management, appropriate

training and good communication. To be effective, this ESMMP must be viewed as a tool reflecting

to the contractors and sub-contractors overall commitment to environmental protection. This must

start at the most senior levels in the organization. Contractor management must provide strong and

visible leadership to promote a culture in which all employees share a commitment to

environmental awareness and protection. The study provides organization setup of MPL with

commitments to be achieved.


xvi

Issues related to environment have been embedded within the role and responsibilities of client,

contractor and sub-contractors. Environmental and social management plan includes impact

reference, description of the impact, mitigation/management measure, project phase and targeted

residual impact.

Monitoring of environmental components and mitigation measures during implementation and

operation stages is a key component of the ESMMP to safeguard the protection of environment.

Monitoring program includes regular monitoring of construction and commissioning activities for

their compliance with the environmental requirements as per relevant standards, specifications and

ESMMP. The purpose of such monitoring is to assess the performance of the undertaken mitigation

measures and to immediately formulate additional mitigation measures and/or modify the existing

ones aimed at meeting the environmental compliance as appropriate during construction.

The framework environmental monitoring plan is provided in the document. Data will be

documented and interpreted. Temporal and spatial trends in the data will be discerned and

compliance with relevant thresholds will be evaluated. Monitoring reports will be produced to meet

internal and external reporting requirements. If monitoring results indicate non-conformance with

stipulated thresholds or if a significant deteriorating trend is observed, it will be recorded as a non-

conformance and handled by the non-conformance and incident procedure. The tools and process

of monitoring involve preliminary monitoring programmes, documentation and Record Keeping,

non-conformances and incidents, formal audits and site inspections.

Cost estimates are prepared for all the mitigation and monitoring measures proposed in the ESMMP.

The budget has been calculated for a duration of 45 months of the construction phase. The costs for

implementation of environmental and social mitigations during the operational phase are not

included. The operational cost shall be calculated before the completion of construction phase after

consultation with stakeholders and regulatory authorities. The cost for land acquisition and

resettlement related activities are not included. This cost shall be calculated on actual basis after

detailed and specific surveys and completion of land acquisition and resettlement plan (LARP).

The cost estimates and the budget during design and construction phase for the mitigation and

monitoring measures is estimated to be around one and half million united states dollars (USD 1.5

million).

The cost estimates for control measures and some of the mitigation measures that were already part

of Engineers estimate are not included in the ESMMP. The cost estimates also includes the budget

for environmental monitoring, implementation, institutional strengthening and capacity building of

project staff and environmental enhancement/compensation measures.

Personnel, including contractors’ personnel, working for or on behalf of the Project will be informed

of potential significant environmental and social impacts and risks associated with the Project by

means of awareness training. Visitors to Project sites will also receive awareness training as part of

site induction training. Personnel, including contractors’ personnel, will be made aware of their

specific environmental and social management responsibilities. Training needs analyses will be

undertaken and personnel will be given adequate training to meet these responsibilities.


xvii

Spill Contingency Plan in the document devised a mechanism for identification of potentially

polluting substances and pollution scenarios and suggests spill prevention strategies and general

response action. The purpose of this section is to describe the preventive and planning measures

and the responding procedures for dealing with spills of pollutant substances during the execution of

the Project. Details of specific responsibilities and procedures to be followed during prevention,

planning, and spill response activities are given in the section.

The biodiversity conservation and management plan or which may refer to biodiversity action plan

will be integral part of the ESMMP and ESIA. As part of the ESIA completion an ecology survey of the

project area has been conducted. The survey included: qualitative and quantitative assessment of

flora, mammals, reptiles and birds; identification of key species, their population and their

conservation status in the area and reports of wildlife sightings and fish captured in the area by the

resident communities. Further surveys shall also be conducted as part of biodiversity action plan.

Air pollution plan aims to reduce the sources and amounts of pollutants responsible for the loss of

any air quality, acidification and global warming and to improve the quality of life, protecting their

health risks from air pollution. This Plan has also been the initial commitment of client to reduce

dust, greenhouse gases (GHGs) emissions in a context of sustainable development with economic

growth, social cohesion and environmental protection at the project level.

Waste management plan has been prepared to meet the Local regulatory requirement, equator

principle and EHS guideline of IFC and ABD. The Plan lays down measures to protect the

environment and human health by preventing or reducing the adverse impacts of the generation

and management of waste and by reducing the overall impacts of resource use and improving the

efficiency of such use. This Plan introduces an approach that takes into account the whole life-cycle

of products and processes and not only their waste phase. Waste management includes the

collection, temporary storage, transportation, recovery/recycle, treatment and disposal of waste

produced by activities in an effort to reduce their effects on human health and environment

throughout the entire cycle of life of their products or processes.

Waste management activities include medical waste management, final destination, waste

transportation, waste storage, waste segregation and collection, waste identification and

classification. Everyone who produced, handles, stores, transports or disposes of waste has a duty of

care to ensure that all reasonable steps are taken to ensure the waste is kept in a safe and secure

state, the waste does not cause pollution of the environment and the waste does not harm people.

The document also provides details of muck disposal plan, traffic management plan, health and

safety plan and emergency preparedness and response plan.


xviii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Volume 1

List of Acronyms ........................................................................................................................... i

Executive Summary ..................................................................................................................... iv

Table of Contents ..................................................................................................................... xviii

List of Tables and Figures ......................................................................................................... xxiv

List of Tables ................................................................................................................................................... xxiv

List of Figures.................................................................................................................................................. xxvi

1 Introduction ...................................................................................................................... 1-1

1.1 Project Overview ................................................................................................................................ 1-2

1.2 Project Area ........................................................................................................................................ 1-2

1.3 Introduction of the ESIA ..................................................................................................................... 1-4

1.3.1 Objectives of the ESIA ................................................................................................................ 1-4 1.3.2 Approach and Methodology ...................................................................................................... 1-4 1.3.3 Organization of this Report ....................................................................................................... 1-5

2 Policy, Legal and Administrative Framework ...................................................................... 2-1

2.1 National Policy and Administrative Framework ................................................................................. 2-1

2.1.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................... 2-1 2.1.2 The AJK, Environmental Protection Act, 2000 ........................................................................... 2-2 2.1.3 Regulations for Environmental Assessment .............................................................................. 2-2 2.1.4 Guidelines for Environmental Assessment ................................................................................. 2-2 2.1.5 National Environmental Quality Standards (NEQS) ................................................................... 2-3 2.1.6 National Resettlement Policy and Ordinance ............................................................................ 2-3 2.1.7 The Land Acquisition Act, 1894.................................................................................................. 2-4 2.1.8 The Forest Act, 1927 and the Forest (Amendment) Act 2010 .................................................... 2-4 2.1.9 The Jammu and Kashmir Forest Regulations, 1930 ................................................................... 2-4 2.1.10 The AJK Wildlife (Protection, Preservation, Conservation and Management) Act, 1975 .......... 2-4 2.1.11 Azad Jammu and Kashmir, Wildlife (Protection, Preservation, Conservation and Management)

Ordinance, 2012 .......................................................................................................................................... 2-5 2.1.12 The Antiquities Act, 1975 ........................................................................................................... 2-6 2.1.13 The Motor Vehicles Ordinance, 1965, and Rules, 1969 ............................................................. 2-6 2.1.14 The Factories Act, 1934 ............................................................................................................. 2-6 2.1.15 The Pakistan Penal Code, 1860.................................................................................................. 2-7 2.1.16 The Explosives Act, 1884 ............................................................................................................ 2-7

2.2 Interaction with other Agencies ......................................................................................................... 2-8

2.2.1 AJK- EPA ..................................................................................................................................... 2-8 2.2.2 Revenue Departments of AJK .................................................................................................... 2-8 2.2.3 AJK of Forestry and Wildlife Departments ................................................................................. 2-8 2.2.4 Local Government and Municipalities ....................................................................................... 2-9

2.3 Applicable International Conventions ................................................................................................ 2-9

2.3.1 Montreal Protocol on Substances that Deplete the Ozone Layer .............................................. 2-9 2.3.2 UN (Rio) Convention on Biological Diversity .............................................................................. 2-9 2.3.3 The Convention on Wetlands of International Importance Especially as Waterfowl Habitat,

1971 (Ramsar Convention) ......................................................................................................................... 2-9 2.3.4 Conventions on the Conservation of Migratory Species of Wild Animals and Migratory Species

2-10 2.3.5 Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora ............. 2-10


xix

2.3.6 Kyoto Protocol ......................................................................................................................... 2-10 2.3.7 The Rotterdam Convention on the Prior Informed Consent (PIC) Procedure ........................... 2-10 2.3.8 International Labour Organization conventions ...................................................................... 2-10

2.4 IFC’s Requirements .......................................................................................................................... 2-11

2.4.1 IFC's Performance Standards on Social and Environmental Sustainability .............................. 2-11 2.4.2 Environmental, Health and Safety General Guidelines ............................................................ 2-12 2.4.3 IFC's Environment, Health and Safety Guidelines for Electric Power Transmission and

Distribution ............................................................................................................................................... 2-13 2.5 ADB Guidelines ................................................................................................................................. 2-13

2.5.1 ADB's Safeguard Policy Statement 2009 ................................................................................. 2-15 2.5.2 Social Protection Requirements ............................................................................................... 2-16 2.5.3 Public Communications Policy 2011 ........................................................................................ 2-17 2.5.4 Gender and Development Policy 1998..................................................................................... 2-17

3 Project Description ............................................................................................................ 3-1

3.1 Location of the Project ....................................................................................................................... 3-2

3.2 Land Required for Project .................................................................................................................. 3-3

3.3 Main Components of the Project ....................................................................................................... 3-4

3.3.1 The Weir .................................................................................................................................... 3-4 3.3.2 Power Tunnel and Penstocks ..................................................................................................... 3-5 3.3.3 Powerhouse ............................................................................................................................... 3-7 3.3.4 River Diversion ........................................................................................................................... 3-9 3.3.5 Dyke ......................................................................................................................................... 3-10

3.4 Construction Schedule ..................................................................................................................... 3-12

3.5 Construction Camp and Workforce .................................................................................................. 3-12

3.6 Access Routes for Construction Sites ............................................................................................... 3-13

3.7 Construction Material ...................................................................................................................... 3-15

3.8 Construction Machinery ................................................................................................................... 3-15

3.9 Excavated Material ........................................................................................................................... 3-16

3.10 Project Cost ...................................................................................................................................... 3-16

4 Description of the Physical Environment ............................................................................ 4-1

4.1 General ............................................................................................................................................... 4-1

4.2 Area of Study ...................................................................................................................................... 4-1

4.2.1 Delineation of the Study Area .................................................................................................... 4-2 4.3 Land Environment .............................................................................................................................. 4-4

4.3.1 Geology ...................................................................................................................................... 4-4 4.3.2 Seismicity ................................................................................................................................... 4-7 4.3.3 Drainage .................................................................................................................................... 4-9 4.3.4 Elevation Bands (Relief) ........................................................................................................... 4-11 4.3.5 Land Use and Land Cover ........................................................................................................ 4-12 4.3.6 Soil ........................................................................................................................................... 4-13

4.4 Climate and Meteorology ................................................................................................................ 4-14

4.4.1 Rainfall and Humidity .............................................................................................................. 4-15 4.4.2 Temperature ............................................................................................................................ 4-15 4.4.3 Wind ........................................................................................................................................ 4-16

4.5 Hydrology and Water Resources ...................................................................................................... 4-17

4.5.1 Hydrology ................................................................................................................................ 4-17 4.5.2 Water Resources ...................................................................................................................... 4-18 4.5.3 Water Quality .......................................................................................................................... 4-20

4.6 Air, Noise and Light .......................................................................................................................... 4-23


xx

4.6.1 Air Quality ................................................................................................................................ 4-24 4.6.2 Noise ........................................................................................................................................ 4-24 4.6.3 Light ......................................................................................................................................... 4-26

5 Description of Biological Environment ................................................................................ 5-1

5.1 Approach of the Ecological Study....................................................................................................... 5-2

5.2 Floral Diversity of the Area................................................................................................................. 5-2

5.2.1 Methodology ............................................................................................................................. 5-3 5.2.2 Floral Diversity and Biogeography ............................................................................................. 5-6 5.2.3 Vegetation Types ....................................................................................................................... 5-7 5.2.4 Vegetation at Project Facilities ................................................................................................ 5-10

5.3 Fish Fauna ........................................................................................................................................ 5-11

5.3.1 Methodology ........................................................................................................................... 5-11 5.3.2 Fish Diversity of the Project Area ............................................................................................. 5-13

5.4 Benthic Invertebrate Fauna ............................................................................................................. 5-16

5.4.1 Methodology ........................................................................................................................... 5-17 5.4.2 Macro-invertebrates Diversity ................................................................................................. 5-17

5.5 Large Mammals ................................................................................................................................ 5-19

5.5.1 Methodology ........................................................................................................................... 5-20 5.5.2 Status of Large Mammals in the Area ..................................................................................... 5-21 5.5.3 Human wildlife conflict ............................................................................................................ 5-24 5.5.4 Conclusion ............................................................................................................................... 5-25

5.6 Small Mammals ................................................................................................................................ 5-25

5.6.1 Methodology ........................................................................................................................... 5-26 5.6.2 Small Mammal Diversity .......................................................................................................... 5-28

5.7 Reptiles and Amphibians .................................................................................................................. 5-29

5.7.1 Methodology ........................................................................................................................... 5-30 5.7.2 Reptiles and Amphibians Diversity .......................................................................................... 5-34 5.7.3 Conclusions .............................................................................................................................. 5-36

5.8 Avifauna ........................................................................................................................................... 5-37

5.8.1 Methodology ........................................................................................................................... 5-37 5.8.2 Bird Diversity ........................................................................................................................... 5-38

5.9 Species OF Special Concern .............................................................................................................. 5-41

6 Description of Socio-Economic Environment ....................................................................... 6-1

6.1 Social Setting ...................................................................................................................................... 6-1

6.2 Demography ....................................................................................................................................... 6-2

6.3 Social Composition ............................................................................................................................. 6-4

6.4 Political and Administrative Set-up .................................................................................................... 6-4

6.5 Conflict and Social Tension ................................................................................................................ 6-5

6.6 Land Ownership and Tenure .............................................................................................................. 6-5

6.6.1 Landholding by size and category ............................................................................................. 6-6 6.7 Economic Profile ................................................................................................................................ 6-7

6.8 Education ......................................................................................................................................... 6-10

6.9 Population Health Profile ................................................................................................................. 6-11

6.10 Housing ............................................................................................................................................ 6-11

6.10.1 Water Supply and Sanitation ................................................................................................... 6-12 6.10.2 Source of Energy ...................................................................................................................... 6-12

6.11 Gender Issues ................................................................................................................................... 6-13

6.12 Vulnerable Groups ........................................................................................................................... 6-13


xxi

6.13 Cultural Heritage .............................................................................................................................. 6-14

6.14 Community Health, Safety and Security .......................................................................................... 6-14

7 Analysis of Alternatives ..................................................................................................... 7-1

7.1 No Project Scenario ............................................................................................................................ 7-1

7.2 Alternate Methods of Power Generation .......................................................................................... 7-2

7.2.1 Electricity Generation Options ................................................................................................... 7-2 7.2.2 Cost for Electricity Generation ................................................................................................... 7-3 7.2.3 Reliability of Power Generation ................................................................................................. 7-3 7.2.4 Green House Gas Emissions ....................................................................................................... 7-4 7.2.5 Rationale for Selection of Hydro Power Generation Option ...................................................... 7-5

7.3 Alternate Location for the Project ..................................................................................................... 7-6

7.4 Design Alternatives ............................................................................................................................ 7-7

7.4.1 Option-1: Earthen Dyke with Collection Drain and Dewatering ................................................ 7-9 7.4.2 Option-2: Concrete Retaining Wall with Collection Drain and ................................................ 7-10 7.4.3 Option-3: Earthen Filling with Earthen Dyke and Collection Drain .......................................... 7-10 7.4.4 No Dyke Option........................................................................................................................ 7-12

8 Stakeholder Consultations ................................................................................................. 8-1

8.1 General ............................................................................................................................................... 8-1

8.2 Identification of Stakeholders ............................................................................................................ 8-1

8.2.1 Primary stakeholders. ................................................................................................................ 8-1 8.2.2 Secondary stakeholders ............................................................................................................. 8-1

8.3 Stakeholder Consultation Process...................................................................................................... 8-1

8.4 Primary Stakeholders Consultation .................................................................................................... 8-2

8.4.1 Topics for Discussion .................................................................................................................. 8-4 8.4.2 Outcomes of Consultations ........................................................................................................ 8-4 8.4.3 Consultation Teams ................................................................................................................... 8-5 8.4.4 Future Consultations ................................................................................................................. 8-5

8.5 Land Acquisition and Resettlement–Related Concerns ..................................................................... 8-5

8.6 Addressing Stakeholders Concerns .................................................................................................... 8-5

8.7 Meetings with Secondary Stakeholders ............................................................................................. 8-5

9 Impact Assessment and Mitigation .................................................................................... 9-1

9.1 Impact Assessment Methodology ...................................................................................................... 9-1

9.1.1 Project Area ............................................................................................................................... 9-1 9.1.2 Establishment of the Existing Environment ............................................................................... 9-1 9.1.3 Prediction / Evaluation of Impacts ............................................................................................ 9-1

9.2 Impacts on Physical Environmental ................................................................................................... 9-5

9.2.1 Soil Quality ................................................................................................................................. 9-6 9.2.2 Soil Erosion ................................................................................................................................ 9-7 9.2.3 Water Contamination ................................................................................................................ 9-8 9.2.4 Change in Drainage Pattern ...................................................................................................... 9-9 9.2.5 Water Resource Depletion ....................................................................................................... 9-10 9.2.6 Fugitive Dust Emissions ........................................................................................................... 9-11 9.2.7 Vehicular and Generator Exhaust Emissions ........................................................................... 9-12 9.2.8 Damage to Infrastructure due to Blasting ............................................................................... 9-13 9.2.9 Noise Nuisance ........................................................................................................................ 9-14 9.2.10 Construction of Earthen Dyke .................................................................................................. 9-15

9.3 Impacts on Ecology and Biodiversity ................................................................................................ 9-16

9.3.1 Land Disturbance ..................................................................................................................... 9-18


xxii

9.3.2 Deterioration of Area’s Water Resources and River ................................................................ 9-19 9.3.3 Reduction in Water Flow beyond Weir .................................................................................... 9-20

9.4 Impacts on Socio-Economic Environment ........................................................................................ 9-23

9.4.1 Economic Opportunities .......................................................................................................... 9-24 9.4.2 Improved Healthcare ............................................................................................................... 9-25 9.4.3 Acquisition of Land and non-Land Assets for the Project ........................................................ 9-26 9.4.4 Loss of Livelihoods ................................................................................................................... 9-30 9.4.5 Disease Incidence .................................................................................................................... 9-31 9.4.6 Access blockade ....................................................................................................................... 9-32 9.4.7 Privacy ..................................................................................................................................... 9-33 9.4.8 Conflicts with local population ................................................................................................ 9-34

10 Traffic Assessment Study ................................................................................................. 10-1

10.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 10-1

10.2 Objectives ......................................................................................................................................... 10-1

10.3 Access Route Options ....................................................................................................................... 10-1

10.4 Traffic Survey ................................................................................................................................... 10-3

10.4.1 Location 1: Gulpur Junction ..................................................................................................... 10-3 10.4.2 Location 2: Palak Junction ....................................................................................................... 10-5 10.4.3 Location 3: Near Proposed Project Site ................................................................................... 10-6

10.5 Potential Impacts ............................................................................................................................. 10-9

10.6 Mitigation Measures ........................................................................................................................ 10-9

10.7 Conclusions .................................................................................................................................... 10-10

Volume 2

11 Environmental and Social Management and Monitoring Plan ........................................... 11-1

11.1 Institutional Implementation of ESMMP ......................................................................................... 11-1

11.1.1 Management Commitment ..................................................................................................... 11-2 11.1.2 Roles and Responsibilities ........................................................................................................ 11-3

11.2 Mitigation and Management Plan ................................................................................................... 11-6

11.3 Monitoring Plan ............................................................................................................................. 11-18

11.3.1 Site inspections ...................................................................................................................... 11-18 11.3.2 Formal audits ......................................................................................................................... 11-19 11.3.3 Non-conformances and incidents .......................................................................................... 11-19 11.3.4 Documentation and Record Keeping ..................................................................................... 11-20 11.3.5 Preliminary monitoring programmes .................................................................................... 11-20

11.4 Cost Estimates ................................................................................................................................ 11-24

11.5 Environmental Training .................................................................................................................. 11-25

11.6 Construction Management Plan .................................................................................................... 11-25

11.7 Spill Contingency Plan .................................................................................................................... 11-29

11.7.1 Identification of Potentially Polluting Substances and Pollution Scenarios ........................... 11-30 11.7.2 Spill Prevention Strategies and General Response Action ..................................................... 11-34

11.8 Biodiversity Conservation and Management Plan ......................................................................... 11-44

11.9 Air Pollution Control Plan ............................................................................................................... 11-44

11.10 Waste Management Plan ............................................................................................................... 11-46

11.10.2 Waste Management Activities .............................................................................................. 11-48 11.10.3 Duty of Care ........................................................................................................................... 11-52 11.10.4 Training ................................................................................................................................. 11-53 11.10.5 Inspection and Audit .............................................................................................................. 11-53 11.10.6 Reporting ............................................................................................................................... 11-53


xxiii

11.11 Muck Disposal Plan ........................................................................................................................ 11-54

11.12 Traffic Management Plan ............................................................................................................... 11-54

11.13 Health and Safety Plan ................................................................................................................... 11-55

11.14 Emergency Preparedness and Response Plan................................................................................ 11-56

Volume 3

References ................................................................................................................................... 1

Annexures .................................................................................................................................... I

Annexure 1: Seismic Hazard Study ...................................................................................................................... I

Annexure 2: Hydrometeorological Data .............................................................................................................. I

Annexure 3: Water Availability Study.................................................................................................................. I

Annexure 4: Environmental Monitoring Report .................................................................................................. I

Annexure 5A: Species Checklist and Auxiliary Data ............................................................................................ I

Annexure 5B: Description of Species of Concern ................................................................................................ I


xxiv

LIST OF TABLES AND FIGURES

List of Tables

Table 2.1: Sector-Wise Legislation ....................................................................................................... 2-7

Table 2.2: Selected NEQS for Waste Effluents ................................................................................... 2-18

Table 2.3: NEQS for Industrial Gaseous Emissions ............................................................................ 2-19

Table 2.4: National Environmental Quality Standards for Ambient Air ............................................. 2-20

Table 2.5: NEQS for Motor Vehicles Exhaust and Noise for In-use Vehicles ..................................... 2-21

Table 2.6: NEQS for Motor Vehicles Exhaust and Noise for New Diesel Vehicles, Passenger Cars and

Light Commercial Vehicles (g/Km) ..................................................................................................... 2-21

Table 2.7: NEQS for Motor Vehicles Exhaust and Noise for New Diesel Vehicles, Heavy Duty Diesel

Engines and Large Goods Vehicles (g/Kwh) ....................................................................................... 2-22

Table 2.8: NEQS for Motor Vehicles Exhaust and Noise for New Petrol Vehicles (g/km) ................. 2-22

Table 2.9: National Standards for Drinking Water Quality ................................................................ 2-23

Table 2.10: National Environmental Quality Standards for Noise ..................................................... 2-24

Table 3.1: Area Requirement for the Proposed Project ...................................................................... 3-3

Table 3.2: Summary of Construction Periods .................................................................................... 3-12

Table 3.3: Project Construction Roads, Lengths & Gradients ............................................................ 3-14

Table 3.4: Quantities AND Sources OF Construction Material .......................................................... 3-15

Table 3.5: Rock Excavation Quantities and Periods ........................................................................... 3-16

Table 4.1: Area and Percentage of Different Elevation Bands of Catchment Area ........................... 4-11

Table 4.2: Soil Analysis Results .......................................................................................................... 4-13

Table 4.3: Summary Table for Average Monthly Rainfall at Rehman Bridge Station ........................ 4-15

Table 4.4: Summary Table for Max/Min Average Monthly at Kotli ................................................... 4-16

Table 4.5: Wind Data at the Proposed Project Site ........................................................................... 4-17

Table 4.6: Summary of Mean Monthly Flows of Punch River at Rehman Bridge (1960-2011) ......... 4-18

Table 4.7: Microbiological Contaminant in Drinking Water .............................................................. 4-20

Table 4.8: Chemical Analysis of Drinking Water ................................................................................ 4-21

Table 4.9: Average Obtained Concentrations of Priority Air Pollutants ............................................ 4-24

Table 4.10: WHO Guideline Values for Community Noise in Specific Environments ........................ 4-25

Table 4.11: Instant Lux Monitoring .................................................................................................... 4-26

Table 5.1: Land Cover for Each Project Area...................................................................................... 5-10

Table 5.2: Fish Fauna recorded from the Gulpur Hydropower Project Area ..................................... 5-14

Table 5.3: Data regarding Number of Benthic Macro-invertebrate .................................................. 5-18

Table 5.4: Annual Sighting Rate of Different Mammalian Species in the Area. ................................ 5-22

Table 5.5: Public Perception of Mammal’s Population in the Area. .................................................. 5-22

Table 5.6: Spatial Pattern of Jackal and Fox Occupancy in the Study Area ....................................... 5-25

Table 5.7: Conservation status of the reptile and amphibian species ............................................... 5-35

Table 5.8: Species of Concern Found in the Gulpur Hydropower Project Area ................................. 5-41

Table 6.1: Villages/Settlements in the Project Area ............................................................................ 6-1

Table 6.2: Demography of AJK ............................................................................................................. 6-2

Table 6.3: Population Data ................................................................................................................... 6-2

Table 6.4: Age Distribution in the Project Area ................................................................................... 6-3


xxv

Table 6.5: Administrative Setup (2006) ............................................................................................... 6-4

Table 6.6: Divisions, Districts & Sub-Divisions of AJK .......................................................................... 6-5

Table 6.7: Cultivable Land Holding....................................................................................................... 6-6

Table 6.8: Land by Types in Sample Villages ........................................................................................ 6-6

Table 6.9: Average Landholdings by Area ............................................................................................ 6-7

Table 6.10: Economic Situation of Project Area Population ................................................................ 6-8

Table 6.11: Earning and Spending Characteristics of Project Area Population ................................... 6-8

Table 6.12: Income Ranges .................................................................................................................. 6-9

Table 6.13: Educational Institutions in Kotli ...................................................................................... 6-10

Table 6.14: Schools and Education Facilities in Kotli ......................................................................... 6-10

Table 6.15: Literacy Level of Project Area Population ....................................................................... 6-10

Table 6.16: Health Facilities in Kotli ................................................................................................... 6-11

Table 6.17: Health Status ................................................................................................................... 6-11

Table 6.18: Housing Characteristics in the Area ................................................................................ 6-11

Table 6.19: Water Supply and Sanitation .......................................................................................... 6-12

Table 6.20: Sources of energy for cooking and heating ..................................................................... 6-13

Table 7.1: Electricity generation by Source 2012-13 ........................................................................... 7-3

Table 7.2: Plant Load Factors ............................................................................................................... 7-4

Table 7.3: Lifecycle Greenhouse Gas Emissions by Electricity Source ................................................. 7-4

Table 7.4: Screening of Available Options for Right bank .................................................................... 7-8

Table 7.5: Optimization of Option 1 .................................................................................................. 7-10

Table 8.1: Process of stakeholder’s consultations ............................................................................... 8-1

Table 8.2: List of Primary Stakeholder’s Consultations in the Project Area ........................................ 8-2

Table 9.1: Method for Rating the Significance of Impacts ................................................................... 9-3

Table 11.1: Environmental and Social Management Plan ................................................................. 11-8

Table 11.2: Preliminary Environmental Monitoring Program ......................................................... 11-21

Table 11.3: Indicative Budget and Breakdown ................................................................................ 11-24

Table 11.4: Aspects and Objectives of Construction Management Plan ......................................... 11-26

Table 11.5: Classification of Spill Contingencies .............................................................................. 11-32

Table 11.6: SMART Objectives ......................................................................................................... 11-48

Table 11.7: Waste Identification and Classification ......................................................................... 11-49


xxvi

List of Figures

Figure 1.1: Project Location and Components ..................................................................................... 1-3

Figure 3.1: Project General Layout Plan ............................................................................................... 3-1

Figure 3.2: Inundated Land/Houses by the Reservoir ......................................................................... 3-2

Figure 3.3: Project Location ................................................................................................................. 3-3

Figure 3.4: Details of Weir Structure ................................................................................................... 3-4

Figure 3.5: Details of Tunnel Intake ..................................................................................................... 3-6

Figure 3.6: Penstock Profile and Details .............................................................................................. 3-6

Figure 3.7: Power House Security Plan ................................................................................................ 3-8

Figure 3.8: Power House Plan .............................................................................................................. 3-8

Figure 3.9: Power House Longitudinal Section .................................................................................... 3-9

Figure 3.10: Diversion Scheme for Weir Sluesway ............................................................................ 3-10

Figure 3.11: Zones for Dyke Structure ............................................................................................... 3-11

Figure 3.12: Different Options for Dykes ........................................................................................... 3-12

Figure 3.13: Project Area Access Roads ............................................................................................. 3-14

Figure 4.1: Project Location and Components ..................................................................................... 4-2

Figure 4.2: Area of Influence for the Propose Project ......................................................................... 4-4

Figure 4.3: Regional Geological Map of the Area. ............................................................................... 4-5

Figure 4.4: Geological Map of the Project Area ................................................................................... 4-7

Figure 4.5: Seismotectonic Map of the Area ....................................................................................... 4-8

Figure 4.6: Micro-seismicity of the Project Area ................................................................................. 4-9

Figure 4.7: Poonch River Catchment Area with Highlighted Catchments of Tributaries ................... 4-10

Figure 4.8: Area Profile under Different Elevation Bands .................................................................. 4-11

Figure 4.9: Elevation Band Map of Catchment Area of Poonch River ............................................... 4-12

Figure 4.10: Soil Sampling Locations .................................................................................................. 4-13

Figure 4.11: Average Monthly Rainfall and Evaporation ................................................................... 4-15

Figure 4.12: Average Monthly Temperatures in ºC ........................................................................... 4-16

Figure 4.13: Monthly Flows and Runoff of Punch River .................................................................... 4-18

Figure 4.14: Mean Annual Flows of Punch River ............................................................................... 4-18

Figure 4.15: Drinking Water Sampling Locations ............................................................................... 4-20

Figure 4.16: Water Hardness in the Various Sampling Sites Area ..................................................... 4-22

Figure 4.17: Chloride and Sulfate Concentration in the Drinking Water ........................................... 4-23

Figure 4.18: Lead and Arsenic Concentration in the Drinking Water ................................................ 4-23

Figure 4.19: Noise Level at Proposed Powerhouse Site .................................................................... 4-25

Figure 4.20: Noise Level at Proposed Camp Area .............................................................................. 4-25

Figure 4.21: Noise Level at Proposed Weir Site ................................................................................. 4-26

Figure 4.22: Noise Level at Proposed Batching Plant ........................................................................ 4-26

Figure 5.1: Study Area for the Ecological Baseline Study .................................................................... 5-1

Figure 5.2: Vegetation Sampling Sites ................................................................................................. 5-4

Figure 5.3: A Summary of Plants Identified from GHPP Study Area .................................................... 5-6

Figure 5.4: Landcover Map of the Study Area ..................................................................................... 5-9

Figure 5.5: Habitat Wise Comparison of Species Diversity .................................................................. 5-9

Figure 5.6: Representative Photos of Vegetation Types in the Study Area ....................................... 5-10


xxvii

Figure 5.7: Fish Sampling Locations ................................................................................................... 5-13

Figure 5.8: Spatial Pattern of Occurrence of Species of Concern in the Study Area. ........................ 5-15

Figure 5.9: Spatial Pattern of Abundance of Selected Species in the Study Area. ............................ 5-16

Figure 5.10: Map of the Study Area Showing Site Occupancy Survey Points. ................................... 5-21

Figure 5.11: Status of Different Mammalian Species by Local People. ............................................. 5-22

Figure 5.12: Spatial Pattern of Jackal and Fox Occupancy in the Study Area .................................... 5-24

Figure 5.13: Traps Used in Small Mammal Surveys ........................................................................... 5-26

Figure 5.14: Small Mammal Survey Sites ........................................................................................... 5-27

Figure 5.15: Family and Order Wise Distribution of Mammals Found in the Study Area ................. 5-29

Figure 5.16: Survey Locations of Amphibians and Reptiles, with Species Diversity and Abundance 5-33

Figure 5.17: Photographs of Reptile and Amphibian Species Recorded in the Area ......................... 5-35

Figure 5.18: Bird Survey Locations, along with Species Diversity and relative Abundance .............. 5-38

Figure 5.19: Encounter Rate of Bird Families ..................................................................................... 5-39

Figure 6.1: Age Distribution based on Gender in the Project Area ..................................................... 6-3

Figure 6.2: Occupation of Household Members (Above 19 years) ...................................................... 6-8

Figure 6.3: Infrastructure and Cultural Heritage ............................................................................... 6-14

Figure 7.1: Lifecycle GHG Emissions Intensity of Electricity Generation Methods .............................. 7-5

Figure 7.2: Conceptual Plan for Resettlement Curtailment Option 1 and 2 ...................................... 7-11

Figure 7.3: Conceptual Plan for Resettlement Curtailment Option 3 ................................................ 7-12

Figure 10.1: Access Route Options for Gulpur Site ............................................................................ 10-2

Figure 10.2: Out at Gulpur Junction (Towards Mirpur-Rawalpindi Traffic) ....................................... 10-3

Figure 10.3: In at Gulpur Junction (From Mirpur-Rawalpindi to Kotli Traffic) ................................... 10-4

Figure 10.4: Traffic in/out at Gulpur Junction.................................................................................... 10-4

Figure 10.5: Out at Palak Junction (From Kotli to Dadyal-Mirpur Traffic) ......................................... 10-5

Figure 10.6: In at Palak Junction (From Dadyal-Mirpur on Kotli Road Traffic) .................................. 10-5

Figure 10.7: Traffic In/Out at Palak Station ....................................................................................... 10-6

Figure 10.8: In at Project Site (Towards Kotli City Traffic) ................................................................. 10-6

Figure 10.9: Out At Project site (Away from Kotli on Rawalpindi-Mirpur Road Traffic) .................... 10-7

Figure 10.10: Traffic Towards and Away from the Proposed Project Site ......................................... 10-7

Figure 10.11: Traffic Flow by Vehicle Type ........................................................................................ 10-8

Figure 11.1: Organization Setup of MPL ............................................................................................ 11-2

Figure 11.2: Hazardous Storage Area and Diesel Tanks Containment Basin ................................... 11-36

Figure 11.3: Environmental Awareness Signboards ........................................................................ 11-37

Figure 11.4: Drip Trays under Fuel Hoses and Drums Stored Temporarily ..................................... 11-38

Figure 11.5: Equipment Washed in a Dedicated Area inside Drip Tray ........................................... 11-39

Figure 11.6: Spill Response Kit ......................................................................................................... 11-41

Figure 11.7: Process and Parties Responsibilities for Waste Management..................................... 11-52


1-1

1 INTRODUCTION

Mira Power Limited (MPL) is an Independent Power Producer (IPP), which is planning to develop

Gulpur Hydropower Project in the Azad Jammu & Kashmir (AJK). This is a run-of-the-river project

that will be developed in private sector on Build, Own, Operate and Transfer (BOOT) basis under the

Policy for Power Generation Projects 2002 formulated by Government of Pakistan and adapted in

the AJK.

The power sector in Pakistan has been facing shortages of electricity generating capacity due to low

pace of development of new power plants to meet the growing demand for electricity. This has been

aggravated by the rising price of oil, shortage of natural gas and lesser focus on hydropower

development. The effect of the large gap between demand and supply of electric power has led to

massive load shedding in Pakistan and in AJK. Due to the widening of this gap; all walks of life from

industry to domestic are being adversely affected. Presently, hydropower projects contribute about

6,500 MW of power as installed capacity and mostly are owned and run by WAPDA. Only about 10%

of the achievable hydropower potential has been utilized so far. The lower values for coal and hydro

in the energy mix and major reliance on use of imported oil for electricity generation has caused a

spurt in the price of electricity and highlights the potential role and importance that both coal and

renewable energy could play in meeting the future energy needs of Pakistan.

Development of hydropower is also considered as attractive to help improving the management of

the national water resources which supports one of the largest irrigation systems in the world, upon

which agriculture of the country is heavily dependent.

In order to increase the share of hydropower, optimal utilization of the country’s hydroelectric

potential has been given priority in the future power development strategy. Accordingly, the Private

Power & Infrastructure Board (PPIB) has identified a number of potential sites attractive for their

hydropower potential. According to the same strategy, one particular site located on the Poonch

River in AJK, i.e., 100 MW Gulpur Hydropower Project was offered for development to the private

sector.

The Letter of Interest (LOI) for the development of the Project was issued to MPL on March 12, 2005

vide Letter No. 1(101) PPIB-1017/05/PRJ by the PPIB, Ministry of Water & Power, and Government

of Pakistan under the Power Policy 2002.

As per the terms of the LOI and the Power Policy 2002, the sponsors appointed a consortium

comprising of ACE Pakistan Limited, NESPAK and NorConsult International as consultants to conduct

a feasibility study for the Project which, after subsequent comments of the PPIB Panel of Experts was

approved by PPIB.

In an effort to help Pakistan in its energy crisis and to ensure the expeditious development of the

Project a renowned South Korean Consortium comprising of Korea South East Power Co. Ltd.

(KOSEP), Sambu Construction Co. Ltd. (Sambu), Lotte Construction Co Ltd (Lotte) and Daelim Group

expressed their desire to fully acquire the Project and in this respect formal Share Purchase


1-2

Agreement (the SPA) was signed with the previous sponsors on 1 October 2012 after the completion

of extensive financial, technical and legal due diligence.

Following the completion of various codal formalities including satisfying the prequalification

requirements the PPIB issued the no objection certificate to Korean Consortium to acquire the

Project on 30 July 2012 followed by the issuance of amended LOS on 19 December 2012.

The acquisition process was fully completed on 31 December 2012 after the satisfaction of

remaining conditions precedents of the SPA.

The new Sponsors embarked on the process of full scale project development immediately and

achieved considerable progress in short span of time including the completion of EPC bidding and

securing the initial interest of leading multilateral banks.

Keeping in view the progress achieved by the new Sponsors in a short span of time and to allow

reasonable time to the new Sponsors to achieve the financial closing, the Company’s request for

extension of LOS until 29 April 2014 has been approved by PPIB.

The project requires Environmental and Social Impact Assessment (ESIA) to fulfill the requirements

of laws of government of Pakistan and AJK, and project lenders including International Finance

Cooperation (IFC) and Asian Development Bank (ADB).

1.1 Project Overview

The proposed project will have 100 megawatt (MW) power generation capacity with annual

generation capability of 465 gigawatt-hour (GWh). The Project site falls administratively in the Kotli

district of AJK and located about 5 km south of Kotli town on the Poonch River, a tributary of Jhelum

River. The site is about 170 km from Islamabad and 285 km from Lahore. The Project will require

construction of a weir on the Poonch River just downstream of its confluence with Bann Nullah. The

dam will create a reservoir in the Poonch River and the Bann Nullah with a volume of 21.9 million

cubic meters. The water from the reservoir will be diverted to a 3.1 km head race tunnel. The intake

of the tunnel will be located in the Bann Nullah about 2 km upstream of the confluence of the Bann

Nullah with the Poonch River. A powerhouse will be constructed on the left bank of Poonch River

about 6 km downstream of the weir. The water, after passing through the powerhouse, will be

discharged back into the Poonch River.

1.2 Project Area

The project area refers to the geographical area in which the activities related to the construction

and operation of the project are proposed to take place and in which the environmental impacts of

the activities are likely to happen. Unless otherwise specified or implied by context, the term ‘project

area’ will refer to the area in the surrounding of each proposed component.


1-3

The project will utilize the flow of the Poonch River, the full length of which within AJK has been

notified as a national park by the AJK Wildlife and Fisheries Department in the year 2010.1 Keeping in

view the environmental sensitivity of the area, the company is giving greater focus and consideration

for environmental assessments of the proposed project in consultation with project lenders.

The location and components of the proposed project are shown in Figure 1.1.

Figure 1.1: Project Location and Components

1 Notification from Secretariat Forests/KLASC/Wildlife & Fisheries, Azad Government the State of Jammu &

Kashmir. NO. SF/PA/11358-72/2010.


1-4

1.3 Introduction of the ESIA

1.3.1 Objectives of the ESIA

The objective of the study is to assess the environmental and social impacts associated with the

construction and operation of the Gulpur Hydroelectric Power Project (hereafter described simply as

the ‘Gulpur Project’ or ‘the project’ or ‘GHPP’).

The objectives of this ESIA were to:

• Assess the existing environmental conditions in the project area, including the identification

of environmentally sensitive areas.

• Assess the proposed activities to identify their potential impacts, evaluate the impacts, and

determine their significance.

• Propose appropriate mitigation and monitoring measures that can be incorporated into the

design of the proposed activities to minimize any damaging effects or any lasting negative

consequences identified by the assessment.

• Assess the proposed activities and determine whether they comply with the relevant

environmental regulations in Pakistan and requirements of project lenders including ADB

and IFC.

• Prepare an ESIA report for submittal to the Azad Jammu & Kashmir Environmental

Protection Agency (AJK EPA), ADB and IFC.

The study will result in the following deliverables:

• Environmental and Social Impact Assessment (ESIA) Report; and a

• Environmental and Social Management and Monitoring Plan (ESMMP);

1.3.2 Approach and Methodology

The ESIA was performed in four main phases, which are described below.

1.3.2.1 Scoping

The key activities of this phase included:

Project Data Compilation: A generic description of the proposed activities relevant to environmental

assessment was compiled with the help of the proponent.

Published Literature Review: Secondary data on weather, soil, water resources, wildlife, and

vegetation were reviewed and compiled.

Legislative Review: Information on relevant legislation, regulations, guidelines, and standards was

reviewed and compiled.

Identification of Potential Impacts: The information collected in the previous steps was reviewed

and potential environmental issues identified.


1-5

1.3.2.2 Baseline Data Collection

No considerable amount of baseline information on the project area was available from existing

literature. Therefore a detailed field visit was conducted to collect primary data on the proposed site

and alternatives of the power plant.

1.3.2.3 Impact Assessment

The environmental, socio-economic, and project information collected was used to assess the

potential impacts of the proposed activities. The issues studied included potential project impacts

on:

• Land Resource and Geomorphology

• Groundwater and surface water quality

• Ambient air quality, greenhouse gas emissions and ambient noise levels

• The ecology of the area, including flora and fauna especially the aquatic ecosystem

• Local communities

• A rapid cumulative impact assessment of multiple hydroelectric projects in the catchment of

Poonch River.

Wherever possible and applicable, the discussion covers the following aspects:

• The present baseline conditions

• The potential change in environmental parameters likely to be effected by project related

activities

• The identification of potential impacts

• The evaluation of the likelihood and significance of potential impacts

• The defining of mitigation measures to reduce impacts to as low as practicable

• The prediction of any residual impacts, including all long-term and short-term, direct and

indirect, and beneficial and adverse impacts

• The monitoring of residual impacts.

1.3.2.4 Documentation

This report documents the ESIA process and results are prepared according to the relevant

guidelines set by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), ADB and IFC. A term of reference for

this study was developed and agreed jointly by the ADB, IFC and the Company. Two separate

assessments are to be incorporated with this report upon the finalization which includes: a critical

habitat assessment and a rapid cumulative impact assessment.

1.3.3 Organization of this Report

Section 2 (Policy, Statutory, and Institutional Framework) briefly discusses existing national policy

and resulting legislation for sustainable development and environmental protection, and then

presents the legislative requirements and the requirements of ADB and IFC that need to be followed

while conducting an ESIA.

Section 3 (Project Description) describes the proposed Project.


1-6

Section 4 to 6 (Description of the Environment) details the project area’s existing physical, biological,

and socioeconomic condition, including geomorphology and soils, water resources, and air quality,

flora and fauna, and demography.

Section 7 (Analyses of Alternatives) presents the project alternatives that were considered, and the

reasons for their selection or rejection.

Section 8 (Stakeholder Consultation) explains the process of public consultation and disclosure of

the report at the District Council Office as well as important public library(s). It makes this document

a legal public document.

Section 9 (Impacts Assessment and Mitigation) presents an assessment of the project’s impact and

their required mitigation measures to the physical, biological, and socioeconomic environment.

Section 10 (Traffic Assessment Study) reviews, assesses and proposes the existing and potential

traffic conditions of the road network available to the proposed project site.

Section 11 (Environmental and Social Management and Monitoring Plan) contains comprehensive

prescriptions regarding environmental and social impacts and their mitigation. This also includes

institutional arrangements and various monitoring, control and management plans.


2-1

2 POLICY, LEGAL AND ADMINISTRATIVE

FRAMEWORK

‘Sustainable Development’ is a concept that has emerged over the past three decades to describe a

new framework that aims at economic and social development, while maintaining the long-term

integrity of the ecological system. The principles of sustainable development are in the process of

being incorporated into national policies and legislation in Pakistan through various statutory

instruments. This chapter describes the current legal responsibilities of the proponent in the context

of the environment and sustainable development, and the requirements of the institutions that may

influence the environmental management of the proposed project.

2.1 National Policy and Administrative Framework

2.1.1 Overview

The Pakistan National Conservation Strategy (NCS) that was approved by the federal cabinet in

March 1992 is the principal policy document on environmental issues in the country as well as AJK

(EUAD/IUCN, 1992). The NCS outlines the country’s primary approach towards encouraging

sustainable development, conserving natural resources, and improving efficiency in the use and

management of resources. The NCS has 68 specific programs in 14 core areas in which policy

intervention is considered crucial for the preservation of Pakistan’s natural and physical

environment. The core areas that are relevant in the context of the proposed project are pollution

prevention and abatement, restoration of rangelands, increasing energy efficiency, conserving

biodiversity, supporting forestry and plantations, and the preservation of cultural heritage. The

Government of Pakistan promulgated “Pakistan Environmental Protection Act” in 1997. The same

was adopted by the Government of AJK. However, this act was adapted to meet the state’s

requirements and notified in 2000 as Azad Jammu and Kashmir Environmental Protection Act, 2000.

This was made effective with the establishment of the Environmental Protection Council (AJK-EPC)

which is the policy formulating body and Environmental Protection Agency (AJK- EPA), which is an

implementing agency. Prime Minister of AJK is the Chairman and the Minister of Environment is the

Vice Chairman of the AJK EPC. Environmental Protection Agency headed by a Director General has

the responsibility for establishing Biodiversity Action Plan.

Pakistan is a signatory to the Convention on Biological Diversity, and is thereby obligated to develop

a national strategy for the conservation of biodiversity. The Government of Pakistan has constituted

a Biodiversity Working Group under the auspices of the Ministry of Environment, Local Government

and Rural Development to develop a Biodiversity Action Plan for the country. After an extensive

consultative exercise, a draft Action Plan has been developed. The draft Plan2, which has been

designed to complement the NCS and the proposed provincial conservation strategies, identifies the

causes of biodiversity loss in Pakistan and suggests a series of proposals for action to conserve

biodiversity in the country.

2 The plan needs approval from the Ministry of Environment.


2-2

2.1.2 The AJK, Environmental Protection Act, 2000

The AJK, Environmental Protection Act, 2000 empowers the AJK –EPA to:

• Administer and implement the provisions of the Act and the rules and regulations made

there-under to comply with the environmental policies approved by the Council;

• Enforce the provisions of the Act through environmental protection orders and

environmental tribunals headed by magistrates with wide-ranging powers, including the

right to fine violators of the Act.

• Prepare or revise, and establish the Environmental Quality Standards with the approval of

the Council;

• Develop environmental emission standards for parameters such as air, water and land.

• Identify categories of projects to which the Initial Environment Examination (IEE) or

Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) will apply.

• Develop guidelines for conducting initial environmental examinations (IEE) and EIA’s and

procedures for the submission, review and approval of the same.

• Review IEE or EIA with the objectives that these meet the requirements of the Act.

• Public participation shall be ensured during review process of IEE or EIA reports.

2.1.3 Regulations for Environmental Assessment

Under Section 11 of the 2000 Act, a project falling under any category (qualifying IEE or EIA) requires

the proponent to file IEE or EIA with the AJK-EPA. Within stipulated time the agency will confirm that

the document submitted is complete for the purpose of review. During this time, should the agency

require the proponent to submit any additional information, it will return the IEE or EIA to the

proponent for revision, clearly listing those aspects that need further discussion. Subsequently, the

agency shall make every effort to complete an IEE or EIA review within four months of filing the case.

2.1.4 Guidelines for Environmental Assessment

In the absence of AJK-EPA guidelines for environmental assessment, those laid down by Pak- EPA

have been followed.

The Pak-EPA has published a set of environmental guidelines for conducting environmental

assessments and the environmental management of different types of development projects. The

guidelines that are relevant to the proposed project are listed below, followed by comments on their

relevance to the proposed project:

A. GUIDELINES FOR THE PREPARATION AND REVIEW OF ENVIRONMENTAL REPORT:

The guidelines on the preparation and review of environmental reports target the project

proponents, and specify;

• The nature of the information to be included in environmental reports

• The minimum qualifications of the EIA team appointed.

• The need to incorporate suitable mitigation measures at every stage of project

implementation.

• The need to specify monitoring procedures.


2-3

• The terms of reference for the reports are to be prepared by the project proponents

themselves. The report must contain baseline data on the project area, detailed assessment

thereof, and mitigation measures.

B. GUIDELINES FOR PUBLIC CONSULTATION:

These guidelines deal with possible approaches to public consultation and techniques for designing

an effective program of consultation that reaches out to all major stakeholders and ensures that

their concerns are incorporated in any impact assessment study.

2.1.5 National Environmental Quality Standards (NEQS)

The National Environmental Quality Standards (NEQs) specify the following standards:

• Maximum allowable contamination of pollutants (32 parameters) in emission and liquid

industrial effluents discharged to inland water.

• Maximum allowable concentration of pollutant (16 parameters) in gaseous emission from

sources other than vehicles.

• Maximum allowable concentration of pollutants in gaseous emissions from vehicle exhaust

and noise emission from vehicles.

• Maximum allowable noise level from vehicles.

• Ambient noise standards

• Ambient air quality standards.

These standards apply to gaseous emissions and liquid effluents discharged by batching plants,

asphalt plants, camp sites, construction machinery, and vehicles. The standards for vehicle, noise

wastewater and drinking water will apply during the construction as well as operational phase of the

project.

These NEQS are presented in Table 2.2 to Table 2.10.

2.1.6 National Resettlement Policy and Ordinance

At this point, the only legislation relating to land acquisition and compensation is the Land

Acquisition Act (LAA) of 1894. The LAA is, however, limited to a cash compensation policy for the

acquisition of land and built-up property, and damage to other assets, such as crops, trees, and

infrastructure based on market prices. The LAA does not consider the rehabilitation and

resettlement of disrupted populations and the restoration of their livelihoods.

Experience with large-scale infrastructure development projects implemented by institutions such as

the Pakistan Water and Power Development Authority (WAPDA) has demonstrated the need for a

cohesive national policy for resettlement. In spite of the fact that a National Resettlement Policy and

related legislation has been drafted, it has not been officially notified. In the absence of this, the

safeguard policy of the World Bank as spelled out in OP/BP 4.12 will form the basis for managing the

resettlement needs arising from the project.


2-4

2.1.7 The Land Acquisition Act, 1894

The law deals with the matters related with acquisition of private land and other immovable

properties existing on the land required for the project. The public purpose, inter alia, includes the

construction of development projects including related roads, quarry areas, colonies, etc. For that

matter it may also be applicable at private level provided the public utility of the project is

established. As the land is a provincial subject, the proponent has to acquire the land for the project

through the provincial governments.

2.1.8 The Forest Act, 1927 and the Forest (Amendment) Act 2010

The Act, inter alia, deals with the matters related with protection and conservation of natural

vegetation/habitats. In that matter it empowers the concerned agency to declare protected and

reserved forest areas and maintaining these. In spite of the fact that it recognizes the right of people

for access to the natural resources for their household use, it prohibits unlawful cutting of trees and

other vegetation.

Therefore, for cutting trees for the construction purposes or otherwise, prior permission is required

from the forest department of the concerned province.

2.1.9 The Jammu and Kashmir Forest Regulations, 1930

The main legislation for management and protection of forest and rangeland in AJK is the Jammu

and Kashmir Forest Regulation of 1930 and its later amendments of 1973, 1976, 1977 and 1980. The

amendments are mostly related with penal provisions for forest offences. According to the AJK

Forest Regulations, the forests are designated as ‘Demarcated” or “Un-demarcated”. The former

forests, like Reserved Forests under Forest Act of 1927 that is in vogue in Pakistan, are under the

control of Forest Department, while the latter are under the control of Board of Revenue through

Deputy Commissioner. There are two other categories of forests in AJK denominated as “Village

Forests” and “Private Forests”. The former are established under Section 14 (a) of the AJK Forest

Regulations, while the latter are established under the Private Forest Rules of AJK Land Revenue Act

1955. Moreover, “Tree Plantation & Maintenance Act 1977 has been enacted to ensure planting and

maintenance of at least 3 trees per acre in farmland.

Under the provision of the forest related legislations there are regulations on usufruct right of the

communities or individual for using the area for grazing, acquiring wood for fuel wood or timber.

However, for cutting trees for the construction of a project special permission would be needed

from the Forest Department and Revenue Department/Local Administration depending upon the

type of forest encountered.

2.1.10 The AJK Wildlife (Protection, Preservation, Conservation and

Management) Act, 1975

In addition to empowering AJK wildlife department to establish game reserves, parks, and wildlife

sanctuaries, this Act regulates the hunting and disturbance of wildlife. While reviewing the ESIA, the

AJK-EPA may consult the AJK wildlife department in case the project has an impact on wildlife.


2-5

The AJK-EPA may require the proponent to coordinate with the AJK wildlife department for the

implementation of the project and monitoring activities during construction and operation of the

project.

2.1.11 Azad Jammu and Kashmir, Wildlife (Protection, Preservation,

Conservation and Management) Ordinance, 2012

The Chapter VI of the ordinance is on Protected Areas. Section 43 of the ordinance is covering

National parks. The department of wildlife and fisheries shall be responsible to ensure the

implementation of this ordinance as per rules of business. The section 43 of the ordinance of

National Park States that:

1. With a view to the protection and preservation of landscape, flora, fauna, geological

features of special significance and biological diversity in the natural state, the government

may, by notification in the official Gazette, declare any area to be a National Park and may

demarcate it in such a manner as may be prescribed.

2. A National Park shall be accessible to public for recreation; education and research purposes

subject to such restrictions as the government may impose.

3. The provision for access roads to and construction of rest houses, hostels and other

buildings in the national park along with amenities for public may be so made, as not to

impair the object of the establishment of the National Park.

4. Any facility provided under Sub-Sections (2) and (3) shall be in conformity with the

recommendations of the Environmental Impact Assessment or Initial Environmental

Examination under AJK Environment Protection Act, 2001 and amendments made

thereunder.

5. The following acts shall be prohibited in a National Park;

i. Hunting, shooting, trapping, killing or capturing of any wild animal;

ii. carrying of arms, pet animals, livestock, firing any gun or doing any other act which

may disturb any wild animal or doing any act which interferes with the serenity and

tranquility of the park and breeding places of wild animals;

iii. logging, felling, tapping, burning or in any way damaging or destroying, taking,

collecting or removing any plant or tree;

iv. grazing of livestock;

v. fishing;

vi. clearing or breaking up any land for cultivation; mining or quarrying of stones for any

other purpose;

vii. polluting or poisoning water flowing in and through the National Park;

viii. littering and dumping of waste;

ix. writing, in scripting, carving, disfiguring, defacing, painting, chalking, advertising;

x. use of vehicular transport except on recognized roads and routes;

xi. blowing of pressure horns within one kilometer radius of the park boundary; and

xii. playing music or using radios, or making noise.

6. The Department may, however for scientific purpose or betterment of the National Park or

for providing incentives or concessions to the communities for participatory management,

authorize doing of one or more acts mentioned in sub-Section (5) on an explicit written


2-6

request made to the Head of the Department justifying the need for such an action and

certifying that it does not impair the objectives of establishment of the park, in a specified

manner.

7. Whoever contravenes or fails to comply with any of the provisions of this Section or abets in

commission or furtherance of any such acts shall be punishable with imprisonment, which

shall not be less than six months and may extend to one year, or with fine which shall not be

less than rupees ten thousand and may extend to rupees thirty thousand, or with both, in

addition to such compensation as the convicting court may direct to be paid, which shall not

be less than the value of the damage assessed by the department.

8. In case offense is proved to be followed by award of punishment by the court, all animals,

tools, implements, carriages, including mechanically propelled vehicles, pack animal, arms,

ammunitions and other equipments and conveyances used in the commission or

furtherance of an offence shall stand confiscated in favor of the government, in addition to

the punishment awarded under this Section.

9. If a woman, is charged for any of the offense under this Ordinance, the court may, after the

reasons to be recorded in writing, dispense with her physical presence before the court

while permitting her to appear by an agent duly authorized in writing under the signature or

thumb-impression of such accused having woman, attested by a respectable person of the

area concerned.

2.1.12 The Antiquities Act, 1975

The Act deals with the matters relating to the protection, preservation and conservation of

archaeological/ historical sites and monuments. It prohibits construction (or any other damaging)

activity within 200 meters of such sites unless prior permission is obtained from the Federal

Department of Archaeology and Museums. Invariably, for the implementation of new projects an

archeological survey is required and in the light of this clearance is sought from the federal. In spite

of the fact that Provincial Archaeological Departments exists, the pertinent authority for issuing

clearance is the Federal Department.

2.1.13 The Motor Vehicles Ordinance, 1965, and Rules, 1969

The Motor Vehicles Ordinance, 1965, has been extended with effect from March 05, 1978, to the

whole of Pakistan. It deals with the licensing requirement for driving; powers of licensing authority,

Regional Transport Authority and those of Court vis-à-vis disqualification for license and registration

requirements to control road transport; compensations for the death of or injury to a passenger of

public carrier; powers of Road Transport Corporation; traffic rules, power to limit speed, weight, use

of vehicles; power to erect traffic signs; specific duties of drivers in case of accident and powers of

police officers to check and penalize traffic offenders.

2.1.14 The Factories Act, 1934

The pertinent clauses of the Act are those that deal with health, safety and welfare of the workers,

disposal of solid waste and effluent, and damage to private and public property. It also deals with

the regulations for handling and disposing of toxic and hazardous materials. As the construction

activity has also been classified as an ‘industry’, the regulations will be applicable to the Contractors.


2-7

2.1.15 The Pakistan Penal Code, 1860

The Act deals with the offences where public or private properties and human lives are affected due

to intentional or accidental misconduct of an individual or a mass of people. It also addresses

violation to any law of the country.

2.1.16 The Explosives Act, 1884

It provides regulations for handling, transportation and use of explosives. The contractors have to

abide by the regulation during quarrying, blasting and for other purposes.

Sector-wise legislation applicable in Pakistan is given in Table 2.1.

Table 2.1: Sector-Wise Legislation

Serial Sector Legislation

1 Environmental protection The Pakistan Penal Code (1860)

Pakistan Environmental Protection Act (2000)

2 Land use

The Land Improvement Loans Act (1883)

The West Pakistan Agricultural Pests Ordinance (1959) and Rules (1960)

The Regulation of Mines and Oil-Fields and Mineral Development (Government Control) Act, 1946.

3 Water quality and resources

The Pakistan Penal Code (1860)

The Canal and Drainage Act (1873)

The Factories Act (1934)

On-Farm Water Management and Water Users’ Associations Ordinance (1981)

Indus River Water Apportionment Accord (1991)

4 Air quality



The Motor Vehicles Ordinance (1965) and Rules (1969)

5 Noise

The West Pakistan Regulation and Control of Loudspeakers and Sound Amplifiers Ordinance (1965)

The Motor Vehicle Ordinance (1965) and Rules (1969)

NEQS, 2000

6 Toxic or hazardous substance


The Explosives Act (1884)


The Agricultural Pesticides Ordinance (1971) and Rules (1973)

7 Solid wastes and effluents The Factories Act (1934)

Pakistan Environmental Protection Act (2000)

8 Forest conservation

The Forest Act (1927)

The West Pakistan Firewood and Charcoal (Restrictions) Act (1964)

The Cutting of Trees (Prohibition) Act (1975)

9 Parks and wildlife conservation protection

The West Pakistan Ordinance (1959)

10 Cultural environment The Antiquities Act (1975)

11 Livestock

West Pakistan Goats (Restriction) Ordinance (1959)

The Grazing of Cattle in the Protected Forests (Range Lands) Rules (1978)

Pakistan Animal Quarantine (Import and Export of Animals and Animal Products) Ordinance (1979/80)

12 Public health and safety The Pakistan Penal Code (1860)

The Boilers Act (1923)


2-8

Serial Sector Legislation

The Public Health (Emergency Provisions) Ordinance (1944)

The West Pakistan Factories Canteen Rules (1959)

The West Pakistan Epidemic Diseases Act (1979/80)

2.2 Interaction with other Agencies

The proponent is responsible for ensuring that the project complies with the laws and regulations

controlling the environmental concerns of dam construction and operation, and that all pre-

construction requisites, such as permits and clearances are met. This section describes the nature of

the relationship between the proponent and line departments.

2.2.1 AJK- EPA

The proponent is responsible for preparing the complete environmental documentation required by

the AJK-EPA and remain committed for getting clearance from it. Moreover, it is also desirable that

once clearance from AJK - EPA is obtained, the proponent should remain committed to the approved

project design. No deviation is permitted in design and scope of rehabilitation during project

implementation without the prior and explicit permission of the EPAs.

2.2.2 Revenue Departments of AJK

Under the national law, matters relating to land use and ownership are provincial subjects, and for

the purposes of this project, the respective Revenue Departments of AJK are empowered to carry

out the acquisition of private land or built-up property for public purposes. In order to depute land

acquisition collectors (LACs) and other revenue staff who will be responsible for handling matters

related to acquisition of land and the disbursement of compensation, the proponent must lodge

applications with the AJK government.

The proponent will provide logistical support and assist in preparing the documents necessary for

notification. It will also need to liaise with the departments of agriculture, horticulture, and forestry

in order to evaluate affected vegetation resources, such as trees and crops, etc., for compensation

purposes. Where public buildings/infrastructure is involved, the proponent will approach the

relevant departments for valuation of the affected building or infrastructure before removing the

facilities.

Likewise, the proponent will liaise with other relevant departments/agencies for relocation of public

facilities such as electricity and telephone poles, public water supply schemes, public buildings, etc.

2.2.3 AJK of Forestry and Wildlife Departments

The project is expected to involve clearing of vegetation and trees within the proposed project area.

The project contractor will be responsible for acquiring a ‘No-Objection Certificate’ (NOC) from the

respective Forest Departments and Local Administration depending upon the type of forest, viz.,

demarcated, un-demarcated or individual forests under threat. The application for an NOC will need

to be endorsed by the proponent.


2-9

Where construction is to be carried out in close proximity of protected forests and wildlife areas, the

proponent is required to coordinate with the departments to ensure that impacts on vegetation and

wildlife are minimized.

2.2.4 Local Government and Municipalities

The proponent and its contractors must ensure that the project meets the criteria of the

governments of AJK for the establishment of construction camps and plants, use of the water

resources and the safe disposal of wastewater, and toxic materials. These matters lie in the

jurisdiction of Local Governments. Therefore, the Contractor should liaise closely with the concerned

body. The project Proponent will coordinate and monitor environment-related issues.

The project proponent will liaise with local government/administration and municipalities on the

matters related to resettlement of squatters and removal of encroachments or sources of

congestion. In specific cases, the project proponent will enter into agreements with the municipality,

local government, or other service provider on the resettlement of displaced squatters.

2.3 Applicable International Conventions

Environmental problems which migrate beyond the jurisdiction (Trans-boundary) require power to

control such issues through international co-operation by either becoming a Contracting Party (CP)

i.e. ratifying treaties or as a signatory by officially signing the treaties and agreeing to carry out

provisions of various treaties on environment and social safeguards. The relevant international

conventions are as provided.

2.3.1 Montreal Protocol on Substances that Deplete the Ozone Layer

Pakistan ratified its accession of the Montreal Protocol along with its London Amendment on 18 Dec

1992 and also ratified the Copenhagen, Montreal and Beijing Amendments of 2003. The Montreal

Protocol on Substances that Deplete the Ozone Layer regulates many radioactively powerful

greenhouse gases for the primary purpose of lowering stratospheric chlorine and bromine

concentrations. These gases include the CFCs, HCFCs, chlorocarbons, bromocarbons and halons.

2.3.2 UN (Rio) Convention on Biological Diversity

Pakistan is a signatory to this convention since 5 June 1992 and ratified the convention on 26 July

1994. The Convention on Biological Diversity (CBD) entered into force on 29 December 1993. It has 3

main objectives: 1. the conservation of biological diversity, 2. the sustainable use of the components

of biological diversity and 3. The fair and equitable sharing of the benefits arising out of the

utilization of genetic resources

2.3.3 The Convention on Wetlands of International Importance

Especially as Waterfowl Habitat, 1971 (Ramsar Convention)

Pakistan ratified the Ramsar Convention in 1975 and there are currently 19 Ramsar sites in Pakistan,

covering an area of 1,343,627 hectares (3,320,170 acres). The convention requires protection of

identified wetlands of international importance as identified under Ramsar convention. The Ramsar

Convention (formally, the Convention on Wetlands of International Importance, especially as


2-10

Waterfowl Habitat) is an international treaty for the conservation and sustainable utilization of

wetlands.

2.3.4 Conventions on the Conservation of Migratory Species of Wild

Animals and Migratory Species

The Convention on the Conservation of Migratory Species of Wild Animals (also known as CMS or

Bonn Convention) aims to conserve terrestrial, aquatic and avian migratory species throughout their

range.

2.3.5 Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild

Fauna and Flora

Pakistan is a party to CITES, with the conventions implementation through “Pakistan Trade Control

of Wild Fauna and Flora Act (2012)”. CITES (the Convention on International Trade in Endangered

Species of Wild Fauna and Flora) is an international agreement between governments. Its aim is to

ensure that international trade in specimens of wild animals and plants does not threaten their

survival.

2.3.6 Kyoto Protocol

The Kyoto protocol was signed by Pakistan in 2005 and in February, 2006, the national CDM

operational strategy was approved. The convention pertains to the United Nations framework on

Climate Change. The 3rd Conference of the Parties to the Framework Convention on Climate Change

(FCCC) in Kyoto in December 1997 introduced the Clean Development Mechanism (CDM) as a new

concept for voluntary greenhouse-gas emission reduction agreements between industrialized and

developing countries on the project level.

2.3.7 The Rotterdam Convention on the Prior Informed Consent (PIC)

Procedure

Pakistan signed the Rotterdam Convention on the Prior Informed Consent (PIC) Procedure on 9

September 1999 and subsequently ratified the convention on 14 July 2005. The Rotterdam

Convention (formally, the Rotterdam Convention on the Prior Informed Consent Procedure for

Certain Hazardous Chemicals and Pesticides in International Trade) is a multilateral treaty to

promote shared responsibilities in relation to importation of hazardous chemicals. The convention

promotes open exchange of information and calls on exporters of hazardous chemicals to use proper

labeling, include directions on safe handling, and inform purchasers of any known restrictions or

bans. Signatory nations can decide whether to allow or ban the importation of chemicals listed in the

treaty, and exporting countries are obliged make sure that producers within their jurisdiction

comply.

2.3.8 International Labour Organization conventions

Pakistan has also ratified many of the International Labor Organization conventions that are relevant

to the Project including:

• C1 Hours of Work (Industry) Convention, 1919;

• C5 Minimum Age (Industry) Convention, 1919:


2-11

• C11 Right of Association (Agriculture) Convention, 1921:

• C14 Weekly Rest (Industry) Convention, 1921;

• C29 Forced Labor Convention, 1930 & C105 Abolition of Forced Labor Convention, 1957;

• C100 Equal Remuneration Convention, 1951;

• C107 Indigenous and Tribal Populations Convention, 1957

• C111 Discrimination (Employment and Occupation) Convention, 1958

2.4 IFC’s Requirements

IFC applies the Performance Standards to manage social and environmental risks and impacts and to

enhance development opportunities in its private sector financing in its member countries eligible

for financing. The Performance Standards may also be applied by other financial institutions electing

to apply them to projects in emerging markets. Together, the eight Performance Standards establish

standards that the client is to meet throughout the life of an investment by IFC or other relevant

financial institution:

• Performance Standard 1: Social and Environmental Assessment and Management System

• Performance Standard 2: Labor and Working Conditions

• Performance Standard 3: Pollution Prevention and Abatement

• Performance Standard 4: Community Health, Safety and Security

• Performance Standard 5: Land Acquisition and Involuntary Resettlement

• Performance Standard 6: Biodiversity Conservation and Sustainable Natural Resource

Management

• Performance Standard 7: Indigenous Peoples

• Performance Standard 8: Cultural Heritage

2.4.1 IFC's Performance Standards on Social and Environmental

Sustainability

International Finance Corporation applies the Performance Standards to manage social and

environmental risks and impacts and to enhance development opportunities in its private sector

financing in its member countries eligible for financing. Together, the eight Performance Standards

establish standards that the client is required to meet throughout the life by IFC or other relevant

financial institution.

PS 1 Social and Environmental Assessment and Management System- It establishes the importance

of integrated assessment to identify the social and environmental impacts, risks, and opportunities

in the project's area of influence. PS 1 requires Social and Environmental Assessment and

Management Systems for managing social and environmental performance throughout the life cycle

of this Project and runs through all subsequent PSs. The main elements of PS 1 includes following

elements: (i) Social and Environmental Assessment; (ii) Management program; (iii) organizational

capacity; (iv)training; (v) community engagement; (vi) monitoring; and (vii) reporting.

PS 2 Labor and working conditions- requires that worker-management relationship is established

and maintained, compliance with national labor and employment laws and safe and healthy working

conditions are ensured for the workers.


2-12

PS 3 Pollution prevention and Abatement- outlines approach to pollution prevention and

abatement in line with Internationally disseminated technologies and practices with objectives to a)

avoid or minimize adverse impacts on human health and the environment by avoiding or minimizing

pollution from activities; and b) promote the reduction of emissions that contribute to climate

change. It requires a project to avoid, minimize, or reduce adverse impacts on human health and the

environment by avoiding or minimizing pollution from project activities.

PS 4 Community health, safety and security- concentrates on the responsibility that must be

undertaken by the client to avoid or minimize the risks and impacts to the community's health,

safety and security that may arise from project activities.

PS 5 Land Acquisition and Involuntary Resettlement- This standard requires that project does not

result in involuntary resettlement or at least if unavoidable it is minimized by exploring alternative

project designs. Also the project will ensure that social and economic impacts from land acquisition

or restrictions on affected persons' use of land are mitigated.

PS 6 Biodiversity Conservation and Sustainable Natural Resource Management- aims at protecting

and conserving biodiversity, the variety of life in all its forms, including genetic, species and

ecosystem diversity and its ability to change and evolve, is fundamental to sustainable development.

This PS addresses how clients can avoid or mitigate threats to biodiversity arising from their

operations as well as incorporate sustainable management of renewable natural resources.

PS 7 Indigenous Peoples- acknowledges the possibility of vulnerability of indigenous people owing to

their culture, beliefs, institutions and living standards and that it may further get compromised by

one or other project activity throughout the life cycle of the project. The PS underlines the

requirement of minimizing adverse impacts an indigenous people in the project area, respecting the

local culture and customs, fostering good relationship and ensuring that development benefits are

provided to improve their standard of living and livelihoods.

PS 8 Cultural Heritage- aims to protect the irreplaceable cultural heritage and to guide clients on

protecting cultural heritage in the course of their business operations.

The applicability of these Performance Standards is established during the Social and Environmental

Impact Assessment process, while implementation of the actions is necessary to meet the

requirements of IFC, the Performance Standards are managed through the owner's Social and

Environmental Management System.

GHPP will have to follow all the Performance Standards of IFC for this project and should also ensure

that the contractors / subcontracts (subcontractors of the contracts) appointed by MPL all follow the

IFC performance standards on Environmental and Social Sustainability.

2.4.2 Environmental, Health and Safety General Guidelines

The EHS Guidelines are technical reference documents with general and industry-specific examples

of Good International Industry Practice (GIIP). The applicability of the EHS Guidelines should be

tailored to the hazards and risks established for each project on the basis of the results of an

environmental assessment in which site-specific variables, such as host country context, assimilative


2-13

capacity of the environment, and other project factors, are taken into account. The General EHS

Guidelines consist of the following components:

Environmental: This guideline applies to facilities or projects that generate emissions to air at any

stage of the project life-cycle. They also look into aspects of energy conservation, wastewater and

ambient water quality, water conservation, hazardous materials management, waste management,

noise and contaminated land.

Occupational Health and Safety: This section provides guidance and examples of reasonable

precautions to implement in managing principal risks to occupational health and safety. Although

the focus is placed on the operational phase of projects, much of the guidance also applies to

construction and decommissioning activities. This incorporates general facility design and operation,

communication and training, physical hazards, chemical hazards, biological hazards, radioactive

hazards, Personal Protective Equipment (PPE), special hazard environment and monitoring.

Community Health and Safety: This guidance complements the above two guidelines by specifically

addressing aspects of project activities which fall outside the traditional project boundaries but

which are related to the project operations as and when they occur.

Construction and Decommissioning: This section provides an additional and specific guidance to the

prevention and control of community health and safety impacts that may occur during new project

development, at the end of the project life-cycle or due to expansion or modification of existing

project facilities.

2.4.3 IFC's Environment, Health and Safety Guidelines for Electric Power

Transmission and Distribution

The EHS Guidelines for Electric Power Transmission and Distribution include information relevant to

power transmission between a generation facility and a substation located within an electricity grid,

in addition to power distribution from a substation to consumers located in residential, commercial,

and industrial areas. The various aspects comprising this guidance are industry specific impacts and

management and performance indicators and monitoring.

2.5 ADB Guidelines

The following ADB policies and guidelines shall be applicable to the proposed project:

• ADB Policies, Strategies and Operations Manuals including but not limited to:

o ADB’s 2009 Safeguard Policy Statement (SPS) – Safeguards Requirement (SR) 1 on

Environment, SR2 on Involuntary Resettlement (IR), and SR 3 on Indigenous Peoples

(IP)

o ADB Social Protection Strategy (2001);

o ADB Gender and Development Policy (1998);

o Public Communications Policy (2011); and

o Relevant ADB Operations Manual (OM) such as OMF1 for Safeguards Policy

Statement, OML3 for Public Communications, OMD10 for Non-sovereign


2-14

Operations, OMC3 for Incorporation of Social Dimensions into ADB Operations,

OMC2 for Gender and Development; 3

The ADB’s environmental policy is grounded in its Poverty Reduction Strategy and its Long-Terms

Strategic Framework. To ensure the reduction of poverty through environmentally sustainable

development, the ADB’s Environment Policy contains five main elements: (i) promoting environment

and natural resource management interventions to reduce poverty directly, (ii) assisting developing

member countries to mainstream environmental considerations in economic growth, (iii) helping

maintain global and regional life support systems that underpin future development prospects, (iv)

building partnerships to maximize the impact of ADB lending and non-lending activities, and (v)

integrating environmental considerations across all ADB operations.

Under the last element, the ADB pledges to address the environmental aspects of its operations

through the systematic application of procedures for (i) environmental analysis for country strategy

and programming; (ii) environmental assessment of project loans, program loans, sector loans, loans

involving financial intermediaries, and private sector loans; (iii) monitoring and evaluation of

compliance with environmental requirements of loans; and (iv) implementation of procedures for

environmentally responsible procurement. In the context of policy-based lending and policy

dialogue, the ADB will identify opportunities to introduce policy reforms that provide incentives to

improve environmental quality and enhance the sustainability of natural resource management.

ADB classifies projects into category A (with potentially significant environmental impact); category

B (with potentially less significant environmental impact); or, category C (unlikely to have significant

environmental impact).4 An IEE is required for category B projects and an ESIA, requiring greater

depth of analysis, for category A projects. No environmental assessment is required for category C

projects although their environmental implications nevertheless need to be reviewed. The proposed

project has been classified as a category A project for environment.

The ADB’s requirements for environmental assessment are specified in its Environmental

Assessment Guidelines. 5 The ADB requires that an environmental assessment report and a summary

ESIA report be prepared for a Category A project. Important considerations in preparing the

environmental assessment include assessing induced, indirect, and cumulative impact, examining

alternatives, achieving environmental standards, designing least-cost mitigation measures,

developing appropriate environmental management plans and monitoring requirements,

formulating institutional arrangements, and ensuring meaningful public consultation. The format of

the environment assessment report for program loans is flexible, but includes a matrix describing

the environmental consequences and mitigation measures for the policy actions underpinning the

program loan.

The ADB requires public consultation and access to information in the environment assessment

process. For a Category A project, it is required that the groups affected by the proposed project and

3 Available from http://www.adb.org/Documents/Manuals/Operations/default.asp

4 A fourth category, FI (credit line for subprojects through a financial intermediary, or equity investment in a

financial intermediary), requires that an appropriate environmental management system should be developed and assessment carried out. 5 ADB. 2003. Environmental Assessment Guidelines. Manila: ADB.


2-15

local NGOs be consulted at least twice: (i) once during the early stages of ESIA field work; and (ii)

once when the draft ESIA report is available, and prior to loan appraisal by the ADB. The public

consultation process needs to be described in the ESIA and summary ESIA reports.

The EMMP is a key component of the ESIA. The ADB places strong emphasis on the preparation of

EMMPs during project processing. The EMMP sets out conditions and targets to be met during

project implementation. It is also required to develop procedures and plans to ensure that the

mitigation measures and monitoring requirements approved during the environmental compliance

review will actually be carried out in subsequent stages of the project.

The ADB, however, recognizes that the specific construction and operational activities may not be

well enough defined at the feasibility stage of the project cycle to provide the details required for an

effective EMMP. The ADB therefore requires that the Borrower ensure that a revised EMMP be

prepared at the beginning of the implementation stage. The Company will be the project proponent

and will be responsible for preparing the revised EMMP.

2.5.1 ADB's Safeguard Policy Statement 2009

Built upon the three previous safeguard policies on the Involuntary Resettlement Policy (1995), the

Policy on Indigenous Peoples (1998) and the Environment Policy (2002), the Safeguard Policy

Statement was approved in 2009. The safeguard policies are operational policies that seek to avoid,

minimize or mitigate adverse environmental and social impacts including protecting the rights of

those likely to be affected or marginalized by the developmental process. ADB's safeguard policy

framework consists of three operational policies on the environment, indigenous peoples and

involuntary resettlement. A brief detail of all three operational policies have been mentioned below:

Environmental Safeguard: This safeguard is meant to ensure the environmental soundness and

sustainability of projects and to support the integration of environmental considerations into the

project decision making process.

Involuntary Resettlement Safeguard: This safeguard has been placed in order to avoid involuntary

resettlement whenever possible; to minimize involuntary resettlement by exploring project and

design alternatives; to enhance, or at least restore, the livelihoods of all displaced persons in real

terms relative to pre- project levels; and to improve the standards of living of the displaced poor and

other vulnerable groups.

Indigenous Peoples Safeguard: This safeguard looks at designing and implementing projects in a

way that fosters full respect for Indigenous Peoples' identity, dignity, human rights, livelihood

systems and cultural uniqueness as defined by the Indigenous Peoples themselves so that they

receive culturally appropriate social and economic benefits; do not suffer adverse impacts as a result

of projects; and participate actively in projects that affect them.

Information, Consultation and Disclosure: Consultation and participation are essential in achieving

the safeguard policy objectives. This implies that there is a need for prior and informed consultation

with affected persons and communities in the context of safeguard planning and for continued

consultation during project implementation to identify and help address safeguard issues that may

arise. The consultation process begins early in the project preparation stage and is carried out on an


2-16

ongoing basis throughout the project cycle. It provides timely disclosure of relevant and adequate

information that is understandable and readily accessible to affected people and is undertaken in an

atmosphere free of intimidation or coercion. In addition, it is gender inclusive and responsive and

tailored to the needs of disadvantaged and vulnerable groups and enables the incorporation of all

relevant views of affected people and other stakeholders into decision making. ADB requires the

borrowers/clients to engage with communities, groups or people affected by proposed projects and

with civil society through information disclosure, consultation and informed participation in a

manner commensurate with the risks to and impacts on affected communities. For projects with

significant adverse environmental, involuntary resettlement or Indigenous Peoples impacts, ADB

project teams will participate in consultation activities to understand the concerns of affected

people and ensure that such concerns are addressed in project design and safeguard plans.

2.5.2 Social Protection Requirements

ADB's Social Protection Strategy (2001 SPS) requires the Borrower to comply with applicable labor

laws in relation to the Project, and take the following measures to comply with the core labor

standards6 for the ADB financed portion of the Project:

a. carry out its activities consistent with the intent of ensuring legally permissible equal

opportunity, fair treatment and non-discrimination in relation to recruitment and hiring,

compensation, working conditions and terms of employment for its workers (including

prohibiting any form of discrimination against women during hiring and providing equal

work for equal pay for men and women engaged by the Borrower);

b. not restrict its workers from developing a legally permissible means of expressing their

grievances and protecting their rights regarding working conditions and terms of

employment;

c. engage contractors and other providers of goods and services:

(i) who do not employ child Iabor7 or forced labor;8

(ii) who have appropriate management systems that will allow them to operate in a

manner which is consistent with the intent of (A) ensuring legally permissible equal

opportunity and fair treatment and non-discrimination for their workers, and (B) not

restricting their workers from developing a legally permissible means of expressing

their grievances and protecting their rights regarding working conditions and terms

of employment; and

(iii) whose subcontracts contain provisions which are consistent with paragraphs (i) and

(ii) above.

6 the core labor standards are the elimination of all forms of forced or compulsory labor; the abolition of child

labor; elimination of discrimination in respect of employment and occupation; and freedom of association and the effective recognition of the right to collective bargaining, as per the relevant conventions of the International Labor Organization; 7 child labour means the employment of children whose age is below the statutory minimum age of

employment in the relevant country, or employment of children in contravention of International Labour Organization Convention No. 138 'Minimum Age Convention" (www.ioo.org) 8 forced labour means all work or services not voluntarily performed, that is, extracted from individuals under

threat of force or penalty


2-17

2.5.3 Public Communications Policy 2011

The Public Communications Policy (PCP) of ADB, originally formulated in 2005 and revised in 2011, is

aimed at promoting improved access to information about ADB's operations related to funded

projects. It endorses greater transparency and accountability to stakeholders involved in a project.

The PCP establishes the disclosure requirements for documents and information related to projects.

It mandates project-related documents normally produced during the project cycle to be posted on

the web.

2.5.4 Gender and Development Policy 1998

ADB's Gender and Development Policy (1998) adopts gender mainstreaming as a key strategy for

promoting gender equity, and for ensuring that women participate in and that their needs are

explicitly addressed in the decision-making process for development activities. The key elements of

ADBs gender policy are: (i) Gender sensitivity, to observe how the project affects women and men

differently and to take account of their different needs and perspectives in resettlement planning;

(ii) Gender analysis, which refers to the systematic assessment of the project impact on men and

women and on the economic and social relationships between them; (iii) Gender planning, which

refers to the formulation of specific strategies to bring about equal opportunities to men and

women; and (iv) Mainstreaming, to consider gender issues in all aspects of ADB operations,

accompanied by efforts to encourage women's participation in the decision-making process in

development activities.

The SPS and safeguards requirements also reiterate the importance of including gender issues in the

preparation of safeguards documents at all stages to ensure that gender concerns are incorporated,

including gender-specific consultation and information disclosure. This includes special attention to

guarantee women's assets, property, and land-use rights and restoration/improvement of their

living standards; and to ensure that women will receive project benefits.


2-18

Table 2.2: Selected NEQS for Waste Effluents

Parameter Unit Standards (maximum allowable

limit)

Temperature increase °C < 3

pH value (acidity/basicity) pH 6/9

5-day biochemical oxygen demand (BOD) at 20 °C

mg/l 80

Chemical oxygen demand (COD) mg/l 150

Total suspended solids mg/l 200

Total dissolved solids mg/l 3,500

Grease and oil mg/l 10

Phenolic compounds (as phenol) mg/l 0.1

Chloride (as Cl) mg/l 1,000

Fluoride (as F) mg/l 10

Sulfate (SO4) mg/l 600

Sulfide (S) mg/l 1.0

Ammonia (NH3) mg/l 40

Cadmium mg/l 0.1

Chromium (trivalent and hexavalent) mg/l 1.0

Copper mg/l 1.0

Lead mg/l 0.5

Mercury mg/l 0.01

Selenium mg/l 0.5

Nickel mg/l 1.0

Silver mg/l 1.0

Total toxic metals mg/l 2.0

Zinc mg/l 5.0

Arsenic mg/l 1.0

Barium mg/l 1.5

Iron mg/l 8.0

Manganese mg/l 1.5

Boron mg/l 6.0

Chlorine mg/l 1.0 Notes:

1. The standard assumes that dilution of 1:10 on discharge is available. That is, for each cubic meter of treated effluent, the recipient water body should have 10 m3 of water for dilution of this effluent.

2. Toxic metals include cadmium, chromium, copper, lead, mercury, selenium, nickel and silver. The effluent should meet the individual standards for these metals as well as the standard for total toxic metal concentration. Source: Government of Pakistan (2000) (SRO 549 (I)/2000).


2-19

Table 2.3: NEQS for Industrial Gaseous Emissions

Parameter Source of Emission Standards (maximum

allowable limit)

Smoke Smoke opacity not to exceed 40% or 2 Ringlemann Scale or

equivalent smoke number

Particulate matter 1

(a) Boilers and furnaces:

i. Oil fired 300

ii. Coal fired 500

iii. Cement Kilns 300

(b) Grinding, crushing, clinker coolers and related processes, metallurgical processes, converters, blast furnaces and cupolas

500

Hydrogen Chloride Any 400

Chlorine Any 150

Hydrogen fluoride Any 150

Hydrogen sulphide Any 10

Sulphur Oxides 2, 3

Sulfuric acid/Sulphonic acid plants 5,000

Other Plants except power Plants operating on oil and coal

1,700

Carbon Monoxide Any 800

Lead Any 50

Mercury Any 10

Cadmium Any 20

Arsenic Any 20

Copper Any 50

Antimony Any 20

Zinc Any 200

Oxides of Nitrogen 3

Nitric acid manufacturing unit 3,000

Other plants except power plants operating on oil or coal:

i. Gas fired 400

ii. Oil fired 600

iii. Coal fired 1,200 Explanations:

1. Based on the assumption that the size of the particulate is 10 micron or more. 2. Based on 1% Sulphur content in fuel oil. Higher content of Sulphur will cause standards to be pro-rated. 3. In respect of emissions of Sulphur dioxide and nitrogen oxides, the power plants operating on oil and coal as fuel

shall in addition to NEQS specified above, comply with the standards provided separately. 4. Units are in mg/Nm

3 unless otherwise stated

Source: Government of Pakistan (2000) (SRO 549 (I)/2000).


2-20

Table 2.4: National Environmental Quality Standards for Ambient Air9

Pollutants Time-

Weighted Average

Concentration in Ambient Air

Method of Measurement Effective from1st

July 2010

Effective from 1

st January 2013

Sulfur Dioxide (SO2)

Annual Average*

80 µg/m3 80 µg/m

3

Ultraviolet Fluorescence

24 hours** 120 µg/m3 120 µg/m

3

Oxides of Nitrogen as (NO)

Annual Average*

40 µg/m3 40 µg/m

3 Gas Phase

Chemiluminescence 24 hours** 40 µg/m

3 40 µg/m

3

Oxides of Nitrogen as (NO2)

Annual Average*

40 µg/m3 40 µg/m

3 Gas Phase

Chemiluminescence 24 hours** 80 µg/m

3 80 µg/m

3

Ozone (O3) 1 hour 180 µg/m3 130 µg/m

3

Non-dispersive UV absorption

Suspended Particulate Matter (SPM)

Annual Average*

400 µg/m3 360 µg/m

3

High Volume Sampling, (Average flow rate not

less than1.1 m3/minute). 24 hours** 550 µg/m

3 500 µg/m

3

Respirable Particulate Matter. PM10

Annual Average*

200 µg/m3 120 µg/m

3

β Ray absorption

24 hours** 250 µg/m3 150 µg/m

3

Respirable Particulate Matter. PM2.5

Annual Average*

25 µg/m3 15 µg/m

3

β Ray absorption 24 hours** 40 µg/m

3 35 µg/m

3

1 hour 25 µg/m3 15 µg/m

3

Lead (Pb)

Annual Average*

1.5 µg/m3 1.0 µg/m

3

ASS Method after sampling using EPM 2000 or equivalent Filter paper 24 hours** 2.0 µg/m

3 1.5 µg/m

3

Carbon Monoxide (CO)

8 hours** 5 mg/m3 5 mg/m

3 Non-Dispersive Infra-Red

(NDIR) 1 hour 10 mg/m3 10 mg/m

3

* Annual arithmetic mean of minimum 104 measurements in a year taken twice a week 24 hourly at uniform interval.

** 24 hourly /8 hourly values should be met 98% of the in a year. 2% of the time, it may exceed but not on two consecutive days. Source: Government of Pakistan (2010) (SRO 1062 (I)/2010).

9Full text of the Standards is available at the Pak-EPA website:

(http://www.environment.gov.pk/info.htm).


2-21

Table 2.5: NEQS for Motor Vehicles Exhaust and Noise for In-use Vehicles10

Sr.

No. Parameter

Standard (Maximum

Permissible Limit) Measuring Method Applicability

1 Smoke 40% or 2 on the Ringlemann Scale during engine acceleration mode.

To be compared with Ringlemann Chart at a distance 6 or more.

Immediate effect 2

Carbon Monoxide

6% Under idling conditions: Non-dispersive infrared detection through gas analyzer.

3 Noise 85 dB (A). Sound meter at 7.5 meters from the source.

Table 2.6: NEQS for Motor Vehicles Exhaust and Noise for New Diesel Vehicles, Passenger Cars and Light Commercial Vehicles (g/Km)

Type of Vehicle

Category/Class Tiers CO HC+ NOx

PM Measuring

Method Applicability

Passenger Cars

M 1: with reference mass (RW) up to 2500 kg. Cars with RW over 2500 kg to meet NI category standards.

Pak-II IDI 1.00 0.70 0.08 NEDC (ECE

15+ EUDCL)

All imported and local

manufactured diesel vehicles

with effect from 01-07-

2012

Pak-II DI 1.00 0.90 0.10

Light Commercial Vehicles

NI-I (RW<1250 kg) Pak-II IDI 1.00 0.70 0.08

Pak-II DI 1.00 0.90 0.10

NI-II (1250 kg< RW <1700 kg0

Pak-II IDI 1.25 1.00 0.12

Pak-II DI 1.25 1.30 0.14

NI-III (RW>1700 kg) Pak-II IDI 1.50 1.20 0.17

Pak-II DI 1.50 1.60 0.20

Parameter Standard (maximum permissible limit) Measuring Method

Noise 85 dB (A) Sound meter at 7.5 meters from the

source.

10

Full text of the Standards is available at the Pak-EPA website: (http://www.environment.gov.pk/info.htm).


2-22

Table 2.7: NEQS for Motor Vehicles Exhaust and Noise for New Diesel Vehicles, Heavy Duty Diesel Engines and Large Goods Vehicles (g/Kwh)

Type of

Vehicle

Category/

Class Tiers CO HC NOx PM

Measuring

Method Applicability

Heavy Duty Diesel Engines

Trucks and Buses

Pak-II 4.0 1.1 7.0 0.15 ECE-R-49

All Imported and local manufactured diesel vehicles with the effect 1-7-2012

Large goods Vehicles

N2 (2000 and up

Pak-II 4.0 7.0 1.1 0.15 EDC

Parameter Standard (maximum permissible limit) Measuring Method

Noise 85 dB (A) Sound meter at 7.5 meters from the source.

Table 2.8: NEQS for Motor Vehicles Exhaust and Noise for New Petrol Vehicles (g/km)

Type of Vehicle

Category / Class Tiers CO HC+ NOx

Measuring Method

Applicability

Passenger

M 1: With reference mass (RW) up to 2500 kg. Cars with RW over 2500 kg. to meet N1 category standards

Pak-II 2.20 0.50

NEDC (ECE 15 + EUDCL)

All imported and new models* locally manufactured petrol vehicles with effect from 1

st

July, 2009**

Light Commercial

Vehicles

N1-I (RW<1250 kg) Pak-II 2.20 0.50

N1-II (1250 kg>RW <1700 kg)

Pak-II 4.00 0.65

N1-III (RW>1700 kg) Pak-II 5.00 0.80

Motor Rickshaws &

motor Cycles

2.4 strokes <150 cc Pak-II 5.50 1.50

ECER 40 2.4 strokes>150 cc Pak-II 5.50 1.30

Parameters Standard (maximum permissible limit) Measuring Method

Noise 85 dB (A) Sound meter at 7.5 meters from the

source Explanations for Table 2.4 to 2.7: DI: Direct Injection IDI: Indirect Injection EUDCL: Extra Urban Driving Cycle NEDC: New Urban Driving Cycle M: Vehicles designed and constructed for the carriage of passengers and comprising no more than eight seats in

addition to the driver's seat N: Motor vehicles with at least four wheels designed and constructed for the carriage of goods. * New model means both model and engine type change ** The existing models of petrol driven vehicles locally manufactured will immediately switch ever to Pak-II emission

standards but not later than 30th June, 2012 Source: Government of Pakistan (2009) (SRO 72 (KE)/2009).


2-23

Table 2.9: National Standards for Drinking Water Quality11

Properties/Parameters Standard Values for Pakistan

Bacterial

All water intended for drinking (E. Coli or Thermo tolerant Coliform bacteria)

Must not be detectable in any 100 ml samples

Treated water entering the distribution system (E. Coli or thermo-tolerant coliform and total coliform bacteria)

Must not be detectable in any 100 ml samples

Treated water in the distribution system (E. Coli or thermo tolerant coliform and total coliform bacteria)

Must not be detectable in any 100 ml samples In case of large supplies, where sufficient samples are examined, must not be present in 95% of the samples

taken throughout any 12- month period.

Physical

Color ≤15 TCU

Taste Non-objectionable/Accept able

Odor Non-objectionable/Accept able

Turbidity < 5 NTU

Total hardness as CaCO3 < 500 mg/l

TDS < 1000

pH 6.5 – 8.5

Chemical

Essential Inorganic mg/Liter

Aluminum (Al) ≤0.2

Antimony (Sb) ≤0.005 (P)

Arsenic (As) ≤ 0.05 (P)

Barium (Ba) 0.7

Boron (B) 0.3

Cadmium (Cd) 0.01

Chloride (Cl) <250

Chromium (Cr) ≤0.05

Copper (Cu) 2

Toxic Inorganic mg/Liter

Cyanide (Cn) ≤0.05

Fluoride (F)* ≤1.5

Lead (Pb) ≤0.05

Manganese (Mn) ≤ 0.5

Mercury (Hg) ≤0.001

Nickel (Ni) ≤0.02

Nitrate (NO3)* ≤50

Nitrite (NO2)* ≤3 (P)

Selenium (Se) 0.01 (P)

Residual chlorine 0.2-0.5 at consumer end; 0.5-1.5 at source

Zinc (Zn) 5.0

Organic

Pesticides mg/l PSQCA No. 4639-2004, Page No. 4 Table No. 3 Serial

No. 20- 58 may be consulted**

Phenolic compound (as phenols) mg/l WHO standards: ≤ 0.002

Polynuclear Aromatic hydrocarbon (as PAH) g/L WHO standards: ≤ 0.01v(by GC/MS method)

Radioactive

Alpha Emitters bq/L or pCi 0.1

Beta Emitters 1

11



2-24

* indicates priority health related inorganic constituents which need regular monitoring. ** PSQCA: Pakistan Standards Quality Control Authority.

Source: Government of Pakistan (2010) (SRO 1063(I)/2010).

Table 2.10: National Environmental Quality Standards for Noise12

Category of Area/Zone

Limit in dB(A) Leq*

Effective from 1st

July 2010 Effective from 1st

July 2012

Day time Night time Day time Night time

Residential area 65 50 55 45

Commercial area 70 60 65 55

Industrial area 80 75 75 65

Silence zone 55 45 50 45 Notes: 1. Day time hours: 6:00 a.m. to 10:00 p.m. 2. Night time hours: 10:00 p.m. to 6:00 a.m. 3. Silence zone: Zones that are declared as such by the competent authority. An area comprising not less than 100

m around the hospitals, educational institutions, and courts. 4. Mixed categories of areas may be declared as one of the four above-listed categories by the competent

authority. * dB(A) Leq: Time weighted average of the level of sound in decibels on Scale A which is relatable to human

hearing. Source: Government of Pakistan (2010) (SRO 1064(I)/2010).

12



3-1

3 PROJECT DESCRIPTION

The Gulpur Hydropower Project will exploit the water resources of the Poonch River for power

generation. It will comprise four main components, viz., Weir, Intake Structure, Power Tunnel and

Power House. The Weir will be located near Aghar Colony on the Poonch River at about 5 km

downstream of Kotli Town and about 250 m downstream of the confluence of Ban Nullah with the

river. The Intake Structure and intake portal of the Power Tunnel will be located on Ban Nullah about

2 km upstream of its confluence with the Poonch River. The Power House and outlet portal of the

Power Tunnel will be located on Poonch River about 6.5 km downstream of the Weir structure.

Figure 3.1 illustrates the layout plan of the Project.

Figure 3.1: Project General Layout Plan

The Normal Operating Level (NOL) of the Project shall be at El. 540 m. At present a freeboard of 2

meters is proposed for the land acquisition and resettlement. Figure 3.2 shows the inundation area

at El. 542.0 m.


3-2

Figure 3.2: Inundated Land/Houses by the Reservoir

3.1 Location of the Project

The Project site administratively belongs to Kotli District, Azad Jammu and Kashmir. It is located at

latitude 33°27’ and longitude 73°51’, which is about 5 km South of Kotli Town. The site is

approximately 167 km from Islamabad and 285 km from Lahore, and is accessible directly from

Islamabad and Lahore by a two-lane (and partially paved) mountainous road. It can be also accessed

from Islamabad via Kahuta or from Lahore using a GT road to reach Dina where connects to Mirpur

first and then Gulpur. At the Project site, river flows in a narrow gorge at a slope of about 1V:200H.


3-3

Figure 3.3: Project Location

3.2 Land Required for Project

The area to be consumed by the Project structures, reservoir, colony, and camp and approach roads

is given in Table 3.1 below. The table shows that the private land constitutes about 26.4 percent of

the total area to be consumed by the Project. It is only this area that is privately owned, while the

rest of the area is government land. About 88 percent (803 Acres) of the land required for the

proposed project will be utilized for the reservoir. In total the proposed project will required 919.85

Acres of land, major portion (74 percent) of this requirement will be fulfilled through usage of

government wasteland.

Table 3.1: Area Requirement for the Proposed Project

S.

No. Structure/ Item

Total

Area

(Acres)

Private Land Government Land

Ownership Shamilat Auqaf KDA Forest Wasteland

1 Power Complex 2 - - - - - 2

2 Weir 10 - - - - - 10

3 Intake 1 - - - - - 1

4 Reservoir 803.85 127.64 84.80 39 57.25 8.81 486.36

5 Spoil Dumping Areas 36 3 1 - - 14 18

6 Colonies/Camps/Stores/Workshops

54 24 2 - - 2 26

7 Access Roads for Power House

13 - - - - - 13

Total 919.85 154.64 87.80 39 57.25 24.81 556.36

Percentages 100% 16.8% 9.5% 4.2% 6.2% 2.7% 60.5%


3-4

3.3 Main Components of the Project

3.3.1 The Weir

The weir type has been determined as concrete gravity dam (CGD) with dimensions of W45.0 m ×

L237.0 m to prevent overflow even in case of probable maximum flood (PMF). 100-year frequency

flood (13,334 m3/s) has been applied to the spillway overflow section, and spillway type has been

determined as radial gate type in consideration of economic aspects, constructability, functionality

and Q&M. The discharge capacity of the spillway has been designed to maintain the normal

operation level (EL.540.0 m) in case of the 100-year frequency flood. Eight gates (W 11.5 m ×H 26.0

m EA) are installed inside the weir body to prevent overflowing the weir crest (El.545.0 m) even in

case of probable maximum flood (PMF). A 9.5 m wide roadway bridge with its crest at El. 545.0 m

will provide access from one bank to other bank of the river. Bridge shall also be used to operate

gate hosting equipment.

Ogee shaped crests for weir portion is connected to submerged roller bucket type energy dissipater

through concrete chutes. The project site displays an extremely high downstream level due to

relatively large amount of flow compared to the river width. It was observed that the downstream

level becomes higher than the water level after hydraulic jump in case of floods higher than 2- year

frequency flood (4,190 m3/s). Submerged roller bucket type has been chosen as a result due to

excessive excavation and absence of major structures at downstream.

Figure 3.4: Details of Weir Structure


3-5

3.3.2 Power Tunnel and Penstocks

The power tunnel off-takes from the left bank of Bann Nullah at a location about 2 km upstream of

its confluence with Poonch River. The tunnel will be concrete lined and circular in shape having a

total length of 3.04 Km. The invert of tunnel intake is kept at El. 523 m to avoid vortices and air

entrance. The intake structure will have a bell-mouthed entrance with trash-rack and a gate shaft. A

road along the left bank of Bann Nullah will be constructed for operation & maintenance of this

structure. The intake arrangements are shown on Figure 3.5 and Figure 3.6.

First part of the power tunnel is designed as a low pressure tunnel of 8.0 m dia, concrete lined,

almost bored straight in the hill up to a 62.64 m high surge shaft. Downstream of surge shaft, tunnel

will connect to a vertical pressure tunnel which will connect to an 8.0 m dia steel penstock which will

be divided into three steel penstocks each 3.75 m dia up to the powerhouse.

Hydraulic features of the power tunnel/penstocks are as given below:

Design discharge 198 cumecs

Shape and size of tunnel Circular, concrete lined, 8 m

Slope of tunnel invert 0.0025

Length of tunnel 3.04 km

Invert elevation

Upstream El. 523.0 m

Downstream El. 514.0 m

Size of penstock 8 m Ø, circular, steel pipe converted into 3.75 m pipe

Length of penstock 62 m

Head Loss

Tunnel 5.69 m

Penstocks 0.85 m


3-6

Figure 3.5: Details of Tunnel Intake

Figure 3.6: Penstock Profile and Details


3-7

3.3.3 Powerhouse

The priority for the horizontal alignment of the tunnel was to set the length as shortest as possible,

but a curvature was inevitable due to the relocation of the tunnel (84 m downstream from the

Feasibility Study location). The radius of the curvature has been determined as 300 m in order to

provide sufficient space additionally to the minimum turning radius required for the excavation

equipment and steel form (200 m). The tunnel alignment has been designed to cross where the

ground condition is sounder, and for the tunnel axis to intersect with major fault zones as

perpendicularly as possible. Sufficient cover thickness was also taken into account in case the tunnel

route crosses below gullies or valleys. Total installed capacity of the powerhouse is 100 MW and

power will be generated with the help of 3 vertical axis Francis turbines. The powerhouse is 80 m

long and 42.3 m wide. Water from draft tubes will be released back into the river with the help of a

tailrace channel. A retaining wall has been proposed to protect the powerhouse from high tailwater

level during floods.

The proposed powerhouse is a surface type and will be located on left bank of the river at a massive

bed of sandstone. Layout of the powerhouse is shown in Figure 3.7, Figure 3.8 and Figure 3.9. The

basic parameters are given below:

Power Station and Equipment

Structure

Powerhouse Surface type

Number of Units 3

Distance between centerline of units 15.0 m

Overall length 42.3 m

Width

Overall height 59.55 m

Turbines

Type Francis (Vertical Shaft)

Discharge at rated head 33~66 m3/s

Rated net head 55.8 MW

Output at rated net head 34.0 MW

Specific speed 227.3 rpm

Synchronize speed 187.5 rpm

Runaway speed

Runner diameter 3.0 m


3-8

Figure 3.7: Power House Security Plan

Figure 3.8: Power House Plan


3-9

Figure 3.9: Power House Longitudinal Section

3.3.4 River Diversion

A 2-stage river diversion plan has been proposed for the construction of the Weir. The diversion will

be manipulated within the river section by constructing coffer dams. This will save the additional

cost of diversion tunnels. Two coffer dams will also be provided for the construction of other

components, one for Intake Structure for the Power Tunnel and the other for Power House.

Diversion of river flows during construction is required at three locations:

1. At the weir

2. At intake structure of power tunnel in Bann Nullah and

3. At powerhouse

To facilitate the construction of weir, diversion installation consists of 1st cofferdam and 2nd

cofferdam. The crests of the first and second cofferdams have been computed by using HEC-RAS

based on the 1-year frequency flood. Firstly, 1st cofferdam is constructed on the left bank. As a

result of water levels estimated for the design flood, the crest of the 1st cofferdam has been

determined as EL.525.0 m due to the water level of EL.524.02 at the 1st cofferdam upstream, and

the water level of EL.524.0 m has been determined separately for the downstream where the water

level is EL.523.44m. Due to the narrow river width, the 2nd cofferdam is installed by connecting a

retaining wall to the structure installed during construction of the 1st cofferdam, and water flow is

induced into the weir structure installed. The water level was computed as EL.525.3 m and the crest

has been determined as EL.526.0 m. The intake structure of the power tunnels will be separated

from Ban Nullah by constructing a cofferdam around the intake area. Similarly the powerhouse will

be isolated from the main river through another cofferdam.


3-10

Figure 3.10: Diversion Scheme for Weir Sluesway

3.3.4.1 River Flows and Cofferdams Heights

Weir

The construction work on weir structure will be carried out during low flow period of nine months

extending from October to June and during the main flood months of July, August and September

construction activity will cease and construction machinery and equipment will be retrieved to

higher ground.

Power Tunnel Intake Structure

Work on intake structure of the power tunnel is an independent activity and can be accomplished

during the low flow period of October through June. Cofferdam has been designed to isolate the

intake structure area from nullah flows. Crest of the cofferdams is worked out as El. 527.0 m.

Powerhouse

Construction work on powerhouse will be continued throughout the year. The crest of cofferdam

has been worked out as El. 485.0 m.

3.3.5 Dyke

In order to minimize resettlement due to inundation of the cultivated land and the number of

houses, MWH/NESPAK conducted a study and concluded a technically viable option. MWH/NESPAK

applied these studies to minimize the resettlement on the right as well as left bank of the upstream

submerged area and emphasized to save Hill Kalan, Hill Khurd, KDA and Mandi Juzvi on the right

bank (Zone-A), Laloi area (Zone B) & Mandi area (Zone C) on the left bank of the river.


3-11

Figure 3.11: Zones for Dyke Structure

NESPAK has recommended earthen filled dyke and varied the length of the dyke on the right bank of

river to get optimum solution by comparing it with that of tentative resettlement cost and

recommended best suitable length for building of earthen filled dyke on right bank of the river. In

order to take care of catchment water of mountains and other area, NESPAK has divided the whole

catchment area into two portions by proposing a Collection Drain at about El. 540 m. to get the

catchment water of the mountains and areas above 540 level to this Collection Drain and throw the

same into the river without any de-watering arrangement. For remaining catchment areas of about

70 Acres (from dyke to 540 level), another drain is proposed adjacent to the dyke which will be

catered through some de-watering arrangements or through flip-flop valves in the dyke. (Figure 3.12

showing different options for dykes)


3-12

Figure 3.12: Different Options for Dykes

3.4 Construction Schedule

It is anticipated that the Project would take about 45 months for its completion and commissioning.

The construction period for each project has been presented in Table 3.2.

Table 3.2: Summary of Construction Periods

Feature Time (Months)

Weir 30

Intake 8

Power Tunnel 32

Powerhouse construction and installation 24

Switchyard installation 7

Surge Shaft 4

Penstock liners 12

Control Gates 12

Commissioning (Dry & Wet) 10

3.5 Construction Camp and Workforce

A large workforce, together with supervisory and support staff, will be required for the Project. It has

been estimated that the Project will employ about 700 skilled, semi-skilled and unskilled workforce

for its construction. Majority of unskilled and to some extent semi-skilled and skilled workforce will

be employed from the local area. However, the contractor will engage specialized workforce

including engineers, geologists and construction management staff from the outside area. While

most of the local workforce will go back to their dwellings on daily basis, the remaining will be

accommodated in three camps located near construction sites at Weir, Intake and Power House.


3-13

Adequate temporary camps, offices and ancillary facilities at convenient locations near the site will

be required. Owing to the hilly terrains, there is a limitation in the availability of ample areas at the

sites near the Weir and Power House for establishing residences, workshops, batching plants and

material storage areas separately. However, a sizeable nearly leveled terrace is available across the

Ban Nullah at the Intake site where the contractor can establish residential colony as well as other

facilities. Moreover, modern houses are also available in Kotli Town on rental basis. The contractor

may hire these for establishing main office and hostels for the workforce.

3.6 Access Routes for Construction Sites

The Project falls in a terrain that is constituted of high hills having steep slopes with narrow valleys in

between. Though the Weir and Power House sites lie close to the main road leading from Kotli to

Mirpur, the sites are located down the hills having very steep slopes. On the other hand the Intake

site is located about 2 km away from the main road devoid of any motor-able access. The contractor

would need to develop access roads for all the sites.


from Islamabad and Lahore by a two-lane, all-weather paved mountainous road. Access to the

Project site from Islamabad is via Kahuta to Kotli and to Gulpur. The other route is from Lahore via

GT Road to Dina and then to Mirpur and to Gulpur. During rainy season, traffic is susceptible to

occasional disruptions due to landslides.

To carry out construction of Project components, there will be a need for temporary access roads

connecting stockpile areas, work areas such as cofferdams, tunnel portal, batching plant(s) and site

workshops for hauling labour and materials within the jobsite. Access roads required for

construction of various Project components are planned and shown in Figure 3.13.


3-14

Figure 3.13: Project Area Access Roads

These roads are planned along the shortest and practicable route at reasonable grades, maximum

allowed grade is 6%, nevertheless, ramps may be steeper. Details are given in Table 3.3.

Table 3.3: Project Construction Roads, Lengths & Gradients

Roads Length (km) Elevation (m) Gradient

From To From To From To

ROADS TO INTAKE PORTAL AREA

Main Kotli Road Construction Camp 0+000 0+500 570 575 1.00

Main Kotli Road Construction Camp 0+500 1+000 575 595 4.00

Main Kotli Road Intake Portal 0+500 1+450 575 520 5.80

Rehman Bridge Intake Portal 0+000 1+350 550 520 2.25

Alternate Camps Intake Portal 0+000 1+050 565 520 4.30

ROADS TO WEIR

Main Kotli Road Construction Camp

Weir Upstream 0+000 0+620 525 500 4.05

Main Kotli Road Construction Camp

Weir Downstream 0+000 1+300 560 500 4.65

ROADS TO POWERHOUSE

Main Kotli Road Powerhouse 0+000 2+200 600 475 5.70

Main Kotli Road Concrete Mixing Plant & Powerhouse

0+000 2+300 600 475 5.45

Concrete Mixing Plant Main Kotli Road for going to weir & Intake Portal

0+000 1+1000 575 630 5.50


3-15

3.7 Construction Material

The materials used for the construction of the proposed project include coarse aggregates, fine

aggregates (sand), rock for stone pitching and riprap, earth, water, cement and steel. Tentative

quantities of various materials along with the source are depicted in Table 3.4:

Table 3.4: Quantities AND Sources OF Construction Material

Sr.

No. Item Quantity Source

1 Coarse Aggregate 300,000 cu m

The material will be borrowed from the following sources:

• River Bed boulders, gravels, cobles. Crushers are already in operation near Kotli and Gulpur Towns.

• Sandstone from excavation of weir, tunnel and power house areas

• Quarrying limestone from Sawar (22 km from Kotli on Kotli-Tatapani Road), Dandli (16 km from Kotli on Dandli-Ghoi Road), Jhanjora (34 km from Kotli on Tatapani-Ghoi Road) Small scale quarrying is already being done on these sites by a local contractor for road and building construction.

2 Fine Aggregate (Sand) 150,000 cu m

Sand is though available in the river bed, its quality is not suitable for the Project construction. Moreover its quantities are small. Therefore, it has to be either transported from Lawrencepur and Qibla Bandi located in Attock District about 200 km from Kotli or manufactured locally from limestone sources.

3 Rock Material for Stone pitching and Riprap

5,000 cu m

Rock material will generally be available from the excavation for the construction of weir, power house and tunnel.

4 Cement (including Portland (60,000 tonnes and Slag 30,000 tonnes)

90,000 tonnes

There is no cement factory in AJK. The Portland cement will be transported from Islamabad, Nowshera and Attock on the average located at a distance of 200 to 300 km from Kotli. Slag Cement will be transported from Karachi (about 1500 km from Kotli) through rail and road transportation. The road network is available from the factories up to construction sites. However, its transportation on large truck-trailers will be difficult as about 100 km of the road passes through hilly terrains, encountering very sharp turns and having rather steep gradients at places. Therefore, a caravan of about 30 trucks would be required to meet daily requirement of cement of about 300 tonnes.

5 Reinforcement Steel 15,000 tons

The steel of the desired specification will be transported from re-rolling mills located at Lahore and Rawalpindi.

6

Water (including concreting, water sprinkling, compaction of earth/rock fill for cofferdams)

100,000 cu m

The project area is almost devoid of groundwater source. Therefore, the Poonch River and Ban Nullah are the only sources for water. The water from the river and nullah would however need some sort of treatment to make it silt and sulphate free for its use in concreting.

3.8 Construction Machinery

The Project will deploy various types of machineries for construction purposes. These will include

bulldozers, excavators, shovels, tunneling machine, dumpers, batching plant, tankers, trucks, etc.


3-16

3.9 Excavated Material

The Project will generate about 1.0 M cum of rock material (mostly constituted of sandstone and

siltstone) from excavation for the Project components. Excavation for Weir will generate a quantity

of about 0.56 M cu m, Power Tunnel 0.211 M cu m and Power House 0.20 M cu m. Depending upon

the quality of the excavated stone material, some quantity will be used to meet the requirement of

aggregate, rock fill at cofferdams, stone pitching, etc. However, bulk of the excavated material will

need to be disposed off. The configuration of the land mass in vicinity of the project structures and

in the surroundings is such that limited appropriate area would be available for disposal of the waste

material. The area is mostly constituted of high hills that are generally occupied by forests, limited

area of nearly flat benches that are occupied partly by settlements and partly used for cultivation,

and narrow river and nullah gorges. None of these really contain suitable areas for dumping the

waste material. Through a reconnaissance of the areas it has been inferred that the well stabilized

gullies in the forest areas and open wasteland benches along the river may be used for the purpose.

In this respect, the matter was discussed with the officials of the Forest Department. They have

given consent that under special case the Department would allow using these gullies provided a

written request is forwarded in advance so that the plantation from the dumping area may be

removed. It will also be required that these areas are re-vegetated with the trees after appropriately

dumping and leveling of the material. Some gullies are also available in civil area near the power

house that can be used for the purpose. Many of the drainage channels from the hills are having

very steep slopes. These may also be used for dumping purposes off course with a plan that their

slopes become milder without impeding their drainage characteristic. Details of excavated rock

material are given in Table 3.5.

Table 3.5: Rock Excavation Quantities and Periods

Feature Estimated Quantity

(m3)

Time

(months)

Peak Quantity

m3/day

Weir 475,000 14 1600

Tunnel 268,000 21 600

Intake 13,715 2 600

Powerhouse 95,000 4 1200

Surge Shaft 3,000 1.5 100

Penstock 40,000 2.5 750

Switchyard 90,000 4 1100

3.10 Project Cost

The Project cost will be approximately US$ 340.00 million.


4-1

4 DESCRIPTION OF THE PHYSICAL

ENVIRONMENT

4.1 General

This chapter summarizes the available baseline data on physical environment within the principal

area of interest i.e. the area of project influence. Reconnaissance visits and physical field surveys

were carried out in August 2013. Validation of this information was done through the data from

secondary sources, satellite imagery study and published literature. The identification of physical

characteristics of the region and assessing their existing conditions is imperative to predict the

possible environmental impacts of the proposed hydropower project.

The baseline environmental data has been compiled to cover the following areas:

• Land;

• Climate and Meteorology;

• Water (water resources, water quality, source of pollution and hydrology);

• Air Quality and Noise (noise levels);

4.2 Area of Study

Gulpur Hydropower Project site is located on Poonch River, which is a left bank tributary of Jhelum

River. Four hydropower projects are planned along the Poonch River; Sehra, Kotali, Gulpur and

Rajdhani13 . In the vicinity of the project site, Poonch River flows through a deep gorge at a slope of

about 1V:200H. Mountains on both sides are more than 100 meter high; valley is narrow and banks

are steep. Width of the river varies from 60 to 90 m. Kotli-Gulpur road runs along the left bank at

about 60 to 80 m above the riverbed. Ranger Nullah on the right bank and Bann Nullah on the left

bank are two main perennial tributaries, which join the river downstream of Kotli Town. Several

villages are located on both banks of the river and along both nullahs. Majority of the settlements is

above El 540 m.

The site of Gulpur Hydropower Project is located downstream of Kotli and upstream of the proposed

Rajdhani Hydropower Project. Minimum tail water level of Kotli Hydropower Project is fixed at El 550

m. Whereas, maximum reservoir level of Rajdhani Hydropower Project is fixed at El 473.5 m.

Location and reservoir levels of these projects are shown in Figure 4.1.

13

P&D-AJK’s Year Book 2011.


4-2

Figure 4.1: Project Location and Components

4.2.1 Delineation of the Study Area

From environmental view the study area is defined as the areas of project influence. Some of these

areas are directly affected while others may be influenced indirectly. For this Project the areas of

most concerns are as follows:

• Areas falling in the vicinity of the structures, viz., Weir, Power House, and upstream and

downstream portals of the Power Tunnel,

• Areas to be used for establishing construction camps and colony,

• Areas likely to be submerged by water impoundment,


4-3

• Areas likely to be used for dumping of spoil material from excavation of tunnel, weir and

power house,

• Areas to be used for developing haul tracks,

• Quarry areas,

• About 6.5 km stretch of the river reach from Weir up to the Power House that is going to be

deprived from the river flows during low-flow season for its diversion into the Power Tunnel

for power generation,

• Areas located on high-benches through which the Power Tunnel is going to be excavated.

These areas are not going to be directly affected, but it is likely that the settlements on these

benches may be disrupted due to vibrations from blasting and drilling at the Power Tunnel.

• Kotli Town is not going to be directly affected by the project; however, the area is likely to

have indirect effects of mixed type. Primarily, the induction of heavy machinery and

vehicles, particularly when transporting construction material from quarries falling on other

side of the town, will cause traffic congestions and hazards, while on the other hand the

induction of outside workforce will be beneficial in boosting the local business.

• The population residing on the right side of the Poonch River is dependent on Kotli for

business, service, shopping, etc is going to be affected due to break in the communication by

the creation of the reservoir.

Most of the potentially affected areas, except the ones related with the quarries, would fall within a

strip of about 4 km wide (on the average 2 km on either side of the Poonch River) and about 10 km

in length covering the river stretch from Kotli up to the Power House site. As such, the study area

comes to about 50 sq. km. The quarry sites have presently been excluded from the study area as the

sites indicated for quarrying are tentative and would be finalized when the contractor is mobilized

(Figure 4.2).


4-4

Figure 4.2: Area of Influence for the Propose Project

4.3 Land Environment

The different geological and physiographic features of the project area were analyzed using GIS tools

and interpretation of the spatial databases were completed through secondary data like Survey of

Pakistan toposheets, satellite imagery and other available data sources.

4.3.1 Geology

The study area is a part of land formations developed at the foothills of Himalayan Ranges through

tectonic events subsequent to those that caused building of Himalaya. The Project area contains

middle Siwalik formations developed from the sedimentary deposits contributed by a number of

drainage channels from the uprising Himalayan Mountain Ranges. The rock formations include

extremely folded beds, having almost vertical dips, of various types of sandstones, clay-stones and

siltstones. As compared to Himalayan Ranges, the mountains of the project area have low to

medium surface relief. The Poonch River and nullahs generally pass through deep and narrow gorges

having almost vertical slopes. Occasionally, relatively wide valleys are also encountered here and

there which are being used for settlements and agricultural activities. The typical examples in the

project area are Kotli and Gulpur towns. Similarly, some open and relative flat areas are also


4-5

encountered on the raised benches/terraces on the mountains. Invariably these areas are also used

for settlement and agricultural activities. The typical examples of the raised benches are the Barali

Village in the vicinity of the Power House and Dheri and Banor Ki Dhok near the Intake of the Power

Tunnel.

Mostly the mountains are covered with primary soils, except along the river and nullahs where the

beds are almost devoid of soil material either for steep slopes or for the scouring action of the

river/nullahs flows. Within the flood plains where slopes are milder to nearly level deposits of

secondary soils are met with. Such areas include Mandi, Mandi Juzvi, Hill Kalan, and Laloi areas of

Kotli Town and a small bench near Jamalpur Village, part of which are used for agricultural purposes.

Figure 4.3: Regional Geological Map of the Area.


4-6

Major geological formations in the project area are;

4.3.1.1 Pliestocene and Recent Deposits Overburden

The overburden present in the area is river alluvial material and overburden on the terraces. River

alluvial material is present in the river bed, and along the slopes of the river valley. The thickness of

alluvial material in the river bed is between 3.0 m to 5.0 m. This material consists of sandy gravels,

cobbles and some boulders, which are rounded to sub-rounded, few sub-angular, semi spherical,

some platy and oblonged, generally of igneous and metamorphic origin, some sedimentary

(sandstone and limestone) origin are also present. The overburden on the terraces and especially

along the alignment of power tunnel and around the proposed portal consists of weathered clay and

siltstone with pieces of sandstone. The terraces in and around to Barali village area consist of sand,

gravel and silt.

4.3.1.2 Secree, Talus and Vegetation

Overburden on the slopes of the river valley is of detritus and detached blocks and boulders of

sandstone, at places mixed with weathered and eroded siltstone and claystones. The material is

mostly composed of different sizes of broken pieces of rocks due to weathering effect on parent

rock. The vegetation consists of self-grown plants and grass, thorny bushes and small trees planted

by WAPDA Watershed Management and Forest Department.

4.3.1.3 Classification of Rocks

Petrographically, this part of Nagri Stage of Siwaliks also has three main units of rocks which are:

a. Sandstones of various strength and cementation

b. Claystones

c. Siltstones

4.3.1.4 Sandstone

Sandstones of this part of Nagri (middle Siwaliks) have also been classified into three categories:

1. Sandstone-1 (Sst-1). This type of sandstone is always present in the form of ribs and

lenses in the main beds of sandstone-2.

2. Sandstone-2 (Sst-2). Moderately strong to strong, dirty greenish grey to light brownish

grey, medium to coarse grained, moderately to well cemented and cross bedded.

3. Sandstone-3 (Sst-3). Moderately weak to moderate strong, light brownish grey to grey,

fine grained, at places silty, slightly to moderately weathered, highly weathered at

places, thinly bedded, closely jointed and fractured generally present in thick beds of

clay and siltstone.

4.3.1.5 Claystone/Siltstone

Alternate beds of Cst/Mst of various shades vary in thickness from place to place. Siltstone is

moderately weak to moderate strong, various shades of brown and brownish grey, moderate thick

to thinly bedded partly laminated, moderately weathered at exposed surfaces, moderately to closely

jointed and moderate fractured.


4-7

Figure 4.4: Geological Map of the Project Area

4.3.2 Seismicity

Earthquakes pose a multitude of hazard to dams, either by direct loading of the structures or by

initiating a sequence of events that may lead to dam failure. The project area lies very close to the

Riasi Thrust which is a branch of the Main Boundary Thrust (MBT). Virtually, the former almost


4-8

passes through or near to the course of the Poonch River, while the latter bounds the Project area at

a distance of about 5 km towards east. Consequently, the proposed Project will be located in active

seismic region that has experienced numerous large earthquakes with magnitude greater than 7

(Figure 4.5). These are believed to be associated with MBT in Himalayan range. A detailed study of

seismic hazard is provided in Annexure 1.

Figure 4.5: Seismotectonic Map of the Area

The micro-seismic data of the region indicate that the region is very active on a micro-seismic level

with frequent earthquakes of magnitude greater than 4. The largest earthquake recorded by

regional network is the Kangra earthquake of magnitude Ms=8.0 occurred on 4th April 1905 about

200 km southeast of the project. Two earthquakes of magnitude greater than 6 have also been

recorded in this area.

Figure 4.6 shows distribution of seismicity with depth in the region as recorded by Mangla

microseismic network. Major concentration of earthquakes is within upper 20 km. It is important to

note that all the events having magnitude 5 or greater are originated within shallow depth (< 20 km).

This aspect of seismicity depicts that seismic forces are active at shallow depth, which increases

earthquake hazard within this region. Majority of the events falls within focal depths less than 30

km. Though, events with magnitude greater than 5 do not seem to occur beyond 30 km depth,

nevertheless, events with magnitude 4 to 5 do occur at depths up to as much as 60 km. There is only

one earthquake that was located at focal depth of 79.3 km.


4-9

Figure 4.6: Micro-seismicity of the Project Area

4.3.3 Drainage

Situated in the Jammu and Kashmir region, catchment of the Poonch River down to the proposed

weir is about 3800 km2, with many snow fed and rain fed rivulets/streams with dendritic drainage

pattern. It originates in the western foothills of Pir Panjal range, in the areas of Neel-Kanth Gali and

Jamian Gali. It is called 'Siran' in this area. It flows to the north west. At first flowing southwards it

enters Mangla Lake near Chomukh. The towns of Poonch, Sehra, Tatta Pani and Kotli are situated on

the banks of this river. It has two major tributaries in Pakistan, Batar and Mendher. The Poonch River

originates at an elevation of more than 3500 m and traverses about 110 km from east to west up to

the proposed weir site and fed by many big and small streams on both the banks. Most of the

tributaries join the river on its right bank (Figure 4.7).

-90

-80

-70

-60

-50

-40

-30

-20

-10

0

3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 6D

ep

th (

kms)

Magnitude


4-10

Figure 4.7: Poonch River Catchment Area with Highlighted Catchments of Tributaries

Bann Nullah: A left bank tributary has a relatively steep gradient. It joins the Poonch River at the

proposed weir site. Catchment area of the nullah is about 423 km2 and mean annual runoff is about

450 Million Cubic Meters (MCM).

Rangur Nullah: About 3 km upstream form the proposed weir site, this ephemeral tributary joins

Poonch River at right bank near Kotli. With a catchment area of about 400 km2 it is also joined by

smaller tributaries like Sarsawah Nullah.

Mendher River: It is a snow fed perennial right bank tributary of Poonch. It joins Poonch River near

Sehra about 33 km upstream from proposed wear site.

Rangar Nullah: It runs about 18 km from its point of origin, before joining Poonch River on right

bank, about 42 km upstream of the proposed project site, near Sehr Kakota. This is the last major

tributary of Poonch in Azad Kashmir. The settlement of Hajira is also located on this tributary.

Rangun Nullah: It is about 19 km ephemeral tributary. It originates in AJK, near the villages of Bandi

and Jhaniwala and joins Poonch River, on right bank.


4-11

Batar Nullah: This is a perennial right bank tributary of Poonch River fed by many small nullahs. It

joins the Poonch River about 56 km upstream from the proposed project site.

Mandi River/Suran River: About 10 km upstream from Poonch city, the river split into two perennial

tributaries the northern tributary is Mandi River and the southern tributary is Suran River. The major

tributary Suran River is the source of Poonch River, having its source, 39.5 km upstream from the

junction point, in the Pir Panjal range. The total catchment area of these rivers is about 1260 km2.

4.3.4 Elevation Bands (Relief)

The relief in the catchment area of Poonch River varies from 200 m to 4500 m. This elevation range

was divided into 9 elevation bands with 500 m interval (Figure 4.9). The area of catchment area (in

terms of sq. kms and percentage) which comes under these 9 elevation bands is given in Table 4.1

and depicted in Figure 4.8. It is clear from the graph that most of the catchment area of proposed

project (approximately 67%) has an elevation in the range of 500-2500m. The proposed location of

project site has an elevation of 500 m ±50 m.

Table 4.1: Area and Percentage of Different Elevation Bands of Catchment Area

Elevation Band Catchment Area

Area (Sq. Kms) Percentage (%)

0-500 22.72 0.59

501-1000 719.57 18.69

1001-1500 832.76 21.63

1501-2000 590.98 15.35

2001-2500 433.51 11.26

2501-3000 372.68 9.68

3001-3500 321.48 8.35

3501-4000 291.06 7.56

4001-4500 265.27 6.89

Figure 4.8: Area Profile under Different Elevation Bands

0.00 100.00 200.00 300.00 400.00 500.00 600.00 700.00 800.00 900.00

0-500501-1000

1001-15001501-20002001-25002501-30003001-35003501-40004001-4500

Area (Sq.Kms)


4-12

Figure 4.9: Elevation Band Map of Catchment Area of Poonch River

4.3.5 Land Use and Land Cover

The lands on the hills generally belong to the Forestry Department and bear forests of pine trees.

The lands on the high benches within hilly areas, however proprietary, are used for cultivation and

settlements. The river and nullah beds along with the adjacent slopes are again the government

property. As such, the proposed project components, viz., Weir, Intake structure including intake

portal of the Power Tunnel and Power House including penstocks, will be located on the government

land. Though some proprietary land exists in the area of Intake structure, it lies on a quite high

bench and will not be affected by the construction activities. Similarly, the Power Tunnel will pass

underneath the lands belonging either to the Forestry Department or to individual owners of the

Barali Village. Either of these lands would not be affected by the Project as the tunnel will be many

tens of meters below the natural surface. Similarly, the land required for construction camps and

colony has been proposed to be acquired from the land available on the raised benches near the

structures.


4-13

On the other hand, the reservoir will consume both government and proprietary lands. Of this,

however, the major chunk is the government land. Majority of the terrace land falling in the

floodplain of the Poonch River in the Kotli Valley belongs to Auqaf Department attached with a

shrine that was inundated and demolished by 1992 flood. Thus the proprietary land likely to be

submerged by the reservoir will be a small fraction of the total reservoir area.

4.3.6 Soil

The texture of the primary soils varies

from moderately fine to moderately

coarse depending upon the rock type

from which these have developed.

However, the secondary soils are mostly

moderately coarse textured. The soils of

the raised terraces in floodplains are

generally devoid of the stony material.

The soils of lower terraces generally

contain varied quantities of pebbles,

cobbles and boulders.

During site visit conducted in August

2013, soil samples were collected from

the following 5 locations:

1. Barali village;

2. Gulhar;

3. Mandi Juzvi;

4. Jamal Pur;

5. Weir Site;

The sample locations were well distributed to represent the project area; Figure 4.10 shows the

sampling locations. Test results of these samples have been presented in Table 4.2. TKN (Nitrogen)

and Phosphorous contents of the samples indicate moderate fertility of soil. Though the metallic

content of the soil samples is higher than average, these concentrations pose no threat to human

health.

Table 4.2: Soil Analysis Results

Sr.

# Parameters Method Unit LDL

Test Results

Barali Gulhar Mandi

Juzvi Jamal Pur Weir Site

1 Nitrogen (TKN)

Based on APHA-4500 Norg B

mg/kg 0.1 1.53 3.02 1.86 1.38 1.8

2 Phosphorous Based on APHA-4500 P C

mg/kg 0.05 2 1.72 2.6 2.6 2.36

3 Cadmium (Cd)

+2

USEPA 3050 B

mg/kg 0.5 3.55 <0.50 <0.50 <0.50 <0.50

4 Chromium USEPA 3050 mg/kg 0.5 19.32 15.76 25.27 28.65 26.11

Figure 4.10: Soil Sampling Locations


4-14

Sr.

# Parameters Method Unit LDL

Test Results

Barali Gulhar Mandi

Juzvi Jamal Pur Weir Site

(Cr) B

5 Lead (Pb)+2

USEPA 3050 B

mg/kg 0.5 75.16 95.19 77.76 100.9 76.69

6 Iron as (Fe)

+3/+2

USEPA 3050 B

mg/kg 0.02 27153.91 21934.86 25545.5 26119.6 25842.05

7 Aluminium (Al)

+2

USEPA 3050 B

mg/kg 0.5 <0.5 <0.5 <0.5 <0.5 <0.5

8 Sulfate (SO4)-2

In-House /Gravimetric

mg/kg 5 299.18 213.73 311.39 201.15 102.07

9 Total Dissolved Solids (TDS)

In-House /Gravimetric

mg/kg 5 989.70 1193.51 796.81 688.10 994.91

* Source, physical baseline survey, sampling, testing and analysis conducted in August 2013, (LDL: Lowest

Detection Limit <: Less Than)

4.4 Climate and Meteorology

There are number of meteorological stations within and in the vicinity of the catchment area where

data is available for meteorological parameters. These include Sehr Kakota, Plandari, Mangla, Bagh,

Rawalakot and Khandar. Kotli is the representative station for which meteorological parameters like

temperature, precipitation, humidity and evaporation are available. This part of the report will

provide a baseline of climate and meteorology of the area, for a detailed study refer to Annexure 2.

Generally, the project area falls in sub-humid and sub-tropical zone. It has moderate summer and

cold winter. The climate is greatly influenced by monsoon in the months of July and August and

snowcapped mountains of Pir Panjal Range. Consequently the weather is pleasant in the months of

March to May and August to October.

Winter Season: Though the duration of winter season depends on altitude, it generally lasts from

November to February in proposed project area. It is characterized by heavy frost in the lower areas

and some snowfall at higher elevation. Rain and snow during winter season come from north-

western air currents, and snowfall starts at higher elevations towards the end of November or early

in December

Spring Season: Though there is no characterized spring season in the area, but the weather is

pleasant in the months of March to April. This period is of intense phonological activity at the higher

elevations and can be termed as spring.

Summer Season: This is characterized by dry spells in April to June followed by frequent showers in

the moist or wet zone. At this time of the year the lower valleys are hot. Hot winds from Punjab and

sunny weather in arid and semi-arid parts cause intense summers.

Rainy Season: It starts with the advent of monsoons either towards the end of June or early in July

and lasts till middle or sometimes up to the end of September. The bulk of rainfall is received during

this period in the wet zone. After the rainy season, the sky becomes clear and there is very little rain,


4-15

if any, during October to November. In these months the diurnal range of temperature is quite

marked.

4.4.1 Rainfall and Humidity

The average annual precipitation in the area is 1,237 mm. However, there is a great seasonal

variation. The maximum rainfall occurs during the months of July and August when the average

precipitation is 266 mm and 271 mm, respectively. Minimum rainfall is experienced in November

with the average of 24 mm (Table 4.3). Figure 4.11 presents the yearly precipitation and evaporation

trend in project area.

Mangla Reservoir is the nearest station where the evaporation data was available. Climatic

conditions of this reservoir are similar to that of Kotli and as such this data has been utilized for Kotli.

Mean monthly maximum and minimum evaporation at Mangla Reservoir is 229 mm and 46 mm,

respectively.

Table 4.3: Summary Table for Average Monthly Rainfall at Rehman Bridge Station

Year Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Year

Average Monthly Rainfall (mm) (1953-1996)

81.4 96.9 119.9 77.9 46.8 76.6 293.9 292.0 104.3 38.6 25.0 53.0 1,289


69.0 111.6 79.9 50.7 44.5 95.0 214.0 200.5 83.8 24.2 17.2 42.0 1032.3


75.2 101.2 113.9 73.3 49.5 85.6 266.0 270.8 93.5 32.2 24.1 51.7 1236.9

Evaporation (mm) 48 68 108 158 226 229 157 123 111 89 66 46 1,427

* Source Pakistan Water and Power Development Authority14

(data not available from 1997 to 2002)

Figure 4.11: Average Monthly Rainfall and Evaporation

4.4.2 Temperature

Temperature in different parts of the tract varies according to the elevation. Temperature begins to

rise rapidly from the end of March, till June, which is the warmest month. The temperature remains

14

Annual Report on River and Climatology Data of Pakistan (WAPDA)

0

50

100

150

200

250

300

350

Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec




Evaporation (mm)


4-16

high during July to September in the arid zone, because it lies beyond the reach of the monsoons.

With the onset of southwest monsoon by the end of June, the temperature begins to decrease

gradually; however, the drop is rapid only after October. January is the coolest month. The data

shows that the average monthly mean maximum temperature varies from 17.6 oC in January to 38.4 oC in June, whereas monthly mean minimum temperature ranges between 4.8 oC in January and 24.9 oC in June. (Table 4.4 and Figure 4.12)

Table 4.4: Summary Table for Max/Min Average Monthly at Kotli


Max Temperature

(oC)

17.6 19.6 24.1 30 35.3 38.4 34.2 32.9 32.8 30.6 25.4 20.0 28.4

Min Temperature

(oC)

4.8 7.37 11.9 16.9 21.46 24.94 24.2 23.44 21.4 16.35 9.9 5.5 15.6

* Source Pakistan Water and Power Development Authority

Figure 4.12: Average Monthly Temperatures in ºC

4.4.3 Wind

Winds decide the dispersion of air pollutants and are an important aspect in any environmental

impact assessment study. Movement of air pollutant is dependent on the wind speed and wind

direction, the temperature and humidity also affects the dispersion of pollution. There is no

complete data set available for wind speed and direction in the proposed project area. To provide a

general picture of these factors, stations were established and observations were carried out during

the physical survey of the proposed project area.

Because of the physiographic features of the project area, wind direction is East/Westerly at the

proposed powerhouse and camp site, whereas, wind direction is predominantly North/Easterly at

the proposed weir and batching plant site. The detailed wind speed, direction, humidity and

temperature data are provided in Table 4.5.

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

45


Max Temperature Min Temperature


4-17

Table 4.5: Wind Data at the Proposed Project Site

Time

Proposed Power House Site Proposed Camp Area Proposed Weir Site Proposed Batching Plant

Direc

tion

Wind

Speed

Humidi

ty Directi

on

Wind

Speed

Humidi

ty Directi

on

Wind

Speed

Humidi

ty Directi

on

Wind

Speed

Humidi

ty

m/s % m/s % m/s % m/s %

15:00 W 5.4 63 W 2.7 52 N 5.3 40 E 2.8 42

16:00 W 4.3 60 W 2.8 55 N 4.6 45 E 2.4 43

17:00 W 4.7 58 W 4.5 54 N 5.5 48 E 4.5 45

18:00 WE 5.9 68 WE 4.9 57 NW 4 52 E 4.3 46

19:00 WE 5 70 E 5.2 58 N 3.8 52 E 4 48

20:00 WE 3.8 72 E 5 58 N 1 53 E 5.2 53

21:00 W 3 78 W 4.6 59 N 3.2 55 NE 5.4 56

22:00 W 4.7 79 E 3.8 63 N 1.8 57 NE 4.8 58

23:00 W 5.8 80 E 2 64 N 1.4 60 NE 3.1 59

24:00 W 5.3 84 E 1.8 66 NW 2.4 61 E 2 60

1:00 W 4.8 80 WE 1.8 67 NW 2.2 63 E 1.9 62

2:00 W 4.6 78 E 1.3 69 NW 2 64 E 1.4 63

3:00 W 4.2 65 E 1 75 N 1.7 68 E 0.9 65

4:00 WE 4 63 E 0.8 74 N 2.8 67 E 1.8 68

5:00 WE 4.8 62 WE 2.4 78 N 2.2 65 E 1.2 69

6:00 WE 5.3 60 W 2.8 78 N 5 64 NE 1.1 66

7:00 WE 4.9 58 W 3.7 82 N 4.2 63 NE 2.6 64

8:00 W 4.5 57 W 2.2 80 N 3.9 61 NE 2.8 63

9:00 W 3 55 WE 4 64 NE 3.5 59 NE 3.5 60

10:00 W 3.8 53 WE 4.3 62 NE 3 58 E 4.8 57

11:00 WE 3.1 52 WE 5.3 60 N 4.6 57 E 4.6 56

12:00 WE 3 50 W 5 55 N 5.1 55 E 4 55

13:00 W 2.9 48 W 5.1 52 NE 5.4 53 E 4.4 54

14:00 W 3.8 45 W 4.7 50 NE 4.8 52 E 4.1 52

* Source, physical baseline survey, sampling, testing and analysis conducted in August 2013

4.5 Hydrology and Water Resources

4.5.1 Hydrology

A stream gauging station on Poonch River has been maintained at Rehman Bridge by SWHP of

WAPDA since 1960. Measurements include stream flows and suspended sediment concentrations.

Complete water availability study is provided in Annexure 3. Rehman Bridge Gauging Station is

located just downstream of Bann Nullah about 5 Km south east of Kotli Town. Between Rehman

Bridge gauge site and proposed weir site, there are no major tributary/nullahs joining the main river,

thus discharge and sediment data available at Rehman Bridge gauge is directly applicable for the

proposed project. Stream flow record of Poonch River at Rehman Bridge for the period 1960 to 2011

available in the form of mean daily flows has been used to present inflow time series. Mean monthly

discharges computed from the mean daily flows are given in Table 4.6, which shows a minimum

value of 12 cumecs observed in January 1966 and maximum value of 830 cumecs in September

1992. Mean monthly flows (in cumecs) and monthly runoff (in MCM) are graphically shown in Figure

4.13 and Figure 4.14. This figure depicts that mean monthly flows vary between 41 cumecs (106

MCM) in November to 279 cumecs (746 MCM) in August. Additionally Punch River drains south side

of Pir Panjal range and flows through Azad Kashmir in deep canyons with young easily erodible rocks

and carries large amount of sediment load.


4-18

Table 4.6: Summary of Mean Monthly Flows of Punch River at Rehman Bridge (1960-2011)

Year Mean Monthly Flow (Cumecs) Annual Flow

Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Cumecs MCM (MAF)

Maximum 156 293 402 396 221 263 633 665 830 220 162 187 260 8215 6.66

Minimum 12 21 27 53 53 56 80 90 45 19 15 15 66 2086 1.69

Runoff 144 272 375 343 168 207 553 575 785 201 147 172 194 6129 4.97

Mean 53 100 177 165 119 116 225 264 141 57 41 47 126 3966 3.22

* Source Pakistan Water and Power Development Authority (Cumecs: Cubic Meters per Second MCM: Million

Cubic Meters MAF:Million Acre-Foot)

Figure 4.13: Monthly Flows and Runoff of Punch River

Figure 4.14: Mean Annual Flows of Punch River

4.5.2 Water Resources

4.5.2.1 Surface Water

The main surface water resource of the project area is the Poonch River, which flows along Kotli-

Mirpur Road and enters into Mangla Reservoir. Poonch River is a main tributary of Jhelum River. The

Project is going to utilize the flows of the Poonch River that initiates from the Indian Held Kashmir

0

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Mea

n M

on

thly

Flo

w (

Cu

mec

s)

Maximum Minimum Runoff Mean

0

50

100

150

200

250

300

19

60

19

62

19

64

19

66

19

68

19

70

19

72

19

74

19

76

19

78

19

80

19

82

19

84

19

86

19

88

19

90

19

92

19

94

19

96

19

98

20

00

20

02

20

04

20

06

20

08

20

10

Year

ly F

low

(C

um

ecs)

Annual Flow Mean Flow for Last 50 Years Maximum Minimum


4-19

draining south side of Pir Panjal Range. The total catchment area of the river at the Project weir site

is about 3,800 km2. Besides the discharge of main trunk, the river receives discharge of many natural

streams (Nullahs). Bann Nullah is one of these, which have its confluence with the river about 200 m

upstream the Project Weir and where the intake of the power tunnel is going to be located. Other

tributary of the river that falls in the Project area is Rangur Nullah that has its confluence with river

at about 2 km upstream of Weir site.

Like other rivers of Pakistan and AJK, Poonch River exhibits seasonal variations in the discharges. The

daily mean river flow data recorded at gauge station located about 50 m upstream of the proposed

weir location has been collected for a period of 43 years (from 1960 through 2011). The analysis of

data shows that monthly mean discharges varied from 41 cumecs (cubic meter per second) in

November to 279 cumecs in August, while the annual mean had been 128 cumecs during this period.

On the whole, the river discharges varied from a minimum of 12 cumecs in January 1966 to a

maximum of 830 cumecs in September 1992. However, the annual mean minimum and maximum

flows had been 69 cumecs and 260 cumecs, respectively. The annual mean had been 128 cumecs

that corresponds to a runoff of 4,044 MCM or 3.28 MAF.

The Poonch River and most of its tributaries originate from mountains ranging in elevation from

3,000 m to 4,500 m above mean sea level. Consequently, the mountains remain covered with snow

cap for part of the year that contributes to the river discharges. However, the major contribution in

the annual flows comes from the monsoon rains that are spread from July to September. The

configuration of the drainage area combined with the cloud bursts during monsoon results in

instantaneous flood peaks in the Poonch River in a short period after the rains. The historical

instantaneous flood peaks experienced at the weir site during the reference period from 1960 to

2011 had been in the range of 878 cumecs (on 2nd August, 1979) to 12,150 cumecs (on 10th

September, 1992) with an average of 4,671 cumecs. The Project has been designed for probable

maximum flood. The study has shown that the figure for 100 year flood comes to about 13,340

cumecs, while the PMF has been estimated to be 21,640 cumecs. The combined capacity of the main

and undersluice weirs are enough to efficiently pass more than the design discharge (about 15,000

cumecs).

The water quality of the river is generally fresh that can be used for irrigation and other non-

consumptive purposes. However, the river water is contaminated from the disposal of wastewater

effluent from towns, villages and settlements established along the river as well as located in the

river drainage area. This particularly implies for the Kotli Town.

4.5.2.2 Ground Water

The project area in Kotli District is devoid any true aquifer. This is because of the stony formation of

the area and steep slopes of the mountains. The rain water seeps into the grounds at the mountains

oozes out at places in the form of springs. However, limited quantity of groundwater is available in

Kotli Valley that is exploited for supply of potable water to the town. The consumptive requirement

of the communities at other places is generally met from the spring water. It has been observed that

the settlements are located where spring water is available in addition to the availability of level

ground for housing and cultivation.


4-20

4.5.3 Water Quality

Water quality parameters of the surface/spring water, which is the main source of water in the

project area; have been studied to evaluate its suitability for drinking purpose along with anticipated

impacts of the proposed project on water environment. The sampling and analysis was conducted

for ESIA. Water quality can be expressed in terms of physical, chemical and biological characteristics.

Essential characteristics like pH, color, odor and total suspended solid are covered under physical

analysis; dissolved solids, total hardness, Calcium, Magnesium, Sulphates, Nitrates, Chloride,

Fluoride and heavy metals under chemical analysis and Biological Oxygen Demand (BOD), Chemical

Oxygen Demand (COD), Coliforms under biological/ bacteriological analysis.

To generate baseline data for existing

quality of water in the project area, 25

water samples (composite) were

collected (Figure 4.15) and analyzed as

per the procedure specified in standard

methods for examination of water and

wastewater. Representative samples

from source and household use water

were also taken at various points,

considering its importance during project

activities. To establish the ground water

quality, samples major springs in nearby

villages were also collected. Almost all

the important physico-chemical

attributes as well as microbiological

parameters were analyzed for all the 25

samples collected. The results of the

analysis carried out for the sampling

undertaken are summarized in Table 4.7

and Table 4.8. Some of the important

results are also discussed below.

E. coli or Thermo tolerant Coliform Bacteria must not be detected in all water intended for drinking,

but the microbiological analysis of the sample in the project area show that nearly every sample has

some biological contamination. Especially the drinking water in Jamal Pur and Aghar Colony has

highest microbial count.

Table 4.7: Microbiological Contaminant in Drinking Water

Parameter Total Colony

Count

Total Coli

Forms

Faecal coli

Forms (E. coli)

Faecal

Streptococci/

Enterococci

Procedure APHA: 9215 B APHA: 9222 B APHA: 9222 D APHA: 9230 C

Permissible Limits < 500 cfu / ml 0 cfu / 100ml 0 cfu / 100ml 0 cfu / 100ml

Barali Spring 2.9x105 56 41 Absent

Barali (Spring Neeara) 4.2x104 49 Absent 2

Dharang Spring 2.8x104 79 2 16

Mandi Juzvi (Spring Water) 1.1x104 45 Absent 11

Figure 4.15: Drinking Water Sampling Locations


4-21

Parameter Total Colony

Count

Total Coli

Forms

Faecal coli

Forms (E. coli)

Faecal

Streptococci/

Enterococci



Hill Kalan (Spring Water) 1.1x105 70 12 48

Hill Kalan (Spring Water) 6.2x104 74 Absent 18

Hill Kalan (Spring Water) 1.4x105 65 6 12

Hill Khurd (Spring Water) 1.1x105 55 4 14

Hill Khurd (Spring Water) 9.5x104 57 Absent 40

Hill Khurd (Spring Water) 8.3x104 63 18 22

M. Asif S/O M. Sadiq (Gulhar Colony) 2.9x105 8 Absent 4

Mr. Abdullah S/O M. Hussain (Gulhar Colony) 1.6x103 2 Absent Absent

Mr. Waseem S/O Abdul Karim (Gulhar Colony) 2.1x104 6 Absent 2

Mr. lrshad S/O M. Nazir (Gulhar Colony) 1.7x105 7 Absent 1

Mr. Afaq S/O Mr. Haider (Gulhar Colony) 3.9x104 58 Absent Absent

M. Shafiq S/O M. Usman (Dharang) 7.3x104 64 Absent 12

Mr. Haider S/O M. Abdullah (Dharang) 1.5x104 37 Absent 8

Jamal Pur 3.9x104 TNTC Absent 16

Jamal Pur 4.3x104 14 Absent 62

Jamal Pur 4.9x104 TNTC 24 50

Aghar Colony 6.5x104 TNTC 40 68



* Source, physical baseline survey, sampling, testing and analysis conducted in August 2013, (cfu: colony

forming unit TNTC: Too Numerous to Count)

Table 4.8: Chemical Analysis of Drinking Water

Parameters pH @

25 °C

Solids,

Total

dissolv

ed

(TDS)

Hardn

ess,

Total

as

CaCO3

Alkalin

ity,

Total

as

CaCO3

Chlorid

e (Cl)-1

Sulfate

(SO4)-2

Lead

( Pb )+2

Arsenic

(As)+3

Total

Iron as

(Fe)+3/+

2

Sodiu

m

(Na)+1

Potassi

um

(K)+1

Method APHA-4500H

+ B

AP HA-2540 C

APHA-2340 B

& C

APHA-2320 B

APHA-4500CI

- B

APHA-4500-SO4 C

APHA-3111 B

APHA-3120 B

APHA-3111 B

APHA-3111 B

APHA-3111 B

Unit - mg/L mg/L mg/L mg/L mg/L mg/L mg/L mg/L mg/L mg/L

LDL 0.1 5 0.5 0.5 0.5 5 0.01 0.005 0.02 1 0.2

Limits As Per NEQS 6.5-8.5 <1000 <500 NS <250 NS ≤0.05 0.01 NS NS NS

Barali Spring 7.66 640 405.9 486 19.56 41.57 0.027 <

0.005 0.033 83.76 3.869

Barali (Spring Neeara) 7.7 618 425.7 507.6 19.56 47.33 <0.01 <

0.005 0.041 83.6 3.805

Dharang Spring 7.68 832 356.4 378 127.19 171.63 0.021 0.034 0.7 191.85 7.026

Mandi Juzvi (Spring Water)

7.69 595 455.4 351 44.02 48.56 0.04 <

0.005 0.075 47.74 4.912


7.16 590 455.4 356.4 39.13 59.68 <0.01 <

0.005 0.038 48 4.778


7.17 600 455.4 351 44.02 59.68 <0.01 <

0.005 0.021 48.06 4.775

Hill Kalan (Spring Water)

7.72 601 485.1 351 44.02 56.38 0.041 <

0.005 0.033 48.2 4.798


7.8 580 435.6 340.2 44.02 52.27 <0.01 <

0.005 0.546 47.84 4.753


7.8 590 504.9 334.8 39.13 51.45 <0.01 <

0.005 0.026 47.66 4.763

Hill Khurd (Spring Water)

7.45 589 485.1 351 44.02 46.51 0.08 <

0.005 0.024 48.46 4.784


7.62 866 346.5 361.8 132.08 171.22 0.023 0.018 0.333 190.95 6.358


7.67 602 485.1 351 44.02 51.45 0.04 <

0.005 0.028 47.5 4.774

M. Asif S/O M. Sadiq 7.57 427 346.5 324 29.35 27.16 <0.01 < 0.022 31.1 2.52


4-22

Parameters pH @

25 °C

Solids,

Total

dissolv

ed

(TDS)

Hardn

ess,

Total

as

CaCO3

Alkalin

ity,

Total

as

CaCO3

Chlorid

e (Cl)-1

Sulfate

(SO4)-2

Lead

( Pb )+2

Arsenic

(As)+3

Total

Iron as

(Fe)+3/+

2

Sodiu

m

(Na)+1

Potassi

um

(K)+1

(Gulhar Colony) 0.005

Mr. Abdullah S/O M. Hussain (Gulhar Colony)

7.61 410 356.4 313.2 24.46 23.87 0.037 <

0.005 0.02 31.94 2.515

Mr. Waseem S/O Abdul Karim (Gulhar Colony)

7.64 424 366.3 324 29.35 27.16 0.061 <

0.005 0.033 32.76 2.619

Mr. lrshad S/O M. Nazir (Gulhar Colony)

7.58 726 514.8 486 53.81 53.5 0.061 <

0.005 <0.02 82.12 9.282

Mr. Afaq S/O Mr. Haider (Gulhar Colony)

7.55 701 475.2 464.4 48.92 61.17 <0.01 <

0.005 0.052 81.28 8.716

M. Shafiq S/O M. Usman (Dharang)

7.79 716 504.9 399.6 58.7 49.39 0.052 <

0.005 0.038 56.64 4.995

Mr. Haider S/O M. Abdullah (Dharang)

7.81 698 495 378 53.81 51.45 0.025 <

0.005 0.029 57.06 5

Jamal Pur 7.83 498 386.1 324 24.46 25.51 0.021 <

0.005 0.027 31.1 2.71

Jamal Pur 7.52 494 405.9 329.4 24.46 22.63 0.101 <

0.005 0.03 32.28 2.71

Jamal Pur 7.67 508 366.3 313.2 29.35 24.28 0.021 <

0.005 0.039 32.2 2.708

Aghar Colony 7.63 508 396 324 19.56 23.87 0.041 <

0.005 0.038 33.92 2.69

Aghar Colony 7.8 506 386.1 334.8 29.35 20.58 0.041 <

0.005 0.029 31.24 2.67

Aghar Colony 7.81 494 386.1 334.8 24.46 23.46 <0.01 <

0.005 0.046 31.5 2.69

* Source, physical baseline survey, sampling, testing and analysis conducted in August 2013 (LDL: Lowest

Detection Limit NS: Not Specified)

Total dissolved solids and pH level in all samples were observed to be within normal limits. The

analysis shows that hardness in all the samples ranged from 346 to 515 mg/l. Total hardness of

water as CaCO3 is within acceptable limits in most of the samples except for one (Figure 4.16).

Figure 4.16: Water Hardness in the Various Sampling Sites Area

0

100

200

300

400

500

600

BS

BSN D

S

MJ

MJ

MJ

HK

L

HK

L

HK

L

HK

H

HK

H

HK

H

GC

GC

GC

GC

GC

DV

DV JP JP JP AC

AC

AC

Hardness, Total as CaCO3 NEQS Limit


4-23

Chloride (Cl)-1 and Sulfate (SO4)-2 ranged from 19.56 to 132.08 mg/l and 20.58 to 171.63 mg/l

respectively. The values are well within the permissible NEQS Limits (Figure 4.17).

Figure 4.17: Chloride and Sulfate Concentration in the Drinking Water

Lead (Pb) and Arsenic (As) concentration ranged from 0.01 to 0.101 mg/l and 0.005 to 0.034 mg/l

respectively for the analysis (Figure 4.18). There are four sample with lead concentration above

acceptable limits and two samples with arsenic concentration above acceptable limits. Both these

elements are highly toxic and carcinogenic. Therefore, this points to poor quality of water.

Figure 4.18: Lead and Arsenic Concentration in the Drinking Water

4.6 Air, Noise and Light

No air quality monitoring data is available for the project area. In general there are no major sources

of air pollution, viz., industries, exist in the project area except road traffic in the valleys of Poonch

River and Nullahs. The ambient air quality monitoring within the project area was carried out

through monitoring stations. Representative samples of the ambient air quality in the project area

were analyzed, which would also help in assessing the conformity to standards of the ambient air

quality during the construction and operation of the project. The existing ambient air quality of the

0

50

100

150

200

250

300

BS

BSN D

S

MJ

MJ

MJ

HK

L

HK

L

HK

L

HK

H

HK

H

HK

H

GC

GC

GC

GC

GC

DV

DV JP JP JP AC

AC

AC

Chloride (Cl)-1 Sulfate (SO4)-2 NEQS Limit

0

0.02

0.04

0.06

0.08

0.1

0.12

BS

BSN D

S

MJ

MJ

MJ

HK

L

HK

L

HK

L

HK

H

HK

H

HK

H

GC

GC

GC

GC

GC

DV

DV JP JP JP AC

AC

AC

Lead (Pb)+2 Arsenic (As)+3 NEQS (Pb) Limit NEQS (As) Limit


4-24

study area serves as an index for assessing the pollution load and the assimilative capacity of any

region and forms an important tool for planning further development in the area.

4.6.1 Air Quality

Air quality monitoring was carried out in August 2013 for the following four parameters:

• Carbon Monoxide (CO),

• Nitrogen Dioxide (NO2),

• Sulphur Dioxide (SO2) and

• Particulate Matter (PM10)

The average concentration of carbon monoxide (CO) for 08 hrs according to the National

Environmental Quality Standards (NEQS) for Ambient Air should not exceed from 5.0 mg/m3. The

values obtained are in compliance with National Environmental Quality Standards (NEQS).

Table 4.9: Average Obtained Concentrations of Priority Air Pollutants

Parameter

Carbon

Monoxide

(CO)

Nitrogen

Dioxide(NO2)

Sulfur

Dioxide (SO2)

Particulate

Matter

(PM10)

Unit mg/m3 ug/m

3 ug/m

3 ug/m

3

Duration 24 Hours 24 Hours 24 Hours 24 Hours

Lowest Detection Limit 0.01 5 5 2

National Environmental Quality Standards 5 80 120 150

Average Obtained Concentration

Proposed Power House Site

0.85 <5.0 <5.0 97.14

Proposed Camp Area 0.82 <5.0 <5.0 87.9

Proposed Weir Site 0.72 <5.0 <5.0 75.19

Proposed Batching Plant 0.93 <5.0 <5.0 66.77

* Source, physical baseline survey, sampling, testing and analysis conducted in August 2013

Average 24 hrs concentrations in Environmental Quality Standards (NEQS) for Ambient Air for

Nitrogen Dioxide (NO2) is 80 ug/m3 and average concentrations of Nitrogen Dioxide (NO2) measured

during monitoring were found in compliance with National Environmental Quality Standards.

According to standard the 24 hrs concentration of Sulphur Dioxide (SO2) in ambient air should not

exceed from 120 ug/m3, while concentration obtained was found within limit of National

Environmental Quality Standards (NEQS).

The ambient particulate matter PM10 was found 97.14 ug/m3 at proposed power house site,

87.90ug/m3 at proposed camp area, 75.19 ug/m3 at proposed weir site and 66.77ug/m3 at proposed

batching plant are within standard value of 150 ug/m3.

4.6.2 Noise

Noise level monitoring was conducted at the same location where the ambient air quality was

monitored. The noise level was found in range of 59.7 to 68.1 (dBA) at proposed power house site,

37.0 to 57.0 (dBA) at proposed camp site, 37.3 to 54.8 (dBA) at proposed weir site and 35.9 to 48.9

(dBA) at proposed batching plant. Figure 4.19 to Figure 4.22 shows the values obtained during noise

level monitoring at project sites respectively.


4-25

Table 4.10: WHO Guideline Values for Community Noise in Specific Environments

Specific Environment Leq (dB) LAmax fast (dB)

Outdoor living area 55 -

School class rooms and pre-schools (indoors) 35 -

School, playground (outdoors) 55 -

Hospital, ward rooms (indoors) 30 40

Hospital, treatment rooms (indoors) 1 -

Industrial, commercial, shopping and traffic areas (indoors and outdoors) 70 110

Figure 4.19: Noise Level at Proposed Powerhouse Site

Figure 4.20: Noise Level at Proposed Camp Area

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

15

:00

16

:00

17

:00

18

:00

19

:00

20

:00

21

:00

22

:00

23

:00

24

:00

1:0

0

2:0

0

3:0

0

4:0

0

5:0

0

6:0

0

7:0

0

8:0

0

9:0

0

10

:00

11

:00

12

:00

13

:00

14

:00

Reading 1 (dBA) Reading 2 (dBA) Reading 3 (dBA)

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

15

:00

16

:00

17

:00

18

:00

19

:00

20

:00

21

:00

22

:00

23

:00

24

:00

1:0

0

2:0

0

3:0

0

4:0

0

5:0

0

6:0

0

7:0

0

8:0

0

9:0

0

10

:00

11

:00

12

:00

13

:00

14

:00



4-26

Figure 4.21: Noise Level at Proposed Weir Site

Figure 4.22: Noise Level at Proposed Batching Plant

4.6.3 Light

Lux monitoring was also monitored at a location near the community area. The monitoring results

are provided in the Table 4.11.

Table 4.11: Instant Lux Monitoring

Sr. # Sampling Point Method / Technique Unit Results

01. Near Community Area Illuminance Meter LUX 1165 * Source, physical baseline survey, sampling, testing and analysis conducted in August 2013

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

15

:00

16

:00

17

:00

18

:00

19

:00

20

:00

21

:00

22

:00

23

:00

24

:00

1:0

0

2:0

0

3:0

0

4:0

0

5:0

0

6:0

0

7:0

0

8:0

0

9:0

0

10

:00

11

:00

12

:00

13

:00

14

:00


0

10

20

30

40

50

60

15

:00

16

:00

17

:00

18

:00

19

:00

20

:00

21

:00

22

:00

23

:00

24

:00

1:0

0

2:0

0

3:0

0

4:0

0

5:0

0

6:0

0

7:0

0

8:0

0

9:0

0

10

:00

11

:00

12

:00

13

:00

14

:00



5-1

5 DESCRIPTION OF BIOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT

This section describes the ecological conditions in the study area (defined below, and shown in

Figure 5.1), focusing on the aquatic ecology, flora, mammals, birds, and reptiles and amphibians. The

diversity in these groups has been described along with the population and conservation status of

the species. The habitat of the study area has been characterized on the basis of biological and

physical factors and its spatial delineation is provided. Annexure 5A provides checklists of recorded

flora and fauna, along with other auxiliary data. Annexure 5B provides description of species of

concern.

Figure 5.1: Study Area for the Ecological Baseline Study


5-2

5.1 Approach of the Ecological Study

The ecological baseline study focused on the following components:

• Assessment of vegetation and land cover classification

• A thorough investigation of aquatic ecology particularly fish and invertebrates

• Assessment of wildlife, on each of the following components;

o Large mammals (carnivores/ungulates)

o Small mammals

o Birds

o Reptiles and Amphibians

The field survey was carried around the project facilities, and a five-kilometer buffer was added to

explore status of ecological receptors on a broader area of about 228 km2 (Figure 5.1). In order to

systematically cover the area, 1-km grid around the project facilities and 2-km grid in rest of the area

was placed. At least one sample was taken in each grid, however fish and macro-invertebrate

sampling was limited to aquatic the habitat.

Specific methodology was adapted for each component of the study, which will appear in the

following sections.

5.2 Floral Diversity of the Area

The forests of the area are characterized by the presence of subtropical broad leaved vegetation

(Shaheen et al., 2011a) and is fundamentally Chirpine forest type (Malik & Malik, 2004). These

forests are mainly dominated by Pinus roxburghii in an altitudinal range of 700-1800m Ahmad et al.,

2012. Several environmental and anthropogenic factors regulate the composition and community

structure Doležal & Šrůtek, 2002. Malik & Malik, 2004 have reported seven plant communities in the

area viz, Adiantum olea, Acacia modesta, Dodonaea-Acacia- Themeda, Pinus-Themeda, Imperata-

Pinus, Pinus roxburghii and Pinus-Carissa-Themeda recognized in Kotli Hills during monsoon, 2000.

Nazir et al., 2012 have classified the vegetation of the area into tree layer consisting Ficus palmata,

Dalbergia sissoo, Acacia nilotica, Pinus roxburghii and Flacourtia indica; a shrub layer of Adhatoda

vasica, Dodonaea viscosa, Carissa opaca, Maytenus royleanus, Otostegia limbata, Punica granatum;

and herb layer dominated by Themeda anathera and Poa annua.

The sub-tropical forests of the area were mainly dominated by Pinus roxburghii Champion et al.,

1965. But present figures show that Pinus-Themeda community is becoming sparse which would

eventually transform the area into a degraded scrub-land. Now, the area is characterized by the

dominance of herb and shrub layer, comprising Themeda anathera, Poa annua, Carissa opaca and

Adhatoda vasica over Pinus roxburghii (Nazir et al., 2012). Radically, Pinus has a broad ecological

amplitude and specialized niche in the subtropical zone and therefore cannot be out-competed by

associated species. However the depletion of forest crown canopy over time as a consequence of

factors like deforestation, overgrazing and forest fires have resulted in the shift from Pinus to ground

and shrub flora (Ahmad, et al., 2012). Environmental factors such as low fertility (P and K) and soil

moisture have also contributed to the situation (Dasti & Malik, 2000).


5-3

There are a number of studies focusing indigenous knowledge of flora. The study conducted by

Ahmad, et al. (2012) of ethno botanical inventory about plants paves way to assess their usage and

impacts associated thereof. A total of 66 plant species are reported to be used as folk medicine for

curing different diseases in the village of Barali Kass and adjacent areas of District Kotli, AJK (Ur-

Rehman, 2006). Most of the population of the area dwells in remote areas that are not easily

accessible and thus left with no other option but to rely on medicinal plants for general treatment.

Notable among these floras are Justicia adhatoda, Acacia nilotica, Calotropis procera, Ricinus

communis, Morus nigra, Dodonaea viscosa, Achyranthes aspera, Ipomoea carnea, Taraxacum

officinale, Eriobotrya japonica, Cissus carnosa, Melia azedarach, Eucalyptus citriodora and Ficus

carica (Ahmad, et al., 2012). Pinus roxburghii is used as antiseptic, diaphoretic, diuretic, rubefacient,

tonic and vermifuge. It is also used as charcoal, pigment, herbicide, resin and wood (Muhammad et

al., 2012).

The data shows that these forests are faced with the problems of overgrazing and deforestation

(Malik & Malik, 2004). The factors like poverty, over population, lack of access to remote areas,

unavailability of alternates of energy sources are major causes for severe depletion of Himalayan

forests. The local communities use forest species as their main source of fuel wood, timber and

fodder. The simultaneous increase in the demand of forest products and population has not only

deteriorated the condition of these subtropical forests but also affected the species diversity and

community structure.

5.2.1 Methodology

Different vegetation types identified on the physiognomic basis were sampled using circular

quadrats of 100 m2 for trees, 25 m2 for shrubs and 1 m2 for herbaceous layer (Figure 5.2). The data

recorded within each quadrat included a complete inventory of vascular plants as well as visual

estimation of ground area covered by each species. Due to prevailing weather situation, only a

modest effort to sample each landcover type could be performed, mainly emphasizing project

components such as spoil tip areas, camping sites, and proposed new roads etc. as well as,

submersion zone of the reservoir.

The plant specimens were collected for identification and voucher numbers were added to facilitate

their identification as well as their geographic location was noted down using handheld GPS device.

The identification of flora was carried out with the help of published literature and identification

keys. The main sources of information included Flora of West Pakistan fascicles (Nasir et al., 1970),

online edition of the Flora of Pakistan (www.efloras.org). In addition, Jstor Plant Science archive was

also consulted (http://plants.jstor.org/).

5.2.1.1 Species diversity

The notes on distribution of plants were documented during transect walks at suitable locations

identified on the basis of change in habitat reflected by occurrence of new species. The association

of different species with a particular habitat type was tabulated and species diversity was calculated

for each of the habitat types using Shannon-Weaver diversity index (Hˊ) or simply Shannon index,

(Shannon & Weaver, 1948). It is calculated as:


5-4

i

s

ii ppH ln

1∑

=

−=′

Where: Hˊ = Shannon-Wiener diversity index, s = number of species, pi = the proportion of

individuals or the abundance of the ith species expressed as proportion of total cover, ln = log basen

Figure 5.2: Vegetation Sampling Sites

5.2.1.2 Biogeography

The plant species recorded from the study area were assigned to respective chorotypes based upon

their distribution (Annexure 5A, Exhibit 5A.1). Most important literature consulted includes:


5-5

Dickoré, 1991; Dickore & Miehe, 2002; Dickoré & Nüsser, 2000; Hara, 1966; Meusel, 1972; Nasir, et

al., 1970; Nasir et al., 1972; Ohashi, 1975; Polunin et al., 1987; Rafiq, 1996.

5.2.1.3 Landcover Mapping

The landcover map was prepared using Landsat satellite image (path 150 row 037 dated June 15,

2011) and ancillary data, subset to the extent of project area and its immediate vicinities (30 m

resolution). The map was prepared using statistical modeling approach by including ancillary data

such as elevation, aspect and slope coupled with satellite derived indices. The quantitative analysis

of remotely sensed data in mountainous regions is often affected by topographic effects, thus land

surface reflectance in the image was corrected through Pixel-based Minnaert correction method (Lu

et al., 2008).

The statistical models were developed for each of the landcover classes subjectively defined during

the fieldwork. These classes were used as response variable in a statistical model against a predictor

dataset and the classes included: Agriculture (AGR), Riverine (RIV), Open areas (OPA), Settlements

(SET), Broadleaved and Conifer forests with Sparse (<30%), Medium (30-75%) and Dense (>75%)

crown cover. Notes on major floral associates of these landcover classes were also prepared.

The ground control points (GCP) for the areas representing particular landcover class were marked

during the field visits using handheld GPS receiver. Some additional locations were inferred by visual

interpretation of high resolution satellite imagery (Google Earth) supplemented with GPS labeled

photographic documentation and field sketches. The number of GCPs utilized to map the respective

landcover class has been provided in Annexure 5A.

The explanatory variable data including extracted from digital elevation model of the study area

(elevation, slope, aspect and topographic wetness index) and satellite image (normalized difference

vegetation index (NDVI), Tasseled cap greenness, and Soil brightness (Crist & Cicone, 1984))

corresponding to these locations were extracted in GIS and used to develop statistical model for

each of the landcover class. The satellite data that was used consisted of Landsat 5 scene (L1T

processed - radiometrically and geometrically correct) dated: 15th June 2010 (WRS II path 150, row

037) having <1% cloud cover for GHPP area. The image was obtained from Land Processes

Distributed Active Archive Center (LPDAAC) of National Aeronautics and Space Administration’s

(NASA) Earth Observing System (EOS) Data and Information System (EOSDIS). The necessary image

processing was done using ERDAS IMAGINE ® ver. 9.2 and elevation data in ArcGIS ver. 9.2.

The generalized additive models (GAM) were fitted for each of landcover using GRASP (Generalized

Regression Analysis and Spatial Prediction) package (Lehmann et al., 2002) in software S-PLUS ver. 8

and their accuracy was statistically tested using the area under the curve (AUC) of the Receiver

Operating Characteristic ROC (Fielding & Bell, 1997).

The fitted landcover models for each of the classes were exported as a ‘lookup tables’ from S-Plus

software and processed in ArcView GIS software ver. 3.1 (ESRI, 1992) with an Avenue script program

(GRASPIT - available with GRASP package) to produce landcover maps for individual categories.

These individual maps were then combined in a GIS to produce final landcover map based on

probability of occurrence of landcover classes.


5-6

5.2.2 Floral Diversity and Biogeography

A total of 186 vascular plant species were identified from the area including 3 species of

pteridophytes (Figure 5.3; Annexure 5B). The Leguminosae and Asteraceae were the largest families

of dicotyledons, whereas, Poaceae was largest of the monocotyledons.

Biogeographically the area of the Project falls into Irano-Turanian region Floristic region (Ali, 1978). It

was found that the majority of the species were of the tropical origin or introduced/cultivated

category. This signifies that the flora of the area is much disturbed. The Himalayan endemics

included 19 species viz., Ajuga bracteosa var. densiflora Wall., Asparagus filicinus var. brevipes

Buch.-Ham. Ex, Dalbergia sissoo Roxb. ex DC., Duchesnea indica var. microphylla (Andr.) Focke,

Erigeron bellidioides (Buch.-Ham. ex D. Don) Benth., Galium acutum Edgew., Geranium wallichianum

D. Don ex Sweet, Grewia optiva J. R. Drumm. ex Burret, Juglans regia var. kamaonia L., Kickxia

ramosissima (Wall.) Janchen, Mentha royleana var. royleana Benth. Mimosa himalayana Gamble,

Morus serrata Roxb., Olea ferruginea Royle, Otostegia limbata (Benth.) Boiss. Pinus roxburghii Sarg.,

Rubia wallichiana Decne., and Sauromatum venosum (Aiton) Kunth. However, none of them is

narrow endemic and have relatively wider distribution.

Figure 5.3: A Summary of Plants Identified from GHPP Study Area

3 1

153

29

2 1

121

27

1 1

55

5

0

50

100

150

200

Pteridophyte Gymnosperms Dicots Monocots

Nu

mb

er

of

taxa

Group

Species Genera Families

0

5

10

15

20

25

Legu

min

ose

ae

Ast

erac

eae

Lab

iata

e

Mo

race

ae

Ro

sace

ae

Sola

nac

eae

Eup

ho

rbia

ceae

Salic

acea

e

Asc

lep

iad

ace

ae

Bo

ragi

nac

eae

Scro

ph

ula

riac

eae

Co

nvo

lvu

lace

ae

Rh

amn

acea

e

Aca

nth

ace

ae

Am

aran

thac

eae

Bra

ssic

acea

e

Mal

vace

ae

Me

liace

ae

Po

lygo

nac

eae

Ru

bia

ceae

Ger

ania

ceae

Po

ace

ae

Cyp

erac

eae

Nu

mb

er

of

taxa

Families

Species Genera


5-7

5.2.2.1 Rare Species

Fraxinus raiboearpa was the plant that is confined to few localities in north Pakistan and E

Afghanistan.

5.2.2.2 Threatened Species

World Conservation and Monitoring Centre (WCMC) and Species Survival Commission (SSC) of IUCN

has prepared a list of species with different categories of threats in their wild habitats. None of the

species found in GHPP study area is listed in the WCMC list in endangered categories.

There are several taxa for which sufficient information is not available but they are threatened or

vulnerable in other countries in their distribution range.

5.2.3 Vegetation Types

The project area lies in the humid subtropical zone influenced by monsoon Mediterranean

disturbances as well. The forests can be grouped into and Subtropical Broadleaved Forest, and

Subtropical Pine Forests.

5.2.3.1 Subtropical Broadleaved Forest

This is a scrub type forest with Olea ferruginea, Acacia modesta and Dalbergia sissoo as key species.

It occupies altitude ranging from 450 to c. El. 1000 m. Acacia dominates dry slopes whereas Olea

finds its space in moist depressions. Both species admix with each other in varying proportions,

depending upon site conditions. The principal associates include Adhatoda vasica, Mallotus

philippinensis, Dalbergia sissoo, Cassia fistula, Punica granatum, Ficus spp and Nerium odorum. Such

a kind of vegetation may transform into a Dodonaea viscosa type Scrub on the base of forest or

disturbed localities due to heavy cutting and grazing. The depressions and cool moist slopes may

dominate with Dalbergia sissoo. The broadleaved forest terminate into Chir pine forest above.

5.2.3.2 Subtropical Chir Pine Forest

The Pinus roxburghii stands occur singly or in groups with an irregular deciduous lower storey, often

best developed in depressions and on sheltered aspects. The main species associated with the pine

include Mallotus philippinensis, Pyrus sp, Ficus sp., Flacourtia sp., Berberis sp., Gymnosporia sp. and

Rubus.

The main habitat types zones that can be delimited in the study area may include:

• b : Broad leaved forest

o Fbl liana (woody climber)

o Fbo open space/forest clearing

o Fbr rock inside forest

o Fbs shady floor

• Fc : Coniferous forest

o Fcs shady floor

o Fco open space/forest clearing

o Fcl liana (woody climber)

• Fm : Mixed broad-leaved/coniferous

o Fms shady floor


5-8

o Fmo open space/forest clearing

• S : Shrubland or Shrubberies

o Sl climber

o So open shrubland

o Sp parasite

• : Open land

o Os slope/ pasture/ meadow/ridge

o Ot terrace/flatland

o Or rock/rocky/ landslide area/slope

• C : Cultivated land

o Ck Irrigated land

o Cb Non irrigated land

o Cc cultivated crop

o Cp planted for fodder, shade, medicine etc.

• U : Urban/Settlement area

o Ug garden/avenue/pot

o Ut wall, etc.

o Uw waste-land

• R : Riverine (River belt, flood plain etc)

o Rs river/streamside

o Rss shady river/stream side, ravine

o Rc irrigation canal/running water

o Rsr river/streamside rocky area

The land cover map of the study area, developed from landsat data, and map showing above

described vegetation types, is provided in Figure 5.4. The associated species of each habitat type

have been documented in Exhibit 5A.4 (Annexure 5A).

With respect to diversity, the habitat agricultural and open areas were found to be most diverse with

H′ 4.19 and 4.25 respectively (Figure 5.5). The broadleaved forests also had value close to 4. The

conifer forest and shrubs habitat types were having lowest values for diversity. There can be two

reasons for this difference. The first being the fact that most of the sampling efforts and ecological

observations were made in the broad leaved forest type vegetation for the reason that the dam

components were located within these habitat types. Secondly there is a great diversity of habitats

in this zone and due to edge effect there could be higher species diversity.

The representative photo of each vegetation type is given in Figure 5.6.


5-9

Figure 5.4: Landcover Map of the Study Area

Figure 5.5: Habitat Wise Comparison of

Species Diversity

Forest clearing has given way to

broadleaves

Conifer forest

Mix forest

Habitat Category Shannon Diversity

Fb 3.99

FB 2.77

FBL 1.10

FBO 3.53

FBR 0.00

FBS 3.00

Fc 2.64

FCS 2.08

FCO 1.61

FCL 0.00

Fm 1.33

FMS 1.39

FMO 0.69

S 2.93

SI 0.69

SO 2.89

SP 1.10

O 4.25

OS 4.01

OT 3.14

OR 3.43

C 4.19

CK 2.94

CB 3.91

CC 1.95

CP 2.77

U 3.43

UG 2.08

UT 1.95

UW 3.04

R 3.55

RS 3.40

RSS 0.00

RSR 1.61

U

R

Fb

Fc

Fm

S

O

C

ESIA of 100MW Gulpur Hydropower Project (GHPP)

Kotli, Azad Jammu and Kashmir

5-10

The vanishing forest closer to

the settlements

Broadleaved forest

Open Areas

Broadleaved sparse

Agriculture/settlements

Riverine

Figure 5.6: Representative Photos of Vegetation Types in the Study Area

5.2.4 Vegetation at Project Facilities

The existing land cover of at proposed project facilities is summarized in Table 5.1 (and facility wise

detail of land use is provided in Annexure 5A). The dominant land use at the project facilities was

agriculture/settlements. Areas devoid of forest make about 25% of the land cover. Overall forest

cover is only 18 % that can be treated to be closest to primary; otherwise, the forest cover is not so

dense. Similarly for the direct impact areas (project facilities) the forest cover is around 35% with

only about 5% being dense.

Table 5.1: Land Cover for Each Project Area

S.No Landcover/Landuse Code Total Area (ha) Area (ha) Project components

1 Agriculture AGR 5562.344 59.368

2 Riverine RIV 303.515 54.947

3 Open areas OPA 1269.516 9.413

4 Settlements SET 4294.065 43.570

5 Broadleaved (Sparse) BLS 3484.192 94.043

6 Broadleaved (Medium) BLM 800.600 16.588

7 Broadleaved (Dense) BLD 28.612 0.101

8 Conifer (Sparse) CNS 5292.298 -

9 Conifer (Medium) CNM 3500.617 -

10 Conifer (Dense) CND 372.395 -

Generally, the landcover class representing sparse broadleaves will be the most affected landcover

due by all components except camping sites (of Power house, and Weir) and Spoil tip2 that will

mainly affect agriculture and medium cover broadleaves. The overall impact by the project

components in ascending order is Broadleaved (Dense) < Open areas < Broadleaved (Medium) <



5-11

Settlements < Riverine < Agriculture < Broadleaved (Sparse). The breakup of area that will be

impacted by each component of the project is summarized in Exhibit 5A.5 (Annexure 5A).

5.3 Fish Fauna

The Poonch River originates in the western foothills of Pir Panjal Range, in the areas of Neel-Kanth

Gali and Jamian Gali. The steep slopes of the Pir Panjal form the upper catchment of this river. It is a

small gurgling water channel in this tract and descends along a very steep gradient until it reaches in

the foothill areas. The river widens as more and more tributaries from both sides enter into Main

River. The valley also opens up and Poonch River begins to flow in a leisurely manner in its middle

and lower reaches. The upper catchment is covered by dense forests while the vegetation of the

middle and lower region is under intense biotic pressure. Poonch River from the line of control to

Kotli town has steep slope (6.9-8.3 m/km) and the valley is narrow. Below Kotli, the river gradient is

relatively mild (3.7m/km). The river ultimately joins the Mangla Lake near Chomukh in Mirpur

district of Azad Jammu and Kashmir.

The Poonch is the warm water river and the water temperature approaches to 30o C during the

summer months. Water in the Jhelum River has the intermediate temperature and the reaching up

to 25o C during the summer months. Due to this temperature and topographical differences

between two rivers, fish fauna of the Poonch River is more representative of Mangla Reservoir than

that of Jhelum River. A reasonable number of riverine fish species found in the reservoir move

upstream on the onset of summer season for breeding and feeding and in the reservoir for

wintering.

5.3.1 Methodology

5.3.1.1 Selection of Sampling Stations

A general survey of the study area was conducted to identify sampling sites. The sampling sites were

selected keeping in mind the major activity areas of the Gulpur Hydropower Project. Special

concentration was paid on the sites where the Weir is going to be constructed, the downstream

areas of the Weir up to Gulpur and various nullahs (tributaries) meeting the river as they are major

breeding grounds of the fish of the Poonch River (Figure 5.7, shows locations of fish sampling sites).

5.3.1.2 Fish Sampling Strategy

Recognized techniques for fish surveys include bank-side counts, trapping, cast netting, seine

netting, gill netting, and electro-fishing. Bank–side counts are preferred on the banks of clear

shallow streams, and would not suitable given the torrential nature and turbidity of the water in the

Poonch River. Trapping is suitable for specific species using specific baits. Gill netting and seine

netting is mainly done in lakes, slow moving rivers or side pools along the river side. Electro–fishing

is suitable for shallow streams with limited width. Keeping in mind the constraints regarding

different sampling strategies, cast netting technique was used as it requires a minimum amount of

time with good results.

5.3.1.3 Cast Netting

The fish fauna in running waters was collected using cast with mesh sizes 2 x 2 cm, having a

circumference of 4m. The cast net had the lead weight so that it could not float with the fast flowing



5-12

water. The net was not immediately dragged after cast but was delayed so that maximum fish could

be trapped in the pockets. One cast of net was made at about 10 meter apart from the first one. In

this way 10 casts of net were made along a length of 100 m, starting from downstream to upstream

to minimize the impact of adjacent netting. The cast nets which were entangled in the rocks or were

not cast in a proper way were not counted but the alternate net was cast at a distance of 10m

upstream as the net once cast, disturb the area and fish moves from that spot.

5.3.1.4 Specimens Handling

The specimens collected from each sampling point were collected in a bucket, and were

photographed and identified in the field. Number of specimens of each species was counted and

then released. The voucher specimens were preserved in 10% formaldehyde solution in the field.

Large specimens were given an incision in the belly to ensure proper preservation. All the specimen

data and the relevant auxiliary information were recorded in the data sheet specially designed for

these studies.



5-13

Figure 5.7: Fish Sampling Locations

5.3.2 Fish Diversity of the Project Area

River Poonch is generally rich in fish diversity and even 21 fish species have been recorded from a

stretch of about 10 km (Figure 5.2). This diversity is quite high for this small river stretch. The reason

is generally prevailing topography and water temperature of the river Poonch. The Poonch flows

gently in a vast and flat valley which provides numerous breeding grounds for the reproduction of

fish. High temperature and gravely, rocky and the sandy riverbed of the river Poonch not only helps

for high river productivity but also enhance the breeding capacity of aquatic organisms and their

subsequent survival.



5-14

Among the recorded species, majority of fish fauna belongs to the family Cyprinidae which is

comprised of 13 species. Other 8 species are divided among seven families in such a way that five

families are represented only by one species and the rest two each by two species. Among the fish

fauna of the project area, two species are endemic in Pakistan including AJK, one is endangered, two

are Vulnerable, and one is Near Threatened. Quite a good number of species are commercially

important. The species Tor putitora and Clupisoma garua are considered among the esteemed fishes

and have very high commercial value. The fishes Labeo dyocheilus, Cyprinus carpio, Cirrhinus reba,

Labeo dero, Ompok bimaculatus and Mastacembelus armatus are also quality food fishes. In

addition to the above documented 21 species, the field team collected another specimen, for which

identification is not clear at this stage. Additional field surveys and lab work will be required to

confirm identification of this species.

A detail description of species of concern is provided in Annexure 5B, whereas Figure 5.8 provides

photographs of important species and spatial pattern of their occurrence in the study area. Figure

5.9 shows spatial pattern of abundance of selective species in the study area. Species abundance is

expressed as netting success, defined as chance (%) of capturing a species per netting effort. This

statistics was calculated from a data of ten netting efforts at each sampling location. Species

captured at ≥5 locations are selected for spatial analysis of abundance. Inverse Distance Weighting

interpolation technique in Arc GIS 10 was used to generate maps of spatial abundance. A 250 m

buffer was added to river to improve visibility of the pattern.

Table 5.2: Fish Fauna recorded from the Gulpur Hydropower Project Area

Scientific Name Family Common

Name

English

Name

Distributional

status IUCN Status

Commercial

value

1 Securicula gora Cyprinidae Bidda Gora Chela Wide Least concerned (LC)

Low

2 Salmophasia

bacaila Cyprinidae Chal

Large razorbelly minnow

Wide LC Low

3 Aspidoparia

morar Cyprinidae Chilwa Aspidoparia Wide LC Low

4 Barilius

pakistanicus Cyprinidae Chal

Pakistani baril

Endemic Not determined (ND)

Low

5 Cirrhinus reba Cyprinidae Sunni Reba carp Wide LC Fairly good

6 Cyprinion

watsoni Cyprinidae Sabzal Cyprinion Wide ND Low

7 Labeo dero Cyprinidae Chali Kalbans Wide LC Fairly good

8 Labeo dyocheilus Cyprinidae Torki Pakistani Labeo

Wide LC High

9 Osteobrama

cotio Cyprinidae Palero Cotio Wide LC Low

10 Tor putitora Cyprinidae Mahasheer Mahaseer Wide Endangered Very high

11 Crossocheilus

latius Cyprinidae Chilwa

Gangetic latia

Wide LC Low

12 Garra gotyla Cyprinidae Pathar Chat Sucker head Wide LC Low

13 Cyprinus carpio Cyprinidae Carp Common carp

Exotic Vulnerable High

14 Acanthocobitis

botia Noemacheilidae Kangi

Mottled Loach

Wide LC Low

15 Schistura

punjabensis Noemacheilidae Loach

Hillstream loach

Endemic ND Low



5-15

Scientific Name Family Common

Name

English

Name

Distributional

status IUCN Status

Commercial

value

16 Botia rostrata Cobitidae Loach Twin-banded

Loach Wide Vulnerable Low

17 Clupisoma garua Schilbeidae Jhalli Garua

bachwaa Wide LC Very high

18 Ompok

bimaculatus Siluridae Palu

Butter

catfish Wide

Near

threatened Low

19 Glyptothorax

pectinopterus Sisoridae Sangi

Flat head

catfish Wide LC Low

20 Mastacembelus

armatus Mastacembelidae Groje

Tire-track

spiny eel Wide LC High

21 Channa gachua Channidae Dola Dwarf

Snakehead Wide LC Low

Figure 5.8: Spatial Pattern of Occurrence of Species of Concern in the Study Area.



5-16

Figure 5.9: Spatial Pattern of Abundance of Selected Species in the Study Area.

15

Notes: Species abundance is expressed as netting success, defined as chance (%) of capturing a

species per netting effort. Species captured at ≥5 locations are selected for spatial analysis of

abundance.

5.4 Benthic Invertebrate Fauna

Benthic macro invertebrates are an important part of the food chain, especially for fish. Many

invertebrates feed on algae and bacteria, which are on the lower end of the food chain. Some shred

and eat leaves and other organic matter that enters the water. Because of their abundance and

position as ‘middlemen, in the aquatic food chain, benthos plays a critical role in the natural flow of

energy and nutrients (Williams & Feltmate, 1992). Ali (1971) reported five orders of benthic

invertebrates including Oligocheats, Ephemeroptera, Trichoptera, Chironomidae and Tabanidae

from Poonch River. But it provided very limited information about assemblage benthic macro

invertebrates and organisms were identified up to order level. Present study provides first

comprehensive account on benthic macro invertebrate fauna of the area.

15

Species abundance is expressed as netting success, defined as chance (%) of capturing a species per netting effort. Species captured at ≥5 locations are selected for spatial analysis of abundance.



5-17

5.4.1 Methodology

Sampling was conducted during the flood season. Locations of the sampling sites are shown in

Figure 5.7. The location of individual sampling sites was influenced by accessibility to the rivers, as

certain segments of the both rivers have steep banks, or are located at a distance from the access

road.

The sampling sites are representative for the river-segment (Frissell et al., 1986) and the purpose of

the study. Sampling was started at the downstream end of the stretch and progressed upstream.

The river section to be sampled was disturbed by physical contact. The sampling area of each

sampling unit was covered by a quadratic area in the front of the opening of the surber net (32.5

30.5 cm). When kick-sampling was necessary (e.g. in deep sections), the D frame dip net were held

vertically with the frame at a right angle to the current, downstream from sample collector boots

(991.25 cm2 sampling area), and the river/stream bed was disturbed vigorously by kicking or

rotating the heel of your boot to dislodge the substratum and the fauna.

After at least every three sampling units (or more frequently if necessary) collected material was

rinsed by running clean stream water through the surber of D frame dip net two to three times.

Sampling material was transferred into a large (white) tray or a bucket. The final multi-habitat

sample was comprised of 20 pooled sampling units. The samples were combined to obtain a single,

homogeneous sample at each sampling station. The sample was then transferred to white enamel

tray and thoroughly checked to remove large debris. The sample was then transferred to a container

and covered with 10% formalin.

In the laboratory, each sample was passed through a sieve of 500 m mesh size and rinsed with

running water (to remove traces of formalin). Macro-invertebrates were sorted out from the

samples and identified to family level using a Kyowa Stereozoom Microscope and the identification

keys given in (Edmondson 1959; Ali 1967, 1970, and 1971; Hartmann 2007; Khatoon & Ali 1975,

1976, and 1977; Bouchard 2004). The benthic macroinvertebrate data was presented in the form of

number of individuals per square meter. Organism’s pollution tolerance was taken from HKHbios

scoring list (Hindukush Himalayan Score Bioassessment, Hartmann et al., Deliverable 10).

5.4.2 Macro-invertebrates Diversity

Table 5.3 show the overall picture of macro-invertebrates families collected from six sampling

stations. Thirty one families of macro-invertebrates were identified from 546 benthic macro-

invertebrate individuals collected during the whole study period. Ali (1971) reported five orders of

benthic invertebrates including Oligocheats, Ephemeroptera, Trichoptera, Chironomidae and

Tabanidae from Poonch River, however the present documents higher diversity.

There was high flood in Poonch on 13th August 2013 due to monsoon rains, which resulted in bank

full flow in channel. Therefore no macroinvertebrate were recovered from samples collected on the

same day (station S1 & S2, Table 5.3). The number of benthic macroinvertebrates was comparatively

higher at S3 because of two reasons. First, sample was collected from standing water pool formed as

a result of River seepage water. Secondly, it is mostly populated by lentic ecosystem loving pollution

tolerant taxa including Culicidae, Chironomidae, Erpobdellidae and Ceratopogonidae etc. The

samples S4, S5 and S6 were collected from running water (stream & river). The number individuals



5-18

were relatively lower at these stations because of recent flood in river. Floods usually dislodge the

habitat available to benthic macroinvertebrates during ordinary flow conditions. Results also

indicate that running water accommodate Neoperla, Acentrella, Rhithrogena, Atherix, Elmidae and

Scirtidae.

Among the documented benthic macro-invertebrate fauna:

• Culicidae (14% of total count) was most dominant genus followed by Chironomidae (8.4 % of

total count) and Hydropsyche sp. (7.9 % of total count) at Poonch River.

• Eight taxa including Neoperla (Plecoptera: Perlidae), Acentrella (Baetidae: Ephemeroptera),

Heptagenia, Rhithrogena (Heptageniidae: Ephemeroptera), Ephemera (Ephemeridae:

Ephemeroptera), Atherix (Athericidae: Diptera), Scirtidae (Coleoptera), Elmide (Coleoptera)

were highly sensitive to pollution and represent small proportion of the benthic invertebrate

population sampled at Poonch river. Highly pollution tolerant taxon was Culicidae,

Chironomidae, Planorbidae, Physidae and Ceratopogonidae which represent approximately

34 percent of the total count.

• Major functional feeding group was predators which were 28.7% followed by unknown

22.4%, and collector gatherers 17.3% of entire sample collected.

Table 5.3: Data regarding Number of Benthic Macro-invertebrate16

S.

No. Taxa (Family) Genus S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6

Total no. of

Individuals

Feeding

Habit

HKH Bios

pollution

tolerance

values

1 Perlidae Neoperla - - - - 6

(6.7)

10

(15.1) 16 (2.9) Predator 8

2 Baetidae Acentrella - - - 6

(11.1) - - 6 (1.1)

Collector

gatherer 8

3 Baetis - - 10

(18.5)

8

(8.9)

12

(18.2) 30 (5.5)

Collector

gatherer -

4 Centroptilum - - 29

(8.6)

4

(7.4) - - 33 (6.0)

Collector

gatherer -

5 Caenidae Caenis - - - 2

(3.7) - - 2 (0.4)

Collector

gatherer 7

6 Heptageniidae Heptagenia - - - 10

(18.5)

18

(20.2)

10

(15.1) 38 (6.9) Scraper 8

7 Rithrogena - - - - 7

(7.8) - 7 (1.3) Scraper 9

8 Leptophebiidae Choroterpes - - - 8

(14.8)

5

(5.6) - 13 (2.3)

Collector

gatherer 7

9 Ephemeridae Ephemera - - - 6

(11.1) - - 6 (1.1)

Collector

gatherer 8

10 Hydropsychidae Hydropsyche - - - - 15

(16.8)

28

(42.4) 43 (7.9)

Collector

filterer 7

11 Chironimidae - - - 54

(16.1) -

10

(11.2) - 64 (8.4) Unknown 1

12 Ceratopogonidae - - - 42

(12.5) - - - 42 (7.7) Predator 2

13 Tipulidae Antocha - - - 5

(9.2) - - 5 (0.9)

Collector

gatherer 7

14 Simulidae - - - 23

(6.8) - - - 23 (4.2)

Collector

filterer 7

15 Athericidae Atherix - - - - 9

(10.1) - 9 (1.1) Predator 9

16 Culicidae - - - 76 - - - 76 (14.0) Unknown 2

16

Benthic Macro-invertebrate individuals per 991.25 cm2 of Poonch River from different sampling stations

(data with in parenthesis indicate percent abundance).



5-19

S.

No. Taxa (Family) Genus S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6

Total no. of

Individuals

Feeding

Habit

HKH Bios

pollution

tolerance

values

(22.5)

17 Elmidae - - - - - 5

(5.6) - 5 (0.9) Scraper 8

18 Scirtidae - - - - - - 2

(3.0) 2 (0.4) Unknown 8

19 Dytiscidae - - - 23

(6.8) - - - 23 (4.2) Predator 5

20 Hydrophilidae - - - 14

(4.2) - - - 14 (2.5) Predator 6

21 Aphelocheiridae Aphelocheirus - - - - 6

(6.7) - 6 (1.1) Predator 7

22 Notonectidae - - - 10

(3.0) - - - 10 (1.8) Predator 3

23 Naucoridae - - - 3

(0.8) - - - 3(0.5) Predator 7

24 Gerridae - - - 16

(4.7) - - - 16 (2.9) Predator -

25 Pleidae - - - 5

(1.5) - - - 5 (0.9) Predator 4

26 Corydalidae Corydalus - - - - - 2

(3.0) 2 (0.4) Predator 7

27 Gomphidae - - - - - - 2

(3.0) 2 (0.4) Predator -

28 Libellulidae Pantala - - 7

(2.1)

3

(5.6) - - 10 (1.8) Predator 6

29 Physidae - - - 12

(3.6) - - - 12 (2..2) Scraper 2

30 Planorbidae - - - 20

(5.9) - - - 20 (3.6) Scraper 4

31 Erpobdellidae - - - 3

(0.8) - - - 3 (0.5) Predator -

Total no. of Individuals 337 54 89 66 546

Number of taxa 15 9 10 7

5.5 Large Mammals

Large mammals, especially carnivores, are hard to grasp directly in the field. Therefore it is

challenging to study these animals particularly when their numbers are too small and populations

are scattered. So, the best way is to go with some indirect approaches like sign surveys are

interviews from local people to get maximum information about these species. A number of

mammalian species including common leopard, black bear, barking deer, jackal, fox and rhesus

monkey were reported from the Kotli district of Azad Jammu and Kashmir in past(Akbar and Anwar

2011; Roberts 2005). Status of most of these species is still unknown in the area due to lack of

scientific studies in the area.

This study was conducted in Gulpur Hydropower Project area in the surroundings of Kotli city to

assess the status and occupancy of different mammalian species in the area. Study covered the

project area and its buffer zone. The main objectives of the present study were to collect

information about their presence and absence in the area, human-wildlife conflicts, threats to

different mammalian species and the proportion of the area occupied by each species. Two methods

were used; a standardized questionnaire survey to collect information on status of species and its

conflict with local people while site occupancy surveys were used to measure the proportion of the

area occupied by different species.



5-20

The findings of the study will be helpful in future actions about different species and their

conservation in the area. It will also be helpful in measuring the impact of hydropower project on

existing wildlife of the area.

5.5.1 Methodology

5.5.1.1 Human-Carnivore Interaction Survey

Human-wildlife interaction surveys were conducted to measure the human conflict with large and

medium sized mammals like black bear, common leopard, jackal, fox, otter, rhesus monkey and

Indian wild boar. Whole area was considered as one unit. Thirty respondents, each representing a

separate household, were interviewed from different villages/localities. People were asked about

their previous record of sighting of different large mammals in five years, status of large mammals,

their perception about different species of large mammals, and intensity of danger of large

mammals according to them. Information on killings of livestock and poultry different by carnivores

for last five years (2008-2013), was also collected. Attacks of any large mammal species on human

and number of large mammals killed during past five years were also recorded. Respondents were

also asked for a guestimate of population of different large mammal species in their areas according

to their knowledge.

5.5.1.2 Site Occupancy Survey

Site occupancy surveys (MacKenzie and Nichols 2004) were conducted from August 12, 2013 to

August 19, 2013 to assess the occupancy of different medium and large sized mammalian species in

the surroundings of Kotli city. Global Information System (GIS) maps of the area were developed by

dividing the area into 2×2 km grid cells while Gulpur Hydropower Project area was further divided

into 1×1 km grid cells (Figure 5.10). Each grid was accessed by Global Positioning System (GPS) and

points (repeat surveys) were selected on the basis of favorable routs of different species, habitats

and topographic features. Different points were surveyed depending upon the accessibility,

settlements and disturbance. Total 43 grids were accessed by excluding settlements, and 2-10 points

were explored in different grids. Signs were searched along ridges, valleys, draws, cliff bases and

river banks. Signs of different mammalian species were recorded on data forms along with the

necessary information like species name, sign age (guessed by freshness of a sign), and substrate

type. Sign were categories in three age groups; “fresh”= < 10 days, “old”= <30 days and “very old”=

>30 days.

Detection or non-detection of species signs on each of the point was recorded as 1s and 0s in a

matrix of sites vs. replicates (points) (McKenzie et al. (2002). Survey covariates like terrain

brokenness (1-4), topography, habitat were also recorded during the survey while the Normalized

Difference Vegetation Index (NDVI), slope, altitude, distance from roads and distance from

settlements at site level, calculated from GIS, were used as site covariates .

After preparing data matrix for detection/non-detection and appropriate survey covariates and site

covariates, it was analyzed using software PRESENCE (Hines, 2006). Different combinations survey

and site covariates were compared to find the model that best explains the variation in probability of

detection and markability, and occupancy of the different species at the site level. The best fitting

model was determined using the Akaike Information Criteria (AIC). The model that has the best fit



5-21

(likelihood) and minimum number of parameters obtains the minimum value of AIC value (Akaike

1974; Burnham and Anderson 2002).

Figure 5.10: Map of the Study Area Showing Site Occupancy Survey Points.

5.5.2 Status of Large Mammals in the Area

5.5.2.1 Public Perception on Status of Large Mammals

Local people were asked about the sightings of different mammalian species in the area for past five

years (2008-2013). Jackal has highest annual sighting rate at 25 animals per respondent per year



5-22

followed by fox; 4.7, and rhesus monkey; 2.8. Black bear, leopard cat and wild boar have negligible

sighting rates (Table 5.4).

Table 5.4: Annual Sighting Rate of Different Mammalian Species in the Area.

Species Annual Sighting Rate

Black bear 0.0

Common leopard 0.1

Leopard cat 0.0

Otter 0.2

Jackal 25.0

Fox 4.7

Rhesus monkey 2.8

Wild boar 0.0

Public perception about presence of mammals in the area is summarized in Figure 5.11. Among the

species questioned, jackal was considered as most common species of the area while leopard cat

was considered completely absent from the area. For the common leopard, people believe it is

either extirpated or very rare in neighboring forest areas.

Figure 5.11: Status of Different Mammalian Species by Local People.

Local people were also asked to provide a guestimates of different mammalian species in the area. A

range of figure was quoted by local people which is given in Table 5.5.

Table 5.5: Public Perception of Mammal’s Population in the Area.

Species Reported Population

Black bear 0

Common leopard 0

Leopard cat 0

Jackal up to 1000

Fox up to 500

Wild boar 0-25

Barking deer 0

Mongoose up to 300

0

50

100

Black Bear CommonLeopard

Otter Leopard Cat Jackal Fox RhesusMonkey

Indian Boar

%

Absent

Rare

Common



5-23

Species Reported Population

Flying Squirrel up to 200

Porcupine up to 250

5.5.2.2 Relative abundance through Sigh Surveys

Different types of signs belonging to different mammalian species were detected in the area but

signs frequencies were very low. Jackal was dominating in field signs, followed by fox. No reliable

sign or sighting of common leopard, black bear, leopard cat, rhesus monkey and wild boar was

recorded.

Occupancy analysis was done in Program PRESENCE (Hines, 2006) to find out the occupancy of

different mammalian species in the study area. Due to low sign detection for majority of the species,

estimates were possible for jackal and fox only. A summary of occupancy models tested for jackal

and fox is given in Exhibit 5A.8 and Exhibit 5A.9 (Annexure 5A). Figure 5.12 shows spatial pattern of

jackal and fox occupancy in the study area.

Occupancy of Jackal in the area

Naïve estimate for jackal was 0.3256 which showed an overall low sign detection of the animal in

area at that time. Among 43 surveyed sites 22 fresh signs of jackal were detected including feces and

pugmarks while total signs detected were 25 which by including old and very old signs. Sites

occupancy estimates (psi) were calculated by PRESENCE (Hines 2006) and found an estimate at an

average 0.6 ± 0.2135SE for top model; psi (road-qd), p (terr), which means almost 60% area was

occupied by the jackal at the time of survey. Various models were compared with different

combination of survey and site covariates (Exhibit 5A.8). No single model supported adequately to

estimate the occupancy of jackal therefore model averaging was used to get an averaged estimate of

different models at site level. Distance from the road and terrain brokenness affected the occupancy

and detection of signs. Terrain brokenness had a positive effect while distance from road had a

negative effect.

Occupancy of fox in the area

Signs detection for fox was much lower than that of jackal. Only 9 (both old and fresh) signs of fox

were detected in the study area among them 7 were fresh. Naive occupancy estimate was very low;

0.1163 due to low sign detections. Different models with different combinations of site and survey

covariates were used but none of them have enough weightage (Exhibit 5A.8). Top model was; psi

(.), p (terr) with constant occupancy (psi) and detection probability (p) was influenced by terrain

brokenness. The model gave an occupancy estimate of 0.2278 ± 0.1213SE which means that almost

23% area was occupied by the fox at the time of survey. To estimate the site level occupancy

estimate of fox, model averaging was used to get an average estimate of different models used.



5-24

Figure 5.12: Spatial Pattern of Jackal and Fox Occupancy in the Study Area

5.5.3 Human wildlife conflict

Only 12 cases of predation on livestock and poultry were recorded. Jackal was the main predator

responsible for almost 92% predations majority; 93%, of which was poultry while remaining were

goats. Goats were killed while grazing and poultry was capture from cage most of the time. Only one

case of common leopard depredation was reported in which predator attacked on a coral and killed

30 goats at a time.

5.5.3.1 Economic Loss by Mammals due to Crop Damage

Porcupine was mainly responsible for crop damages in the area. An estimated 2300 PKR were lost in

past one year to each household by porcupine which attacks on maize crop in summer. In one case

wild boar was also considered for crop damage.

5.5.3.2 Attacks on Humans

Local people were asked about the attacks of large mammals on humans which may be fatal or non-

fatal. Three animals were found to be involved in attacks on humans. There were two attacked by

common leopard and jackal each. All of these were non-fatal but a case from nearby area was died

of common leopard attack. One non-fatal attack was also reported to wild boar.



5-25

5.5.3.3 Killings of Large Mammals by Local People

At least 95 jackals were killed by local people in past five years in different localities followed by 15

porcupines (Table 5.6). At least four common leopards were killed in the study area and two cubs of

common leopard were killed in the adjacent area (Annexure 5A).

Table 5.6: Spatial Pattern of Jackal and Fox Occupancy in the Study Area

Mammalian Species Killed in past five years

Black bear 0

Common leopard 04-07

Leopard cat 0

Jackal 95

Fox 09

Porcupine 15

5.5.4 Conclusion

Overall diversity of large mammals was much lower as compared to adjacent areas like Pir Lasura

National Park where 45 barking deer are residing (Zulfiqar et al. 2011) and frequent sightings of

yellow-throated marten, small Kashmiri flying squirrel and common leopard are reported (Manzoor

et al. 2013).

Both questionnaire survey and sign based site occupancy survey revealed the rarity of the most of

the species. Low sighting and sign detections were mainly because of small populations, and

disturbances imposed numerous human settlements in the area. Signs were destroyed due to

human and livestock movements, and weather conditions. Human-wildlife conflicts also make area

hostile for carnivores. Killings of large mammals especially of predators explain absence of majority

of large mammals.

Project area and its surroundings is dominated by adaptable species like fox and jack, while the

species which either pose danger (eg, leopard) or have economic value (ungulates) seems to be

locally extirpated. The species of large home ranges like common leopard gets killed if some

individuals enter into to the area while dispersing from main populations (Annexure 5A, Exhibit

5A.10)

5.6 Small Mammals

Nestled in the famous Siwalik Range of the Pir Panjal Hills, the project area has good biodiversity

with meager forests around. There is abundant aquatic vegetation mixed with agriculture fields on

the sides of both sides of the Poonch River having perennial and deciduous scrub forest on the

hillsides providing enough shelter and food to the terrestrial fauna.

As the area is thickly populated, the forest around the project area is over-exploited by livestock

grazing, firewood cutting and encroachment etc. which results in the depletion of suitable habitat

for wildlife, coupled with the indiscriminate killing of the animals. Most of the local people in vicinity

of project area keep fighting and hunting dogs and hunt animals mainly predator species like foxes,

rabbits and jackals just for fun.



5-26

There are several scattered reports on the study of small mammals of Pakistan (Ahmad and Ghalib,

1979; Akhtar, 1958-60; Anthony, 1950; Baig et al, 1986; Banerji, 1955; Beg, et al., 1975, 1986; Frantz,

1973; Fulk et al., 1981; Mehmood et al., 1986; Mian, 1986; Mirza, 1969; Parrack, 1966; Roberts,

1972, 1973; Siddiqui, 1970; Thomas, 1920a,b,1923; Wagle, 1927; Walton, 1973 and Wroughton,

1911,1920) but the most comprehensive and consolidate work is that of Roberts (1997). Roberts

(1997) compiled all the information available on the mammalian fauna of Pakistan. After that Woods

et al. (1997 a,b) gave a very detailed account on the small mammals of Pakistan but their work was

restricted to the northern mountain region of Pakistan. None of these studies has specifically

addressed the mammals of project area.

5.6.1 Methodology

Following method for the study of small mammals was adopted.

5.6.1.1 Trapping

Bait used: A mixture of different food grains mixed with fragrant seeds was used as bait in Sherman

Traps for the attraction of the small mammals. Wheat and rice were used as food grains while

peanut butter, coriander, oats and onion were used for fragrance. For Snap Traps mixture of peanut

butter and oats was used as bait.

Traps and trapping procedure: Sherman traps and Snap traps (Figure 5.13) were used for the

present studies to collect the live specimens. Fifty traps were set at each location (Figure 5.14) in a

grid of 10X10 m. The snap traps were set in line transect of 100 m setting each trap 2 m apart. The

traps were checked on the next day. The trapped animals were carefully transferred one after the

other into an already weighed transparent polythene bag. Utmost care was done to avoid direct

handling and harassing of the specimens. The sex, weight, breeding status, habitat and other

necessary data of the specimen were noted. The voucher specimens collected were subsequently

preserved in 10% formaldehyde.

Snap trap

Sherman trap

Figure 5.13: Traps Used in Small Mammal Surveys



5-27

5.6.1.2 Indirect Methods

The mammals’ presence was also documented through indirect methods like burrows, footprints,

droppings, and road kills. Some of the species were directly sighted in the field and whenever

possible photographs were also taken

Whenever necessary the records of specimens were verified from the already published literature or

distribution maps of different species.

Figure 5.14: Small Mammal Survey Sites



5-28

5.6.2 Small Mammal Diversity

Seventeen species of small mammals have been collected from the study area belonging to eleven

families and five orders (Figure 5.15). The species Rattus rattus, Mus musculus and Suncus murinus

are the dominant rodent and insectivore species, Pipistrellus kuhlii and Scotophilus heathii are

common chiroperan species and Lutra lutra represents the rare but widely distributed carnivore

species in the study area. The species Lutrogale perspicillata (Otter) is Vulnerable species (IUCN

2010). This species is reported in good numbers in the study area due to easy availability of the food

in the form of large sized fish and also due to availability of shelter for this species in the form of

crevices in the hills found in and around the Poonch River. The species Herpestes edwardsi and

Herpestes javanicus are included in the CITES APPENDIX III. These species have a trade pressure for

their skins exported to different countries. These skins are used for manufacturing the purses and

the decoration pieces. None of the other species of small mammals have any conservation status

and are also common in the area. The species of fruit bats, viz., Rousettus leschenaultii (Fulvous Fruit

Bat) is quite common in the area found hanging on the fig trees.

The area forms a transitional and overlapping zone between the fauna of plain areas in the south

and that of the Himalayas in the North. This phenomenon is reflected from the distribution of many

species in the project area. The small mammal species Rattus pyctoris (Turkistan Rat) is distributed in

the Himalayas and the project area forms the southernmost distribution limit of this species. The

area provides the first record of this species at this lower altitude of 700 m and the previous lowest

altitude recoded for this species is 2300 m. The species Suncus murinus (House shrew), on the

contrary, is distributed in the plain areas and the project area forms the North most limit for

distribution of this species in AJK. Similarly the species Mus booduga (Little Indian field mouse) is

distributed in the plain areas and the project area forms the North most limit for distribution of this

species in AJK. The bat Pipistrellus tenuis (Least pipistrelle) is found in the plain areas and generally

avoids hilly areas but was observed in the project area indicating its north most limit in Himalayan

region. The Indian Fox, Vulpes bengalensis, is distributed in Southern parts of the country and has

the last northward distribution limit in the project area. Smooth coated otter, Lutrogale perspicillata,

is found in plain areas but has been reported in the project area forming its north most distribution

limit. Two species of Mongoose, Herpestes edwardsii and H. javanicus are also found in plain areas

and were recorded in the project area forming its north most distribution limit. The Jungle cat also

has the north most distribution limit in the area.



5-29

Figure 5.15: Family and Order Wise Distribution of Mammals Found in the Study Area

5.7 Reptiles and Amphibians

The available works on the herpetology of the proposed Gulpur Hydro-Power Project in District Kotli,

AJK include those by Khan (1989, 1998, 1999, 2000), Khan (1996) and Manzoor et al. (2013). Khan

and Khan (2000) described a new subspecies of Coluber snake Coluber rhodorachis kashmirensis

from Kotli, Azad Kashmir. Khan (1999) described two new species and a subspecies of blind snakes of

Genus Typhlops from Kotli, Azad Kashmir and Punjab. The new species included; Typhlops

madgemintonai and the subspecies included; Typhlops madgemintonai shermanai. The Holotype of

the other new species Typhlops ahsanai was also collected from Kotli, Azad Kashmir. Khan (1998)

described a new subspecies of Diard’s blind snake Typhlops diardi platyventris belonging to the

Genus Typhlops from Kotli, Azad Kashmir. Khan and Khan (1996) described the Ophidian fauna of the

State of Azad Jammu and Kashmir and recorded 25 ophidian species belonging to five families and

17 genera. Khan and Tasnim (1989) described a new species of frog of the Genus Rana, Subgenus

Paa from Southwestern Azad Kashmir including the Gulpur Hydro-Power Project in District Kotli.

Manzoor et al. (2013) while assessing the biodiversity of the Pir Lasura National Park in District Kotli,

Azad Kashmir reported six amphibian and 24 reptilian species.

0

1

2

3N

o. o

f Sp

eci

es

Famalies

0

1

2

3

4

5

Rodentia Lagomorpha Carnivora Insectivora Chiroptera

No

. of

Spe

cie

s

Orders



5-30

5.7.1 Methodology

The study area represents different types of habitats and terrains including cultivated lands, wild

lands, wetlands and forests. Similarly, some of the herpetological elements are nocturnal in feeding

habits whereas others are diurnal; therefore, different direct and indirect methods were applied to

study various groups of the herps in the study area. Field visits were carried out between 9:00 am to

4:00 pm for diurnal species and for two hours after dusk for the nocturnal species. Detailed

methodology applied for studying the herpetological diversity in the study area is given below.

Survey locations of Reptiles and Amphibians are shown in Figure 5.16.

5.7.1.1 Secondary Data

To record every possible species in the study area, the available literature was collected and

reviewed. The literature included published and unpublished reports and books of private and

government conservation organizations, gazetteers, research articles, popular articles and

newspapers. Based on the available literature, a checklist of different species was developed which

was confirmed through observing different species during the survey.

5.7.1.2 Interviews with Local Residents

Interviews with local residents are valuable not only for identifying the potential sites in the study

area but also a good source of primary data about the existing wildlife of an area. This method was

used for locating different amphibian and reptilian species in the study area. The relevant people in

the study area for the interviews included; field biologists, local hunters, local fishermen, fish

farmers, agriculturists and officials from fisheries, wildlife, forest and irrigation departments in the

study area. A questionnaire was also developed before interviewing different people for

herpetological survey. However, despite the effectiveness of this method, minimal emphasis was

placed on this source regarding the populations of different animals as it is assumed that the data

regarding the population estimates could be biased.

5.7.1.3 Amphibians’ Survey

Indirect Evidences

Since the survey was planned during the breeding season of amphibians (August), therefore

different indirect evidences of existence of different species were available in the study area

including amphibians’ eggs, tadpoles and their mating calls. To locate different amphibian species

and their identification at the project area, following indirect methods were be applied.

Amphibian Eggs: Amphibian eggs are the best indication of the presence of different species at a

particular site. Medium sized eggs of Fejervarya, Euphlyctis and Sphaeroteca are found in jelly

patches, normally floating at water surface. Large Hoplobatrachus eggs are mostly attached in 1-5s

to the submerged marginal grass blades. Much smaller, greenish-brown eggs of Uperodon and

Microhyla are about 1/4th of the size of that of other species, float in small patches of thick jelly at

water surface. Toads’ spawn of black eggs are strung in a double string of jelly, wound round

submerged vegetation. During the present survey, amphibian eggs were actively searched along

ponds, puddles and roadside water reservoirs in order to locate any amphibian species.

Amphibian Tadpoles: Temporal breeding sites of amphibians are the major source of bulk of

tadpoles and the tadpoles can also be an indication of different species. For example, dark brown to



5-31

black Bufo and Pseudepidalea tadpoles are most common, usually fringe the marginal water. They

move in deeper water as they grow older and lighter in color. Schools of transparent Microhyla and

Uperodon tadpoles swim at mid-stream. While different species of Ranoid tadpoles occupy different

niches in the pond. Euphlyctis are confined to the bottom, Fejervarya under submerged vegetation;

Hoplobatrachus and Sphaerotheca keep to the marginal deep water. Of the mountain tadpoles;

Allopaa develop in pools in the course of streams, taking refuge among crevices and holes along

marginal stones, when the stream is in flood. Chrysopaa tadpoles remain in deep water pools

confined under floating algal sheets. During the present survey, amphibian tadpoles were actively

searched in ponds, puddles and roadside water reservoirs in order to locate any amphibian species.

Tadpoles of Euphlyctis cyanophlyctis, Hoplobatrachus tigerinus and Microhyla ornata were observed

at eight different locations in the study area.

Mating Calls: Amphibian species can also be identified through their mating calls during night and

this method was also applied during night search at four out of the 18 study sites in the project area.

Active Search

It is an effective way to search amphibians during the daytime. This method is equally applicable for

both nocturnal and diurnal species. The study area was actively searched for potential breeding

areas of amphibians like small water pools, water channels, roadside ponds and puddles and suitable

microhabitats for amphibians e.g. stones, pond bunds, crevices, leaf litter, debris, rotten log etc.

These places are deliberately uncovered to search the amphibians hiding under such covers. Active

searching was carried out at all the sites with focus on suitable microhabitats. Search for the

nocturnal amphibians was carried out in exposed areas of their potential habitats on the ground,

along the path or the pond or stream bank.

Amphibians were also observed during day time as well as at night around their feeding grounds i.e.

under light posts etc. and around breeding sites like ponds, puddles and streams where they

advertise their presence by their crocks. All the amphibian species found during the study, were

identified at the spot and photographed to record the evidences of their existence.

Collection and Preservation of Amphibians

Monsoon rains are the best time for study amphibians as they breed usually during monsoon when

water as a medium for their breeding is available easily. Amphibians are specialized vertebrates,

occupying special habitat in ecosystem where they forage, follow their breeding rituals, lay eggs and

where their tadpoles feed and develop. A few specimens were collected, preserved, tagged and

deposited/donated to the Pakistan Museum of Natural History as reference material for future

researchers.

To keep track of a preserved specimen and related field information, every collected specimen was

allotted a specific number written on a tag tied to the specimen. Tags were prepared by using water

/ formalin resistant paper, strung on a strong silken cord. The number was written on the tag with a

water / formalin resistant ink or with lead pencil. The prepared tag with number was then tied at

knee joint or around waist of the specimen. Field notes were taken and data was entered in the

notebook under each tag number. The field notes included; date of collection (day / month / year),

time of collection, name of the collector, name of the locality from where the specimen was



5-32

collected including district, province and distance and direction from nearest town by using a

standard map and the ecological data including habitat, vegetation, temperature, humidity,

substratum and elevation from sea level.

Photography

A close up color photograph of the specimen in its natural habitat or a series of photographs or a

short movie can contribute to understand morphology, breeding, spawning and feeding habits of the

animal. Therefore, photographs of all the specimens were taken in their natural habitats not only for

their identification purposes but also as an evidence of their existence.



5-33

Figure 5.16: Survey Locations of Amphibians and Reptiles, with Species Diversity and Abundance

5.7.1.4 Reptiles’ Survey Methodology

According to a preliminary review of literature, it was found that no crocodilians and tortoises are

found in the study area; Kotli, AJK and the existing species in the study area include; freshwater

turtles, lizards and snakes. Some of the reptilian species are nocturnal in their feeding habits like

gekkonid lizards and elapide snakes whereas others are diurnal like agamid, lacertid, varanid and

scincid lizards, freshwater turtles and colubrine snakes. Therefore, different direct and indirect



5-34

methods were applied to study various groups of the reptilian fauna at the study area. Field visits

were carried out between 10:00 am to 3:00 pm for diurnal species and for 2-3 hours after dusk for

the nocturnal species.

Field Identification of Reptiles

Different habitats in the study area were searched for any reptilian species both during day time and

night. Stone turning, looking at and through bushes, searching basking agamas on stones and

boulders and walking along microhabitats were the means to find out all possible reptiles in the

study area. Freshwater turtles were observed from the banks of the water bodies. All the reptiles

encountered during the survey were photographed and field notes for each specimen were

recorded. However, the specimens that could not be identified on the spot or the specimens

identified but require detailed study for their confirmation as a sub-species were collected and

preserved for their identification in the lab. For the identification of different species, Amphibians

and Reptiles of Pakistan, by Khan (2006) was used.

Collection Methods for Reptiles

Hand picking through bare hands or with the help of long forceps or snake clutch has always been

the most efficient way of collecting different species of reptiles. The larger species like monitor lizard

and rock-agama, noose traps were used. For handling snakes, especially poisonous ones, snake

clutches / sticks were used. In addition to Hand picking, “Scoop nets” for shallow water and “cast

nets” in large water bodies were also used for aquatic reptiles. Fast moving Agamid and Lacertid

lizards were also collected by striking with stick. Some specimens were pulled out with the help of

long forceps from crevices in stones while a few were collected by hand from under the bushes.

Snakes were mostly collected using snake catcher and every snake being collected was considered as

poisonous in order to avoid any mishap.

The collected lizards were killed by injecting concentrated formalin at the site of heart and then the

formalin was injected in belly, neck, legs and tail for preservation. A tag number was allotted to each

specimen and tied with the left hind limb for identification and later detailed studies. Preserved

specimens were stored in 10% formalin in air-tight plastic jars.

5.7.2 Reptiles and Amphibians Diversity

A total 21 species of herps belonging to three orders, 13 families and 18 genera are found in the

study area including six amphibians and 15 reptiles. Amphibians included two toads and four frogs

whereas; reptiles included one turtle, nine lizard and five snake species (Annexure 5A). Two species

out of the five recorded snakes are poisonous rests all the amphibian and reptiles are non-

poisonous. According to a preliminary review of literature, no crocodilians and tortoises are found in

the study area.

Most of the species were observed directly whereas some were detected through indirect evidences

like tracks, burrows, molts and interviews with local residents. All the amphibians and lizards were

observed directly. The existence of five species including one turtle (Lissemys punctata andersoni)

and four snakes (Typhlops ductuliformes, Eryx johnii, Xenochrophis piscator and Naja oxiana) was

confirmed after interviewing a number of local residents including farmers, hunters and teachers.



5-35

Common Krait (Bungarus

caeruleus )

Brown Cobra (Naja oxiana)

Checkered Keeled back

Snake (Xenochrophis

piscator)

Himalayan Rock Agama (Laudakia himalayana)

Tadpoles of Microhyla ornata

Figure 5.17: Photographs of Reptile and Amphibian Species Recorded in the Area

5.7.2.1 Conservation Status of the Recorded Species

All the species recorded during the survey were commonly found at all the study sites, with mostly

Not Evaluated species (52%) according to IUCN 2013 or having Least Concern status (42%) with

stable population trend (Table 5.7). Only one species, Brown Cobra (Naja oxiana) was found Data

Deficient with unknown population trend. None of the recorded species is protected under the AJK

Wildlife Act 1975 or AJK Wildlife Ordinance 2013.

Six of the recorded 21 species are CITES Species with one (Varanus bengalensis) enlisted in Appendix

I, four species (Hoplobatrachus tigerinus, Lissemys punctata, Eryx johnii, Naja oxiana) are enlisted in

Appendix II while one species (Xenochrophis piscator) is enlisted in Appendix III of the CITES category

2013.

Table 5.7: Conservation status of the reptile and amphibian species

Sr.

No. Zoological Name

Local

Status

CITES

Category

IUCN

Status(2013)

Population Trend IUCN,

2013

1 Bufo stomaticus Abundant - Least Concern Stable

2 Bufo melanostictus Rare - Least Concern Increasing

3 Microhyla ornata Fair - Least Concern Stable

4 Euphlyctis

cyanophlyctis Common - Least Concern Stable

5 Fejevarya limnocharis Rare - Not evaluated Not evaluated

6 Hoplobatrachus

tigerinus Common II Least Concern Stable

7 Lissemys punctata Occasional II Least Concern Unknown

8 Laudakia agrorensis Common - Not evaluated Not evaluated

9 Laudakia himalayana Common - Not evaluated Not evaluated

10 Eublepharis macularius Occasional - Least Concern Unknown



5-36

Sr.

No. Zoological Name

Local

Status

CITES

Category

IUCN

Status(2013)

Population Trend IUCN,

2013

11 Hemidactylus

flaviviridis Abundant - Not evaluated Not evaluated

12 Hemidactylus brookii Abundant - Not evaluated Not evaluated

13 Indogekko rohtasfortai Common - Not evaluated Not evaluated

14 Ophisops jerdonii Common - Least Concern Stable

15 Eutropis dissimilis Fair - Not evaluated Not evaluated

16 Varanus bengalensis Common I Least Concern Decreasing

17 Typhlops ductuliformes Common - Not evaluated Not evaluated

18 Eryx johnii Fair II Not evaluated Not evaluated

19 Xenochrophis piscator Common III Not evaluated Not evaluated

20 Bungarus caeruleus Fair - Not evaluated Not evaluated

21 Naja oxiana Fair II Data Deficient Unknown

5.7.2.2 Local Status of the Recorded Species

The local status of the recorded species in the project area was determined following five categories

based on their appearance at different locations in the project area;

• Abundant: if the species appeared in almost all the study sites visited during the study

• Common: if the species appeared in almost 50 % study sites visited during the study

• Fair: if the species appeared in almost 25 % study sites visited during the study

• Rare: if the bird appeared in 5 to 10 % study sites visited during the study

• Occasional: if the species appeared at only one or two study sites during the study

Following the criteria given above, three species were evaluated as Abundant, nine species as

Common, five species as Fair, two species as Rare and two species as Occasional (Table 5.7).

5.7.2.3 Endemic Species at the Project Site

Out of the recorded 21 species, three are endemic to Pakistan including two lizards; Agrore valley

agama (Laudakia agrorensis) and Rohtas gecko (Indogekko rohtasfortai) and one snake; Slender

blind snake (Typhlops ductuliformes). All the three endemic species were commonly found at the

project site.

5.7.3 Conclusions

Total 21 species of herps including six amphibians and 15 reptiles were recorded during the present

study. Out of the recorded 21 species, three are endemic to Pakistan including two lizards; Agrore

valley agama (Laudakia agrorensis) and Rohtas gecko (Indogekko rohtasfortai) and one snake;

Slender blind snake (Typhlops ductuliformes). The recorded three endemic species were not only

found commonly at the project site but also these species occupy a vast distribution range in the

country. Laudakia agrorensis is found in almost all the mountainous areas, Indogekko rohtasfortai

occupies vast distribution range in the Salt Range whereas; Typhlops ductuliformes is a common

species in plain areas.

None of the three recorded endemic species during the survey have yet been evaluated by IUCN or

listed for evaluation of their conservation status in IUCN Red List of Threatened Species. None of

these endemic species are protected under the AJK Wildlife Act 1975 or AJK Wildlife Ordinance



5-37

2013. The recorded endemic species are none CITES species i.e. none of these is enlisted in any

Appendix of CITES category 2013.

5.8 Avifauna

Birds are considered as important health indicators of the ecological conditions and productivity of

an ecosystem (Li and Mundkur, 2007). While addressing the environmental problems of an area,

birds can be used as very appropriate bio-indicators suggesting the status of biodiversity in general

(Bhatt and Joshi, 2011).

Of the total Pakistan’s bird species, 30% visit the country for a significant period of the year as long

distance migrants, 43% are either Palearctic species visiting Pakistan only for breeding and 28% are

regular winter visitors, which breed mainly in trans-Himalayan northern regions (Roberts, 1992). The

information about avian distribution across different habitats and Himalayan elevation zones across

the region is scarce, fragmented and preliminary (Ali & Ripley, 1998). The study area is unexplored in

terms of avifauna and old documentation of the bird diversity specific to the study area exist.

5.8.1 Methodology

The present study was carried out using 500 m transects, spread across the study area (Figure 5.18).

Transects were rightfully separated (about 400 m) to shun the double counting of birds. The other

most important aspect kept in consideration while surveying for the birds was the activity period of

birds. The peak activity of birds lasts for 1 or 2 hours after sunrise or before sunset, so recording of

birds were done either in early morning or late evening hours (Thakur et al., 2002). Survey was done

between 0530–1100 hrs and 1530–1830 hrs during the dusk and dawn, respectively. It helped to

note the movements and calls of the birds, which were noticed easily to draw data more accurately.

All birds seen while walking along transects, including those flying, were recorded. All observations

were made by using binocular and photographic documentation was done by using digital camera. In

the field, the birds were identified using an authentic field guide (Grimmett, et al., 2008). By using

Shannon's Diversity Index (H'), data was analyzed for species diversity and relative abundance.

Pi (Relative abundance) = ni /N H' (Shannon diversity index) = -Σ (pi*ln*pi) E (Evenness) = H'/LnS Whereas, Pi = relative abundance of species, i=1, ni = Number of individuals of species, N = total

number of individuals of all species, H'= the Shannon Diversity Index, S = Total number of species, Ln

= Log with base 'e' (Natural logarithm)



5-38

Figure 5.18: Bird Survey Locations, along with Species Diversity and relative Abundance

5.8.2 Bird Diversity

A total of 61 species belonging to 32 families were recorded during the present study (Annexure 5A).

The area is a transitional zone between plains and foot hills of Himalayas. It provide the diverse

habitat to the birds species such as winter migrant from higher altitude and summer migrant from

lower altitudes. This renders higher bird diversity and species richness. Analysis of data on

residential status revealed that out of 61 bird’s species, 76% were year round resident, remaining

were summer breeders, winter visitors and passage migrant. The order Passeriformes was the most



5-39

dominant order with highest value of relative abundance. The passerine birds dominated the

diversity with 40 species as compared to non-passerines, which were 21 in number.

Passeriformes have highest relative abundance (pi) and encounter rate (ER) (pi= 74.8134: ER=

53.4667/km) followed by Falconiformes (pi= 7.8358: ER= 5.6/km) and Coraciiformes (pi= 6.1567: ER=

4.400/km) respectively. The family Accipitridae dominate the study area in terms of total bird

counts, followed by Muscicapidae, Corvidae. The family Corvidae has highest relative abundance and

encounter rate (pi=15.02: ER=10.73/km) followed by Muscicapidae (pi=12.22: ER=8.73/km) and

Accipitridae (pi=7.74: ER=5.53/km) (Figure 5.19). The diversity of species in a particular area

depends not only on the number of species found, but also on their individuals’ counts.

Figure 5.19: Encounter Rate of Bird Families

The critically endangered species, the white rumped vulture (Gyps bengalensis) and endangered

Egyptian Vulture (Neophron percnopterus) were also recorded from the study area. The species of

vultures are highly threatened different factors. The major cause of mortality is diclofenac

10.73

8.73

5.53

5.47

5.13

4.00

3.40

3.13

2.93

2.40

2.27

1.80

1.73

1.73

1.67

1.47

1.27

1.20

0.87

0.73

0.73

0.73

0.60

0.60

0.53

0.53

0.40

0.40

0.33

0.27

0.07

0.07

0.00 2.00 4.00 6.00 8.00 10.00 12.00

Corvidae

Muscicapidae

Accipitridae

Timaliidae

Cisticolidae

Pycnonotidae

Passeridae

Meropidae

Apodidae

Estrildidae

Dicruridae

Columbidae

Laniidae

Motacillidae

Paridae

Sturnidae

Sylviidae

Sturnidae

Psittacidae

Sylviidae

Turdidae

Phasianidae

Coraciidae

Picidae

Cuculidae

Strigidae

Alaudidae

Alcedinidae

Nectaribiidae

Upupidae

Monarchidae

Falconidae



5-40

contamination of livestock carcasses (Green et al., 2006). The other causes such as habitat

destruction, food shortage, human persecution, poisoning and pesticide use may have caused a

gradual decline in vulture populations (Birdlife International, 2010). The abundance of Egyptian

Vulture, Black kite (Milvus migrans) and crow species was higher near the waste and garbage stored

land. The habitat overlapping of Jungle crow (Corvus macrorhynchos), Common raven (Corvus corax)

and House crow (Corvus splendens) was also observed in the study area with equally distribution

status of both species. The house crow proliferates in human settlements and disturbed habitats and

is especially suited to coastal settlements.

We also studied the species diversity in selected sites of study area. Irrespective of altitudinal

variation house sparrow was dominant species in urban areas. Similarly the Indian roller (Coracias

benghalensis), red vented bulbul (Pycnonotus cafer) and white cheeked bulbul (Pycnonotus

leucogenys) were also recorded across the study area. The two species of woodpecker, scaly bellied

woodpecker (Picus squamatus) and grey capped pygmy woodpecker (dendrocopos canicapillus) and

Jungle babbler (Turdoides striatus) dominated the forest area (dominated by chir pine). Green bee

eater (Merops orientalis), pied Cuckoo (Clamator jacobinus), rose ringed Parakeet (Psittacula

krameri), common myna (Acridotheres tristis), Brahminy starling (Sturnus pagodarum) and scaly

breasted munia (Lonchura punctulata) were dominated in the agricultural lands. A single sighting of

Asian paradise flycatcher (Terpsiphone paradisi) was also recorded while surveying the study area.

The transitional habitat between cultivated land and thick forest of chir pine dominated the diversity

of passerines birds such as the species of common stone chat, pied bush chat, Indian robin,

flycatcher and warbler. The species of wagtail were also recorded near the water resources. Rollers

inhabit scattered trees, scrublands, cultivated fields and urban parks or gardens. The main threats

include loss of suitable habitat due to changing agricultural practices, loss of nest sites and use of

pesticides (Kovacs et al., 2008).

In term of the abundance of recorded species, the undisturbed area depicted the higher diversity of

avian fauna. That was probably because forest areas with low human occupation provide breeding

ground and roosting places for various birds species.

The Habitat destruction, anthropogenic pressure in the form of tree cutting, firewood collection,

grass cutting, and cattle grazing were also observed in these study sites. At several locations, nests of

various bird species were observed on ground as well in bushes and on the other hand grazing

pressure and cutting of bushes was quite evident. This indicates a serious threat to the breeding

activity of birds in the area. The rivers and stream provide suitable habitat for grassland species as

well as stream dwellers and migratory water birds. These areas are open to human access and

interference. The human related threats in these areas include include water pollution by sewage

drainage, industrial waste, eutrophication caused by sewage effluent and agricultural seepage

carrying fertilizers and stone crushing.

Intensive biomass extraction (mainly through grazing and fuel wood collection) can bring change in

vegetation structure and composition of the forest, leading to changes in bird species composition

(Shahabuddin and Kumar 2005).



5-41

5.9 Species OF Special Concern

Out of 21 species found in Poonch River, 12 species viz., Barilius pakistanicus, Schistura punjabensis,

Cirrhinus reba, Labeo dero, Labeo dyocheilus, Tor putitora, Cyprinus carpio, Botia rostrata, Clupisoma

garua, Ompok bimaculatus, Mastacembelus armatus are species of special importance (Table 5.8). A

detailed description of these species is provided in Annexure 5B. The species, Barilius pakistanicus

and Schistura punjabensis are endemic in Pakistan including AJK. Four species, Tor putitora

(Endangered), Cyprinus carpio (Vulnerable), Botia rostrata (Vulnerable), Ompok bimaculatus

(Vulnerable) and Ompok bimaculatus (Near Threatened) have special IUCN status. Out these, Tor

putitora, Cyprinus carpio and Ompok bimaculatus are commercially important. The other

commercially important species are Clupisoma garua, and Mastacembelus armatus.

Table 5.8: Species of Concern Found in the Gulpur Hydropower Project Area

Nos. Scientific Name Distributional

status IUCN Status

Commercial

value

Max.

Length (cm)

Max.

Weight (Kg)

1 Barilius pakistanicus Endemic - - - -

2 Schistura punjabensis Endemic - - - -

3 Cirrhinus reba - - Fairly good 30 0.3

4 Labeo dero - - Fairly good 75 0.2

5 Labeo dyocheilus - - High 90 5

6 Tor putitora - Endangered Very high 275 54

7 Cyprinus carpio - Vulnerable High 110 40.1

8 Botia rostrata - Vulnerable - - -

9 Clupisoma garua - - Very high 61 0.5

10 Ompok bimaculatus - Near

threatened Fairly good 45 0.2

11 Mastacembelus armatus - - High 90 0.5 g



6-1

6 DESCRIPTION OF SOCIO-ECONOMIC

ENVIRONMENT

This section presents a description of the socioeconomic characteristics of the project area, and

where available utilizes national and regional level data for providing a more cogent understanding

of the context. This social baseline analysis is based on:

• primary data collected by conducting a systematic settlement survey targeting the project

area in the Kotli District AJK to supplement the available surveys and studies; and

• secondary data collated from previously published literature as well as national and regional

data.

The settlement survey was carried out over a period of ten days by two teams comprising a total of

four members. The methodology for the collection of primary data consisted of focus group

discussions and structured interviews in the villages listed below, geared to provide detailed

qualitative socio-economic data. The villages included in Table 6.1 are seen as those villages that will

be directly affected by the proposed project activities.

Focus group discussions and structured interviews were chosen as the methodology in order to,

provide detailed information rapidly; to provide information on the many non-measurable issues

(for example, access to natural resources or the structure of social institutions); and to ensure a

more inclusive, participatory approach than what would have been possible with individual

questionnaires.

The secondary data pertaining to the project area was drawn chiefly from the following sources:

• Environmental Statistics AJK, AJK-EPA 2008

• Data available from Population Census Organization - Islamabad

• Data available from Planning & Development Department - AJK

• Economic survey of Pakistan 2010-2011

Table 6.1: Villages/Settlements in the Project Area

Village Name Village Name

1. Aghar 5. Hill Kalan

2. Barali 6. Hill Khurd

3. Dharang 7. Jamal Pur

4. Gulhar 8. Mandi

6.1 Social Setting

Traditionally, the social set up of Kotli was largely based on kinship. The overall social arrangement

was based around different clans (baraderi). The composition of society remained intact for

centuries until the mid of last century when geo-political changes in the region brought about

changes in political set up, economy and society. In the decades of 1960-70s migration of people to

abroad for earning shifted the basis of economy. Forced from lack of economic activities in the past,



6-2

the people of the area started migrating abroad for search of opportunities. With increasing

exposure to market forces and exogenous lifestyle the pattern of interface between different

communities also witnessed drastic changes. Despite modernization people still rely on pre-

modernization social structure and social interaction and politics is largely shaped by social dynamics

and power relationships. However, access of opportunities in the country and abroad enabled

people to find increasing role in the society.

6.2 Demography

The district Kotli is the second largest in terms of population in Azad Jammu and Kashmir. The

population of the district was 365,000 in 1981 and an increase of 54.37 percent was recorded over

the last seventeen (17) years i.e 1981-1998. According to 1998 census its total population of the

district is 0.563 million with a growth rate of 2.59%. The projected population is 0.69 million in 2006.

The average annual growth rate of population is 2.59% in the district during inter censual period

1981-1998. The population density is 370 persons per sq. km. The average household size is 7.3

persons, which is slightly lower than national which is 8.5, but slightly higher than AJK -7.2. The

demographic details are given in the table below:

Table 6.2: Demography of AJK

District Area (Sq.

Kms)

Population (Millions) Density In (2006)

(Persons/ Sq. Km )

Growth

Rate

House-Hold

Size 1998 2006

Muzaffarabad 2496 0.62 0.77 307 2.80% 7.1

Neelum 3621 0.126 0.159 42 2.80% 7.1

Mirpur 1010 0.334 0.395 391 2.09% 6.8

Bhimber 1516 0.302 0.37 244 2.60% 6.7

Kotli 1862 0.563 0.69 370 2.59% 7.3

Poonch 855 0.411 0.49 573 2.24% 7.6

Bagh 1368 0.393 0.46 336 2.00% 7.4

Sudhnuti 569 0.224 0.262 460 1.99% 7.3

Total 13297 2.973 3.596* 270 2.41% 7.2

The human habitation in district Kotli is predominantly determined by its topography as the hilly

mountainous terrain limits options for human habitation. Hence, most of the human habitation in

the project area is scattered. The field survey about the settlement pattern of the surveyed

communities shows that majority of the population (91.84 percent) resides in rural areas with some

urban pockets in few settlements.

According to survey findings 99% households are headed by men. 57% of the households are living in

a joint family system. In the project area average household comprises of 9.2 persons, which is

higher as compared to the average national household size of 7.3 persons per household in the

district.

Table 6.3: Population Data

Village/Settlement Number of

Households Population

Persons per

Household

% Male

Population

% Female

Population

Aghar 28 280 10.00 51.07 48.93

Barali 15 138 9.20 50.72 49.28

Dharang 33 288 8.73 50.69 49.31



6-3

Village/Settlement Number of

Households Population

Persons per

Household

% Male

Population

% Female

Population

Gulhar 14 136 9.71 45.59 54.41

Hill Kalan 14 103 7.36 48.54 51.46

Hill Khurd 12 117 9.75 50.43 49.57

Jamal Pur 35 332 9.49 53.31 46.69

Mandi 22 209 9.50 48.33 51.67

Survey Area Total/Average

173 1,603 9.27 50.41 49.59

Kotli District Total/Average

94,521 690,000 7.30 50.62 49.38

AJK Total/Average 499,444 3,596,000 7.20 50.62 49.38

As per the results of this survey female and male is 49.38 and 50.62 respectively.

Table 6.4: Age Distribution in the Project Area

Village/Settl

ement

Total

Population

Children below

9yrs (%)

Youth 10-

17yrs (%)

Active population 18-

65yrs (%)

Aged population

above 65 (%)

Aghar 280 24.29 13.57 58.93 3.21

Barali 138 29.71 12.32 54.35 3.62

Dharang 288 19.44 17.36 58.68 4.51

Gulhar 136 13.97 19.85 61.76 4.41

Hill Kalan 103 27.18 18.45 51.46 2.91

Hill Khurd 117 20.51 24.79 50.43 4.27

Jamal Pur 332 25.00 18.67 53.92 2.41

Mandi 209 27.27 23.44 45.93 3.35

Total 1,603 23.46 18.15 54.90 3.49

The findings of survey show that 54.9% of the sampled population was between 18 and 65 years of

age, followed by 23.46% children. The percentage of those falling between 10 and 18 years is 18.15%

whereas 3.49 % of the population falls in the age slot of more than 65 years and above.

Figure 6.1: Age Distribution based on Gender in the Project Area

11.29

8.80

28.45

1.87

12.16

9.36

26.45

1.62

0.00 5.00 10.00 15.00 20.00 25.00 30.00

0-9 years

10-17 years

18-65 years

65+ years

% P

op

ula

tio

n

Female Male



6-4

6.3 Social Composition

Despite rapid modernization and urbanization in AJK including district Kotli the kinship system has

remained intact and exert great influence over the economy, politics and cultural ethos. The major

tribes residing in the district are Syed, Gujar, Jat, Rajput, Awan and Sudhan. Hindko, Gojri and Pahari

are the indigenous languages of the district. Other than vernacular languages, Urdu and Punjabi are

also spoken. The majority of population of the district is Muslim, constituting 99.24 percent of the

total population. Christians, Hindus, Qadiani/Ahmedi and Scheduled Castes form minority.

6.4 Political and Administrative Set-up

The state of AJK is constituted of an area of 3,297sq.km and is administratively divided into two

divisions, seven districts, and nineteen sub-divisions. The area falls under the jurisdiction of State of

Azad Jammu and Kashmir (AJK). The State of AJK is administratively controlled by Government of

Pakistan under United Nation’s Commission on India and Pakistan 1948. The laws government of

Pakistan extends to the entire state with the approval of the Azad Jammu and Kashmir Legislative

Assembly (AJKLA).

Politically, the state of AJK is governed by Parliamentary form of Government. The president is the

head of the state and the elected Prime Minister along with his cabinet of ministers is the head of

the government. The State of AJK has its elected President, Prime Minster with Cabinet and AJK

Legislative Assembly along with AJK Council represented by elected members from AJK Legislative

Assembly and nominated members from Pakistan. Currently, the AJK government does not have

local bodies system which is expected to be in place after the ruling of Supreme Court of Pakistan.

Table 6.5: Administrative Setup (2006)

Divisions 2

Districts 8

Sub-Divisions 22

Union Councils 182

Villages 1646

Town Committees 13

Development Authorities 5

Municipal Committees 10

District Councils 8

Municipal Corporations 2

Police Stations 42

The Project is located in Kotli district with a total area of 161,608 hectares. This district is divided

into four sub-divisions/tehsils i.e. Kotli, Fatehpur Thakiala, Charhoi and Sehnsa. Deputy Commissioner

along with three Assistant Commissioners in sub-divisions is the administrative and revenue head of

the district. His major duty is the maintenance of law and order and to look after the land record of

the district.

On the revenue side, Deputy Commissioner is assisted by the Revenue Officer/Extra Assistant

Commissioner, Assistant Commissioner (sub-division), Tehsildar and Naib Tehsildar in each Tehsil.



6-5

The district is further divided into qanoongo, halqas and patwar circles. The qanoongos supervise the

work of patwaries of their respective patwar circles.

Table 6.6: Divisions, Districts & Sub-Divisions of AJK

Division District Sub-division

Muzaffarabad

Muzaffarabad Muzaffarabad

Hattian

Neelum Athmaqum

Sharda

Poonch

Rawalakot

Hajira

Thorar

Abbaspur

Bagh

Bagh

Haveli

Dhirkot

Sudhnuti Pallandri

Mirpur

Mirpur

Mirpur

Dudyal

Chakswari

Bhimber

Bhimber

Barnala

Samahni

Kotli

Kotli

Fatehpur Thakiala

Sehnsa

Charhoi

6.5 Conflict and Social Tension

Generally the area is peaceful as there are no chronic social and communal conflicts among the

communities living in the project area. Owing to social diversity and culture of tolerance in the

society, people hailing from different denominations and clans lives in harmony. The state laws are

fully enforced in the project area. If a conflict arises within the community, the elders resolve the

issues amicably or settled through courts of law. Though the role of clerics (ulema) was traditionally

limited to marriage, burial and religious guidance, they are increasingly play their role in resolution

of conflict among community members.

6.6 Land Ownership and Tenure

Area under cultivation in the state of AJK is around 166,432 hectares, which is almost 13% of the

total Geographical area out of which 92% of the cultivable area is rain-fed. About 84% households

have very small land-holdings between one to two acres per family. Major crops are maize, wheat &

rice whereas minor crops include vegetables, grams, pulses (red lobia) and oil-seeds. Major fruits are

apple, pears, apricot and walnuts. Agriculture and livestock income ranges between 30-40% of

household earnings. The remaining share comes from other sources including employment and

business etc.



6-6

In the project area the private landholding is 1,840 kanals which comprises agricultural 1,044 kanals

(56%), commercial 110 kanals (6%), barren land 230 kanals (13%). Privately own forest land

comprises 456 kanals (25%). The average cultivable landholding in Barali, Mandi, Hill Kalan, Hill

Khurd and Dharang villages is larger as compared to Gulhar and Aghar. The average landholding of

forest, barren and commercial categories is biggest in Jamalpur, followed by Dharang and Hill Khurd.

The ownership of land in terms of category is given in the Table 6.7 and 6.8.

Table 6.7: Cultivable Land Holding

Village/

Settlement

Househol

ds

Total

Population

Househol

d Size

Househol

ds with

Farm

Land (%)

Total

Farm Area

(kanals)

Farm Area

Per Family

(kanals)

Farm Area

per Capita

(kanals)

Aghar 28 280 10.00 7.14 16 0.57 0.06

Barali 15 138 9.20 80.00 171 11.40 1.24

Dharang 33 288 8.73 54.55 234 7.09 0.81

Gulhar 14 136 9.71 7.14 2 0.14 0.01

Hill Kalan 14 103 7.36 100.00 132 9.43 1.28

Hill Khurd 12 117 9.75 91.67 117 9.71 1.00

Jamal Pur 35 332 9.49 54.29 194 5.54 0.58

Mandi 22 209 9.50 54.55 179 8.14 0.86

Survey Area Total/Average

173 1,603 9.27 51.45 1,045 6.04 0.65

Kotli District Figures

94,521 690,000 7.30 65.00 460,622 4.87 0.67

AJK Figures 499,444 3,596,000 7.20 89.00 3,290,160 6.59 0.91

Source: Survey Results

Table 6.8: Land by Types in Sample Villages

Village/Settle

ment Households

Average Farm

Area per HH

(kanals)

Average Forest

Area per HH

(kanals)

Average Barren

Land per HH

(kanals)

Average

Commercial

Land per HH

(kanals)

Aghar 28 0.57 0.50 0.04 0.00

Barali 15 11.40 2.00 4.00 3.33

Dharang 33 7.09 0.12 0.76 0.03

Gulhar 14 0.14 0.00 0.00 0.36

Hill Kalan 14 9.43 2.79 2.07 1.43

Hill Khurd 12 9.71 18.58 3.67 2.50

Jamal Pur 35 5.54 1.11 1.89 0.11

Mandi 22 8.14 4.86 0.23 0.00

Total 173 6.04 2.64 1.33 0.64


6.6.1 Landholding by size and category

Most of the people (88%) own less than a kanal commercial land whereas only 4 people among the

samples’ population own more than 20 kanals of commercial land. The landholding size of cultivated

land is also small as 56% people own less than 10 kanals of land and 15% among them own even less

than a kanal of cultivated land. Only 8 people claimed to own more than 30 kanals of agricultural

land. One among them claimed to own more than 50 kanals, and 3 respondents said they had more

than 40 kanals. Only four respondents had 30-40 kanals.



6-7

Table 6.9: Average Landholdings by Area

Land in Kanals Farm Land (%) Forest Land (%) Barren Land (%) Commercial Land (%)

<1 15.00 79.00 75.00 88.00

1-9 41.00 5.00 12.00 7.00

10-19 24.00 8.00 8.00 0.00

20-29 13.00 3.00 4.00 2.00

30-39 4.00 1.00 1.00 2.00

40-49 3.00 1.00 0.00 0.00

50-60 1.00 3.00 0.00 0.00

Total 100.00 100.00 100.00 100.00


The ownership of landholding in other categories of forest and barren land is not much different

from the agricultural land which indicates subsistence farming in the area and no commercial level

forming is viable in the mountainous valleys to export the agricultural produce to other cities or

main market

6.7 Economic Profile

The main economic activity in area remains in agriculture, livestock and service sectors. Of the total

land area of about 414,019 acres of Kotli District, 20% is available for cultivation while 80% of the

land bears forest, settlements, infrastructures or lie in the form of uncultivable waste land. Wheat,

maize and rice are cultivated on about 63,200 acres, 53,400 acres and 12,000 acres of land,

respectively. Rice is not a common crop of Tehsil Kotli and it is cultivated in Nakyal sector. Average

production of wheat and maize is 22 and 24 mounds/acre, respectively. Wheat is cultivated for the

individual family needs and average land per family is about 5 acres. Vegetable and fruit trees are

spread over the area of 99 and 222 acres respectively in Kotli District. In plain areas citrus fruit trees

are present. Apple trees are also in the area but its fruit is not of good quality. The area is rural is

characterized with subsistence farming and cattle rearing livelihoods.

The survey identity the professions of those falling in the age bracket of 19 to 65. According to

survey finding 82% of the female workforce are housewives and 17% of the working males work

abroad. In addition, 20% of the male workforce is skilled, whereas no female was reported to be a

skilled worker. The following table depicts people associated with different profession and

vocations.



6-8

Figure 6.2: Occupation of Household Members (Above 19 years)

The survey results show that 11% of the male workforce is comprised of unskilled laborers, whereas

no female works as a laborer. Male population working in the government sector makes 7% of the

total workforce. Private jobs accommodate 11% males and 1% females. 8% of the total workforce is

engaged in business sector. The unemployment rate is 11%.

Table 6.10: Economic Situation of Project Area Population

Villages Households Total Sample

Population

Per

Household

Monthly

Income (PKR)

Per

Household

Monthly

Spending

(PKR)

Per Capita

Annual

Income (US$)

Per Capita

Annual

Consumption

(US$)

Aghar 28 280 36,696 36,939 423.42 426.22

Barali 15 138 49,087 43,487 615.64 545.40

Dharang 33 288 65,458 37,364 865.42 493.99

Gulhar 14 136 36,786 34,321 436.93 407.66

Hill Kalan 14 103 34,886 26,043 547.12 408.44

Hill Khurd 12 117 87,433 60,317 1,034.71 713.81

Jamal Pur 35 332 44,876 41,707 545.87 507.33

Mandi 22 209 28,591 26,845 347.26 326.06

Total 173 1603 47,261 37,797 588.52 470.67


Per capita income in project area is US$ 589 with Hill Khurd being the highest and lowest Mandi. This

is below the national per capita income which is US$ 1,256. Overall there is not a huge variance

between the per capita income of the villages except Hill Khurd and Dharang.

Table 6.11: Earning and Spending Characteristics of Project Area Population

Sources of Income Expense Heads

Source Contribution (%) Head Consumption (%)

Service/Job 19.87 Food 50.41

Business 23.73 Cooking and Heating 8.58

Skilled Labor 13.83 Housing Repair 3.40

20

11

7

11

13

11

8

0

2

17

0

0

1

1

5

4

7

82

0

0

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90

Skilled labor

Unskilled Labor

Govt Service

Private Job

Business

Unemployed

Disability

Housewives

Household chore

Working Abroad

Female (%) Male (%)



6-9

Sources of Income Expense Heads

Source Contribution (%) Head Consumption (%)

Unskilled Labor 7.24 Health Care 8.79

Pension 2.20 Education 9.84

Rental Income 1.31 Transport 5.65

Remittances 26.42 Utilities 4.63

Zakat/Bait-ul-Mal 0.04 Religious, Social Events 6.34

BISP 0.07 Other 2.37

Crops, Fruit, Vegetable 4.76

Land, Forest 0.07

Livestock, Poultry 0.24

Other 0.22

Total 100.00 Total 100.00


Majority of the rural population still relies on agriculture for its livelihood. However, there is

discrepancy between source of income between rural and urban areas because 84% of income

generation is derived from profession which are urban base, such as service/jobs, skilled labor,

business and remittances. With the increasing inflow of remittances the project area has witnessed

mushrooming of construction. However, its contribution to overall income generation is minimal at

1%. Typical agricultural and rural income generating sources like livestock, poultry, land, forests,

crops, fruits and vegetables make only 5.3% of total income generation. A salient feature of

remittance economy is that it does not lead to investment in enterprises or small scale industry;

rather it led to consumer culture. Thereby, siphoning off the hard earned income to outside areas.

The highest expenditure is 50.41% on food followed by education 10%. 9% of the total income is

spending on health care. Heating consumes 8% of the income. Rest of the expenditures is made on

house repair, transport, religious activities, festivals and utilities. It is important to highlight that the

expenditure on food is symptomatic of food insecurity as evident in the Table 6.10 that agriculture

and livestock 5.3% of the total income generation. In addition, food commodities are being imported

from main land in Pakistan. When people are faced with food insecurity, they tend to spend less on

health and education as a counter coping mechanism. Therefore, it can be said that increase in

expenses of one head has deteriorating impact on others.

Table 6.12: Income Ranges

Income Brackets (in Pak Rs.) Percent

< 5,000 0

5,000-15,000 13

15,001-25,000 21

25,001-35,000 16

35,001-45,000 14

45,001-55,000 15

55,001&above 21


The concentration of the poorest people (13%) falls in the bracket of Rs. 5,000-15,000 per month.

Ordinary concentration of households (21%) is in the bracket of Rs 15,001-25,000. 16% fall in the

bracket of 25,001-35,000. In the income of 35,001-45,000 per month falls 14% of the project



6-10

population. Those above 45,001 but below 55,000 make 15% of the population, whereas richest

concentration (21%) falls in the income bracket of Rs. 55,000 and above.

If different slots of income are divided between upper and lower incomes by attributing income

35,000 below and above respectively, then the ratio of people with lower and upper income remains

equal. Division of income slots into three categories of lower, middle and higher income provides

another perspective. If people with income of less than 25,000 per month are categorized as poor,

than they make 34% of the total, whereas people with middle income (above 25,000 and below

45,000) form 30% of the total. The remaining with income above 45,000 per month make majority

with 36% of the total. Cumulatively, both categories of middle and highest income make the bulk of

the population which is 66%.

6.8 Education

According to the information received from Department of Education AJK, apart from a campus of

University of Azad Jammu and Kashmir there is one post graduate college for men and 12 degree

colleges for men and women in the district. Total number of colleges in the district are given in Table

6.13.

Table 6.13: Educational Institutions in Kotli

Post Graduate Degree Inter Total

M F M F M F

1 0 6 6 8 11 32

Source: Survey Results and P&D AJK

The number of schools is 1028 according to Directorate of Schools AJK. The highest number of

Primary schools 478, followed by 279 mosque schools and 157 middle schools. Apart from the

government schools there are a number of private schools in the district.

Table 6.14: Schools and Education Facilities in Kotli

Mosque Primary Middle High Higher

Secondary

Indus

School

Village

Work Shop Total

276 478 157 108 6 2 1 1028

Source: Survey Results and P&D AJK

In the project area each settlement has primary level government schools for boys and girls within

an average distance of 2 km. However, the students after passing their middle class and

matriculation have to travel an average of 5 km to reach high schools or colleges in nearby town of

Kotli. For rural settlements the average distance to high schools is 5 to 10 km. The overall literacy in

the project area is as under:

Table 6.15: Literacy Level of Project Area Population

Level Male Female Total

Illiterate 20% 36% 27%

Basic Literacy 7% 2% 5%

Primary 17% 15% 16%

Middle 18% 20% 19%

Metric 21% 18% 19%

Intermediate 12% 7% 10%



6-11

Level Male Female Total

Degree 4% 1% 3%

Masters 2% 0% 1%

Diploma 1% 0% 1%


Overall 27% of the population falling above the eligible age of 10 years population is illiterate (20%

men and 36% women). Among the literate, 5% have basic literacy, 16% have attended primary

school, 21% and 12% have done metric and intermediate respectively. Although there is a campus of

the University of AJK in Kotli district, only 3% have attained a university degree followed by 1%

master’s degree holders. In addition, 14% children of school going age did not attend school at all.

Overall there are more males than females in education school with the exception of middle level

where female are 20% as compare to 18% men.

6.9 Population Health Profile

There is one District Headquarter (DHQ) Hospital in District Kotli, three Rural Health centers, 20 First

Aid Posts (FAPs) and 16 Mother Child Health Care (MCH) Centers along with other health facilities at

grassroots level.

Table 6.16: Health Facilities in Kotli

DHQ

Hospitals

RH

Cs

BH

Us

Dispensa

ries

FA

Ps

MCH

Centres

TB Leprosy

Centres

Dental

Centres

EPI

Centres

Malaria Sub

Centres

1 3 25 13 20 16 6 4 30 25

Source: Planning and Development Department Govt of AJK

Access and preference of the people in the project area was ascertained through a question and

almost all of the population (97.5%) said to have access to medical consultations and check-ups.

Being in the vicinity of District Headquarters the majority (76%) of population goes to DHQ as their

first option. 50% showed their dissatisfaction with the services being provided in the hospital and

45% showed satisfaction.

Table 6.17: Health Status

Facility DHQ Private Doctor Dispensary/ BHU/ RHC

Access by people 76% 15% 5%


There are private clinics and hospitals operating in the main town of Kotli which are approached by

15% respondents in the project area. Only 5% respondents said to approach a lower level

government facility for checkups and treatment.

6.10 Housing

The housing pattern is lavish in terms of size and construction as more than 88% of the structures

are pukka, made of cement and bricks with RCC structures. Only 5% houses and structures are

kacha, made of mud and stone, whereas 6% structures are a combination of kacha and pakka.

Table 6.18: Housing Characteristics in the Area

Village/Se Househo Family Structure Type of housing structure Ownership Number of



6-12

ttlement lds

Joint (%) Nuclear

(%)

Pakka

(%)

Kacha

(%) Mix (%)

of

Residence

(%)

Rooms per

House

Aghar 28 57.14 42.86 82.14 10.71 7.14 100.00 5.50

Barali 15 60.00 40.00 86.67 6.67 6.67 100.00 5.87

Dharang 33 63.64 36.36 96.97 3.03 0.00 100.00 5.70

Gulhar 14 50.00 50.00 78.57 21.43 0.00 100.00 4.79

Hill Kalan 14 50.00 50.00 92.86 7.14 0.00 92.86 6.07

Hill Khurd 12 66.67 33.33 100.00 0.00 0.00 100.00 6.00

Jamal Pur 35 60.00 40.00 85.71 0.00 14.29 97.14 6.54

Mandi 22 45.45 54.55 86.36 0.00 13.64 95.45 4.23

Total 173 57.23 42.77 88.44 5.20 6.36 98.27 5.64


The average rooms in a single housing unit are 2-5 in 55% houses, whereas 41% of households have

5-10 rooms and 3% houses are with 10-20 rooms. The entire surveyed population owned their

houses, as no one reported to have rented residential accommodation.

6.10.1 Water Supply and Sanitation

According to Government of AJK, currently 80% of the urban population and 66% of rural population

has been provided with a piped water supply through house connections and public stands. The

entire population (95%) in the project area has access to drinking water in their houses. 23% use

water from wells and 50% use water from both wells and pipeline. 32% have facility of sewerage

system, and 57% use septic tank. 7% percent use a pit latrine and 4% use open fields. The majority of

households do not have drainage facility (68%).

Table 6.19: Water Supply and Sanitation

Village/Se

ttlement

House

holds

HH

Size

Source of Household Water Latrine Type Availability

of Drainage

(%) Pipe (%) Well (%) Both (%)

Pit

latrine

Septic

Tank Open

Aghar 28 10.00 28.57 17.86 53.57 71.43 25.00 3.57 25.00

Barali 15 9.20 13.33 26.67 60.00 33.33 66.67 0.00 33.33

Dharang 33 8.73 36.36 21.21 42.42 48.48 51.52 0.00 48.48

Gulhar 14 9.71 14.29 28.57 57.14 21.43 64.29 14.29 21.43

Hill Kalan 14 7.36 28.57 28.57 42.86 28.57 71.43 0.00 42.86

Hill Khurd 12 9.75 0.00 50.00 50.00 25.00 75.00 0.00 33.33

Jamal Pur 35 9.49 37.14 11.43 51.43 25.71 65.71 8.57 34.29

Mandi 22 9.50 4.55 31.82 63.64 31.82 63.64 4.55 13.64

Total 173 9.27 24.28 23.70 52.02 38.73 57.23 4.05 32.37


6.10.2 Source of Energy

At present the total installed grid capacity in AJK is 403 MVA. About 20,242 km transmission lines

provided to 1,629 villages. Out of these villages about 390,671 consumers have been provided with

power connections.

Electricity connection is available to all the households (100%) in the project area. The electricity is

used for lighting, washing, cooling and heating etc. For cooking and heating purposes 55% percent of

the households use Liquid Petroleum Gas (LPG) and 7 % use wood. 34% rely on LPG and wood as

fuel.



6-13

Table 6.20: Sources of energy for cooking and heating

Energy Source LPG Wood Both

%age 55% 7% 34%


6.11 Gender Issues

The women have no formal role in the authority structure of the nearby villages. They are about 48%

of the population in these villages; the literacy rate for above 10 years of female population is 67%

(80% for males). Apart from schools there are 6 degree colleges and 11 Intermediate colleges in the

whole district for female population. The traditional attitude of not sending the girls to school is

changing now, because the parents understand that the basic education is necessary for each

individual regardless of sex. Most of the women stay at home and only travel outside the village in

case of visiting to shrines, relatives, and going to weddings and hospitals in nearby towns.

• Local women pointed out the following major issues relating to this project activities;

• Working women (school teachers, lady health visitors & others) of the area will feel

uncomfortable for traveling/ mobility during the construction activities;

• The timing of construction activities and local population especially women and children

should be adjusted in view of their routine mobility/ schools timing and working/ jobs

timing;

• Local women mobility will be restricted because of construction activities along the

road.

• Construction should be done as fast as can be because in some emergencies women and

children will have to go hospitals for health care purposes;

• Waiting sheds may be constructed, including provision of drinking water, toilet facilities,

partition in waiting shed for females and males.

6.12 Vulnerable Groups

There is none falling under the category of ultra-poor as all the households have a monthly income

which is above PKR 5,000/- and expenditure accordingly. The high monthly income is because of the

remittance from abroad as every household has a family member or a closed relative working

abroad who support the families and their spouses living in the country.

No household was found to be headed by women or elderly as well as people with disabilities and

handicaps. Every household in the project area owns its own house for residence and there was no

household living in a rented home. All the households have access to basic social infrastructures like

schools, health facilities and roads in the area.

The project will have an overall positive impact on the living conditions of the local people as the

employment opportunities as well as business opportunities would be increased which will be

offered to local people as a priority. Moreover, the project Affected People will be compensated for

loss of their land and non-land assets according to a Land Acquisition and Resettlement Framework

which has been agreed by MPL and local communities. Under this LARF provisions the vulnerable



6-14

have clearly been defined. The vulnerable including families headed by women, elderly people with

limited abilities and those who lose more than 10% of their productive assets will adequately be

compensated and supported with additional allowances and job to improve their livelihoods or

maintain at least pre project conditions.

6.13 Cultural Heritage

Kotli has the official status of ‘city of the mosques’ or

“Madina –tul- Masajid. There are some shrines of saints.

One of them is in Gulhar, situated in south of the city, has

the tombs of two Islamic Scholars; Qazi Fateh-ulla

Siddiqui and Khawaja Muhammad Sadiq whose son

Muhammad Zahid Sultani is also a great Islamic scholar.

The tombs of some of the greatest Islamic Scholars Syed

Noor Hussain Shah, Syed Aftab Hussain Shah and Syed

Mushtaq Husssain Shah are in Mandi in the north of city

on Poonch river bank.

6.14 Community Health, Safety and Security

A separate community health, safety and security plan is to be developed by EPC Contractor and

implemented to avoid health, safety and security issues emerging as result of implementation of the

project.

Figure 6.3: Infrastructure and Cultural Heritage



7-1

7 ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES

Alternatives are essentially, different ways through which the proponent can feasibly achieve

sustainable development by carrying out a different type of actions, choosing design alternatives or

adopting a different technology or design for the Project to create win-win scenario for all

stakeholders. At the more detailed level, alternatives merge into mitigating measure where specific

changes are made to the project design or to methods of construction or operation to avoid, reduce

or remedy environmental effects. All ESIA systems also require developers to consider mitigation

(i.e. measures to avoid, reduce and remedy significant adverse effects).

Alternatives and mitigation, therefore, cover a spectrum ranging from a high level to very detailed

aspects of project design. As an example they might range from:

• different strategies e.g. to manage demand or reduce losses rather than develop a new

resource;

• different sites or routes for all or part of the project;

• different technologies and raw materials e.g. construction of a thermal power plant rather

than a hydro power plant;

• altered layouts or designs e.g. locating noisy activities away from sensitive receptors;

• environmental measures incorporated into the project design e.g. construction of an

ecoduct to ensure safe passage of wildlife across a motorway rather than establishment of

compensatory habitat.

The “No Project” scenario must also be considered as the baseline against which the environmental

effects of the project should be considered. This may include changes from the present day situation

as a result of other developments taking place in the vicinity and changes in environmental

conditions. This section of the report presents the analysis of the alternatives considered for the

proposed project. The following scenarios have been considered:

• No Project Scenario;

• Alternate Methods of Power Generation;

• Alternate Location of the Project;

• Design Alternatives

• Selection of Access Roads & Alignment;

7.1 No Project Scenario

The “No Project” option is least considered option for Pakistan. The country is currently going

through the worse power crisis of the history. Energy crisis is considered as major development

hurdle in Pakistan and has resulted in formulation of the national energy policy in the recent past.

The energy crisis is being given utmost priority at the government level. The acute power shortage in

Pakistan has resulted in massive load shedding in the country hugely deteriorating the economic

development and growth.



7-2

An analysis of electricity data for year 2012-13 reveal that the minimum shortfall was 1,141 MW,

while it touched the figured of 6,390 MW at one point in period under consideration. The average

shortfall over the year remained 3,886 MW which is around 26% of the average demand of

electricity during year.

The maximum generation during the year was 14,756 MW which is only 78% of the maximum

demand of electricity. Whereas the minimum generation during the year was 7,345 MW which is

65% of the minimum demand in the same period.

The total generation was 95,364 GWh during year 2011-12, however 2,382 GWh were consumed as

auxiliary load by power plants. As discussed above, this generation represents only 47% capacity

utilization. The extraordinary transmission and distribution losses (around 22%) have added to

catastrophe.

The No Project scenario is considered or adopted it would mean that the already power deficient

economy would suffer even more and at current rate if no power is added to the national grid

Currently, power outages are in the range of 12-14 hours daily for the rural areas and 8-10 hours for

the urban areas, while at the same time the industrial sector is also suffering huge financial losses

due to the power outages. Given the gravity of energy crisis and its repercussion on the economy,

Pakistan cannot afford to deprive itself of a major project of cheap source of electricity.

7.2 Alternate Methods of Power Generation

7.2.1 Electricity Generation Options

There are different options available to generate electricity which include but are not limited to

production using furnace oil, natural gas, coal, solar and hydel.

The root of all the devastation in power industry, other than crowning transmission and distribution

losses, is the unsolicited expensive energy mix. Out of total 22,797 MW installed capacity, only 6,556

MW is Hydel power. The rest of capacity is mostly thermal projects with little contribution of 3%

from nuclear production. Out of total 95,364 GWh produced during year 2011-12, only 30% has

been generated by Hydel resources, 29% has been produced using natural gas while the 35%

generation was dependable on expensive furnace oil. The nuclear energy contributed 5.5%, whereas

a minor part of energy also came through diesel and coal (see Table 7.1).

Average cost of the energy delivered to Discos was PKR 7.11 per kilowatt hour. The average cost of

delivery from furnace oil was PKR. 15.94. While the cost from coal generation came around PKR

3.18, the Hydel generation cost only PKR 0.16 per kilowatt hour (as most of the hydro plants have

already paid their debts and incurring nominal O&M cost).

The government plans to replace the expensive furnace oil projects with coal technology to reduce

the overall cost of production. On the other hand the power policy 2013 is focusing on the control of

inefficiencies in transmission and distribution infrastructure.



7-3

Non-renewable options such as solar and wind are not brought into the national grid at any of the

location in Pakistan, however, few wind projects are at different stages of

implementation/construction.

Table 7.1: Electricity generation by Source 2012-13

Source % Share in Power Mix

Hydel 30.0

Oil 35.0

Coal 0.5

Gas 229.0

Nuclear and Imported 5.5

Pakistan imports oil from other countries to meet domestic needs whilst the gas reserves of the

country are fast depleting and hence cannot be presently considered as reliable sources of power

generation. In the last few years the cost of furnace oil has sky rocketed. The only coal used in

Pakistan is imported from Indonesia and South Africa. The Thar Coal resources are still in early stages

of exploration and are yet to be further evaluated for potential to generate electricity.

Wind power is currently in the experimental stage and few projects are under implementation and

having lower efficiency and power potential cannot be considered as a replacement or full time

substitute of other sources of power generation.

Numerous perennial and seasonal rivers are flowing in the north south direction in Pakistan. Hence

Hydel power is considered a viable option for a country rich in surface water resources. For a

developing country like Pakistan minimum O&M cost makes the hydel power as a viable option.

7.2.2 Cost for Electricity Generation

Hydropower is the cheapest source of electricity in terms of per unit cost and maintenance of the

generation system when compared with other alternatives, such as the furnace oil or gas run power

plants. Hydropower requires significant initial investment compared with thermal options, however,

once the debts are paid back the cost of electricity generation reduces significantly resulting in long

term energy security of the country. A typical hydropower project in private sector has a levelized

cost around 8-9 US cents/KWh with a generation cost of about 3 US cents/KWh after debt

repayments are complete. In comparison the thermal projects (furnace oil based) currently have the

levelized cost of around 16.0 US cents/KWh and keep on increasing with time due to continuous

increase in oil prices.

7.2.3 Reliability of Power Generation

For assessing the reliability of power generation, the plant load factor can be used as an indicator.

The load factor of an energy technology is the ratio (expressed as a percentage) of the net amount

of electricity generated by a power plant to the net amount which it could have generated if it were

operating at its net output capacity. The plant load factors for different power generation sources

are presented in Table 7.2.



7-4

Table 7.2: Plant Load Factors

Technology Plant Load Factor

Combined Cycle Gas Turbine (CCGT) 70-85%

Waste to Energy 60-90%

Coal 65-85%

Nuclear Power 65-85%

Hydro 30-50%

Wind Energy 25-40%

Wave Power 25%

Source: Renewable UK

The hydro power plants have a plant load factor in the tune of 30-50 %, which is lesser than that for

conventional power generation sources with higher load factor of 60% - 80%. However, it is higher

than those of other renewable energy options such as wind and wave energy.

7.2.4 Green House Gas Emissions

Greenhouse gases are one of the main causes of the rising global temperatures and climate change

or climates shifts. Options are assessed all over the world for going towards technologies to reduce

or eliminate the emissions of the greenhouse gases into the atmosphere. The main source of power

generation in Pakistan is the thermal power which is based on fuel oil and / or natural gas. These

options have greenhouse gas emissions and create a significant carbon foot print on the

deteriorating natural environment of the country and in the wider context of the regional

environment.

According to the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC), the world emits approximately

27 gigatonnes of CO2e from multiple sources, with electrical production emitting 10 gigatonnes, or

approximately 37% of global emissions. In addition, electricity demand is expected to increase by

43% over the next 20 years.

Table 7.3: Lifecycle Greenhouse Gas Emissions by Electricity Source

Technology Description 50th Percentile (g CO2/kWhe)

Coal various generator types without scrubbing 1001

Natural Gas various combined cycle turbines without scrubbing 469

Solar PV polycrystalline silicon 46

Geothermal hot dry rock 45

Solar Thermal parabolic trough 22

Biomass Various 18

Nuclear Various generation II reactor types 16

Wind Onshore 12

Hydroelectric Reservoir 4 Source: Moomaw, W., P. Burgherr, G. Heath, M. Lenzen, J. Nyboer, A. Verbruggen, 2011: Annex II: Methodology. In IPCC:

Special Report on Renewable Energy Sources and Climate Change Mitigation

Coal fired power plants have the highest Green House Gas (GHG) emission intensities on a lifecycle

basis. Although natural gas and to some degree oil, have noticeably lower GHG emissions; biomass,

nuclear, hydroelectric, wind, and solar photovoltaic all have lifecycle GHG emission intensities that

are significantly lower than fossil fuel based generation (Figure 7.1).



7-5

Figure 7.1: Lifecycle GHG Emissions Intensity of Electricity Generation Methods

17

World Nuclear Association (WNA)'s report places wind energy's 26 tonnes CO2e/GWh emission

intensity at 7% of the emission intensity of natural gas and only 3% of the emission intensity of coal

fired power plants. In addition, the lifecycle GHG emission intensity of hydropower generation is

consistent with renewable energy sources including biomass, hydroelectric and nuclear.

The proposed project is located in a greener area where installation of a combustion based power

plant would only deteriorate the environment, while installation of hydro power station would not

have any greenhouse emissions from plant operations and the positive economic impact would help

reduce the pressure on the local natural resources. It is obvious from the above table the hydro

power plants are the lowest ranked in terms of greenhouse emissions into the environment while

the much publicized coal power plants are the most notorious when it comes to greenhouse gas

emissions.

7.2.5 Rationale for Selection of Hydro Power Generation Option

As discussed in the above sections, the hydro power generation option is most feasible in Pakistan,

as the country has significant potential to fulfill its energy requirements. It is the second largest

source of power generation. The economics of power generation from hydro power is favorable and

almost comparable to natural gas option. The hydro power generation is also one of the cleanest

energy generation options and has a suitable plant load factor as well. Additionally, hydropower

projects help in grid stabilization.

17

World Nuclear Association Report



7-6

7.3 Alternate Location for the Project

The Gulpur Hydropower Project (GHPP) was first identified by GTZ/HEPO-WAPDA and presented in

their report “Comprehensive Planning of Hydropower Resources in Jhelum River Basin – Medium

Hydropower Projects in Poonch River Catchment”, Lahore – July 1992.

The study by GTZ/HEPO-WAPDA had identified following five locations for developing hydropower

potential in the Poonch River catchment:

1. Rajdhani Dam (10 Km from the end of Mangla Reservoir)

2. Gulpur Dam (28 Km from the end of Mangla Reservoir)

3. Barali Dam (37 Km from the end of Mangla Reservoir)

4. Kotli Dam (47 Km from the end of Mangla Reservoir)

5. Sehra Dam (67 Km from the end of Mangla Reservoir)

The possible Poonch River development, as suggested by GTZ-WAPDA, was to be carried out in two

main combinations. Combination-A comprised four sites, which include Sehra, Kotli, Barali and

Rajdhani dam sites whereas Combination-B consisted of three sites namely Sehra, Kotli and Gulpur

dam sites. GTZ proposed a 90 m high concrete gravity dam at Gulpur with an installed capacity of

116 MW; annual energy of project was estimated about 702 GWh.

AJK Hydroelectric Board in 1996 decided to get the previous studies reviewed and confirmed and

thus hired the services of the Korean consultants who made a field reconnaissance of the four sites

identified in the above-mentioned GTZ/HEPO-WAPDA report. After studying these sites, Koreans

identified a new site, which is located near Gulpur Village approximately 7 Km downstream of the

Barali dam site identified by GTZ/HEPO-WAPDA and at 18 Km downstream of Kotli city. Considering

its location, the Koreans have given this site the name of “Gulpur Hydroelectric Project” which is

obviously different from the Gulpur site identified by GTZ/HEPO-WAPDA. At this site, Korean

suggested a 57 m high concrete gravity dam with an installed capacity of 60 MW; annual energy of

project was estimated about 348 GWh. This site was assigned to the Consultants for the Feasibility

Study.

During the initial stages of the feasibility study, it was noticed that the reservoir level (El 475 m) of

proposed Rajdhani Hydropower Project would submerge the Gulpur site identified by the Korean.

After detailed survey of the river and discussion with AJK HEB, the site was shifted to an upstream

location above the reservoir level of Rajdhani Hydropower Project.

During Conceptual Stage, several locations were examined to find a suitable site where a high

storage dam could be built to maximize the power potential. The finally recommended site was

designated as Axis F-F. Project was conceived as of 120 MW installed capacity. The annual energy of

the Project was estimated at about 640 GWh, which was to be produced with the help of an 80 m

high Roller Compacted Concrete dam through an underground powerhouse to be located in the

right bank.



7-7

After considering various design alternatives (as explained below in Section 1.4) the final site

location will ensure that the Kotli and Rajdhani Dam can also be constructed along with the Gulpur

Dam. To ensure the natural and social environment are not disturbed numerous tweak in the design

are included.

7.4 Design Alternatives

It is a general practice all over the world for dam engineering that reservoir rim periphery has to be

closed either through natural contours at dam crest elevation or by constructing a man-made

structures to avoid resettlement areas. Man-made structure can be earthen dyke, Roller Compacted

Concrete Embankment, Concrete retaining walls etc.

During the finalization of the feasibility study of the Project Consultants initially recommended the

normal operating level (NOL) of reservoir at El. 550 m. The Project layout involved submergence of

about 646 houses and 1800 acres of inhabited area affecting nearly 5,000 people.

However, in an effort to reduce the environmental and social impacts through limiting the

submergence of populated area by reservoir waters were further explored by the consultants upon

the requirement of proponent. It was concluded that dislocating and rehabilitation of the

inhabitants of the area would be problematic and require heavy expenditure with associated social

issues. It was found that submergence can be avoided, if the normal operating level (NOL) of

reservoir is lowered from El. 550 m to El. 540 m. The lowering of NOL does not affect the technical

viability of the Project.

Following three options described below were studied in the aforesaid context:

• Option 1: It is based on the earlier concept where a 75m high dam with NOL at El. 550 m and

an underground powerhouse was proposed.

• Option 2: This is essentially Option-1 but with a reduced dam height of 60 m and NOL at El.

535 m. In this option, submergence of villages will be avoided.

• Option 3: This option is based on the concept wherein the head is partly created by a weir

and partly by a tunnel utilizing the steep gradient of the river. The Project works consist: a 30

m high weir-cum-spillway to maintain the reservoir level at El. 540 m, an intake structure in

the Nullah to divert river flows through a 3.04 km long power tunnel, a surge shaft, steel

penstock and a surface powerhouse at the end of the tunnel.

Following the selection of Option 3 as the most viable option, further design optimization and

studies were based on such option under which maximum reservoir level was fixed at El. 540.0 m to

avoid submergence of surrounding villages and Project was conceived as run-of river with small

storage.

Option 3 has advantageous in respect of the following crucial aspects:

Significant reduction is resettlement which is further reduced by exercising the option of

construction earthen dyke is the resettled areas;

• Significant saving in rehabilitation cost



7-8

• Diversion tunnels are not required.

• Overall cost of the Project will be reduced.

• Reduction in construction time

• Reduction in construction difficulties due to a surface powerhouse

• Longer life of Project due to effective sluicing of incoming sediments

In an effort to further curtail the resettlement and minimizing environmental impacts for selected

Option 3 (as explained above) different options were further studied keeping in view the following

considerations:

• Height of water retaining structure should be minimum for stability and cost point of view

• Availability of construction material in the vicinity of the project

• Minimum risk for the downstream populated areas

• Minimum health and environmental risk

• Stability and reliability of water retaining structures

• Adequate free board to cater flood volume

• Minimum disturbance of the local residents

• Arrangement for collection and disposal of rain water for the downstream areas

The further options studied were as follows:

• Option-1: Earthen Protection dyke + Collection Drain + Dewatering Arrangement

• Option-2: Retaining Wall + Collection Drain + Dewatering Arrangement

• Option-3: Earth filling up to EL. 540 m + Earthen Dyke

Screening of three selected options will also be applicable for left banks resettlement areas (Laloi

and Mandi).

Table 7.4: Screening of Available Options for Right bank

Relevant Aspect Option-1 Option-2 Option-3

Topography Favorable Favorable Favorable

Geological and Geotechnical Conditions

Favorable Favorable Favorable

Availability of Construction Material

Favorable Acceptable Favorable

Dewatering Arrangement Required Required Nil

Ease of Construction Favorable Marginally Favorable

Favorable

Houses to be Inundated Nil Nil 27 houses can be rebuild with raised elevation

Graveyard to be Inundated Nil Nil Can be Raised

Religious Bodies (Shrines and Mosques etc)

Nil Nil 01 Shrine

Social Impact Low Low Medium

Cost Low High Moderately High

Suitability Most suitable

Less Suitable Suitable

Technical Rating First Third Second Note: Same screening results will be applicable for left bank areas



7-9

Conclusions drawn from the above comparison are as follows:

1. Option-1 is considered most suitable to the site specific conditions and thus is technically

rated as the first choice.

2. Option-2 is considered also suitable to the site specific conditions and is technically rated as

the third choice.

3. Option-3 is considered marginally suitable to the site specific conditions and thus is

technically rated as the second choice.

7.4.1 Option-1: Earthen Dyke with Collection Drain and Dewatering

7.4.1.1 For Right Bank Area

Further optimization of Option-1 has been carried out to arrive at most optimum solution with

respect to cost of land acquisition, resettlement and compensation. Main criteria for this

optimization were kept to reduce the cost of earthen dyke by reducing the length and height of

earthen dyke, which should be compared with the cost of resettlement to arrive at the most

optimum solution. Six scenarios of option-1 were plotted as conceptual layouts Figure 7.2.

Table 7.5 shows that with the reduction of dyke length by shifting it towards the uphill, cost for dyke

and other arrangement reduces. However, cost for resettlement, land acquisition and compensation

will increase.

7.4.1.2 For Left Bank Laloi Area

In Laloi area, total 10.48 acre land at EL. 542 m and 20 houses will be inundated, if no engineering

solution is provided for resettlement curtailment. With earthen protection dyke and associated

arrangement, land and houses can be saved for resettlement and compensation. Conceptual layout

and cross section of proposed engineering solution of earthen dyke and collection drain is shown in

Figure 7.2 along with tabular details.

7.4.1.3 For Left Bank Mani Area

In Mandi area, total 17.70 acre land at EL. 542 m, one shrine, one mosque, few rooms and private

crusher plant will need to be displaced or relocated, if no engineering solution is provided for

resettlement curtailment. With earthen protection dyke and collection drain, these structures can be

saved for resettlement and compensation. In this area most important structure is shrine. Actual

shrine has already been submerged in the river. Therefore, keeping in view the emotional and

religious affiliation of locals with the symbolic Shrine, it can be relocated at some higher elevation of

same area.

Conceptual layout for proposed engineering solution of earthen dyke and collection drain is shown

in Figure 7.2 along with Table 7.5.



7-10

Table 7.5: Optimization of Option 1

Relevant Aspect Embankment Alignment Options

R 1 R 2 R 3 R 4 R 5 R 6

Length of Dyke or Retaining Wall (m) 1237 1150 1021 918 777 300

*Avg. Height (m) 7.3 6.8 6.4 5.8 5.4 5.6

Area to be Inundated (Acre) 31.7 32.79 42.65 50.22 58.77 94.09 (KDA)

Houses to be Inundated Nil 3 5 11 24 78

Area of graveyard to be inundated (Acre)

Total 4.12 Nil Nil 1.2 3 4 4.12

Other Structures (Rooms/Shrines/School) Nil Nil Nil 0/1/0 0/1/0 1/3/2001

Social Impact Low > > > > High

Cost High > > > > Low

Suitability Most

Suitable Suitable

Less Suitable

Technical Rating First Second Third Fourth Fifth Sixth *Crest of dykes (earthen embankment) is kept at EL. 545 m in accordance with main dam crest of EL. 545 m given in the

basic design report of the Gulpur Hydropower Project

7.4.2 Option-2: Concrete Retaining Wall with Collection Drain and

Very high cost was anticipated for dewatering arrangement in this option, therefore further working

and development of conceptual layouts and cross-sections have not been developed. However,

conceptual layout will generally be the same as of Option-1.

7.4.3 Option-3: Earthen Filling with Earthen Dyke and Collection Drain

In this option, area of about 54.44 acres up to EL 540.25 m has to be filled with common material

along with construction of earthen dyke up to EL. 545 m and collection drain. Run-off water will be

discharged into the lake at Normal Operation Level (NOL) of EL. 540 m through concrete outlet

structures and flap valves. During detailed studies, if reveals, one collection drain at EL. 542 m will be

provided to drain the catchment run-off into the lake. Pros and cons of this option are as follow:

• Pros:

o No pumping is required for dewatering

o No land acquisition is required, same land after raising to higher elevation of 545.25

m (average thickness of filling =1.5 to 2 m) will be used for cultivation.

o Only 16 houses will need to be either shifted or re-build at the same location

o Operation and maintenance cost is negligible

• Cons:

o High Cost

o Shifting of 16 houses

In this option, collection drain may be required, if hydrological studies confirm this. Conceptual

layout of Option-3 for the left and right bank resettlement curtailment is shown as Figure 7.3.

7.4.3.1 For Left Bank Laloi Area

In Laloi area, total 5.70 acre land at EL. 540.25 m will need to be filled with common material, for

which 27 houses will be either displaced to save location or re-build at same location at higher

elevation. Apparently, it seems that cost for earth filling along with cost of resettlement and

compensation will be much higher than Option-1 as described above.



7-11

7.4.3.2 For Left Bank Mani Area

In Mandi area, total 12.82 acre land at EL. 540.25 m will need to be filled with common material, for

which one shrine, one mosque, one private crusher plant and few rooms will be either displaced to

save location or re-build at same location at higher elevation. Apparently, it seems that cost for

earth filling along with cost of resettlement and compensation will be much higher than Option-1 as

describe above.

Figure 7.2: Conceptual Plan for Resettlement Curtailment Option 1 and 2



7-12

Figure 7.3: Conceptual Plan for Resettlement Curtailment Option 3

7.4.4 No Dyke Option

If the no dyke option is considered than it would have significant social, environmental and

economic implications. These would be hard to address and take time which would not be favorable

for the project and the general public interest. Therefore, it can safely be concluded in the light of

previous dyke options discussion that dyke option should be used so that the social and

environmental issues associated with the project would be minimized and set precedent for other

similar projects.



8-1

8 STAKEHOLDER CONSULTATIONS

8.1 General

This section describes the outcomes of the stakeholder consultation process as part of the ESIA. This

ensures that feedback from communities and other stakeholders directly or indirectly affected by

the project is collected so that it may be used to adjust and improve the project’s design, planning,

implementation and help structure ensuring that the project is both environmentally and socially

sound. The consultation process was carried out in accordance with the requirements of the ADB

and IFC and Government of AJK on public consultation.

The objectives of this process were:

• To disseminate information on the project and its expected impact, long-term as well as

short-term, among primary and secondary stakeholders,

• To gather information on relevant issues so that the feedback received could be used to

address these issues at an early stage,

• To determine the extent of the negative impacts of different project activities and suggest

appropriate mitigation measures.

8.2 Identification of Stakeholders

There are two types of stakeholders, i.e.

8.2.1 Primary stakeholders.

The primary stakeholders are the initial stakeholders, such as affected persons, general public and

women residing in the project area. Accordingly, the consultations/ focus group discussions were

made with all above primary stakeholders for sharing of information about the proposed project and

expected impacts and understanding about the concerns by category of stakeholders.

8.2.2 Secondary stakeholders

The secondary stakeholders are the representatives of Government Departments/Agencies involved

in the planning, design, implementation and operation of the project, including various government

departments such as District Administration, Revenue Department, WAPDA, Agriculture including

the Horticulture wing, Irrigation, Forest, PWD and other relevant departments.

8.3 Stakeholder Consultation Process

The overall strategy for stakeholder’s consultation is as follows:

Table 8.1: Process of stakeholder’s consultations

Stakeholders Purpose of consultations Methodology Stage

Primary Stakeholders

• Information gathering and data

collection.

• Information sharing about the project

(disclosure)

• FGDs

• Household surveys

• Formal and informal

Community meetings

• Base line

study

• Impact

assessment



8-2

Stakeholders Purpose of consultations Methodology Stage

• Opinion seeking (concerns and expectations) • Grievance redress • Involvement of PAPs

• Inventory of Losses • Price fixation Discloser

Secondary Stakeholders

• Participation in the process • Information gathering • Authentication and validation of the processes verification of the record

• One on one meetings • In-depth interviews • Group meetings

• On need basis

Stakeholder consultation for this project was planned in two stages. The first stage was scoping,

which has already taken place, consisted of meetings with individuals, groups, relevant organizations

and government departments, which are in some way linked to the project and therefore considered

stakeholders. The meetings were conducted to inform stakeholders about the project and how it

may affect their lives/activities, and to record their concerns, whether real or perceived. Through the

use of various tools the study team tried to involve the stakeholders in active decision-making. The

results of this exercise are described below, where mitigation measures have been developed

addressing the pertinent stakeholder concerns.

The second stage of the stakeholders’ consultation was part of the separate study conducted for the

preparation land acquisition and resettlement framework of the project. The results of this study

and the proposed mitigation measures for potential social impacts will be documented separately

and will be included in the overall framework of the proposed project.

8.4 Primary Stakeholders Consultation

Apart from gathering of quantitative data through household survey of the area of influence of the

project and 100% survey of project affected people a total of 16 consultations (qualitative) were

conducted with the affected persons and other local community to share the information about the

project and record their concerns/ feedback associated with this project. In this context, APs shared

their view point regarding the assessment especially price assessment, method of payment of

compensation and procedure for entering their concerns/ grievances. A list of public consultations is

presented in the below table:

Table 8.2: List of Primary Stakeholder’s Consultations in the Project Area

No Date Location/Venue Name of Main Participants

1 21-06-2013 Hill Khurd

- Mr. Zulfiqar Hussain Shan - Mr. Adil Shah - Mr. Khalid Mehmood - Mr. Muhammad Hussain

2 22-06-2013 Hill Khurd

- Mr. Muhammad Dad - Mr. Talib Shah - Mr. Sadar Sharif - Mr. Mushtaq Shan - Mr. Yaqoob Shan - Mr. Sardar Azeem



8-3


3 24-06-2013 Hill Khurd

- Mr. Sobidar Javed

- Mr. Ahmed Shah

- Mr. Abid Shah

- Mr. Rehmat Shah

- Mr. Sardar Shah

- Mr. Anwar Shah

4 25-06-2013 Hill Kalan

- Mr. Mohammad Khan

- Mr. Mohammad Shafiq

- Mr. Mohammad Shakeel

- Mr. Talib Hussain

- Mr. Khadim Hussain

- Chaudhray Azam

5 26-06-2013 Hill Kalan

- Mr. Mohammad Hussain

- Chaudhry Fazal

- Mr. Abdul Rehman

- Mr. Khadim Hussain Shah

- Chaudhry Talib

- Mr. Shafiq & others

6 27-06-2013 Hill Kalan

- Mr. Wazir Batt

- Mr. Akram Batt

- Mirza Bashrat

- Mr. Rehmatullah Batt

- Mr. Farqan Batt

- Mr. Mohammad Idress Batt

7 30-06-2013 Laloi

- Chaudhry Lal

- Mr. Abdul Majeed

- Mr. Abdul Haneef

- Mr. Abdul Hafeez

- Mr. Abdul Azeem

8 1-07-2013 Laloi

- Mr. Abdurashid

- Mr. M Riasat

- Mr. Abdul Qayyum

- Mr. Abdul Latif

9 2-07-2013 Laloi

- Mr. Aurangzeb

- Mr. M Azam

- Mr. M Mushtaq

10 4-07-2013 Laloi

- Mr. Atif Mushtaq

- Mr. M Azam

- Mr. M Ashi

11 5-07-2013 Banar - Mr. Sadiq Mehmood

12 7-07-2013 Rehmani Muhallah

- Mr. Mehboob Ali

- Mr. Abid Ali

- Mr. Sajid Ali

- Mr. M Younis

13 9-07-2013 Noshki - Mian Abdul Rehman

- Mr. Ghulam

14 30-06- 2013 Hill Kalan /Hill Khurd

- Gultraz Bukhari

- Khadim Hussain

- Syed Zahoor

- Syed Kazim Hussain

- Syed Zulfiqar

- M. Atif



8-4


15 29-06-2013 Dharang/Jamal Pur

- Akarak Ali

- Raja Maqsood

- Shahid Javed

- Shehryaar Sabir

- Sahid Javed

- Rashid

16 28-06-2013 Barali

- Abdul Rehman

- Qamar Zaman

- M. Saleem

- Syed Naseem Hussain

- Muhammad Akarm

- Khalid Rashid

- Qurashi

- Iftikhar Ahmed

- M. Khalid

8.4.1 Topics for Discussion

The topics discussed in the consultations were

• Land acquisition and resettlement issues.

• Employment and livelihoods of communities.

• Gender and women issues

• Contractor’s camp and access

• Environmental issues

8.4.2 Outcomes of Consultations

• All actions associated with the project should be taken through proper consultations

• There should be a continuous community consultation program throughout the project

implementation period.

• There should be employment opportunities for skilled and unskilled local people, preference

should be given to the project affected persons.

• Vocation training/ educations needs to be provided to local women, so that they could be

able to support their families by supplementing their household income.

• Electricity and irrigation water and electric tube wells are needed for the increased

productions of crops.

• To include local people wherever possible in jobs during the construction of project. Thus,

income generating activity of the area will be enhanced.

• Chances of some environmental effects like noise/ vibration and dust emissions to the

nearby community.

• A large number of women are involved in working in agriculture fields, so that their routine

activities should not be disturbed.

• No major effect on land or crop will occur if the project is implemented after crop harvest.

• Overall the project is good for the villagers and the country.

• No serious concerns with the project because this project will increase the employment and

will reduce the load shedding issue of the country.



8-5

8.4.3 Consultation Teams

There were 8 members team including two female enumerators for household surveys. A PRA

Specialist conducted the Focused Group Discussions (FGDs) with stakeholders, whereas an EIA

specialist supported by a field assistant conducted interviews and meetings with government

functionaries.

8.4.4 Future Consultations

The consultations will be continued with all stakeholders and especially with government regulatory

agencies like EPA, AJK and Deputy Commissioner, Kotli. A mechanism for consultations with local

communities is part of the LARP.

8.5 Land Acquisition and Resettlement–Related Concerns

The following issues and concerns were showed by the stakeholders regarding land acquisition and

resettlement.

• Compensation for loss due to the project should be provided based on market rates.

• Crops compensation should also be given in addition to land compensation

• Compensation of trees should also be given.

• There should be transparent and fair compensation methods/ procedures, so that the

entitled person could receive his payment.

• The most affected people in Hill Kalan and Hillahurd demanded that compensation of their

land/houses be provided on good market price and as the construction material

transportation cost for these villages is too high. The access is only through boat or lift

system and there is no any access road that can be used for material transportation in bulk.

• Moreover, the people in these areas are demanding that they must be provided same basic

facilities on alternate site where they may be shifted or settled.

• The market price of land in Banar village was very high. Therefore, APs demanded

compensation according to the current market rates.

8.6 Addressing Stakeholders Concerns

To address the issues and concerns raised by the stakeholders a mitigation plan has been developed

and made part of the ESIA.

8.7 Meetings with Secondary Stakeholders

The following stakeholders were consulted on different occasions to seek their inputs, feedback and

opinion on the design and scope of the project. The offices and Individuals who were consulted are

as follows:

i. Office of Deputy Commissioner Kotli

ii. Environment Protection Agency, AJK

iii. Chief Conservator Forests AJK

iv. Director Wildlife and Fisheries

v. Deputy director Wildlife and Fisheries AJK



8-6

vi. AJK Rural Support Programme Kotli.

vii. World Wildlife Fund Pakistan (WWF-P)

viii. Leadership for Environment and Development Pakistan

ix. Pakistan Museum of Nature History

x. Snow Leopard Foundation Pakistan

The stakeholders supported the Gulpur Hydro Power project provided that environmental and issues

are addressed through mitigation measures. To address the issues an ESIA and Land Acquisition and

Resettlement Plan (LARP) are developed and shared with stakeholders for their feedback and

suggestions.



9-1

9 IMPACT ASSESSMENT AND MITIGATION

This chapter discusses in detail any of the potential environmental and social impacts that may be

resultant of the project activities (Section 3) in the surrounding environment (Section 4 to 6) of the

project area.

An overview of the general approach for the impact assessment is discussed below so that it is not

repeated in each environmental component. In case, where specific mitigation measures have been

provided for an environmental component these are presented in the relevant section with

supplementary information.

9.1 Impact Assessment Methodology

9.1.1 Project Area

The project area is the site of the proposed project and the area of probable impact as the extent of

the area outside the project area that is likely to be directly or indirectly impacted by the proposed

project is been considered see Section 7.

9.1.2 Establishment of the Existing Environment

The baseline condition is the environmental conditions that would lie in the absence of the

construction and operation of the Project, and against which the potential environmental impacts of

the Project would be assessed. For the majority of the technical studies the baseline is the conditions

at the present time. Baseline information for the ESIA has been collected from published literatures,

desk studies, consultations with relevant stakeholders and data collected for this study during field

surveys.

9.1.3 Prediction / Evaluation of Impacts

The prediction and evaluation of impacts of the Project has been considered against the baseline in

the ESIA. The following impacts have been considered:

• Direct impacts – a primary impact of the Project.

• Indirect impacts – impacts that arise from activities not explicitly forming part of the Project.

• Permanent impacts – impacts that arise from an irreversible change to the baseline

environment or which persist for the foreseeable future.

• Temporary impacts – impacts that persist for a limited period only or can be reversible.

Where possible these will be classified as temporary, short-term, medium-term or long-

term.

Each of the environmental impact will be categorized in to the:

• Beneficial impacts – impacts that have a beneficial influence on environmental receptors

and resources.

• Adverse impacts – impacts that have an adverse influence on environmental receptors and

resources



9-2

The impacts that will be evaluated to be beneficial will be further enhanced to benefit the

environment while those having adverse impact will be mitigated by proposing the required

mitigation measures.

9.1.3.1 Impact Evaluation and Description

Environmental impacts have been and will continue to be considered, eliminated or reduced

throughout the lifecycle of the Project. For the ESIA process Impact evaluation has been carried out

in compliance with the national and international legal requirements and guidelines. These

documents use various types of tools in an attempt to define a comprehensive and consistent

method to capture all potential impacts of a proposed Project.

A uniform system of impact description is used to enable the reviewers to understand how impacts

have been interpreted. The description of each impact will have the following features:

• A definition of the impact using an impact statement;

• The impact statement clearly identifying the project activity or activities that causes the

impact, the pathway or the environmental parameter that is changed by the activity, and the

potential receptors of the impact;

• Establishing the sensitivity of the receiving environment or receptors;

• Based on the stakeholder consultations undertaken, outlining of the level of public concern

regarding the specific impact;

• Rating of the significance of the impact;

• Description of the mitigation and management measures and the effectiveness of proposed

measures; and

• Characterization of the level of uncertainty in the impact assessment.

The significance of an impact is determined based on the product of the consequence of the impact

and the probability of its occurrence. The consequence of an impact, in turn, is a function primarily

of three impact characteristics: magnitude; spatial scale; and duration.

Magnitude is determined from quantitative or qualitative evaluation of a number of criteria

discussed further below. Where relevant, this includes comparison with standards or thresholds.

Examples of thresholds include:

• legal thresholds—established by law or regulation;

• functional thresholds—if exceeded, the impacts will disrupt the functioning of an ecosystem

sufficiently to destroy resources important to the nation or biosphere irreversibly and/or

irretrievably;

• normative thresholds—established by social norms, usually at the local or regional level and

often tied to social or economic concerns;

• preference thresholds—preferences for individuals, groups or organizations only, as distinct

from society at large; and

• reputational thresholds—the level of risk a company is willing to take when approaching or

exceeding the above thresholds.



9-3

After the evaluation of the impacts resulting from project, the probability of impact occurrence is

considered to further evaluate overall impact significance. The probability in this case relates to the

likelihood of the impact occurring.

The resulting significance rating may be further qualified by explaining the effectiveness of proposed

management measures designed to mitigate or enhance the impact, and by characterizing the level

of confidence or uncertainty in the assessment.

9.1.3.2 Impact Significance Rating

The impact significance rating process serves two purposes: firstly, it helps to highlight the critical

impacts requiring consideration in the approval process; secondly, it serves to show the primary

impact characteristics, as defined above, used to evaluate impact significance. The impact

significance rating system is presented in Table 9.1.

• Part A: Define impact consequence using the three primary impact characteristics of

magnitude, spatial scale and duration;

• Part B: Use the matrix to determine a rating for impact consequence based on the

definitions identified in Part A; and

• Part C: Use the matrix to determine the impact significance rating, which is a function of the

impact consequence rating (from Part B) and the probability of occurrence.

Using the matrix, the significance of each described impact is rated.

9.1.3.3 Mitigation and Good Practice Measures

Wherever, the Project is likely to result in unacceptable impact on the environment, mitigation

measures are proposed. In addition, in certain cases good practice measures are proposed.

Table 9.1: Method for Rating the Significance of Impacts

PART A: DEFINING CONSEQUENCE IN TERMS OF MAGNITUDE, DURATION AND SPATIAL SCALE

Impact characteristics

Definition Criteria

MAGNITUDE

Major

Substantial deterioration or harm to receptors; receiving environment

has an inherent value to stakeholders; receptors of impact are of

conservation importance; or identified threshold often exceeded

Moderate

Moderate/measurable deterioration or harm to receptors; receiving

environment moderately sensitive; or identified threshold

occasionally exceeded

Minor

Minor deterioration (nuisance or minor deterioration) or harm to

receptors; change to receiving environment not measurable; or

identified threshold never exceeded

Minor+ Minor improvement; change not measurable; or threshold never

exceeded

Moderate+ Moderate improvement; within or better than the threshold; or no

observed reaction

Major+ Substantial improvement; within or better than the threshold; or

favorable publicity

DURATION/ FREQUENCY

Continuous aspects Intermittent aspects

Short term/

low frequency Less than 4 years Occurs less than once a year

Medium More than 4 years up to end Occurs less than 10 times a year but



9-4

of life of project

(approximately 56 years)

more than once a year

Long term/

high frequency

Beyond the life of the project

(greater than 30 years) Occurs more than 10 times a year

SPATIAL SCALE

Biophysical Socio-economic

Small Within 200 meters (m) of the Project footprint

Within the Study Area

Intermediate Within 3 kilometer (km) of the Project footprint

10 km from the Project facilities

Extensive Beyond 3 km of the Project footprint

Beyond 10 km from the Project facilities

PART B: DETERMINING CONSEQUENCE RATING

Rate consequence based on definition of magnitude, spatial extent and duration

SPATIAL SCALE

Small Inter-

mediate Extensive

MAGNITUDE

Minor DURATION/ FREQUENCY

Long / high Medium Medium Medium

Medium Low Low Medium

Short / low Low Low Medium

Moderate DURATION/ FREQUENCY

Long / high Medium High High

Medium Medium Medium High

Short / low Low Medium Medium

Major DURATION/ FREQUENCY

Long / high High High High

Medium Medium Medium High

Short / low Medium Medium High

PART C: DETERMINING SIGNIFICANCE RATING

Rate significance based on consequence and probability

CONSEQUENCE

Low Medium High

PROBABILITY (of exposure to impacts)

Definite Low Medium High

Possible Low Medium High

Unlikely Low Low Medium

+ denotes a positive impact.



9-5

9.2 Impacts on Physical Environmental

The physical environmental aspects that may be affected by the project activities are following

• Noise and dust associated with construction and operations

• Use of water for Project activities

• Generation of waste by the Project activities during construction and operations

• Construction of an earthen dyke for flood protection and minimization of inundation area

Following are the potential impacts that may arise from the execution of the project activities:

• Impact PE1: Soil Contamination

• Impact PE2: Soil Erosion

• Impact PE3: Water Contamination

• Impact PE4: Change in Drainage Pattern due to Weir Construction

• Impact PE5: Water Resource Depletion

• Impact PE6: Fugitive Dust Emissions

• Impact PE7: Vehicular and Generator Exhaust Emissions

• Impact PE8: Damage to Infrastructure due to Blasting

• Impact PE9: Noise Nuisance due to Blasting, Drilling and Batching Plant

• Impact PE 10: Construction of Earthen Dyke



9-6

9.2.1 Soil Quality

Improper handling of oils, lubricants and other such substances may result in spills which would lead

to soil contamination. Other than this accidental releases and leakages are another grey area in this

regard. Storage in areas with no lining and containing walls and low quality storage containers pose

another threat of soil contamination.

Impact PE1: Discharge related to Project construction and Operation particularly operation of generator and wastewater system can potentially result in the contamination of soil and consequent deterioration of groundwater and surface water quality

Applicable Project Phase

Construction Operational

Impact Rating

Magnitude Duration Scale Consequence Probability Significance +/- Confidence

Initial Impact

Moderate Long Intermediate High Possible High - High

Mitigation Measures:

• MM01: The generator will be placed on impervious layer. Sufficient area around the generator will be made impervious to contain any spill during maintenance

• MM02: Fuel tanks will be appropriately marked by content and will be stored in dyked areas with an extra 10% of the storage capacity of the fuel tank. The area will be lined with an impervious base

• MM03: Grease traps will be installed on the site, wherever needed, to prevent flow of oily water.

• MM04: Spill control kit (shovels, plastic bags and absorbent materials) will be available near fuel and oil storage areas.

• MM05: Emergency plan for spill management will be prepared and inducted to the staff for any incident of spill.

• MM06: The bottom of any soak pit or septic tank will be at least 10 m above the groundwater table. The distance can be reduced, if based on the soil properties, it is established that the lesser distance will not result in contamination of groundwater


Residual Impact

Minor Long Intermediate Medium Unlikely Low - High

Good Practice Measures:

Monitoring:

• MN01: Daily monitoring for any of the spills and leakages in the generator room and other construction area

• MN02: Quarterly monitoring of level of wastewater in soak pits and septic tanks.



9-7

9.2.2 Soil Erosion

Any excavation work during the construction activities, whether permanent or temporary, would

lead to loss of soil. Erosion of soil can also occur from removal of vegetation cover, runoff from

unprotected excavated areas, muck disposal sites, quarry sites etc. Excavations on slopes would also

decrease its stability. Given the topography of the area, unprotected excavations on sloping grounds

may lead to landslide, especially during the rainy season.

Impact PE2: Land clearing and blasting and drilling activities may loosen the top soil in the project area

resulting in possible acceleration of soil erosion, especially in the wet season



Impact Rating


Initial

Impact Moderate Short Small Low Definite Low - High


• MM1: Vegetation loss shall be minimized to the extent possible which would help soil bonding

• MM2: The nearby area will be sprinkled before blasting and drilling to minimize erosion

• MM3: Controlled blasting shall be done to minimize environmental impacts

• MM4: Areas such as muck disposal area, batching plant, labor camp, quarry sites, etc. after the

closure shall be covered with grass and shrubs

• MM5: Slopes in the drilling and blasting areas should be protected against sliding

• MM6: All trace cutting works for road construction, adequate retaining wall or breast wall to be

provided in case the geology is not self-supporting.

• MM7: Slope stabilization measures will be adopted such as adequate vertical and horizontal drains,

drainage along road sides, cross drainage etc.


Residual

Impact Minor Short Small Low Unlikely Low - High

Good Practice Measures: Local species for plantation shall be selected to restore the biodiversity of the area in consultation with forest

department after completion of respective activities

Monitoring:

• MN01: HSE officer visit before the above mentioned activities on regular basis



9-8

9.2.3 Water Contamination

Impact PE3: Water contamination due to releases from the construction camp, vehicles washing area and in

the project phase sewage from the power plant facilities and possible oil spills/leakages



Impact Rating


Initial

Impact Major Medium Extensive High Possible High - High


• MM1: Soak pits for kitchen waste water will be installed

• MM2: Septic tanks for sewage waste will be put in place

• MM3: Prohibit release of camp effluents to the water channels or land

• MM4: Lining of all effluent channels at all working areas with cement will be done to prevent seepage

• MM5: All the garbage shall be collected and disposed off adequately to the disposal site or to an

incinerator, if feasible

• MM6: Leakage of oil wastes from oil storage and vehicles should be avoided in order to prevent

potential contamination of streams or ground water

• MM7: Surface runoff from oil handling areas/devices should be treated for oil separation before being

discharged into the river.


Residual

Impact Minor Short Small Low Possible Low - High


Monitoring:




9-9

9.2.4 Change in Drainage Pattern

Construction of weir and creation of dam will change the flow regime of the existing river, which

may pose impacts on downstream and upstream ecology. Keeping in view the sensitivity of the issue

and project setting, a biodiversity assessment exercise will be carried out separately and made part

of the ESIA. Biodiversity study would aim at determining the ecological flow and the requirements of

releases to maintain that flow after the proposed development. Further options will be assessed to

incorporate positive impacts of the project in that area and specifically in the Poonch River. The

creation of dam will certainly enhance the aesthetic value of the locality and also provide

opportunities for eco-tourism. Another advantage would be the increased productivity of fish

harvest with the increase of water availability due to dam creation in that area.

The construction of access road for intake and quarrying of construction material may also alter the

drainage pattern of the area.

Impact PE4: Construction of weir may alter the drainage patterns of the area



Impact Rating


Initial

Impact Moderate Medium Intermediate Medium Possible Medium - High


• MM1: Results of the biodiversity assessment (ecological flow) be incorporated in implementation

plans.

• MM2: Surface runoff from oil handling areas/devices should be treated for oil separation before being

discharged into the river.

• MM3: The sand and gravel quarrying sites shall be selected keeping in view the impacts and

magnitude of change in surface water drainage patterns. Major changes in the landscape shall be

avoided.

• MM4: At the completion of activities the natural pattern shall be restored, to the extent possible.


Residual

Impact Major Medium Intermediate Extensive Possible High - High


Monitoring:




9-10

9.2.5 Water Resource Depletion

There are several project activities that may affect the water availability in the area. Especially the

area above tunneling location have some households where tunneling under these households may

disturb the groundwater table of that location specifically. Keeping in mind the terrain of the area

and findings of the feasibility studies there would be no groundwater reservoirs/aquifers. There

would be safe distance maintained from the possible reservoirs and in this way no major impact is

envisaged. Still if there is an issue of groundwater depletion then after establishing that the

residents would be provided an alternate source of water in the source of water supply scheme or

regular supplies in containers to be managed by the project proponent in consultation with the local

community and the local authorities. Other activities that may deplete the water resources include

use for cleaning supplies, drinking water supplies and for other construction activities. While

quarrying and drilling the natural water ways and springs may be disrupted or damaged and in this

way limiting the availability of water to the local communities. Special care needs to be taken while

conducting such activities to avoid damage or blockage of natural water ways and channels.

Impact PE5: Use of local water resources for construction activities may reduce the water availability to the local communities



Impact Rating


Initial Impact

Major Short Small Medium Possible Medium - High


• MM1: Water for different construction activities will not be drained of the local wells or fountains instead will be arranged form the river or via a water contractor from an approved source by the local authorities

• MM3: Water conservation techniques will be developed and implement by the EPC contractor

• MM4: Records of water usage would be maintained

• MM5: Shallow or perched aquifers shall not be tapped for any project activity

• MM6: Access to community wells shall be kept clear so that the community’s ability to meet its water requirements are not compromised


Residual Impact

Minor Short Intermediate Medium Unlikely Low - High


Monitoring:

• MN01: Third party audit of the water levels in the impact area every six months



9-11

9.2.6 Fugitive Dust Emissions

The project is spread around an area of around 6km2 in a hilly terrain acts as a natural barrier to

movement of heavy traffic and humans. Therefore there would be more than one camping site for

the proposed project. This would require of road driving, furthermore the roads are two lane and

therefore the shoulders of the road would be used and cut more often generating more dust

emissions. Defensive driving and regular water sprinkling are few steps that would significantly

reduce the emissions and their likely impacts.

Impact PE6: Vehicular movement and drilling will create fugitive dust emissions specially while off road driving



Impact Rating


Initial

Impact Moderate Short Intermediate Medium Definite Medium - High


• MM1: For fugitive dust control, sprinkling of water on the project roads will be done

• MM2: Grading operation to be suspended when the wind speed exceeds 20 km /hr.

• MM3: All storage piles shall be adequately wetted or covered with plastic to ensure protection of

ambient air from fugitive emission during wind storm

• MM4: Batching plants and associated machinery installed for project activities will be installed with

suitable pollution control arrangements

• MM5: Speed limits and defensive driving policies will be strictly implemented

• MM6: Road damage caused by project activities will be promptly attended to with proper road repair

and maintenance work


Residual



Monitoring:

• MN01: Early morning and afternoon in the inspection by the site EHS officer and if required the

frequency can be increased



9-12

9.2.7 Vehicular and Generator Exhaust Emissions

Emissions from the exhaust of vehicles, batching plant and generators etc. would release emissions

which would certainly add to the ambient air levels of the immediate vicinity. Especially the

movements of heavy machinery and vehicles of old make and poor engine condition tends to release

more than new well-tuned vehicles. Use of low grade fuels and lubricants also increases the

emission levels.

Impact PE7: Exhaust emissions from generators, project traffic and batching plant may deteriorate the local

ambient air quality



Impact Rating


Initial

Impact Moderate Short Small Low Possible Low - High


• MM1: New and low emission equipment and vehicles shall be used

• MM2: Best quality fuel and lubes shall be purchased where possible lead free oil and lubes should be

used

• MM3: Batching plant shall be set up considering the wind direction so that the nearby communities

are not affected by the emissions from batching plant

• MM4: Batching plant should be kept as near to natural sinks to minimize emissions to ambient

environment

• MM5: Regular maintenance of vehicles and equipment will be conducted to keep emissions in check

• MM6: Filters will be installed wherever available in vehicles and equipment

• MM7: All stacks will be at least 8ft high to safeguard the labor and passersby from the emissions


Residual



Monitoring:

• MN01: Biannual monitoring of the emissions against NEQS and other applicable emission standards

by third part auditors



9-13

9.2.8 Damage to Infrastructure due to Blasting

Blasting and drilling near any civil structures like houses, schools, mosques, shrines, commercial

buildings etc. may cause damage or destruction of the structure in the worst case or if safe distances

are not maintained. Apart from that noise and vibrations produced from these activities would also

create nuisance to the surrounding communities and wildlife. Therefore, special care is needed in

view of these sensitivities. Special plans and safe distances need to be calculated according to the

best industrial practices to avoid all such mishaps to the extent feasible.

Impact PE8: Blasting for tunneling may cause damage to nearby infrastructure



Impact Rating


Initial



• MM1: Safe distances acceptable worldwide will be calculated and maintained

• MM2: Where safe distances cannot be maintained the structures will be evacuated of the occupants

to avoid human loss

• MM3: Controlled blasting techniques will be adopted at all times

• MM4: Public infrastructure and cultural heritage sites if any near the blasting area will be reinforced

in terms of civil works

• MM5: Muffled blasting techniques be adopted where required.


Residual

Impact Minor Long Intermediate Medium Possible Medium - High


Monitoring:

• MN01: Cracks on ground surface to be monitored for the stabilization of slops and landsliding.

• MN02: Noise level to be monitored at receptor levels to recommend, if a muffled blast is needed.

• MN03: Dispersion of explosion produced debris shall be monitor to ensure personnel and public

safety on regular basis.

• MN04: Sources of ground water, including springs and hand pumps shall be monitored for change in

water availability and quality.



9-14

9.2.9 Noise Nuisance

Impact PE9: Noise produced from blasting, drilling and batching plant may cause nuisance in the vicinity of the

respective activity



Impact Rating


Initial



• MM1: The construction equipment generating high noise must be designed to have an adequate

muffler system.

• MM2: All stationary noise generating equipments such as air compressors and power generators

should be used away from the residential area.

• MM3: A proper routine and preventive maintenance procedure for project vehicles and equipment

should be set and followed in consultation with the respective manufacturer which would help

prevent noise levels from deteriorating with use.

• MM4: Provision of proper Personal Protective Equipment (PPEs), i.e., ear muffs and plugs, will reduce

noise impact on personnel.

• MM5: Movement of vehicles should be restricted to project area only.

• MM6: Restriction on pressure horns.

• MM7: The nearest community will be informed three siren in advance for the case of blasting

activities

• MM8: Blasting will be done only in day hours

• MM9: unscheduled blasting will be strictly prohibited in any case


Residual

Impact Minor Long Intermediate Medium Possible Medium - High


Monitoring:

• MN01: Regular monitoring of the noise levels in the nearest communities against the baseline noise

conditions and if the threshold values are exceeded then re calculating the safe distances on the basis

of monitoring report



9-15

9.2.10 Construction of Earthen Dyke

The proposed flood protection dyke would provide some engineering challenges and some

environmental and social issues as well. According to the suggested option there would be earthen

dyke at elevation which is designed at twice the PMF water level which would eliminate any

potential risks. Furthermore there is proposed water gathering and disposal drain which would cater

for the adjacent catchment’s waters which would be collected at elevation 542 m in the drain

coming directly from the adjoining catchment area and subsequently dispose off all the water into

the river protecting the houses along the proposed dyke from any potential flash floods and water

logging threats. The issue of water logging or pond formation for these houses is not an issues

because the sewage from these households are collected in soak pits and septic tanks built inside

the house hence this issue would be eliminated as well.

The only issue that can arise from this dyke option would be of standing water in case the water

levels rise in the locality. Keeping in view the rock formation and soil nature of the area it is distinct

possibility but cannot be overlooked at the same time. Therefore, along with the dyke there is a

proposal for installation of water pumps (Section 7and 3) of industrial capacity to take care of this

issue as well. The cost of which would be paid by the project proponent.

Impact PE10: Impacts of earthen dyke on physical environment.



Impact Rating


Initial

Impact High

Long

Term Intermediate High Definite High - High


• MM1: The dimensions of dyke to be identified after detailed assessment of floods and surface

hydrology of the area.

• MM2: The drainage system of surface water during rains and excess water for irrigations shall not be

blocked and the diversion of the same shall be in a manner that it has no impacts to the community

and agricultural lands.

• MM3: Water logging and salinity of the area shall be assessed and pumps be installed, if required.

• MM4: Material for the construction of the dyke to be sourced considering environmental aspects

including drainage pattern, stability, vegetation and public infrastructure.


Residual

Impact Minor Long Intermediate Medium Definite Low - High


Monitoring:

• MN01: Water logging and salinity of the area shall be monitored on bi-annual basis.



9-16

9.3 Impacts on Ecology and Biodiversity

The project area represents a human dominated landscape, and the vegetation has been subject to

human influence over a long period of time. The people depend entirely upon the forests for grazing,

fodder, timber and fuel. The heavily grazed areas near the town of Kotli show signs of extreme

denudation, with consequential adverse effects on the fertility of the soil. The southern and

southeastern slopes above thickly populated stretches are also suffering from similar damage.

Majority of the species recorded in the area were of the tropical origin or fall in

introduced/cultivated category, which signifies that the flora of the project area is much disturbed

and altered. In the adjacent forests, nineteen Himalayan endemic species were recorded. However,

none of them is narrow endemic and all have relatively wider distribution. There are no threatened

plant species found in the area. The dominant land use at the project facilities is

agriculture/settlements, and areas devoid of forest make about 25% of the land area.

Since the majority land impacted by the project will be either cultivated land or sparse broad leaf

forest which already have poor ground cover, impacts of the project on vegetation are anticipated to

be minor. Although one rare species (Fraxinus raiboearpa) exists in the area, its wide distribution

was recorded in dense forest areas, and it is not expected to occur in disturbed habitats in vicinity of

the project facilities. In conclusion, no loss of forest of conservation importance is anticipated either

upstream (reservoir) or downstream of the dam site near the power station and along access roads.

Vegetation clearing during the construction phase may lead to soil erosion. Erosion does not only

result in loss of valuable topsoil but also in leaching of soil nutrients and loss of organic matter.

Seventeen species of mammals were recorded in the study area, and most of them are common and

wide spread. The Eurasian Otter Lutra lutra is a rare but widely distributed carnivore species. It was

reported to be present in the area, however the survey team could not find any reliable evidence.

The Indian Grey Mongoose Herpestes edwardsi and the Small Asian Mongoose Herpestes javanicus

are included in the CITES APPENDIX III. These species have a trade pressure for their skins which are

exported to different countries. None of the small mammals found in the area are listed as

Threatened under IUCN Red List. Concerning large mammals, the project area and its surroundings

are dominated by adaptable species like fox and jackal, while the species which either pose danger

(eg, common leopard) or have economic value (ungulates) seems to be locally extirpated. The

species of large home ranges like common leopard gets killed if a vagrant individual enters into to

the area.

All the 21 species of reptiles recorded during the survey were commonly found at all the study sites,

and majority of them are either Not Evaluated species (52%) or have Least Concern status (42%),

according to IUCN 2013 Red List. Only one species, Brown Cobra (Naja oxiana) was found Data

Deficient with unknown population trend. None of the recorded species is protected under the AJK

Wildlife Act 1975 or AJK Wildlife Ordinance 2013. Six are CITES Species with one (Varanus

bengalensis) listed in Appendix I, four species (Hoplobatrachus tigerinus, Lissemys punctata, Eryx

johnii, Naja oxiana) are listed in Appendix II while one species (Xenochrophis piscator) is listed in

Appendix III of the CITES 2013.



9-17

Most of the avifauna of the Project is very common. The endangered species, the White Rumped

Vulture (Gyps bengalensis) and endangered EGYPTIAN VULTURE (Neophron percnopterus) were also

recorded from the study area.

Out of 29 fish species found in Poonch River, 12 species viz., Barilius pakistanicus, Schistura

punjabensis, Cirrhinus reba, Labeo dero, Labeo dyocheilus, Tor putitora, Cyprinus carpio, Botia

rostrata, Clupisoma garua, Ompok bimaculatus, Mastacembelus armatus are species of special

importance. The species, Barilius pakistanicus and Schistura punjabensis are endemic in Pakistan

including AJK. Four species, Tor putitora (Endangered), Cyprinus carpio (Vulnerable), Botia rostrata

(Vulnerable), Ompok bimaculatus (Vulnerable) and Ompok bimaculatus (Near Threatened) have

special IUCN status. Out of these, Tor putitora, Cyprinus carpio and Ompok bimaculatus are

commercially important. The other commercially important species are Clupisoma garua, and

Mastacembelus armatus.

Based on the factors described above, following potential impacts were identified:

• Impact EC1: Land disturbance due to construction and operation of project facilities resulting

in disturbance, fragmentation, displacement and direct loss of animal, plants, reptiles,

amphibians and birds.

• Impact EC2: Deterioration of area’s water resources river if pollutants such as domestic

waste (sanitary and kitchen discharge) or oil and grease, and fuel from project related

machinery or equipment are mixed with surface runoff during rain, or if pollutants leach into

the ground or are carried to river.

• Impact EC3: Reduction in water flow beyond weir, which can alter ecology of the area and

lead to decline in abundance of fish, especially of Mahasher, results in habitat

fragmentation, or affects connectivity of Mangla Reservoirs fishes to Poonch River.



9-18

9.3.1 Land Disturbance

Impact EC1: Land disturbance due to construction and operation of project facilities resulting in disturbance,

fragmentation, displacement and direct loss of animal, plants, reptiles, amphibians and birds



Impact Rating


Initial

Impact High

Long

Term Large Low Definite High - High


• MM1: Cutting of trees if any will be minimized and damage will be compensated by re-plantation.

• MM2: Off-road driving will be prohibited outside the project area.

• MM3: Discharging firearms will be explicitly prohibited

• MM4: The project staff will be educated and instructed to avoid killing or chasing wildlife.

• MM5: The staff will be educated and monitored to ensure that they do not get engage in animal related trade

• MM6: Periodic trainings of the project staff will be conducted on biodiversity conservation issues to sensitize them about the biodiversity and protected area

• MM7: All restrictions imposed under wildlife legislation of AJK, particularly relevant to national park, will be strictly observed.


Residual Impact

Minor Short Term

Small Low Definite Low - Moderate

Good Practice Measures: The Mahasher National Park has been notified recently to protect biodiversity of the Poonch River, particularly the Mahasher fish. The national park through relevant legislation restricts various forms of species exploitation to ensure that the habitat remains protected and congenial for the indigenous species. In fact many mitigation measures given above are specified in the legislation. However, implementation of such measures and management of park resources require a park infrastructure and dedication of the park staff. As the matter stands now, there is limited park staff and other infrastructure which means park notification does not carry any meaning for the public, particularly for the culprits engaged in non-sustainable exploitation of the park resources. Many components of the local biodiversity are already degraded and rest are under severe ongoing assault, due to grazing, timber extraction, hunting, fishing, poisoning, electrification, and exactions in the river bed, etc. The measures listed above will not only help mitigate project related impacts, but will halt ongoing biodiversity degradation in the project area. The project staff will cooperate with the Fisheries and Wildlife Department in implementing park restrictions and the project will contribute to maintenance and rehabilitation of natural habitat and species in the area.

Monitoring:

• MN01: Annual visits of the Fisheries and Wildlife Department to ensure that mitigation measures are implemented.



9-19

9.3.2 Deterioration of Area’s Water Resources and River

Impact EC2: Deterioration of area’s water resources river if pollutants such as domestic waste

(sanitary and kitchen discharge) or oil and grease, and fuel from project related machinery or

equipment are mixed with surface runoff during rain, or if pollutants leach into the ground or are

carried to river.



Impact Rating


Initial

Impact Minor Long Small Medium Possible Medium - High


• MM1: No waste will be discharged in open areas.

• MM2: No contaminated effluents will be released to the River

• MM3: Water from washing areas and kitchen will be released in sumps

• MM4: Sumps will remain covered all the time and measures will be taken to prevent entry of

rainwater into them and at safe distance from runoff

• MM5: Fuels and lubricants will be stored in areas with impervious floors and dykes that can contain

spills, and at safe distance from water resources

• MM6: Fuels and lubricants will be handled in areas with impervious floors.

• MM7: The produced water will be discharged into the waste pit.

• MM8: Entry of runoff from surrounding areas to the land farming site will be restricted by the

construction of bunds or diversion of runoff

• MM9: All septic tanks will be lined with concrete and at safe distance from runoff

• MM10: Waste mud and cuttings will be released into the imperviously lined waste pit

• MM11: Septic tanks and wastewater pits will be designed so that runoff does not flow into them or at

and at safe distance from runoff.

• MM12: Maximum spill tray will be provided to all project vehicles to control fuel or oil leakage


Residual

Impact Minor

Short

Term Small Low Definite Low - Moderate

Good Practice Measures: Project activities will result in waste generation (effluent and solid) that may be hazardous and if not disposed

of adequately. Fish in the river and animals that are exposed to this waste, particularly scavenger species, may

become infected with disease and suffer ill effects, including death. Mammal scavenger species reported from

the area such as, Asiatic Jackal and Red Fox as well as bird species such as, vulture species are susceptible to

this impact. Infected animals may spread the disease among other animals they come in contact with.

However, this impact is not likely to be of consequence if the mitigation measures for adequate disposal of

waste material from the project facility are implemented.

Monitoring:

• MN01: Regular inspections and reporting by project environmental staff during construction and

operation.



9-20

9.3.3 Reduction in Water Flow beyond Weir

The project area enjoys following ecological significances, and ecological integrity of the system can

be compromised, if project is implemented without relevant mitigation measures.

• Important refugium for Mahasher Fish: Mahasher has been a widely distributed fish in

Pakistan during sixties and seventies. It was flourishing in the five rivers of Punjab and

breeding in the Himalayan foothill areas. Due to damming of the water bodies, ecological

fragmentation of the water bodies, pollution, water diversion, habitat destruction and

indiscriminate hunting, its population has been continuously declining. Its distribution range

in the country, therefore, continued squeezing and presently it is almost non-existent in the

rivers of Punjab. Recently, IUCN (2010) has declared it as an endangered species. The

Poonch River, however, still has a reasonably good population. It is successfully breeding in

Poonch River’s upper and middle reaches. The main centers of Mahasher breeding within

the project area are Bann Nullah, Rangar Nullah, Nail Nullah, Hajira Nullah, Meander Nullah

and the Titri Note area where river is wide to its maximum extant. It is the Poonch River

where anglers can still catch a fish of 100 cm weighing 10 Kgs. Efforts are required to save

this natural resource for our future generation. In case of a catastrophe for the Mahaseer

population in Poonch, this valuable species will be lost from the country. If the species

sustains, it can support poverty alleviation and promotion of eco-tourism.

• Breeding ground for the fish fauna of Mangla Reservoir: Poonch River serves as a breeding

ground for many of the fish fauna of the Mangla Reservoir which usually breed in flowing

water conditions. Most of the commercially important cyprinid species usually breed in

backwaters of the reservoir in the Poonch River. The side nullahs meeting to Poonch River

are the major breeding grounds for these fishes. These Nullahs may also serve as nursery

grounds for the breeding fishes.

• Natural reserve for twin-banded loach, Botia rostrata: Twin banded loach is a beautiful

aquarium fish. The fish has been quite common in the Himalayan foothill areas but presently

its population in the foothill areas is almost depleted or non-existent. The Poonch River has

a very good population of this loach and is a hot spot area for it.

• Supporting healthy population of Labeo dyocheilus: Poonch River holds a good population

of Labeo dyocheilus as compared to any other river in the country. This fish has maximum

size in this river and a fish weighing 3-4 kg is commonly caught in the nets.

• Supporting healthy population of Garra gotyla: The fish Garra gotyla is also a fish of

submountanous areas but it is also found in plains. Its population in plain areas has

decreased over the last 20 years and hardly one comes across any fish while sampling. In

past, it was very common in Potowar areas but it is no more seen in any of these areas

except a few localized places. Poonch River has very healthy population of this fish

throughout its length in AJK.

• Supporting high fish diversity as compared to its size: Poonch is the smallest river in AJK as

compared to other two rivers, the Jhelum and the Neelum. It, however, has a very good fish

diversity of 29 species as compared to 32 species in Jhelum and 12 species in Neelum. This is

mainly due to optimum water temperature, pristine breeding grounds, wide river valley, and

network of side nullahs with suitable physic-chemical environment.



9-21

The lake developed after project completion will change the lotic ecosystem (running water) in to

lentic (standing water). This will cause a shift in benthic macro invertebrate fauna and it is likely to

be replaced by pollution tolerant taxa, similar to species observed at S3 (Table 5.3). If flow is not

available during the dry season, it may generate intermittent ponds in area downstream of weir. This

will also replace lotic ecosystem benthic macro-invertebrates with lentic benthic macro-

invertebrates. A regular flow would require for maintaining lotic ecosystem to the downstream of

weir.

Impact EC3: Reduction in water flow beyond weir, which can alter ecology of the area and lead to

decline in abundance of fish, especially of Mahasher, results in habitat fragmentation, or affects

connectivity of Mangla Reservoirs fishes to Poonch River.



Impact Rating


Initial

Impact Large Long Large High Definite High - High


• MM1: Species become more vulnerable due to the barrier of dam, therefore a management plan will

be developed for ensuring long-term survival of the species.

• MM2: Determination of Environmental/Ecological Flows: The rivers all over the world are increasingly

being altered through the construction of dams, diversions, and levees. More than half of the world's

large rivers are dammed and the number continues to increase. Dams and other river structures

change the downstream flow patterns and consequently affect water quality, temperature, sediment

movement and deposition, fish and wildlife, and the livelihoods of people who depend on healthy

river ecosystems. Environmental flows seek to maintain these river functions while at the same time

providing for traditional off stream benefits. Environmental flows describe the quantity, timing, and

quality of water flows required to sustain freshwater ecosystems and the human livelihoods and

wellbeing that depend on these ecosystems. Through implementation of environmental flows, water

managers strive to achieve a flow regime, or pattern, that maintains the essential processes required

to support healthy river ecosystems. Environmental flows do not necessarily require restoring the

natural, pristine flow patterns, instead, are intended to produce a broader set of values and benefits

from rivers rather than strictly focusing on water supply, energy, recreation, etc. Determination of

ecological flows is an essential measure that will be undertaken for maintaining healthy population of

the fauna and flora of the river in the downstream area of the Weir.

• MM3: Intensification of watch and ward services: The Poonch River and its tributaries provide a

breeding ground for many ecologically and commercially important fish species. The commercially

important fish fauna is being poached through illegal netting, use of illegal mesh size, fishing in

breeding season, fishing of migrating species, blasting, electro-fishing etc. A fleet of active guards

need to be appointed by the government to intensively protect the fish resources of the river. The

guards need to be provided with motorcycles, fuel, uniforms and torches for an effective patrolling of

the area to check any illegal fishing. These guards may be given special training for performing their

duties in a proper manner.

• MM4: Declaration of Weir to Power House Area as closed area for fishing: The area from Weir to

Power House will be the most vulnerable area for the fish species as it will have low water especially

during winter season. The area needs to be protected from overfishing. Declaration of this area as no

fishing zone will allow survival of the fish species in ecological flows determined for the river.

• MM5: Involvement of Community in Conservation: Communities living along the project area will be

involved in various eco-tourism activities to provide them an incentive for conservation of fish

resources of the area. They will be helpful in self-watch and ward activities and in control of activities

that are damaging to the fish fauna.



9-22

• MM6: Involvement of Local Administration in Conservation Process: Involvement of local

administration and law enforcement agencies in the fisheries conservation process is important as

nothing happens without their will and commitment. Regular meetings with local deputy

commissioners, police officers and senior bureaucrats will be held to take them on board for

implementation and enforcement of law.

• MM7: Establishment of Mahasher Hatcheries: Two Mahasher hatcheries need to be established, one

upstream of the weir and the other downstream of the weir for recruiting the river and dam site for

compensation of any loss of Mahasher fish being caused by the project activities.


Residual

Impact Minor

Short


Good Practice Measures: Through the mitigation measures described above, a multi-prong approach has been adapted, which will

ensure a net gain in habitat and biodiversity. While maintaining ecological flow and recruiting Mahasher from

hatcheries, decline in Mahasher and other fish populations will be minimized. Intensive watch and ward, strict

protection, and engagement with the communities and administration will halt ongoing deterioration of the

ecosystem. In view of greater protection of the park for 30 years and availability of a vast habitat in the form of

water reservoir, following benefits for the park and biodiversity are anticipated:

• Enhanced habitat availability, habitat diversification and depth in the form of reservoir will help in

maintaining the species diversity. For example the Mangla Reservoir supports sixty fish species as

compared to about thirty in entire stretch of the Poonch River.

• The reservoir with vertical and seasonal variations in temperatures will provide wintering habitat to

fish species, and some species of cold water may also get established here.

• Fishes of commercial importance will get established, and fisheries will get developed in the area.

Fisheries market will grow, creating new jobs and valuable support for the local economy.

• Overall bird diversity and population will be enhanced, owing to diverse habitat.

• The area will serve as staging ground for migratory bird species.

• Ecotourism could be promoted, which is an important tool for environmental education and helpful in developing responsible attitudes towards nature

• With intensive watch and ward, poaching of terrestrial wildlife will be controlled, and species historically occurring in the area will have a chance to re-establish.

In view of above discussion, it is concluded that with strict mitigation measures in place, anticipated benefits to biodiversity will more than balance the expected loss, and the area may serve as an important hub for biodiversity in the province.

Monitoring:

• MN01: Regular monitoring of fish populations will be carried out to determine the changes in abundance and diversity of the fish species.



9-23

9.4 Impacts on Socio-Economic Environment

Environmental and social impacts attributable to the project can broadly be classified into those

taking place during construction and those occurring during the operational phase. Some of these

impacts can be anticipated and avoided through appropriate adjustments / provisions in the project

design. Some can be mitigated by careful implementation of the project while some other can be

adjusted with by appropriately following the operational manual and an effective collaboration with

communities.

• Construction related impacts are heavily dependent on:

• The contractor’s work practices, especially those related to storage of construction materials

and cleanliness of work site;

• Cooperation between local communities and local authorities and the contractor and use of

public space and utilities;

• Project management’s enforcement of correct construction practices and standards;

• The incorporation of mitigation measures identified in the ESIA into the overall work

practices;

• An effective collaboration with local communities in evolving a workable project

implementation; and

• The quality of Monitoring and Reporting of ESMP implementation.

Operational impacts of the proposed project are associated with the movement of vehicular traffic

on it and allied activities. These include air and noise pollution, safety hazards and other similar

impacts.

Following are the potential socio-economic impacts that may arise from the execution of the project

activities:

• Impact SE1: The project will provide job opportunities for the local people in construction

and operation phases.

• Impact SE2: The local communities access to the health facilities.

• Impact SE3: Permanent acquisition of land and non-land assets for the project

• Impact SE4: Lose of livelihood.

• Impact SE5: Diseases incidences due to pollution and interaction with labor

• Impact SE6: The blockade of access of local community due construction activities

• Impact SE7: Privacy of local people to be disturbed because of contractor’s camp and

construction work.

• Impact SE8: Conflict between workers and local community to increase



9-24

9.4.1 Economic Opportunities

The impact of the project on the economic opportunities is positive as the area has no significant

industries and other economic opportunities to be affected by the project operations. The project

would provide job opportunities for skilled and unskilled laborers during the construction phase. The

job opportunities for local people can be increased through skilled development of people in

operating machinery required for construction phase. Also the project will prove instrumental in

injecting money into the local economy and thereby providing new opportunities and opening up

avenues for new professions and services.

Impact SE1: The project will provide job opportunities for the local people in construction and operation

phases.



Impact Rating


Initial

Impact Moderate Long Intermediate High Possible High + High


• MM01: The local people will be offered project related jobs on priority basis.

• MM02: The project will arrange skills development and training programmes to local unskilled labour

in handing equipment and machinery required for the project.

• MM03: The project will boost local economy by injecting money and enacting instrumental role in

emergence of new vocations and professions.


Residual

Impact Minor

Short



Monitoring:

• MN01: Quarterly monitoring reports about number of people employed and trained.



9-25

9.4.2 Improved Healthcare

The impact of the project on existing healthcare is minimal as no health care facilities are being

affected by the project operations. The communities will have access to the first aide health care

provided by the EPC Contractor to labor during construction phase.

Impact SE2: The local communities access to the health facilities.



Impact Rating


Initial Impact Moderate Long Intermediate High Possible High + High


• MM01: The contractor to establish health facilities in the camp during construction phase.


Residual

Impact Moderate Long Intermediate High Possible High + High


Monitoring:

• MN01: Quarterly monitoring of facilities and level of patients visiting the facilities.



9-26

9.4.3 Acquisition of Land and non-Land Assets for the Project

This impact is directly related to the consideration of design alternative to construct the earthen

dyke. The proponent has carried out detailed analysis of land requirements and resettlement

requirement under following two options:

• Option 1: Earthen Dyke with Collection Drain and Dewatering

• Option 2: No Dyke

9.4.3.1 Option 1 – Earthen Dyke with Collection Drain and Dewatering

Land Use

Under this Option the project will consume 16% (116 Acres) of the total area for building structures,

reservoir, colony, and camp and approach roads. About 84 percent (614 Acres) of the land required

for the proposed project will be utilized for the reservoir. In total the proposed project will required

730 Acres of land; major portion (80 percent) of this land is owned by the Government while only 20

percent land in privately owned

S.

No. Structure/ Item

Total Area

(Acres)


Ownership Shamilat Auqaf KDA Forest Wasteland


2 Weir 10 - - - - - 10

3 Intake 1 - - - - - 1

4 Reservoir 613.61 32.64 84.80 26 - 8.81 461.36


6 Colonies/ Camps/ Stores/ Workshops

54 24 2 - - 2 26

7 Access Roads for Power House

13 - - - - - 13

Total 729.61 59.64 87.80 26 - 24.81 531.36

Percentages 100% 8.2% 12.0% 3.6% - 3.4% 72.8%

Non-Land Assets

Under Dyke Option the details impacted of Non-Land Assets is as follows:

S.

No.

Structure/

Item Weir

Submerged Areas Temporary Structures

Total Laloi

Rangar

Nullah

Hill

Kalan

Hill

Khurd Mandi Weir

Power-

house

M&E

Yard

1. Houses (Up to 542)

- - 06 - - - 01 04 - 11

2. Graveyard - 02 - - - - - - 02

3. Water Mill 01 01 01 - - - - - 03

4. Crushers 01 - - - - - - - - 01

5. Electric Poles - 02 - - - 03 04 05 14

6. Suspension Bridge

01 - - - - - - - - 01

7. WAPDA Gauge

01 - - - - - - - - 01

8. Telephone Poles

- - - - - - 03 - 05 08



9-27

9.4.3.2 Option 2 – Without Earthen Dyke

Land Use

Under “No Dyke” option the project will consume 13% (113 Acres) of the total area for building

structures, reservoir, colony, and camp and approach roads. About 87 percent (804 Acres) of the

land required for the proposed project will be utilized for the reservoir. In total the proposed project

will required 920 Acres of land; major portion (74 percent) of this land is owned by the Government

while only 26 percent land in privately owned

S.

No. Structure/ Item

Total

Area

(Acres)


Owner-

ship Shamilat Auqaf KDA Forest

Waste-

land


2 Weir 10 - - - - - 10

3 Intake 1 - - - - - 1

4 Reservoir 803.85 127.64 84.80 39 57.25 8.81 486.36


6 Colonies/Camps/Stores/Workshops 54 24 2 - - 2 26

7 Access Roads for Power House 13 - - - - - 13

Total 919.85 154.64 87.80 39 57.25 24.81 556.36

Percentages 100% 16.8% 9.5% 4.2% 6.2% 2.7% 60.5%

Non-Land Assets

Under “No Dyke” Option the details impacted of Non-Land Assets is as follows:

S.

No.

Structure/

Item Weir

Submerged Areas Temporary Structures

Total Laloi

Rangar

Nullah

Hill

Kalan

Hill

Khurd Mandi Weir

Power-

house

M&E

Yard

1. Houses (Up to 542)

- 18 06 56 18 - 01 04 - 103

2. Shrines - - 02 - 01 - - - 03

3. Graveyard 01 02 01 01 - - - - 05

4. Water Mill 01 01 01 - - - - - 03

5. Crushers 01 - - - - 02 03

7. Transformers 01 - 02 02 02 07

8. Electric Poles 06 02 25 13 05 03 04 05 61

9. Suspension Bridge

01 - - - - - 01

10. Well 02 - 11 03 - - - - 16

11. WAPDA Gauge 01 01

12. Mosques - - - 02 - 02 - - - 04

13 Schools - - - - 02 - - - - 02

14. Telephone Poles

- - - - - - 06 - 02 08

From the aforesaid analysis that obvious choice of the Proponents to go for “Dyke Option” which has

the minimal environmental and social impacts with least cost.



9-28

9.4.3.3 Assessment framework for Permanent Acquisition of Land and Other Assets

For permanent acquisition/ loss of land and non-land assets the following framework will be

followed:

i. Loss of Agricultural Land

Agricultural land shall be directly acquired by the Government of AJK and shall be leased to the

Company for the term of the Project. For the legal title holders, customary or usufruct rights holders,

cash compensation of affected land would be paid on the basis of willing seller-willing buyer at the

mutually agreed market value of the acquired land. The tenants and sharecroppers (if any) will be

compensated for the un-expired duration of the lease. The vulnerable encroachers or squatters (if

any) will be compensated for affected structure at the replacement cost.

ii. Loss of Residential, Commercial or Institutional Land

The compensation entitlement in case of loss of residential, commercial or institutional land will

essentially be similar to the one for the loss of agricultural land, described above. The PAPs with

legal title holders, customary or usufruct rights will be compensated on the basis of willing seller-

willing buyer at the mutually agreed market value of the acquired land. The tenants will be

compensated for the un-expired duration of the lease. The vulnerable encroachers or squatters will

be compensated for affected structure at the replacement cost.

iii. Loss of Residential, Commercial or Institutional Structure

The owners of the affected structure, with or without legal title, will be entitled to cash

compensation at the replacement value (salvage value of the structure will not be deducted). In

addition, an allowance will also be paid to the owner for the repairs of the remaining structure, if

any.

iv. Loss of Common Resources and Facilities

In case of the loss of any common resources or facilities, the project will replace or restore the

affected facility or resource, in consultation with the affected community.

v. Loss of standing crops

The affected cultivators will be entitled to cash compensation for the damaged crops calculated on

the basis of market prices.

vi. Loss of Trees

The owners of the affected trees, with or without land title, will be paid cash compensation, on the

basis of market value of the trees according to the type, age, size and productivity of trees.

vii. Loss of Public Infrastructure

The project will pay cash compensation to the relevant agency based upon the replacement value of

the affected infrastructure. Alternatively, the project will replace or restore the damaged

infrastructure in the pre-project condition or better, in consultation with the concerned agency.



9-29

viii. Loss of or Damage to Religious Sites

The project will pay cash compensation for the replacement cost of the religious sites, such as

mosques/ shrines. Alternatively, the project will construct the religious sites, in consultation with the

affected community. Project will also pay cash compensation for the relocation of graves/shrines.

Impact SE3: Permanent acquisition of land and non-land assets for the project



Impact Rating


Initial

Impact High Long Intermediate High Possible High - High


• MM01: land and non-land assets to be acquired at replacement value/market value following the

Land Acquisition and Resettlement Framework.

• MM02: clear delineation and dissemination of laws both customary and positive laws related to land

issues.


Residual

Impact Moderate Long Intermediate Medium Unlikely Low - High

Good Practice Measures: Unforeseen impacts on land and non-land assets to be addressed as per the spirit of LARF.

Monitoring:

• MN01: Quarterly Internal and External Monitoring as per Land Acquisition and Resettlement Plan.



9-30

9.4.4 Loss of Livelihoods

The project has no significant direct impacts on the livelihoods of the local people. The only impact

on the income from on farm and off farm income from the acquired land will adequately be

compensated at replacement cost. Moreover, the skilled and local people will be provided with job

opportunities on priority basis in the construction and operational phases. The project will also

arrange training skills development opportunities to unskilled people enable them to qualify for the

skill and semi skill jobs in the project. Though, the project may cause minimal loss of agriculture land,

it will also provide local people with new opportunities as reservoir will become habitat for varieties

of fish that survive in the streams and Punch river. Availability of fish at large scale in the reservoir

might provide people with another source of income.

Impact SE4: Temporary land to be acquired for contractor’s camp and roads.



Impact Rating


Initial

Impact Moderate Long Intermediate High Possible High - High


• MM01: People losing more than 10% of their productive assets to be provided with livelihood

allowances as per LARF.

• MM02: People losing their assets to be offered project related jobs

• MM03: Skills development training to local people


Residual

Impact Moderate Short Intermediate Medium Unlikely Low - High


Monitoring:

• MN01: Quarterly monitoring of number people provided with livelihood allowances, jobs and

trainings.



9-31

9.4.5 Disease Incidence

The chances of disease incidences is minimal, however, the project will assure minimal incidences

through isolation of contractor’s camps from local communities, regular follow ups for vaccination of

workers and camp followers.

Impact SE5: Diseases incidences due to pollution and interaction with labor



Impact Rating


Initial Impact Moderate Short Intermediate High Possible High - High


• MM01: A comprehensive Health and safety plan to be implemented

• MM02: Creation of grievance redressed mechanism to protect rights and livelihood of community


Residual

Impact Moderate Short Intermediate Medium Unlikely Low - High


Monitoring:

• MN01: Daily monitoring of incidences through grievance redressal mechanism.



9-32

9.4.6 Access blockade

The probability of blockade of access for the local community is high due to construction work on

the ware, dyke and power houses. The contractor will assure the access by scheduling the work and

alternate access in consultation with local community during construction period. Road blockade for

construction may cause trouble in case of emergency. To avoid any untoward event in emergency,

the contractor ought to make alternate arrangements.

Impact SE6: The blockade of access of local community due construction activities



Impact Rating


Initial



• MM01: Alternate access to local communities during construction work,

• MM02: Scheduling for road blockade

• MM03: Alternate options for patients in emergencies


Residual

Impact Minor Long Intermediate Medium Unlikely Low - High


Monitoring:

• MN01: Daily monitoring of access and registration and reporting of complaints through redressal

mechanism.



9-33

9.4.7 Privacy

The local communities are living in settlements mostly in family groups where the community

members especially women freely move around without hesitation. The probably of disturbance in

the privacy of local people near contractor’s camp is moderate due to non-local labor in camps. The

local people especially the women will not feel comfortable in the presence of non-local labors in

the camp. The contractor will assure the privacy of local people by establishing camp at a reasonable

distance from local settlements and restrict the mobility of labor in the community.

Impact SE7: Privacy of local people to be disturbed because of contractor’s camp and construction work.



Impact Rating


Initial



• MM01: Contractor’s camps to maintain a reasonable distance from local population

• MM02: Restriction on mobility of workers in local community


Residual



Monitoring:

• MN01: Daily monitoring for any of the incidences and complaints.



9-34

9.4.8 Conflicts with local population

The chances of conflict between labor and local community are high as the local people would not

like the mobility of the labor in the community. The contractor will make sure a harmony between

labor and local community through a permanent liaison with community elders and by maintaining a

reasonable distance of the camp site from the local population.

Impact SE8: Conflict between workers and local community to increase



Impact Rating


Initial Impact Moderate Long Intermediate High Likely High - Low


• MM01: Contractor’s camps to maintain a reasonable distance from local population

• MM02: Restriction on mobility of workers in local community

• MM03: Priority in jobs for the local people with expertise required by the project


Residual



Monitoring:

• MN01: Daily monitoring for any of the incidences and complaints



10-1

10 TRAFFIC ASSESSMENT STUDY

10.1 Introduction

The proposed Gulpur Hydropower Project is located about 5km downstream of Kotli. The proposed

project can be approached by an all-weather road from Islamabad and on grand trunk (GT) road via

Mirpur. Currently the road(s) can cater for the needs of the traffic that is using these approach roads

but with the anticipated increase in heavy and light traffic there are likely to be impacts on the

existing road infrastructure. This study will mainly focus on the routes that may be used for project

related traffic and the likely impacts that may be caused due to the proposed project.

For this purpose the road was studied from satellite imagery and by travelling on the road. Traffic

count surveys were also conducted to assess the traffic load baseline before onset of the proposed

project.

10.2 Objectives

The main objectives of this study are as follows:

• to review the existing traffic conditions of the road network

• to appraise the potential traffic impact of the proposed development on the surrounding

road network

• to propose a feasible special traffic arrangement plan in peak erection and construction

activities.

10.3 Access Route Options


from Islamabad and Lahore by a two-lane, all-weather paved road. Access to the Project site from

Islamabad is via Kahuta –Kotli to Gulpur. The other route is from Lahore via GT Road to Dina and

then to Gulpur via Mirpur. During rainy season, traffic is susceptible to occasional disruptions due to

landslides. Another option that may be considered to access the proposed site via Kalar Sayedan and

reach Kotli via Dodyal that would take car ride around 2.5 to 3 hours from Islamabad. All these three

options are shown in Figure 10.1.



10-2

Figure 10.1: Access Route Options for Gulpur Site

GT road is the main access route for all heavy transport vehicles for domestic needs and also for

transit trade with Afghanistan also is a main trade route for India and Indian held Kashmir via AJK.

Considering that most of the machinery and manpower would come from the southern regions of

the country and it would be easier for them to approach the project site via Dina-Mangla-Mirpur-

Kotli route. Machines for the proposed power plant would be imported via sea and then transported

by road from Karachi.

Rail a rather cheapest and more beneficial mode of transport on land with much safety compared to

option could not be explored as is no rail access to the p the project site. The provision of the railway

line is not even considered by the government of Pakistan and AJK in its near future for the area.

Hence it is not considered at all.

It would not be advisable to take the long route by diverting from Jhelum to Islamabad and then go

to Kotli via Dodyal or Kahuta which would add another 300 km (approx.). Furthermore the Kahuta

option may not be feasible as the road passes near some strategic installations and access to that

route can be made limited due to a number of reasons without a prior notification which would then

hamper project activities.



10-3

The nearest international airport is located in Islamabad that is around 150km (approx.) so the

Kahuta or the Kalar Sayedan options can perhaps be explored for people reaching the project site by

air or from Islamabad.

10.4 Traffic Survey

Traffic count surveys were conducted at three different locations in and around Kotli which are listed

as follows:

• Location 1: Gulpur Junction

• Location 2: Palak Junction

• Location 3: Near Proposed Project Site

Separate counts were conducted for both traffic attracted towards a point and traffic leaving that

area so that the complete baseline could be established. There were separate counts for all different

sorts of vehicles that are using the road in order to assess the load in terms of the type of traffic that

is currently using these roads and then would the project related traffic bring as an impact to the

project area.

10.4.1 Location 1: Gulpur Junction

Figure 10.2: Out at Gulpur Junction (Towards Mirpur-Rawalpindi Traffic)

It is obvious from the Figure 10.2 that the traffic activity varies with the different times of the day

starting from lower number of vehicle in early morning to gradually increasing towards the mid-day

and then there is a dip in the afternoon and then another rise in traffic count in the evening and

finally a drop towards the later of the evening and still lower in the late night of the hours.

In terms of the traffic activity there are three main peaks first is around the 0900 hours which is

normally the time when people have to reach to the offices and business. Next surge is in the

afternoon lunch time around 1400 hours as that is lunch time in the offices and off time for

educational institutions and hence the greater activity. The last peak in the traffic activity is observed

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

Car Jeep Van (Flying Coach) Suzuki Van Truck Motorcycle



10-4

in the evening around the 1700 hours time mark because this is the time when people leave their

work places and rush towards their homes.

Figure 10.3: In at Gulpur Junction (From Mirpur-Rawalpindi to Kotli Traffic)

The traffic pattern in the opposite direction at the Gulpur Junction follows a slightly different pattern

in terms of the number of traffic peaks in which away traffic were three and here there are two clear

surges, one at the same time in the morning around the 1000 hours while the next one is observed

at around the 1600 hours (Figure 10.3).

Figure 10.4: Traffic in/out at Gulpur Junction

If we compare the two traffic patterns simultaneously (Figure 10.4) it can be seen that the volume of

traffic attracted towards Gulpur and then traffic away from the Gulpur area is more or less the same

but the slight change is observed only in the timings of peak traffic hours. This is due to the reason

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90


0

50

100

150

200

250

In at Gulpur Out at Gulpur



10-5

that people from the adjoining areas come to for business to Gulpur in the morning and then go

back and hence the greater activity in that direction.

10.4.2 Location 2: Palak Junction

Figure 10.5: Out at Palak Junction (From Kotli to Dadyal-Mirpur Traffic)

At this location the traffic follows a different pattern with no hourly surges or peak hours to be

specific but starting to rise in the early hours of the morning around the 0800 hours the traffic

volume remains constant well in the afternoon and even towards the evening (Figure 10.5). The

early morning hours and then later at night there is a considerable dip in the traffic count in the area

owing to the rural setting of the locality. If we observe carefully there is sudden lull in traffic around

the 1900 hours.

Figure 10.6: In at Palak Junction (From Dadyal-Mirpur on Kotli Road Traffic)

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35


0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35




10-6

Unlike the traffic going away from the traffic survey point there change in the volumes. From the

early mornings of the day there is a constant build up towards the 1000 hours when there is a

distinct peak in traffic volume and then again in the evening around the 1700 to 1800 hours.

Towards the late evening, just like the early hours of the morning the traffic volumes are significantly

reduced (Figure 10.6).

Figure 10.7: Traffic In/Out at Palak Station

If we compare the two traffic volumes the patterns and volumes are more or less the same except

for a deviation around the 0800 to 1000 hours where the traffic away from the traffic survey point is

higher than the traffic attracted towards this location (Figure 10.7).

10.4.3 Location 3: Near Proposed Project Site

Figure 10.8: In at Project Site (Towards Kotli City Traffic)

0

20

40

60

80

100

Palak Station

In at Palak Station Out at Palak Station

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90




10-7

This was the last of the traffic survey locations that was selected for this round of traffic count

survey. For the project attracted towards this location there is only one high volume activity zone

which is from 0800 to 1100 hours. Apart from that the traffic volume is significantly lower than the

three hours when there is maximum activity recorded in terms of traffic attracted towards the

project site (Figure 10.8).

Figure 10.9: Out At Project site (Away from Kotli on Rawalpindi-Mirpur Road Traffic)

The traffic pattern at this point is totally different and the busiest part of the day is around 1400

hours in the afternoon with the least activity in the early hours of the morning and the late hours of

the evening (Figure 10.9).

Figure 10.10: Traffic Towards and Away from the Proposed Project Site

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80


0

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

180

Towards Project Site Away From Project Site



10-8

If we plot the traffic data for both directions for this point there is a wide gap emerging in the traffic

volumes in the afternoon. Overall the traffic coming towards the project site is significantly lesser

that the traffic going away from the project site (Figure 10.10).

As seen in Figure 10.11, if we compare the traffic count data from all the three survey locations we

can see that majority of the vehicles are motor cars and motor bikes, followed by public transport

vehicles and trucks. Keeping in mind the proposed project this indicates that the volume of heavy

vehicles would definitely increase and may cause traffic impacts that are listed and assessed in the

following sections.

Figure 10.11: Traffic Flow by Vehicle Type

The traffic counts may be higher for a hilly area but majority of the count accounts for motor bikes

which would, in the project scenario, be less of an issue with reference to the expected rise in traffic

volumes.

Another important observation is that daily around 200 trucks are moving along the roads which

would be used for project activities, which means that the risks associated with the movements of

these vehicles are known to the people. Furthermore these roads are frequently used by trucks so

there would not be a need for roads improvement at least in the initial phases of the project, in time

if the requirement arises, different options can be assessed as per the demand of the situation then.

Passenger Car Equivalent (PCE) is a metric used in Transportation Engineering, to assess traffic-flow

rate on a highway. A Passenger Car Equivalent is essentially the impact that a mode of transport has

on traffic variables (such as headway, speed, density) compared to a single car. For example, typical

values of PCE (or PCU) are:

• private car (including taxis or pick-up) 1

• motorcycle 0.5

• bicycle 0.2

• horse-drawn vehicle 4

0

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

Car Jeep Van (FlyingCoach)

Suzuki Van Truck Motorcycle

In at Gulpur Out at Gulpur In at Palak Station

Out at Palak Station Towards Project Site Away From Project Site



10-9

• bus, tractor, truck 3.5

In our case the PCE or PCU values are as low as 1,724 and 1,776 for traffic leaving and entering the

project site.

While if it is considered as Class 1 Highway the PC/ hour for combined flow is only 195 while

according to HCM 2000 the recommended capacity of the two lane highway is 3200 PC/hour so the

traffic flow is very low and with addition of at maximum 200 trucks per day the value will rise

insignificantly.

10.5 Potential Impacts

i. In view of the above discussion following are the potential impacts envisaged due the

proposed project activities:

ii. Traffic congestions at the entry and exit points of Kotli and especially near the different

quarrying sites

iii. Road damage to the main road shoulders at the proposed quarrying sites, camping sites and

near the batching plant (s)

iv. Noise due to the movement of heavy traffic and their pressure horns especially while

loading and offloading near communities

v. Fugitive dust emission I general due to movement of heavy traffic on roads and especially

the dust emissions from the trucks that would be carrying the quarried material to and away

from the quarrying site as well when carrying the spoil load for disposal away from site

vi. Increased risk of road side accidents as the traffic would have to pass through several small

and large settlements where the shops, schools, mosques and other such types of places are

almost on the road shoulder

vii. In case a heavy vehicle carrying equipment or construction material is met with an accident

that would block the road entirely creating a major problem as the roads enter the hilly

terrain of the AJK region which would cause serious issues as there would be no alternative

route available in the immediate vicinity to shift the traffic

viii. As the road passes through so many villages and there are cattle that frequently cross the

road would also be exposed to increased risk

ix. Exhaust emissions from these vehicles would impact the ambient air quality as well and in

case of traffic blockages or traffic congestion it may be a hazard for the nearby people

10.6 Mitigation Measures

Following are the general mitigation measures to be followed during the construction activities.

Detail traffic management plan is to be developed for the construction phase (see ESMMP).

i. Contractor’s vehicle will follow strict speed limits within city and all applicable local traffic

rules and regulations especially near sensitive receptors (Schools, hospital, mosques etc.)

ii. In no case horn will be used during the day timings near the sensitive receptors

iii. Over speeding will be subject to disciplinary actions.

iv. Local traffic will be allowed to overtake and drivers will be encouraged to make way for the

local commuters, ambulances, army and special persons conveys in all cases.



10-10

v. Contractor’s personnel will only use access routes assigned to them for project activities

which will be finalized during the kickoff meeting with representatives of client,

subcontractor and social receptors

vi. Trucks and vehicle will not be overload.

vii. Movement of contractor’s vehicles for transportation of material and wastes from and to

the site will be restricted to low traffic timings.

viii. A monitoring protocol will be implemented to track the vehicles

ix. Heavy traffic will only travel in the night time or a special permission from the district

administration be obtained.

x. Contractor’s vehicles and equipment will be parked at identified designated area.

xi. Vehicles and machinery should be appropriately parked/ placed to provide ample access to

local commuters/pedestrians

xii. Diversion plans will be developed to minimize disturbance to local population during

occasional high activity timings / days. These plans will be communicated to residents well in

advance and proper diversion signs will be placed to inform locals.

xiii. Prior communication to residents and safety signs will be installed well before the

commencement of any activity at site

xiv. The vehicles will be encouraged to leave the city area as quickly as possible after the delivery

of material to the project site.

10.7 Conclusions

The traffic baseline surveys and traffic assessment clearly suggest that the current road conditions

are appropriate for the project related traffic during the construction and operation. The traffic load

is also as calculated PCE values are very low in comparison to HCM 2000.

The social receptors are already experiencing the traffic flow on the current road so it is not

expected that they will be susceptible to project related traffic. With implementation of the

proposed mitigation measure and development and implementation of the project traffic

management plan the impact will be minimized.



10-1

Environmental and

Social Management

and Monitoring Plan

(ESMMP)

Volume 2





Environmental and Social Management and Monitoring Plan (ESMMP)

of



Volume 2

September, 2013



11-1

11 ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL

MANAGEMENT AND MONITORING PLAN

This section comprises the Environmental and Social Management and Monitoring Plan (ESMMP) for

the ESIA for this Project. It summarizes the organizational requirements, management and

monitoring plans to ensure that the necessary measures are taken by MPL to avoid potentially

adverse effects and maximize potential benefits of the Project as identified in preceding section of

the ESIA and to operate in conformance with applicable laws and regulations of AJK, as well as the

policies of international financial organizations such as ADB and IFC.

The environmental and social management and monitoring plan (ESMMP) presented in this section

is a component of the overall environmental management that is particularly important with respect

to this ESIA report as it presents MPL’s commitments to address the impacts identified by the impact

assessment process.

The ESMMP is based on the baseline conditions and the impact assessment described in previous

chapters, plus the results of discussions with stakeholders. ESMMP is prepared for all the identified

environmental impacts during design, construction, and operation of various Project activities. The

methodology followed for preparing the ESMMP consists of the following steps:

• Deriving mitigation/protection measures for identified impacts using impact evaluation

methodology;

• Rationalize and combine series of mitigation, compensation and enhancement measures

from each identified impacts and risks to prepare overall measures;

• Developing a mechanism for monitoring the proposed mitigation measures;

• Estimating budget requirements for implementation mitigation and monitoring measures;

and

• Identifying responsibilities of various agencies involved in the Project for implementation

and monitoring of mitigation measures

The ESMP may be considered as a separate, stand-alone section within the suite of documents that

are being prepared as part of the ESIA process for this Project. This ESMMP due to its nature and

applicability will be further use for contractual purposes and will be included as a part of the bid

document for EPC contractor who have to coerce to it along with the regulatory requirement. The

strict implementation of the ESMMP and project management’s strict enforcement of the adequate

construction practices and standards will greatly reduce the negative impacts of the Project.

11.1 Institutional Implementation of ESMMP

Effective implementation and functioning of the ESMMP depends on adequate human and financial

resources, clearly defined responsibilities for environmental and social management, appropriate

training and good communication. An outline of how these features will be managed for the Project

is presented below



11-2

11.1.1 Management Commitment

To be effective, this ESMMP must be viewed as a tool reflecting to the contractors and sub-

contractors overall commitment to environmental protection. This must start at the most senior

levels in the organisation. Contractor management must provide strong and visible leadership to

promote a culture in which all employees share a commitment to environmental awareness and

protection. The following are commitments to be achieved by the highest position in Pakistan from

the MPL:

• Putting environmental and social matters high on the agenda of meetings;

• Highlighting the importance of environmental and social issues in relation to the HSE

considerations in business decisions and communication with stakeholders;

• Evaluating environmental and social aspects, before final decisions are reached;

• Being fully aware of the main environmental and social hazards associated with the

Contractor and Sub Contractor activities and the systems, procedures and field practices in

place to manage these hazards;

• Immediately and visibly responding and being involved in investigating incidents or other

abnormal events related to environmental and social and HS issues;

• Seeking internal and external views on environmental and social issues; and recognizing

their achievement.

The organization setup of MPL is provided in Figure 11.1.

Figure 11.1: Organization Setup of MPL

Manager EHS & CSR MPL

Security Manager EPC Contracotor

EHS Manager EPC Contractor

EHS 0fficer EPC Contractor

Safety Inspectors

Onsite Doctor

Paramedics

EHS Perosnnel of

Subcontractors

EHS Officer MPL

CLO EPC Contractor

CLO MPL



11-3

11.1.2 Roles and Responsibilities

11.1.2.1 Client

With overall responsibility for the Project, MPL will:

• Minimize any impact the Project may have on the environment through preparation of this

ESIA (as being carried out in the design stage)

• Appoint responsible contractors who will comply with this ESIA.

• Approve environmental safe materials for use on site in accordance with the ESIA.

• Ensure all relevant parties receive a copy of the approved ESIA and that it is incorporated

into all contractual documentation

• Obtain the relevant environmental permits, consents and authorizations prior to

commencing site works.

• Comply with all requirements of AJK EPA and obtain NOCs related to the Project.

11.1.2.2 Contractor

The Contractor’s general responsibilities will be to:

• Ensure the implementation of the ESIA/ESMMP throughout construction works by all

contractor personnel and subcontractors.

• Ensure that adequate resources are available to implement the requirements of this

ESMMP.

• Undertake quarterly environmental audits and report to MPL on regular basis.

• To coordinate with MPL for all correspondence to AJK EPA.

• Prepare a comprehensive legislation list and ensure compliance to these legislations.

11.1.2.3 Sub-Contractors

Any Sub Contractor hired directly or indirectly by the Contractor to carry out Project related tasks is

designated as a subcontractor. It is the responsibility of those sub-contractors, whose activities have

at least one interface with identified key environmental aspects, to comply with the ESIA at all times.

They must also designate sufficient competent resources to ensure all Sub-Contractor personnel

receive the required training. Sub-Contractors directly in charge of activities shall be registered and

approved. Registration documentation should be provided to the Client prior to commencement of

any activities. Sub-Contractors are expected to demonstrate a proactive behavior towards

environmental concerns. It is their responsibility to provide information requested by the Client with

regard to their scope of activities and to demonstrate compliance with the applicable environmental

requirements.

11.1.2.4 Personnel

Chief Executive Officer

The Chief Executive Officer (CEO) manages and superintends all head office and site activities for the

implementation of the Project. In relation to the ESIA and implementation of ESMMP, the CEO’s

responsibilities will include:



11-4

• Overall responsibility for ensuring implementation of the ESMMP in compliance of all legal

matters regarding the Project.

• The development and establishment of adequate Environmental, Safety and Quality

Management teams, who will ensure the development, communication and implementation

of this ESIA across the entire project, including all activities being undertaken by

subcontractors and suppliers working on the site, and all personnel visiting the site.

• Ensure that an environmental representative is available on the Subcontractor part to

address environmental requirements in accordance with the ESIA.

• To develop and establish an organization structure adequate to oversee the whole of the

works, including overseeing the appointment of an appropriate qualified HSE Manager and

Environmental Manager.

• Ensure that adequate resources are available to implement the requirements of this ESIA.

• Ensure the ESIA is reviewed regularly to correspond with on-going construction activities.

• Coordinate with government agencies and bodies regularly to discuss the Project’s

construction environmental issues and requirements.

• Attend regular meetings with the Head Hydro Project, Construction Manager, HSE Manager

and Environmental Manager in order to discuss the site’s environmental issues and

requirements.

Chief Technical Officer

Responsibilities include:

• Taking primary responsibility for all activities on site, including those undertaken by direct or

indirectly employed personnel or agencies.

• Ensuring the issue of suitable procedures for the definition of working methods and site

regulations that take into consideration the requirements within the ESIA.

• Ensuring that construction and erection works are performed in respect of the ESIA

requirements.

• Attending regular meetings in order to discuss the site’s environmental issues and

requirements.

Manager EHS & CSR

The Manager EHS & CSR manages and supervises the Project activities relating to health, safety and

environment. The HSE Manager will be responsible for:

• The overall responsibility for the development and implementation of the Project HSE policy

/ philosophy.

• Coordinating weekly HSE meetings, during which any environmental issues will be discussed

and minuted.

• Reviewing and ensuring the implementation of Contingency and Emergency Response

Procedure.

• Providing specialized HSE input into engineering, construction and contracts, ensuring

requirements are properly integrated into project planning, design criteria, construction

plans and specifications and contracts



11-5

• Supporting / leading incident investigations as per project procedure and report to all

concerned. Follow up and review the corrective and preventive action taken, and close-out

the incidences.

• Conducting HSE inspections of project construction activities and monitoring compliance

with requirements including contractual commitments, permits and projects HSE plan and

other applicable HSE requirements and ensure that the Project HSE inspection plan is

implemented.

• Ensuring that all internal as well as external incidents and complaints are appropriately

resolved with all applicable forms and records duly filled and maintained.

• Coordinating and organizing regular meetings with the Project Director, Construction

Manager and Environmental Manager in order to discuss the site’s HSE issues and

requirements.

• Coordinating the environmental activities with the higher management time to time.

• Coordinating with the AJK EPA, other regulatory authorities and stakeholders on

environmental issues related to construction of the Project.

• Monitoring construction activities and performance to ensure compliance with the ESIA and

effectiveness of control measures adopted.

• Ensuring that no works are carried out outside the construction corridor as defined in the

ESIA, especially within the protected areas (e.g. forests).

• Ensuring the issue and updating of the project’s environmental plans.

• Coordinating Project document review activities from an environmental standpoint, assuring

that the execution of these activities is compatible with development of the Project and

reporting any discrepancies between the environmental requirements and other Project

objectives to the Head Hydro Power and CEO.

• Supplying essential information for the preparation of the environmental control plan for

construction.

• Updating AJK EPA regularly on construction information.

• Coordinate the development of environmental monitoring data relevant to construction

activities.

• Performing environmental checks and monthly internal audits of onsite activities, in

coordination with the HSE Manager.

• Supporting the higher management in relations with the governmental agencies and with

the AJK EPA on environmental matters.

• Implementing the environmental requirements of the project management system including

inspection and reporting.

• Monitoring construction activities and performance to ensure compliance with the CEMP

and effectiveness of control measures adopted.

• Developing and implementing of the environmental training programme.

• Conducting staff environmental training, inductions and Tool Box Talks (TBT).

• Advise the Project Manager, or in his absence the relevant Construction Manager, to stop

work which could, or is, causing unacceptable environmental impacts.

• Communicate with internal and external parties as required.



11-6

• Coordinating daily and weekly site inspections and approving the associated environmental

inspection report.

• Reviewing daily and weekly checklists to ensure that appropriate recording of site activities

and observations.

• Preparing of the monthly environmental reports, quarterly performance reports and

incident reports.

• Reporting of any environmental incidents to the higher management.

• Ensuring that major environmental incidents are reported to AJK EPA within a maximum of 3

days.

• Participating in environmental management reviews.

• Reviewing environmental monitoring data.

• Raise non-conformance and issue CAPs reports in coordination with the HSE Manager /

coordinator(s).

• Ascertaining that effective measures and relevant actions are undertaken to avoid or

minimize adverse environmental impacts.

• Attending regular meetings with the CEO, Head Hydro Power, PM, Construction Manager

and HSE Manager in order to discuss the site’s environmental issues and requirements.

• Ensuring that all internal as well as external environmental incidents, emergencies and

complaints are appropriately resolved with all applicable forms and records duly filled and

maintained.

• Regular reviewing of environmental plans and procedures to assess compliance and

recommend revisions, where required.

• Review quarterly audit reports and submit to AJK EPA with the quarterly performance

reports.

11.2 Mitigation and Management Plan

The plan prepared in accordance with the above framework is given below. The key components of

the plan are discussed in the following sections.

The environmental and social management plan includes the following:

• Impact reference – this specifies the impact/s which according to impact assessment

methodology followed for the project has potential influence either negative or positive and

needs to be mitigated by the proposed management measure influences as discussed in

earlier sections.

• Description of the impact – this briefly describe the potential impact which may arise from

the project activities and need a management measures

• Mitigation / Management measure – a description of the action, which will be clear, concise

and specific enough to enable execution of the action. Where relevant, targets, indicators,

trigger points and/or threshold levels will be incorporated into the management measure. If

a set of management actions is required to meet the objective, the ESMP will be simplified

by making a commitment to develop an appropriate supporting document in which the

detail will be provided.

• Project phase – Indicating the project phase/s when the management measure is applicable



11-7

• Institutional Responsibilities –an indication of the roles and responsibilities for the concise

implementation of proposed management measures

• Targeted residual impact– an indication of how achievement of the management measure

will be assessed, which will be used to develop the monitoring, inspection or audit program

In addition to the above, specific management plans are developed which includes:

• Construction management Plan

• Air Pollution Control Plan

• Waste Management Plan

• Muck Disposal Plan

• Spill Contingency Plan

• Biodiversity Conservation and Management Plan

• Construction Labour Management Plan

• Traffic Management Plan

• Health and Safety Plan

• Emergency Preparedness Plan



11-8

Table 11.1: Environmental and Social Management Plan

Impact

Ref Description Mitigation / Management Measures Project Phase

Institutional Responsibilities Targeted Residual

Impact Implementation Supervision

PE1

Discharge related to

Project construction and

operation can

potentially result in the

contamination of soil

1. The generator will be placed on impervious

layer. Sufficient area around the generator will

be made impervious to contain any spill during

maintenance

2. Fuel tanks will be appropriately marked by

content and will be stored in dyked areas with

an extra 10% of the storage capacity of the fuel

tank. The area will be lined with an impervious

base

3. Grease traps will be installed on the site,

wherever needed, to prevent flow of oily

water.

4. Spill control kit (shovels, plastic bags and

absorbent materials) will be available near fuel

and oil storage areas.

5. Emergency plan for spill management will be

prepared and inducted to the staff for any

incident of spill.

6. The bottom of any soak pit or septic tank will

be at least 10 m above the groundwater table.

The distance can be reduced, if based on the

soil properties, it is established that the lesser

distance will not result in contamination of

groundwater

Construction

Operation

Constructional and operational Contractor

MPL

There are no major oil releases (more than 200 litres) during the construction and all the minor releases (less than 5 litres) are reported

PE2

Land clearing and blasting and drilling activities may loosen the top soil in the project area especially during the wet season

7. Vegetation loss shall be minimized to the extent possible which would help soil bonding

8. The nearby area will be sprinkled before blasting and drilling to minimize erosion

9. Controlled blasting shall be done to minimize environmental impacts

10. Areas such as muck disposal area, batching plant, labor camp, quarry sites, etc. after the closure shall be covered with grass and shrubs

Construction Construction contractor

MPL There are no major landslides due to project



11-9

Impact




11. Slopes in the drilling and blasting areas should

be protected against sliding

12. All trace cutting works for road construction,

adequate retaining wall or breast wall to be

provided in case the geology is not self-

supporting.

13. Slope stabilization measures will be adopted

such as adequate vertical and horizontal drains,

drainage along road sides, cross drainage etc.

PE3

Uncontrolled

wastewater releases

from the construction

camp, vehicles washing

area

14. Soak pits for kitchen waste water will be

installed

15. Septic tanks for sewage waste will be put in

place

16. Prohibit release of camp effluents to the water

channels or land

17. Lining of all effluent channels at all working

areas with cement will be done to prevent

seepage

18. All the garbage shall be collected and disposed

off adequately to the disposal site or to an

incinerator, if feasible

19. Leakage of oil wastes from oil storage and

vehicles should be avoided in order to prevent

potential contamination of streams or ground

water

20. Surface runoff from oil handling areas/devices

should be treated for oil separation before

being discharged into the river.

Construction

and

Operations

Construction and operation contractor

MPL

The river water quality is not affected by the project

PE4

Construction of weir may alter the drainage patterns of the area

21. Results of the biodiversity assessment (ecological flow) be incorporated in implementation plans.

22. Surface runoff from oil handling areas/devices should be treated for oil separation before

Detailed Design and Construction

Design consultant and contractor

MPL

Little to no impact on the ecological biodiversity downstream



11-10

Impact




being discharged into the river.

23. The sand and gravel quarrying sites shall be

selected keeping in view the impacts and

magnitude of change in surface water drainage

patterns. Major changes in the landscape shall

be avoided.

24. At the completion of activities the natural

pattern shall be restored, to the extent

possible.

PE5

The water availability to

the local communities

may be affected due to

influx of project

25. Water for different construction activities will

not be drained of the local wells or fountains

instead will be arranged form the river or via a

water contractor from an approved source by

the local authorities

26. Water conservation techniques will be

developed and implement by the EPC

contractor

27. Records of water usage would be maintained

28. Shallow or perched aquifers shall not be tapped

for any project activity

29. Access to community wells shall be kept clear

so that the community’s ability to meet its

water requirements are not compromised

Detailed

Design and

Construction

Design consultant

and Contractor MPL

No complaints from

the locals on water

availability

PE6

Construction activities

will create fugitive dust

emissions

30. For fugitive dust control, sprinkling of water on

the project roads will be done

31. Grading operation to be suspended when the

wind speed exceeds 20 km /hr.

32. All storage piles shall be adequately wetted or

covered with plastic to ensure protection of

ambient air from fugitive emission during wind

storm

33. Batching plants and associated machinery

installed for project activities will be installed

Construction Construction

contractor MPL

Ambient PM values

are within

permissible limits



11-11

Impact




with suitable pollution control arrangements

34. Speed limits and defensive driving policies will

be strictly implemented

35. Road damage caused by project activities will

be promptly attended to with proper road

repair and maintenance work

PE7

Exhaust emissions from

generators, project

traffic and batching

plant may deteriorate

the local ambient air

quality

36. New and low emission equipment and vehicles

shall be used

37. Best quality fuel and lubes shall be purchased

where possible lead free oil and lubes should

be used

38. Batching plant shall be set up considering the

wind direction so that the nearby communities

are not affected by the emissions from

batching plant

39. Batching plant should be kept as near to

natural sinks to minimize emissions to ambient

environment

40. Regular maintenance of vehicles and

equipment will be conducted to keep emissions

in check

41. Filters will be installed wherever available in

vehicles and equipment

42. All stacks will be at least 8ft high to safeguard

the labor and passersby from the emissions

Construction Contractor MPL

No complaints

received regarding

noise pollution

PE8

Blasting for tunneling

may cause damage to

nearby infrastructure

43. Safe distances acceptable worldwide will be

calculated and maintained

44. Where safe distances cannot be maintained the

structures will be evacuated of the occupants

to avoid human loss

45. Controlled blasting techniques will be adopted

at all times

46. Public infrastructure and cultural heritage sites

Construction Contractor MPL

No complaints

received regarding

noise pollution



11-12

Impact




if any near the blasting area will be reinforced

in terms of civil works

47. Muffled blasting techniques be adopted where

required.

PE9

Constructional may

cause nuisance in the

vicinity

48. The construction equipment generating high

noise must be designed to have an adequate

muffler system.

49. All stationary noise generating equipments

such as air compressors and power generators

should be used away from the residential area.

50. A proper routine and preventive maintenance

procedure for project vehicles and equipment

should be set and followed in consultation with

the respective manufacturer which would help

prevent noise levels from deteriorating with

use.

51. Provision of proper Personal Protective

Equipment (PPEs), i.e., ear muffs and plugs, will

reduce noise impact on personnel.

52. Movement of vehicles should be restricted to

project area only.

53. Restriction on pressure horns.

54. The nearest community will be informed three

siren in advance for the case of blasting

activities

55. Blasting will be done only in day hours

56. unscheduled blasting will be strictly prohibited

in any case

Constructional Contractor MPL

No complaints

received regarding

noise pollution

PE10

Impacts of earthen

dyke on physical

environment

57. The dimensions of dyke to be identified after

detailed assessment of floods and surface

hydrology of the area.

58. The drainage system of surface water during

rains and excess water for irrigations shall not

Constructional

and

Operational Contractor MPL

No complaints received regarding noise pollution



11-13

Impact




be blocked and the diversion of the same shall

be in a manner that it has no impacts to the

community and agricultural lands.

59. Water logging and salinity of the area shall be

assessed and pumps be installed, if required.

60. Material for the construction of the dyke to be

sourced considering environmental aspects

including drainage pattern, stability, vegetation

and public infrastructure.

EC1

Land disturbance due

to construction and

operation of project

facilities resulting in

disturbance,

fragmentation,

displacement and direct

loss of animal, plants,

reptiles, amphibians

and birds.

61. Cutting of trees if any will be minimized and

damage will be compensated by re-plantation.

Off-road driving will be prohibited

62. Discharging firearms will be explicitly prohibited

63. The project staff will be educated and instructed to avoid killing or chasing wildlife.

64. The staff will be educated and monitored to ensure that they do not get engage in animal related trade

65. Periodic trainings of the project staff will be conducted on biodiversity conservation issues to sensitize them about the biodiversity and protected area

66. All restrictions imposed under wildlife legislation of AJK, particularly relevant to national park, will be strictly observed.

Construction Construction Contractor

MPL

The trees are replanted in case of cutting. BAP implemented on site

EC2

Deterioration of area’s water resources river if pollutants such as domestic waste (sanitary and kitchen discharge) or oil and

67. No waste will be discharged in open areas. 68. No contaminated effluents will be released to

the River 69. Water from washing areas and kitchen will be

released in sumps 70. Sumps will remain covered all the time and


MPL Waste management is implemented



11-14

Impact




grease, and fuel from

project related

machinery or

equipment are mixed

with surface runoff

during rain, or if

pollutants leach into

the ground or are

carried to river

measures will be taken to prevent entry of

rainwater into them and at safe distance from

runoff

71. Fuels and lubricants will be stored in areas with

impervious floors and dykes that can contain

spills, and at safe distance from water

resources

72. Fuels and lubricants will be handled in areas

with impervious floors.

73. The produced water will be discharged into the

waste pit.

74. Entry of runoff from surrounding areas to the

land farming site will be restricted by the

construction of bunds or diversion of runoff

75. All septic tanks will be lined with concrete and

at safe distance from runoff

76. Waste mud and cuttings will be released into

the imperviously lined waste pit

77. Septic tanks and wastewater pits will be

designed so that runoff does not flow into

them or at and at safe distance from runoff.

78. Maximum spill tray will be provided to all

project vehicles to control fuel or oil leakage

EC3

Deterioration of area’s

water resources river if

pollutants such as

domestic waste

(sanitary and kitchen

discharge) or oil and

grease, and fuel from

project related

machinery or

equipment are mixed

79. A management plan will be developed for

ensuring long-term survival of the species.

80. Determination of ecological flows to be

undertaken for maintaining healthy population

of the fauna and flora of the river in the

downstream area of the Weir.

81. A fleet of active guards need to be appointed

by the government to intensively watch and

ward of the fisheries resources of the river. The

guards need to be provided with the

Operation Contractor MPL Implementation of BAP



11-15

Impact




with surface runoff

during rain, or if

pollutants leach into

the ground or are

carried to river

motorcycles, petrol, uniforms and torches for

an effective patrolling of the area to check any

illegal fishing. These guards may be given

special training for performing their duties in a

befitting manner.

82. Declaration of Weir to Power House Area as

closed area for fishing.

83. Communities living along the project area may

be involved in various eco-tourism activities for

conservation of fisheries resources of the area.

84. Involvement of local administration and law

enforcement agencies in the fisheries

conservation process is important as nothing

happens without their will and commitment.

Regular meetings with local deputy

commissioners, police officers and even with

top bureaucrats need to be held to take them

on board for implementation and enforcement

of law.

85. Two Mahasher hatcheries need to be

established, one upstream the weir and the

other downstream the weir for recruiting the

river and dam site for compensation of any loss

of Mahasher fish being caused by the project

activities.

SE1 Potential for local

opportunities

86. The local people be offered project related jobs

on priority basis

87. The project will arrange skills development and

training program to local people in handing

equipment and machinery required for the

project

88. The project to boost local economy by injecting

money and enacting instrumental role in

Construction

and Operation

Constructional contractor and operational contractor

MPL 100 % unskilled jobs are provided to the locals



11-16

Impact




emergence of new vocations and professions

SE2

Local communities

access to the health

facilities

89. The contractor to establish health facilities in

the camp during construction phase. Operation

Operational contractor

MPL Health facilities developed in area

SE3

Permanent acquisition of land and non-land assets for the project

90. Land and non-land assets to be acquired at replacement value/market value following the Land Acquisition and Resettlement Framework.

91. Clear delineation and dissemination of laws both customary and positive laws related to land issues.

Detailed Designed

Resettlement specialist

MPL

RAP is developed and implemented. No local communities complaints regarding the compensation and its mechanism

SE4

People lose their productive assets to the project

92. People losing more than 10% of their productive assets to be provided with livelihood allowances as per LARF.

93. People losing their assets to be offered project related jobs

94. Skills development training to local people

Detailed Design and Construction

Resettlement specialist Construction contractor

MPL

No local communities complaints regarding the compensation and its mechanism

SE5

Diseases incidences due to pollution and interaction with labor

95. A comprehensive Health and safety plan to be implemented

96. Creation of grievance redressed mechanism to protect rights and livelihood of community


MPL

No local communities complaints regarding the compensation and its mechanism

SE6 Blockage of roads during the construction

97. Alternate access to local communities during construction work,

98. Scheduling for road blockade 99. Alternate options for patients in emergencies


MPL

No local communities complaints Diversion plan implemented Drivers trained on the traffic issues

SE7 Privacy of local people to be disturbed because

100. Contractor’s camps to maintain a reasonable distance from local population


MPL No local communities



11-17

Impact




of contractor’s camp

and construction work.

101. Restriction on mobility of workers in local

community

complaints

Diversion plan

implemented

Drivers trained on

the traffic issues

SE8

Conflict between

workers and local

community to increase

102. Contractor’s camps to maintain a reasonable

distance from local population

103. Restriction on mobility of workers in local

community

104. Priority in jobs for the local people with

expertise required by the project

Construction Construction

contractor MPL

No local

communities

complaints

Diversion plan

implemented

Drivers trained on

the traffic issues



11-18

11.3 Monitoring Plan

Monitoring of environmental components and mitigation measures during implementation and

operation stages is a key component of the ESMMP to safeguard the protection of environment. The

objectives of the monitoring are to

i. manage environmental issues arising from construction works through closely monitoring

the environmental compliances

ii. monitor changes in the environment during various stages of the project life cycle with

respect to baseline conditions;

Monitoring program will includes regular monitoring of construction and commissioning activities

for their compliance with the environmental requirements as per relevant standards, specifications

and ESMMP. The purpose of such monitoring is to assess the performance of the undertaken

mitigation measures and to immediately formulate additional mitigation measures and/or modify

the existing ones aimed at meeting the environmental compliance as appropriate during

construction.

The monitoring programme will be coupled with a series of supporting procedures, yet to be

developed, covering:

• sample or data collection;

• sample handling, sample storage and preservation;

• sample or data documentation;

• quality control;

• data reliability (calibration of instruments, test equipment, and software and hardware

sampling);

• data storage and backup, and data protection;

• interpretation and reporting of results; and

• verification of monitoring information by qualified and experienced external experts.

Skeleton Environmental Monitoring Plan is provided in Table below. Data will be documented and

interpreted. Temporal and spatial trends in the data will be discerned and compliance with relevant

thresholds will be evaluated. Monitoring reports will be produced to meet internal and external

reporting requirements. If monitoring results indicate non-conformance with stipulated thresholds

or if a significant deteriorating trend is observed, it will be recorded as a non-conformance and

handled by the non-conformance and incident procedure.

11.3.1 Site inspections

Site inspections will be undertaken regularly in relevant areas of the Project. The inspections will

focus on compliance with the ESMMP. The inspections will play an important role in increasing

awareness of ESMMP.

Minor non-conformances will be discussed during the inspection and recorded as a finding in the

inspection report. Major non-conformances will be reported as incidents. Inspection results will be

disclosed at management meetings.



11-19

11.3.2 Formal audits

Formal audits will be undertaken at planned intervals in accordance with the requirements of client

and regulatory authorities. Procedures for audits will be established, implemented and maintained.

These will cover the audit criteria, scope, frequency and methods, and will address the

responsibilities and requirements for planning and conducting audits, reporting results and retaining

associated records.

Any negative findings arising from an audit will be treated an incident and dealt with in accordance

with the non-conformance and incident procedure. Results from audits and evaluations of

compliance with legal requirements will be reported to site and senior management and subject to

management reviews. Usually environmental regulatory authorities require a quarterly audit report

for large scale projects.

11.3.3 Non-conformances and incidents

Non-conformances include the following:

• exceedances of relevant thresholds as identified during routine monitoring;

• non-conformances with the requirements of the ESMP or supporting documentation

identified during an internal inspection;

• non-conformances identified during an audit or by regulatory authorities;

• events, such as spills, resulting in potential or actual environmental harm;

• events that did or could result in injury to staff, visitors to site or surrounding communities;

and

• significant complaints or grievances received from any source.

Corrective and preventive actions will be identified and implemented in response to these non-

conformances. These actions will address the root cause of the non-conformance and will reduce or

prevent repeated non-conformances.

A process will be established for the identification, investigation and tracking of non-conformances,

including:

• prioritizing and classifying non-conformances based on the type and severity of the non-

conformance;

• recording of non-conformances and the results of corrective and/or preventive actions,

including the actions necessary to mitigate or remedy any associated impacts;

• defining results expected from the corrective and/or preventative actions;

• confirming the corrective and/or preventive actions taken to eliminate the causes of the

non-conformance are appropriate to the magnitude of problem and commensurate with the

impacts encountered;

• reviewing the effectiveness of the corrective and/or preventive actions taken; and

• implementing and recording required changes in the ESMP or monitoring programme

resulting from corrective and preventive action.

Serious non-conformances will be classified as incidents. Incidents will be promptly reported to

appropriate management. A guideline will be prepared on:



11-20

• the types of incidents reportable to internal management at the site, Project and corporate

levels, as well as to regulatory authorities and other external stakeholders; and

• standards to be observed when reporting incidents.

During construction, environmental monitoring will ensure the protection of air and noise pollution,

community relations, and safety provisions. Post monitoring evaluation will be carried to evaluate

the impacts of the Project during first 3 years of operation of the Project. During operation,

emissions, air, noise, and waste water quality monitoring and greenbelt development around the

plant will be important parameter of the monitoring program.

The monitoring requirement can only be fulfilled by maintaining the proper documentation records

of the findings. Daily checklists, weekly reports and monthly audit will be taken in accordance with

construction management plan. Based on the ESIA approval a scheduled audit will be conducted by

the MPL and reports will be shared with the regulatory authority and funding agency if required.

11.3.4 Documentation and Record Keeping

Monitoring elements of the ESMMP will be documented and controlled in accordance with a

document control system. Records demonstrating compliance with legal requirements and

conformance with the ESMMP will also be maintained. Client will supervised, establish, implement

and maintain procedures:

Documentation and record keeping controls will include:

• measures to enable relevant documents and records to be readily available and identifiable

(labeled, dated and properly filed), legible and protected from damage;

• review, revision and approval of documents for adequacy by authorized personnel at least

once a year;

• establishment of the electronic document control version as the ‘authorized version’;

• making current versions of relevant documents available at locations where operations

essential to the effective functioning;

• suitably identifying obsolete documents retained for legal and knowledge preservation

purposes; and

• identification and segregation of confidential and privileged information.

11.3.5 Preliminary monitoring programmes

Preliminary monitoring program have been prepared in response to the ESMP (Table 11.1). These

provide a framework of monitoring to evaluate performance and assist in predicting and managing

impacts.

The frequencies and locations may need to be adjusted depending on final Project design and

ongoing review of results obtained by the monitoring programmes.



11-21

Table 11.2: Preliminary Environmental Monitoring Program

Aspect

Impact

referenc

e

Type of monitoring Units Frequency Location/s Records Reporting

Land

disturbance

PE1,

PE2,

PE3, EC1

Footprint area disturbed and/or

rehabilitated m2

Monthly during

construction and

then as needed

when land

disturbed or

rehabilitated

Alongside the weir

and power house

area

Log

Monthly report

during construction

Annual report during

operation

PE1,

PE2,

PE3, EC1

Soil quality for at least the following

parameters: Al, Sb, As, Ba, Be, Bi, Bo,

Cd, Ca, CrIII, Criv, Co, Cu, Fe, Pb, Li, Mg,

Hg, Mo, Ni, P, K, Se, Si, Ag, Sr, S, Tl, Sn,

U, V, Zn, TPH, NH-3, Cl, EC, F, nitrate,

nitrite, pH, phosphate, sulphate, TOC

ug/L, mg/L or other units as appropriate

Annually ESIA baseline monitoring points

Database Annual report on results and long term trends

PE1, EC1 Visual inspections for signs of erosion or wind deposition

None Quarterly or on receipt of grievance

Construction sites, rehabilitated areas and water release points

Log Annual report with non-conformances handled

PE2, SE7 Visual inspection of road condition None Quarterly or on receipt of grievance

Bypass roads around fenced Project facilities

Log Annual report with non-conformances handled

Water

PE1, PE3, PE4, PE5, EC2, EC3, SE3, SE4

Measure of the flow m3 Weekly Before and after the projects at selected monitoring points

Log Monthly Reports



11-22

Aspect

Impact

referenc

e


PE1,

PE3,

PE4,

EC2, EC3

Quality of water supply in accordance

with the WHO and National regulation

Mg/l or other units as appropriate

Quarterly ESIA baseline monitoring points

Database Quarterly report

PE1 Volume of water used for dust control m3/d When water trucks filled

Truck filling points Database Monthly report of volume

Air

PE1, EC1, SE7

Dust deposition and horizontal dust flux

mg/d/m2 Quarterly ESIA baseline monitoring points

Database Quarterly report of results and long term trends

PE6 Ambient air concentrations µg/m3 Quarterly ESIA baseline monitoring points


PE6 Stack testing of generators and other equipment

µg/m3 During induction to site and quarterly

For each equipment including but not limited to generator, batching plant


Vehicle and Equipment

PE1, EC1, PE6, PE9, SE7, SE8

Random speed checks km/hr.

Once a week and different location and different time

Access and haul roads

Log Monthly report

PE1, EC1, PE6, PE9, SE7, SE8

Records of vehicle and equipment maintenance

None As per manufacturers instructions

Mine truck shop and equipment workshop

Log Annual report



11-23

Aspect

Impact

referenc

e


PE9, SE2 Baseline noise emissions of new

equipment dB

On commissioning of new equipment

Within 100m of equipment

Log None

Ecological

EC1 Visual inspections by ecologist to verify presence or absence of species of conservation importance

None As per BAP Areas to be utilised for construction or waste deposition

Log Monthly report

EC1, EC2 Visual inspections of presence of weeds or invasive species

None As per BAP Disturbed and rehabilitated areas, and adjacent areas

Log Annual report on findings and remedial measures

EC2, EC3 Records of animal kills None On occurrence Within Project areas Log Annual report on fatalities and remedial measures

EC2 Records of major wildlife sightings None On occurrence Within or near the Project area

Log Annual report on observations



11-24

11.4 Cost Estimates

Cost estimates are prepared for all the mitigation and monitoring measures proposed in the ESMMP.

The cost represented Table 11.3 is indicative only. This budget has been calculated for a duration of

45 months of the construction phase. The costs for implementation of environmental and social

mitigations during the operational phase are not included. The operational cost shall be calculated

before the completion of construction phase after consultation with stakeholders and regulatory

authorities. The cost for land acquisition and resettlement related activities are not included. This

cost shall be calculated on actual basis after detailed and specific surveys and completion of land

acquisition and resettlement plan (LARP).

Estimates are based on the current market rates for similar activities and items, which are

implemented in similar projects. Estimations of quantities are based on previous experiences. The

cost estimates and the budget during design and construction phase for the mitigation and

monitoring measures is estimated to be around one and half million united states dollars.

The cost estimates for control measures and some of the mitigation measures that were already part

of Engineers estimate are not included in the ESMMP. The cost estimates also includes the budget

for environmental monitoring, implementation, institutional strengthening and capacity building of

project staff and environmental enhancement/compensation measures.

Table 11.3: Indicative Budget and Breakdown

Sr. No. Activity Estimated Cost (USD)

1 Facility for generators (PE1-1) 2,830

2 Oil and grease collection system (PE1-3, EC2-79) 420

3 Spill control kit (shovels, plastic bags and absorbent materials) (PE1-4) 2,360

4 Sprinkling of water on the project roads, blasting/drilling areas and material piles (PE2-8, PE6-30, PE6-32)

21,220

5 Plantation and re-vegetation (PE2-10, EC1-61) 94,340

6 Soakage pits for wastewater (PE3-14, EC2-70, EC2-71, EC2-73, EC2-74) 1,320

7 Septic tanks for sewage waste (PE3-15, EC2-76, EC2-78) 1,690

8 Lining for effluent collection system (PE3-17, EC2-77) 850

9 Solid waste management (PE3-18) 8,490

10 Plastic covering of all material storage piles (PE6-32) 3,770

11 Personal Protective Equipment (PPEs) (PE9-51) 24,340

12 Installation of pumps for water logging and salinity (PE10-59) 28,300

13 EHS trainings (EC1-65, EC1-66, SE1-88, SE3-95) 14,150

14 Facility for fuels and lubricants storage (EC2-72) 990

15 Biodiversity Action Plan (EC3-80) 141,500

16 Ecological Flow Assessment (EC3-81) 141,500

17 Environmental monitoring activities (EC3-84) 9,430

18 Activities for involvement of local administration and law enforcing agencies (EC3-85)

18,860

19 Establishment of two Mahasher hatcheries on the upstream and downstream of the weir (EC3-86)

188,670

20 Construction of a basic health facility, with necessary equipment and operation cost for 45 months (SE2-90)

116,000

21 Implementation of health and safety plan (SE5-96) 212,260

22 Salaries for EHS staff 500,900

Total Cost 1,534,190



11-25

11.5 Environmental Training

Personnel, including contractors’ personnel, working for or on behalf of the Project will be informed

of potential significant environmental and social impacts and risks associated with the Project by

means of awareness training. Visitors to Project sites will also receive awareness training as part of

site induction training.

Personnel, including contractors’ personnel, will be made aware of their specific environmental and

social management responsibilities. Training needs analyses will be undertaken and personnel will

be given adequate training to meet these responsibilities.

The training programme comprises the following elements:

• identification of training needs for all employees specific to their varying responsibilities;

• development of a training plan and schedule to address defined needs;

• verification of training programmes to confirm consistency with organizational

requirements;

• training of employees and documentation of training received;

• evaluation of training effectiveness; and

• review and modification of training programmes, as required.

Personnel with direct responsibility for implementation of the ESMMP and functioning of the will

have additional training to:

• provide them with the knowledge and skills necessary to perform their work;

• maintain their knowledge of relevant environmental and social obligations; and

• enable them to implement specific measures required under the ESMP in a competent and

efficient manner

11.6 Construction Management Plan

The construction contractor will develop a specific construction management plan (CMP) based on

the conceptual CMP included below. The CMP will be submitted to the client for approval.

The CMP will clearly identify all areas that will be utilized during construction for various purposes.

For example, on a plot plan of the construction site the following will be shown:

• Areas used for camp

• Storage areas for raw material and equipment

• Waste yard

• Location of any potentially hazardous material such as oil

• Parking area

• Loading and unloading of material

• Septic tanks

Every contractor should submit the CMP and get a prior approval from the client before the

commencement of any activity on the site.



11-26

The plan should:

• Be in line with the client requirement

• Adhere to the rules and regulation

• Identify clear roles and responsibilities

• Identify monitoring plan for management

Table 11.4: Aspects and Objectives of Construction Management Plan

Aspect Objective Mitigation and Management Measure

Vegetation

clearance

• Minimize vegetation

clearance and felling of

trees

• Removal of trees should be restricted to the

development footprint.

• Construction activities shall minimize the loss or

disturbance of vegetation

• Use clear areas to avoid felling of trees

• A procedure shall be prepared to manage

• vegetation removal, clearance and reuse

• Inform the plant management before clearing trees

• Cleared areas will be re-vegetated

Poaching • Avoid illegal poaching

• Contractual obligation to avoid illegal poaching

• Provide adequate knowledge to the workers relevant

government regulations and punishments for illegal

poaching

Discharge from

construction

sites

• Minimize surface and

ground water

contamination

• Reduce contaminant and

sediment load discharged

into water bodies

affecting humans and

aquatic life

• Install temporary drainage works (channels and bunds)

in areas required for sediment and erosion control and

around storage areas for construction materials

• Prevent all solid and liquid wastes entering waterways

by collecting waste where possible and transport to

approved waste disposal site or recycling depot

• Ensure that tires of construction vehicles are cleaned

in the washing bay (constructed at the entrance of the

construction site) to remove the mud from the wheels.

This should be done in every exit of each construction

vehicle to ensure the local roads are kept clean

•

Soil Erosion and

siltation

• Avoid sediment and

contaminant loading of

surface water bodies and

agricultural lands.

• Minimize the length of time an area is left disturbed or

exposed.

• Reduce length of slope of runoff

• Construct temporary cutoff drains across excavated

area

• Setup check dams along catch drains in order to slow

flow and capture sediment

• Water the material stockpiles, access roads and bare

soils on an as required basis to minimize dust

• Increase the watering frequency during periods of high

risk (e.g. high winds)

• All the work sites (except permanently occupied by the

plant and supporting facilities) should be reinstated to

its initial conditions (relief, topsoil, vegetation cover).

Excavation, earth

works, and

construction

yards

• Proper drainage of

rainwater and wastewater

to avoid water and soil

contamination

• Prepare a program for prevent/avoid standing waters,

which Construction Supervision Contractor (CSC) will

verify in advance and confirm during implementation

• Establish local drainage line with appropriate silt

collector and silt screen for rainwater or wastewater



11-27


connecting to the existing established drainage lines

already there

Construction

vehicular traffic

• Control vehicle exhaust

emissions and combustion

of fuels

• Use vehicles with appropriate exhaust systems and

emission control devices.

• Establish and enforce vehicle speed limits to minimize

dust generation

• Cover haul vehicles carrying dusty materials (cement,

borrow and quarry) moving outside the construction

site

• Level loads of haul trucks travelling to and from the

site to avoid spillage

• Use of defined haulage routes and reduce vehicle

speed where required.

• Transport materials to site in off peak hours.

• Regular maintenance of all vehicles

• All vehicle exit points from the construction site shall

have a wash-down area where mud and

• earth can be removed from a vehicle before it enters

the public road system.

• Minimize nuisance due to

noise

• Maintain all vehicles in good working order

• Make sure all drivers comply with the traffic codes

concerning maximum speed limit, driving hours, etc.

• Avoid impact on existing

traffic conditions

• Prepare and submit a traffic management plan

• Restrict the transport of oversize loads

• Operate transport vehicles, if possible, in non– peak periods to minimize traffic disruptions.

• Prevent accidents and spillage of fuels and chemicals

• Restrict the transport of oversize loads

• Operate transport vehicles, if possible, in non– peak periods to minimize traffic disruptions

• Design and implement safety measures and an emergency response plan to contain damages from accidental spills

• Designate special routes for hazardous materials transport.

Construction machinery

• Prevent impact on air quality from emissions

• Use machinery with appropriate exhaust systems and emission control devices.

• Regular maintenance of all construction machinery

• Provide filtering systems, duct collectors or humidification or other techniques (as applicable) to the concrete batching and mixing plant to control the particle emissions in all stages

• Reduce impact of noise and vibration on the surrounding

• Appropriately site all noise generating activities to avoid noise pollution to local residents.

• Ensure all equipment is in good repair and operated in correct manner.

• Install high efficiency mufflers to construction equipment.

• Operators of noisy equipment or any other workers in the vicinity of excessively noisy equipment are to be provided with ear protection equipment

• The project shall include reasonable actions to ensure that construction works do not result in vibration that could damage property adjacent to the works



11-28


Construction

activities

• Minimize dust generation

• Water the material stockpiles, access roads and bare

soils on an as required basis to minimize dust

• Increase the watering frequency during periods of high

risk (e.g. high winds).

• Stored materials such as gravel and sand should be

covered and confined

• Locate stockpiles away from sensitive receptors

• Reduce impact of noise

and vibration on the

surrounding

• Avoid driving hazard

where construction

interferes with pre–

existing roads

• Notify adjacent landholders or residents prior to noise

events during night hours

• Install temporary noise control barriers where

appropriate

• Avoid working during 21:00 to 06:00 within 500m from

residences.

• Minimizing impact on

water quality

• Stockpiles of potential water pollutants (i.e. bitumen,

oils, construction materials, fuel, etc.) shall be locate

so as to minimize the potential of contaminants to

enter local watercourses or storm-water drainage

• Storm-water runoff from all fuel and oil storage areas,

workshop, and vehicle parking areas is to be directed

into an oil and water separator before being

discharged to any watercourse.

• An Emergency Spills Contingency Plan shall be

prepared.

Siting and

location of

construction

camps

• Minimize impact from

construction footprint

• Arrange accommodation in local towns for small

workforce

• Locate the construction camps at areas which are

acceptable from environmental, cultural or social point

of view

Construction

Camp Facilities

• Minimize pressure on local

services

• Adequate housing for all workers

• Safe and reliable water supply.

• Hygienic sanitary facilities and sewerage system.

• Treatment facilities for sewerage of toilet and

domestic wastes

• Storm water drainage facilities.

• In–house community entertainment facilities

Disposal of

waste

• Minimize impacts on the

environment

• Ensure that all on-site wastes are suitably contained

and prevented from escaping into neighboring fields,

properties, and waterways,

• and the waste contained does not contaminate soil,

surface or groundwater or create unpleasant odors for

neighbors and workers

• Prepare detailed waste management and muck

disposal plan incorporating safe disposal of the

expected waste from the construction activities

Water and

sanitation

facilities

at the

construction

sites

• Improve workers personal

hygiene

• Provide portable toilets at the construction sites and

drinking water facilities.

• Portable toilets should be cleaned once a day.

• All the sewerage should be pumped from the

collection tank once a day into the common septic

tank for further treatment.



11-29

11.7 Spill Contingency Plan

The plan should be read in correspondence to the other plans of ESMMP which includes:

• Construction management Plan

• Air Pollution Control Plan

• Waste Management Plan

• Muck Disposal Plan

• Biodiversity Conservation and Management Plan

• Construction Labour Management Plan

• Traffic Management Plan

• Health and Safety Plan

• Emergency Preparedness Plan

The construction contractor will develop a specific plan (SCP) for the project and get a prior approval

from the client before the commencement of any activity on the site.

The plan should:

• Be in line with the client SCP

• Adhere to the local rules and regulation



Spill Contingency Plan (SCP) scope is to provide the basis and the guidelines for the management of

spills which could happen during the execution of the Project.

The Plan is dedicated to the management of oil/ chemical incident (both accident and near misses):

for other kind of environmental incident refer to Emergency Management Plan.

During the course of the Project, every effort shall be made to ensure that all operations are

conducted in order to avoid the risk of a spill situation or, whenever an accident occurs, to

implement measures and actions to prevent its escalation.

Starting from the identification of the main situations in which a spill of pollutants may occur, the

plan outlines strategies for spill prevention relevant to the site activities and describes procedures

for the control and limitation of the releases, in order to avoid or minimize the impact on the

environment.

Moreover this plan details the overall response coordination in order to organize the control, alert

and intervention, so as to avoid or reduce any potential pollution.

The Spill Contingency Plan will include the following:

• identification of the relevant types of spill and the scenarios which could possibly lead to

pollution;

• identification of the prevention strategies and the actions adopted during and immediately

after the release of pollutants;



11-30

• description of the project site organization, both during the prevention and emergency

intervention phases;

In pursuing this aim, the following actions shall be considered as priorities:

• carrying out all the necessary operations for the protection of the health and safety of all

people present where the spill occurs, both employees and others;

• minimization of the spill dimensions and protection of the main structures;

• minimization of environmental impact due to spill.

11.7.1 Identification of Potentially Polluting Substances and Pollution

Scenarios

This section provides an inventory of polluting substances present on site, indicates a possible

classification of spills by degree of severity, and identifies the various pollution scenarios.

11.7.1.1 Inventory of Potentially Polluting Substances

Potentially polluting substances have been identified by analyzing the main critical activities

performed during the Project. The detailed list of construction activities is provided in ESIA, Section

3.

An analysis of the above-mentioned activities shows that the most critical substances that may be

involved in spills are:

• diesel fuels;

• brake fluids;

• lubricants, such as engine and transmission fluids;

• solvents and chemicals;

• cement additives and residues;

• paints;

• battery acid;

• hazardous liquid wastes (e.g. used oil, spent paints and solvents, wastewater from washing

equipment facilities).

However, during the execution of the Project, only small quantities are typically involved in

incidents, with the possible exceptions of fuel transportation operations, breakdown of storage

tanks or of existing pipelines.

The following subsections outlines descriptions of the main identified hazardous substances that will

be possibly used throughout the PROJECT, and gives preliminary indications about their use and

storage.

11.7.1.2 Polluting Substances and Management Options

The following subsections outlines descriptions of the main identified hazardous substances that will

be possibly used throughout the project, and gives preliminary indications about their use and

storage.

Diesel fuels



11-31

• The most of diesel fuels will be used for vehicles and equipment throughout the project

area.

• Designated refueling areas are classified for mobile machinery and equipment and semi-

permanent equipment installations. Vehicles and equipment that are difficult to move due

to their size or whose movement to the designated refueling areas may cause further

damage to the environment and create a road safety hazard shall be refueled by means of

mobile refueling vehicles.

• Diesel fuel will be stored in dedicated facilities protected by concrete retention bounds or

lined with plastic sheeting for spill containment.

Brake fluids

• Brake fluid is a specially formulated liquid used in the brake hydraulic system.

• Brake fluids will be stored in sealed containers within a designed and bounded area. The

storage in non-designated areas is forbidden. In addition, drip trays will be used during

maintenance activities.

Oil and Lubricants

• Oil and lubricants will be used for the maintenance of all vehicles, vessels and equipment,

usually during planned maintenance processes at the site maintenance facilities. However, it

is possible that machinery and equipment will have to be serviced or repaired outside of the

maintenance area: oil and lubricants may be de-canted from their storage drums and

transported for use to other areas of operation.

• Oil and lubricants shall be stored in sealed drums (150 – 200 L) within a designed secondary

containment area at the main camp facility designated maintenance and storage areas. The

storage in non-designated areas is forbidden.

Paints and Solvents/Chemicals

• Paints (used during painting activities) shall be stored in sealed drums in properly designated

areas with appropriate environmental and safety controls.

• Solvents and other chemicals shall be stored in sealed drums in properly designated areas

with appropriate environmental and safety controls.

• All solvents and chemicals shall be segregated as per their MSDS and stored separately

depending on their chemical reactivity and compatibility criteria.

• Chemicals shall be used, in any significant quantity, for maintenance in camp areas.

Cement Additives and Residues

• Cement additives will be used during the Construction activities and will be stored within the

cement production area in designated compounds.

• Cement residues may be arisen during cleaning operations involving cement trucks and

mixing facilities, when they are performed in-site. The residue shall be mixed with copious

amounts of water. An area for the cleaning of cement-contaminated equipment shall be



11-32

designated within the cement production area. This kind of wastewater shall be properly

collected and disposed of in an environmental responsible manner.

Battery Acid

• Battery acids will be used for maintenance requirements. They shall be stored separately

from any other substance in a designated area within the hazardous substance storage area.

It shall be stored in a supplier’s container and shall not be de-canted into any other

container.

Hazardous liquid wastes

• The provisions of this Plan may be applied also to respond to potential spills of liquid wastes.

Recommendations about hazardous liquid wastes management is reported in the Waste

Management Plan

In addition, it shall be remarked that wastewater for large concrete-mixing equipment, if any, shall

not be discharged on the ground. It shall be collected and disposed of properly. All washing

equipment operation shall be carried out in identified locations where produced wastewater may be

collected and disposed of in a proper manner.

11.7.1.3 Classification of Spills

As it may be detected from the above inventory, the pollutants most likely to be spilled are

hydrocarbons and there would be essentially no difference in the impact of any one of these

substances on the environment.

Therefore the spill contingencies are usually classified into three levels, or “Tier” approach and the

classification is based on the entity of the spill and on the response resources required to deal with

it, as follows:

Table 11.5: Classification of Spill Contingencies

Tier Definition Example Responsibility

Tier A

Minor Incident One that is easily brought under control and prevented from re-occurring by the Contractor

• Small, containable spills within the site boundary

• Minor nuisance but controllable and preventable from re-occurrence

• Minimal environmental damage but controllable and preventable from re-occurrence

Following the incident response the HSE Coordinator will be responsible for notifying the Environmental Manager / Construction Manager.

Tier B

Medium Incident One that will need to be brought under control and prevented from re-occurrences in consultation with the HSE Coordinator

• Un-containable or uncontrollable spills within the site boundary

• Excessive uncontrollable incidents which are likely to re-occur to cause nuisance or when a complaint is received

• Un-rectifiable environmental damage and likely to re-occur

Following incident response the Environmental Manager / Construction Manager will be responsible for notifying the local authorities and detailing actions to prevent re-occurrence.

Tier C

Major Incident (Emergency) One which cannot be controlled by the Project

• Un-containable or uncontrollable spills outside the site boundary or which affect authorities supply networks

Following incident response the Environmental Manager / Construction Manager will,



11-33

Tier Definition Example Responsibility

or that effects local

authorities or

independent parties

• Excessive uncontrollable incidents

which will re-occur to cause danger,

nuisance, numerous complaints or

significant impact to proponents

reputation and / or principles

• Massive environmental damage at the

site which will re-occur to cause long

term major impacts.

in agreement with

proponent, be responsible

for implementing the

relevant authority’s

response plans.

The classification is to be considered only as a general guideline: who is responsible for dealing with

the emergency shall decide, case by case, which actions are the most appropriate for the specific

spill occurred.

The potential severity of a spill may be reduced by the following actions:

• Ensure that in site there are appointed personnel with appropriate and sufficient skills and

information in order to mobilize promptly suitable resources;

• Allow rapid and orderly expansion of spill response by each Project areas as needed during a

declared emergency;

• Optimize use of project resources, and facilitates the interface among contractor,

Subcontractors, Government and their Agencies and others that could become involved in

an escalating spill response;

• Provide flexibility to address local, regional, countrywide emergencies, with a clear

understanding and devolution of responsibilities.

• As a spill evolves, its severity is continuously re-evaluated, and the level of response is

adjusted as appropriate.

For the Project activities, the most probably spills are of Tier A: in order to deal with them the

procedure explained in this plan will be applied.

11.7.1.4 Pollution Scenarios/Potential Incidents

Spills are usually related either to operator errors or to incidental events due to equipment failures.

Equipment failures include corrosion and leaking of pipes and tanks, valves failure, and sewer and

drain leaks. Many of these failures may be avoided through proper inspection and maintenance

procedures.

Operator errors include overfilling tanks and improper alignment of valves and piping. These and

other operator errors can properly be corrected through developing operating procedures, regular

training and testing of personnel, and systematic follow-up to assure that procedures are followed.

It is assumed that all personnel performing or supervising the various phases of work are familiar

with international and local standards and have gained sufficient operational experience to be able

to take preventive measures in all types of high-risk situations.



11-34

Furthermore, those responsible for the various phases of the Project Execution shall ensure that all

vessels, vehicles, and equipment are kept in perfect working order and functioning efficiently. This

will reduce drastically the likelihood of spill due to both human errors and malfunction/breakdown.

In addition, it will be their responsibility to ensure that all controls and necessary maintenance work

are carried out correctly, so that the equipment in use is always in a perfect state.

Possible common incidents that may occur during site activities and may cause the release of

hazardous materials include the following:

• Spills during vehicle maintenance such as oil leaks while changing the oil, engine coolant

leaks while changing or adding coolant, and fuel leaks while refueling the vehicles. If these

spills occur, the quantities should be minimal;

• Oil/diesel spills due to improper handling of drums and improper storage of them (Tier A

expected – 200, 250 liters);

• Paint spills from painting and labeling equipment, oil and hydraulic fluid leaks from

machinery, and gas leaks from welding equipment. The severity of these spills will vary

depend upon spill detention and response (Mostly it is expected to be Tier A);

• In case of a vehicle overturning, the fuel tank may be damaged and a fuel spill occurs.

Furthermore, depending upon what the vehicle was transporting, other spills may occur in

conjunction with the fuel spill. The severity of these spill events is highly dependent upon

several factors such as the hazard degree of the substances transported, where the spill

occurred, and what, environmentally sensitive areas were affected, if any.

• Breakdown of storage tanks. The severity of these spills will vary depending upon the

quantity involved, expected to be quite high (it shall be noticed that if the release occurs in

the retention basin it is not to be considered as environmental accident, but a near miss).

• In case of spills as a result of a vehicle accident / collision the severity will vary depending

upon the quantity of vehicles involved and the severity of the incident.

11.7.2 Spill Prevention Strategies and General Response Action

Potential incidents are usually related either to operational/human errors or to unexpected

events/breakdown.

All personnel performing or supervising the various phases of work shall be familiar with

international and local standards and have gained sufficient operational experience to be able to

take preventive measures in all types of high-risk situations.

The purpose of this section is to describe the preventive and planning measures and the responding

procedures for dealing with spills of pollutant substances during the execution of the Project.

Specific responsibilities and procedures to be followed during prevention, planning, and spill

response activities are detailed in the following.

The review of the procedures of this Plan will be carried out by contractor on as-needed basis.

The main objective of the emergency procedures review is:



11-35

• to determine if the procedures should be modified to prevent reoccurrence of similar

accidents;

• to improve preventive and response measures;

• to investigate the causes that led to the spill;

• to keep records of spills and actions undertaken to deal with the emergency.

11.7.2.1 Spill Prevention

The main objective of the prevention and planning phase is the implementation of all possible

measures to prevent any potential spill of polluting substances.

Prevention of spills shall be the prime objective and shall include operating practices (maintenance

to the construction equipment and tools), inspections and monitoring of facilities.

Personnel responsible for handling and storage of liquids which may be involved in spills shall

receive training on the best practices to be adopted in site.

In this phase, the resources appointed to manage the emergency arisen by the spill of pollutant

substances, has the following tasks:

• to identify all the hazardous materials, related to Project activities, that may produce a

health and safety risk for project employees and subcontractors and that may produce an

environmental impact;

• to make all personnel working on the project informed about environmental protection

concerned and to ensure that all workers are familiar with response procedures when a spill

occurs;

• to ensure that the activities carried out comply with the procedures, especially those

regarding prevention of spills into the environment of pollutant substances;

• to provide continuous training to enable workers to perform their work in a safe and healthy

manner.

For the particular activities potential source of incident, the general strategies described in the

following subsections shall be adopted in order to prevent the most critical spills.

The activities are:

• Chemicals and Hazardous materials handling and storage

• Oil changes

• Chemicals/fuel transfer

• Construction equipment operation

Chemicals and hazardous material handling and storage

Properly label containers;

• Keep an updated inventory of all chemicals and hazardous materials stored on site;

• Keep Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs) at storage areas: handling and storage shall

respect the recommendations defined in;



11-36

• Use appropriate chemical segregation practices where any potentially toxic or hazardous

material will be stored;

• Manual handling of hazardous materials shall be minimized and the use of forklifts or cranes

with pallet loads shall be preferred;

• Storage areas of hazardous materials/chemicals shall be sheltered from the sun, provided

with a means to restrict access, located away from occupied buildings and work areas, and

properly sign posted (Figure 11.3) - eg. “no smoking”, “hazardous material storage area”,

etc”.

• All hazardous chemicals and materials will be stored in contained bounded areas with

impervious flooring, or according to the most conservative of relevant government

regulations and guidelines regarding safe handling, storage and transport;

• All chemicals storage tanks and drums shall be located on paved area or contained within a

suitably sized concrete retention bound. In this case the bound shall be provided with a

lockable valve. All drainage valves shall be kept closed. They shall be opened only after

checking the absence of chemicals in water to be discharged.

• Waste oils and other liquid wastes shall be stored in sealed drums within a designated

secondary containment area or in a temporary storage area consisting of an earth bound

lined with plastic sheeting;

• All fixed fuel storage tanks will be contained within a suitably sized concrete retention bund

(Figure 11.2);

Figure 11.2: Hazardous Storage Area and Diesel Tanks Containment Basin

• Stationary fuel storage tanks and dispensing areas will have a containment membrane

underneath and a bund around;

• In the event of a significant leakage from the fuel tanks in the bund retained fuel will be

pumped back into another tank or the repaired tank. Residual fuel on the bottom of the

bund will be soaked up using appropriate spill kits or sand and disposed of in compliance

with Waste Management Plan. This episode has to be considered a “near miss”;

• For transferring of fuel from a delivery tanker to a stationary storage tank:

o The hose coupling must be compatible,

o The use of improvised connections shall not be permitted,



11-37

o Shut off valves shall be available and easily closable in the event of hose or

connection failure,

o The operation must be supervised at all times.

• According to ESIA, daily and weekly checks will be undertaken of the construction area

including chemical and hazardous materials / waste storage area: these will be recorded in

the daily and weekly site inspection reports.

• The access to potentially hazardous materials shall be granted only to qualified personnel:

Hazardous materials will only be handled by trained personal.

Furthermore, environmental warning signboards shall be displayed at critical pollution point, in

order to address the workers to adopt good environmental behavior and promote environmental

awareness.

Figure 11.3: Environmental Awareness Signboards

Maintenance and Refueling

The maintenance and refueling activities shall be carried out on a dedicated area, properly

demarcated and with signboard (preferably an area for each activity). The Area shall be:

• Located safe in terms of position;

• Not close to site traffic access routes;

• Not place within 30 m of any hot work activity;

• Not on environmentally sensitive surface.

The area shall be paved; only if there is not availability of any paved area, a non-paved area can be

used.

The maintenance vehicles shall perform the activity only in the Maintenance area and every vehicle

shall be provided with:

• MSDS;

• Drip tray;

• Spill Response Kit;

• PPE;



11-38

• Fire extinguisher.

During Maintenance and Refueling, the following measures shall be strictly put in place in order to

avoid any kind of contamination of the ground and ground water.

• Place retention tanks or drip trays below drum taps and fuel hoses to collect every drips and

leaks and provide spill response kit

• Use portable tanks placed under engine drain points to prevent any spilling of oils during oil

changes. The contents of these tanks will be transferred immediately to sealed drums within

the designated waste oil storage areas;

• Place retention tanks or drip trays below all terminals and in-line connections (e.g. drum

taps, fuel hoses, etc.) to collect drips and leaks. Couplings will be appropriate, shut off valves

easily accessible;

• Check tanker delivery hose for residual fuel from last fuelling operation. If there is residual

fuel, handle the delivery hose accordingly;

• Properly connect delivery pipes. Ensure the integrity of all terminal and in-line connections;

• Operator must control the dispenser at all times.

If there is some oil that spills inside the drip tray, it shall be put again in the tank or dispose as

indicated in Waste management plan. This episode has to be considered a near miss.

Figure 11.4: Drip Trays under Fuel Hoses and Drums Stored Temporarily

Construction equipment operation

• All welding machine, compressor units, water pumps, power generators (on wheels or not) -

diesel and petrol operating construction equipment shall have drip trays placed under them

during operation (any eventual spillage – that in this case has to be considered near miss-

will be collected and disposed of as hazardous waste);

• Trucks transporting oils, greases and fuels for the earthmoving machinery shall be equipped

with anti-spilling devices on distribution nozzles and pistols.

• Heavy vehicles and cranes shall be assisted during maneuvering to avoid incidents;



11-39

• All plants and vessels shall be maintained in an efficient state, efficient working order and in

good repair;

• Vehicle maintenance and Routine inspections of components and systems shall be carried

out as per the manufactures maintenance manual;

• Vehicles and equipment will be kept in designated areas away from sensitive environments.

• Pre start checkup and visual checks to be carried out to ensure the integrity of the

plants/equipment.

Figure 11.5: Equipment Washed in a Dedicated Area inside Drip Tray

11.7.2.2 General Response Action

This section provides a general overview of response options to deal with possible oil and chemical

spills during site activities. These may include more significant spills arising from accidents, or spills

resulting from leaking fuel tanks, chemical drums, etc., that can lead to large releases of material.

Any incidents where pollutant spills are involved require immediate response to stop the source of

the discharge, to limit the spread of material and to ensure the safety of personnel and the

sensitivity in the area where spill occurred.

During response operations, priority shall be given to the protection of health and safety of the

personnel involved. Therefore, appropriate PPE shall be worn during the response activities.

The main objective of the response phase is to minimize the effects of any spill and, if necessary, to

clean-up the site concerned.

In this phase, the organization assigned to manage the emergency has the following tasks:

• to guarantee the immediate identification of the spill;

• to take action to handle the emergency phases after the spill of polluting substances, and

specifically to stop and contain the spill, taking the necessary steps to protect personnel and

the environment, thus minimizing the negative effects of such an occurrence;

• to take action to clean-up the impacted area.

Spill identification



11-40

The first step after the occurrence of a spillage is the identification of its source. Once the spill has

been assessed, response measures shall be immediately selected and undertaken in order to

mitigate its effects. Any response action may depend on the spill severity.

Incident Evaluation

After spill identification, the severity of the spill shall be evaluated in order to select the proper

response strategies.

In addition, the situation shall be assessed to determine whether evacuation is required. If

necessary, traffic will also be re-routed.

Once these factors have been determined, the proper level of response will be determined. In any

case, after stopping the release of material to the environment, containment shall likely be the next

step of response process.

Spill Response Equipment

As rapid containment of any spill is desirable, the equipment for the clean – up shall be suitable for

adequately respond to the type of substance spilled.

In particular, according to CEMP, spill kits shall be provided in the construction site in the area where

a possible scenario of spill, as described, can occur.

Commercially are available different types of spill kit (Figure 11.6), fit for the purpose (i.e. volume of

spill, liquid involved, outdoor / indoor spill, etc). In the common spill kit the following items are

provided:

• Absorbent pillows and granulate;

• Polypropylene adsorbent pad;

• Containment drip pans;

• Shovels;

• Protective gloves;

• Goggles / safety glasses;

• Heavy duty oil resistant storage bags;

• Duct tape.



11-41

Figure 11.6: Spill Response Kit

The pollutant materials, arisen by clean-up actions, shall be disposed of in compliance with Waste

Management Plan

All response and clean up material will be replaced as soon as practicable after it has been used.

After an incident, the effectiveness of the present Plan shall be assessed and, if necessary, the spill

response procedure shall be properly improved and updated.

It is contractor and subcontractor duty to verify that their workers are equipped (and trained to use)

with all PPE prescript on specific MSDS concerning each chemical substance used.

It is Contractor and subcontractor duty to include type of PPE to be used specifically to individual

chemicals, as prescript on MSDS, on their HSE Plans. This information will be available before to the

site activities and will be transmitted by HSE Manager.

Containment methods

Selection of appropriate control and containment techniques is dependent on site-specific

conditions, such as:

• the nature of the substrate;

• the slope of the terrain;

• the amount of product;

• the time available to implement response action.

The following subsections describe general containment and clean-up techniques to treat pollutant

spills that have impacted impermeable and permeable land surfaces.

The objective of surface containment is to prevent the spread of spilled material on soil surface and

to intercept the horizontal movements in the subsoil. The most important containment techniques

are:



11-42

• surface containment: to prevent spread of substances on soil surface or substrate surface

and to prepare it for the recovery;

• sorbent barriers: to form a continuous barrier to limit spreading and collect the pollutant to

allow recovering by physical removal of spent sorbents or by pumping.

Surface Containment

The method for surface containment of fuels, solvents, chemicals, and other dangerous or hazardous

toxic materials on impermeable ground may consist of:

• block inlets/outlets to drains, pipes, sewage systems, and cable ducts to prevent explosion

risk or contamination of sewage treatment plants or water courses (if any in the area);

• use sorbents to limit spreading;

• concentrate the material by brushing it in to a collecting area, or by creating an absorbent

barrier that can be tightened around the pool, so that it can be transferred to a container.

In case of a spill directly to permeable ground or if spilled material escapes a bermed area, one of

the following approaches will be employed:

• for smaller spills, increase sorption capacity of surface layers by spreading absorbent

material;

• use absorbent barriers to contain the spill;

• for larger spills or where movement is an issue, construct barriers, such as berms, dams, and

trenches, to contain or divert the flow. These barriers can be constructed with readily

available tools and equipment, such as shovels, earth-moving equipment, and sorbents;

• block all inlets, except the oily water drains, and let the pollutant flow enter an oil

interceptor via the water drainage system and retain it there;

• in presence of oil spill, bulldoze or otherwise move any free oil and oil-saturated soil to the

nearest natural or artificial impermeable surface.

The confinement operations should be started immediately to limit the amount of penetration of

spilled material into the soil surface, thus containing the spill impacts.

The advantage of the containment methods is that confinement and damming can be achieved using

easily available materials and are suggested if the pollutant is to be pumped and/or sucked up.

Sorbent Barriers

Sorbent materials may be stacked or piled to form a continuous barrier across the entire leading

edge of the advancing pollutant mass to contain minor flow and recover a portion of the hazardous

substance. Collected pollutant is recovered by physical removal of spent sorbents or by vacuuming

or pumping when quantity exceeds absorption capabilities of the sorbents.

The application depends on the form of the sorbent; generally they are spread or applied over the

slick and, after absorption, they are collected by various methods.

Clean-up, Recovery and Removal Methods



11-43

The appropriate clean-up technique to be used depends on the location of the incident, volume and

type of the pollutant involved, and the amount of soil that has to be removed. For smaller spills,

storage containers, such as lined drums or lined hauling trucks, will typically be sufficient for

collection and transport of the recovered and waste materials. For larger spills or if insufficient

storage containers are available, the removed material may be held, prior to disposal or treatment,

in a lined excavated ditch prepared using a bulldozer.

Depending on the specific circumstances of the spill, the choice on how to conduct recovery

depends on:

• the material spilled;

• the quantity spilled;

• the location of the spill and terrain of the surrounding area;

• potentially endangered resources;

• manpower and equipment resources available.

These factors define the possible impact of the spill and the options for cleanup. The expected

benefits from using a particular technique must be weighed against the potential impact to the

environment from the suitable clean-up techniques.

Possible recovery and removal strategies include:

• excavation;

• recovery pump system.

Excavation

It is used to remove impacted unsaturated soil and prevent contamination of the ground water.

Contaminated soil may be removed by mechanical excavation, using various types of earth-moving

equipment, to prevent the contamination of the groundwater.

The method should not be used:

• if excavation will disturb or penetrate an impermeable natural layer;

• if there is a risk of damaging underground utilities such as pipes and electric cables;

• for large spills, because there is a danger of causing more damage and costs also rise steeply

with increased depth: recovered material may cause disposal problems.

The advantage of the method is that early and successful excavation can save long-term recovery

operations and it may be the most economic method of recovering high viscosity substances (heavy

fuel oils, some crudes, etc), even though it may increase the volume of impacted materials for

disposal.

At the end of clean-up operations the stored material will be disposed in accordance with the Waste

Management Plan. Recovered waste materials will be collected and transported as specified in the

above mentioned specification.



11-44

Recovery pump system

It is used to remove pollutant from the water table. This strategy is generally applied to a site when

the depth of the groundwater table is not significant.

11.8 Biodiversity Conservation and Management Plan

The biodiversity conservation and management Plan or which may refer to biodiversity action plan /

framework will be integral part of the ESMMP and ESIA. As part of the ESIA completion an ecology

survey of the project area has been conducted as discussed in baseline section which included:

• Qualitative and quantitative assessment of flora, mammals, reptiles and birds

• Identification of key species, their population and their conservation status in the area.

• Reports of wildlife sightings and fish captured in the area by the resident communities.

Data analysis to determine baseline biodiversity and to evaluate whether any potential critical

habitat and ecosystem services were present in the area

In the course of ESIA based on the literature review and detailed surveys in the environmental

setting of the project area (as discussed in baseline section) the need of consequent survey(s)

spanning to different seasons was observed.

The survey as have to spread to upcoming seasons the biodiversity conservation and management

plan is still in the process of finalization. The biodiversity conservation and management plan will be

included as part of the ESIA after its completion before commencement of activities on site.

It is the client commitment to implement the findings and proposed mitigation measures of the

biodiversity conservation and management plan. All the contractor and subcontractor will also be

obliged to follow it.

11.9 Air Pollution Control Plan

This Plan aims to reduce the sources and amounts of pollutants responsible for the loss of any air

quality, acidification and global warming and to improve the quality of life, protecting their health

risks from air pollution. This Plan has also been the initial commitment of client to reduce dust,

greenhouse gases (GHGs) emissions in a context of sustainable development with economic growth,

social cohesion and environmental protection at the project level. The plan should be considered in

accordance with the other plans which include:

• Construction management plan

• Water pollution control plan

• Waste management plan

• Muck disposal plan

• Biodiversity conservation and management plan

• Construction labour management plan

• Traffic management plan

• Health and safety plan



11-45

• Emergency preparedness plan

The Contractor will devise the specific plan identifying the monitoring points and detail of the

monitoring location in accordance with the clients and regulatory requirements.

The strategic lines on which contractor should submit his detail plan is as follows:

Air quality:

• Having an optimal system of assessment and forecasting of air quality for monitoring PM10,

PM2,5, SO2, NOx, CO

• Water will be sprinkled regularly to suppress dust emissions

• Stock piles from leveling will be appropriately located and dampened to avoid dust

emissions

• All the equipment and machinery will be inspected regularly for any maintenance

• Contractor’s equipment and machinery will be properly maintained and provided with

necessary noise reduction and control equipments such as silencers and mufflers

• Regulate speed of construction vehicles

• Reduce the sources and amounts of pollutants responsible for the loss of urban ambient air

quality

• Achieve a level of air quality where concentrations of air pollutants do not pose a risk to

human health and the environment.

• Improving awareness and promote a change in consumption and mobility habits.

• Improve coordination, exchange information and implement joint work with other public

and private agencies related to air quality.

• Increasing transparency and keep the public informed about air quality.

Climate Change

• Maximize savings, energy efficiency and participation of renewables in the energy structure

at local and regional level.

• Reduce the sources and amounts of pollutants responsible for global warming with “Best

Available Technologies”, cleaner fuels and more sustainable mobility.

Specific Objectives

• Implementation of the mitigation measures related to the air pollution control as identified

in the ESIA.

• Reducing emissions of nitrogen oxides and volatile organic compounds during construction.

• Incorporation of energy efficiency and renewable energy measures

• Incorporation of Vapor Recovery Systems in Fuel Stations.

In addition the contractor need to identify the roles and responsibilities of the personnel(s) involved

for the proper management and implementation of the plans.



11-46

11.10 Waste Management Plan

This is a project level plan for the waste management. The plan has been prepared to meet the Local

regulatory requirement, equator principle and EHS guideline of The World Bank. The contractor will

be asked to adhere to the plan and prepare and submit the more specific plan related to the

assigned activities to them.

The purpose of the present Plan is to provide effective guidance for the management of all the

Waste generated during Project execution.

The Plan lays down measures to protect the environment and human health by preventing or

reducing the adverse impacts of the generation and management of waste and by reducing the

overall impacts of resource use and improving the efficiency of such use. This Plan introduces an

approach that takes into account the whole life-cycle of products and processes and not only their

waste phase.

The scope of the present Plan is to:

• Describe the main principles of Waste Management strategy;

• Describe how client wishes to deals with wastes generated by its activities, products and

services (collection, handling, transportation, storage, treatment, disposal, records keeping,

auditing);

• Provide guidance to personnel and contractor for managing waste effectively and within the

requirements of the applicable waste Laws and Regulations.

11.10.1.1 Waste Management Strategy

Waste management includes the collection, temporary storage, transportation, recovery/recycle,

treatment and disposal of waste produced by activities in an effort to reduce their effects on human

health and environment throughout the entire cycle of life of their products or processes.

Contractor and its Subcontractor shall take the necessary measures to ensure that waste

management is carried out with the duty of care and without endangering human health, and

harming the environment. In particular risks to water, air, soil, plants and animals, and nuisance

through noise or odors shall be avoided.

The basic principles of waste management in activities are summarized as follow:

• Reduce

• Reuse

• Recycle

• Recovery (e.g. energy recovery)

• Responsible Disposal

This shall be considered as a hierarchy, which shall apply in a priority order in waste prevention

activities and management taking into account the Best Environmental Practicable Option (BPEO)

and Best Available Control Technology (BACT).



11-47

At all levels everyone shall take measures, as appropriate, to promote the application of this

hierarchy in all activities.

11.10.1.2 Waste Minimization Strategy

Waste minimization (source reduction and reuse) helps to conserve resources and reduce pollution,

including greenhouse gases that contribute to global warming. Moreover, it reduces waste disposal

and handling costs, because it avoids the costs of recycling, municipal composting, landfilling, and

combustion.

Source reduction is the practice of designing, manufacturing, purchasing, or using materials (such as

products and packaging) in ways that reduce the amount and/or the toxicity of waste created. This

process include, e.g.:

• material elimination

• inventory control and management

• material substitution

• reduction in the consumption of natural resources.

• process modification

• improved housekeeping

Reuse (without any treatment) is the way to stop waste at the source because it delays or avoids

items entry in the waste collection and disposal system.

Client and contractor will dedicate all efforts dedicated towards minimizing waste generation at the

source, by preventing the generation of waste and by selecting product and raw material

alternatives of lesser damage to the environment.

Following some minimization actions that will be implemented:

• reduce the water consumption (and consequently the wastewater production) from

accommodation camps through personnel awareness campaign and with the use of taps

aerator and two-way flushing system

• reduce equipment and machinery wash water through awareness campaign of the involved

personnel

• reduce packaging and packing material buying in bulk. Packaging and packing material will

be reused for other purposes (shipping, etc.)

• used wooden planks will be reused for concrete formworks and scaffolds

• timber will be used for project sign boards, etc.

• empty drums will be used as waste bins

• metal scrap will be used for other purpose, as metal drip trays, etc.

• paper from office will be reduced with proper awareness campaign of the personnel (i.e.

avoid printing, two-side printing, etc.)

• the use of small water bottles will be limited and use of water dispenser and reusable

glasses will be enhanced, especially in offices. Water bottles may be refilled several times at

the water dispenser



11-48

• soil cut material will be reused as filling material, if technically possible, or for unpaved road

maintenance.

Opportunity for minimization will be identified and consequently prioritized during the entire

execution of the project.

11.10.1.3 Waste Treatment

Substances or object that cannot be reused (waste) shall be properly treated before disposal where

possible. Waste treatment refers to the activities required to ensure that waste has the least

practicable impact on the environment.

According to waste hierarchy recycling/recovery is the first option of waste treatment.

Recycling/recovery is the conversion of wastes into usable materials and/or extraction of energy or

materials from wastes.

11.10.1.4 Waste Disposal

Responsible disposal is the depositing of waste on land (e.g. landfilling) trying to mitigate any

negative impact to the environment. Disposal is the least desirable waste management option and

shall be discouraged, and considered only for unused waste.

11.10.2 Waste Management Activities

Client is committed in the application of the strategy described above and in particular to ensure

that efforts will be dedicated toward waste production minimization. Where feasible, the waste will

be managed according to the described hierarchy.

The waste generator (Contractor and Subcontractors) is the owner of the waste and in thus

responsible for the correct handling in accordance with applicable legislation until it reaches the

approved waste management facilities.

11.10.2.1 Target and Objective

The objectives for the first year related to Waste Management are described in the following table

(the objectives for the following years will be contained in other relevant document):

Table 11.6: SMART Objectives

Subject

Specific Measurable Achievable Responsibility Timely

Description of

objective Activity Indicator Target

Responsible

Department

Time

Frame

Waste Waste Segregation

Implement segregation on project sites

No of sites where segregation is done vs. total No of sites

100% Construction End

Waste water

Wastewater Minimization of wastewater from camps

Wastewater discharged per person per day / 160 liters

1,00 Camp Boss /

HSE End

Solid Waste

Mixed solid waste

Minimization of mixed solid waste from camps

Mixed solid waste produced per person per day / 2 kg

0,90 Camp Boss /

HSE End



11-49

11.10.2.2 Waste Identification and Classification

The first step of a proper and effective waste management is the identification of waste streams

arising from project activities and temporary offices/accommodation camps.

The waste shall be properly classified in order to select the best available management technique.

According to applicable laws and regulations wastes are classified as follow:

Table 11.7: Waste Identification and Classification

Classification Examples

Solid Waste Like domestic, industrial, agricultural, medical, construction and demolition wastes

Liquid waste Effluents from residential, commercial and industrial premises and others

Gas, Fume, Vapor and

Dust Wastes

Produced by crushers houses, bakeries, incinerators, factories, quarries, power

stations, oil works, and transportation and commuting various means

Hazardous Wastes The residual or ash of the various activities and operation having hazardous

contents.

Non-Hazardous Waste Other wastes that may not be classified as hazardous

Medical Wastes

Any wastes made in whole or part of human tissue, animal tissue, blood or other body liquids, secretions, drugs or other pharmaceutical products, bandages, syringes, needles or other medical sharp objects, or any other wastes whether contagious chemical or radioactive produced by medical activities, nursing, treatment, medical care, dental, veterinary or pharmaceutical or processed activities or others, tests, research works or study materials or sampling or storage of the same.

Should the classification of a waste is unknown (whether hazardous or non-hazardous), the Project

HSE Site Coordinator and HSE Site Inspectors shall conduct initial field screening using portable

testing equipment or monitors (e.g. LEL meter, PID monitors, pH testing equipment, etc.) on wastes

to determine if they exhibit any hazardous characteristics. If an unknown waste is identified as

hazardous or potentially hazardous, the material should be subjected to laboratory testing to

guarantee its proper classification.

11.10.2.3 Waste Segregation and Collection

The segregation of different waste streams is a pre-requisite for implementing a good waste

management system.

Wastes sorting shall be promoted at all level for a more efficient handling before treatment or

disposal. Segregation shall be done in compliance with local requirements and in accordance with

final destinations available options. To facilitate and improve recycling/recovery, waste shall be

collected separately if technically, environmentally and economically practicable and appropriate to

meet the necessary quality standards for the relevant recycling sectors, where available.

Waste shall not be mixed with other waste or other material with different properties. In any case

hazardous waste shall not be mixed (or diluted), either with other categories of hazardous waste or

with other waste, substances or material.

Wastes shall be collected in adequate containers (bins, skips, etc.) as they accumulate. A color code

system shall be implemented in order to facilitate the segregation process. In all areas good

housekeeping shall be maintained at all times. The number of categories of bins/skips shall be



11-50

consistent with waste generated in the relevant areas. Clear signboards/placards shall be put on the

skips/bins in all the collection points, in order to help identifying appropriate waste type and

promote segregation.

11.10.2.4 Waste Storage

Specific areas for waste temporary storage shall be foreseen on construction sites and temporary

yards. Waste temporary storage areas will be located at main and satellite Construction Camps

Temporary waste storage shall be conducted in a way to prevent risks to the environment (water,

air, and soil) and public health, and without causing a nuisance through dust or odors. These

locations shall meet the most stringent safety and environmental conditions.

Temporary waste storage areas shall be well identified by clear signboards and properly fenced.

Waste removed from the various generation areas shall be collected, transferred and temporally

stored in this main collection points for a definite period, before being sent off site. A dedicated

competent person will be appointed to supervise the area in order to:

• Receiving wastes and ensuring they are placed in the correct area

• Ensuring all containers are properly marked with the relevant information

• Ensuring all wastes are properly packed/contained with adequate isle spacing between

containers for inspection and emergency exit

• Regular inspection of the area to ensure integrity of all waste storage containers

• Control over the removal of wastes from the area by contractors or others

• Ensuring all containers are securely covered except when waste is being added or removed

• Receiving and issuing waste transfer consignment notes

• Maintenance of waste transfer records

• Security and cleanliness of the storage area.

An up-to-date inventory of all wastes temporarily store on site must be maintained, together with

relevant health and safety information. Other kind of form, containing the same information may be

proposed by subcontractor.

Particular attention shall be given to hazardous waste storage area and collection. Hazardous waste

should be removed from sites/facilities as soon as practically possible and shall be handled by

competent persons. Bins/skips provided for hazardous waste collection shall be identified by labels

indicating the type of waste contained and shall be located in a paved area cover by a roof, if

necessary. The Hazardous wastes shall be collected and stored in compliance with applicable legal

requirements and recommendations of the relevant Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs), which

shall be available on site. Fire-fighting and spill response provision shall also be available on site.

Liquid contaminated/hazardous waste shall be stored in secure fenced areas, with impermeable

bounded base (covered by a roof). These areas shall have a suitable drainage control. Containers and

storage tanks shall be designed of suitable/compatible material to contain the waste. Fire-fighting

provision and spill response material shall be available on site.



11-51

The following practical criteria shall be kept into consideration, particularly while handling

Hazardous Waste:

• Hazardous waste shall be stored in dedicated leak-proof containers provided with tight caps

and seals with appropriate capacity;

• Clear marks shall be placed on hazardous waste storage containers stating the contents and

indicating the hazards associated with handling and storage;

• Flammable substances must be kept separate from sources of ignition or oxidizing agents;

• Acids must be kept away from substances with which they may react, producing dangerous

compounds e.g. cyanide;

• Strong corrosive agents must be kept away from gas cylinders or other containers;

• Volatile liquid waste should be safely stored in closed drums in a dedicated open area;

• Pressurized aerosol cans must be collected separately in a single, suitably marked container;

• Hazardous waste containers shall not be located in public areas at any times.

Applicable local legislation does not indicate any time/quantity limit related to hazardous/non-

hazardous waste temporary storage area, anyway the maximum retention time for storage in site

may not exceed 3 months and 10 m3, according to the best practice. In any case, putrescible waste

shall be removed daily from the storage area.

11.10.2.5 Waste Transportation

Wastes produced during activities shall be treated or disposed to offsite facilities and areas.

No waste shall be given to a Third Party.

Competent appointed personnel shall check if subcontractor complies with the following

requirements:

• Any vehicle used to transport waste shall be constructed and maintained so as to prevent

spillage of waste and equipped with all safety equipment

• Any container used to transport the waste shall be secured safely on the vehicle used to

transport the waste

• Any vehicles used to transport waste shall be covered when loaded

• Any vehicles shall not overloaded

• Incompatible wastes shall not be mixed or transported together

• Any material segregated for recycling shall not be mixed with different waste during

transportation

• Any vehicles shall be driven by trained licensed drivers

• Any vehicles shall display clear marks indicating the extend of danger of their loads (if any),

and the best course of action in emergency cases.

To assure waste traceability, each shipment shall be documented as per local laws and regulations

Waste traceability shall be assured for all waste typology by Contractor and Subcontractors, even if

not specifically required by applicable law (log and register shall be used for all type of waste, the

use of WTN also for non-hazardous waste will be assessed, if feasible).



11-52

11.10.2.6 Final Destination

In order to assure the proper management of waste treatment/disposal throughout all the waste

cycle all waste shall have proper authorization by Competent Authority and, as a minimum, comply

with applicable legislation for disposal site. Evidence of the NOC / permit shall be available to the

Environmental Manager prior of the waste transportation.

11.10.2.7 Medical Waste Management

Medical waste shall be properly segregated into the categories and disposed of only in proper

containers prepared to this purpose under the directions of the Ministry of Health.

11.10.3 Duty of Care

Everyone who produced, handles, stores, transports or disposes of waste has a duty of care to

ensure that:

• All reasonable steps are taken to ensure the waste is kept in a safe and secure state

• The waste does not cause pollution of the environment

• The waste does not harm people.

Duty of care process and parties responsibilities are summarized in Figure 11.7.

Figure 11.7: Process and Parties Responsibilities for Waste Management

WASTE

PRODUCER

WASTE

TRANSPORTER

WASTE

DISPOSAL

FACILITY

Implement the Waste Management Strategy

Identification and classification of Waste

Provide safe and secure storage

Ensure segregation and suitable packing

All step taken to prevent pollution

Must be licensed by competent authority

Waste trenasfer documents completed

Verify waste consignment matching

documentation

Issue final disposal certificate



11-53

11.10.4 Training

At all level personnel shall receive proper information about waste management requirements, in

particular regarding waste prevention strategy and proper segregation.

Personnel involved with waste handling shall be provided with basic and/or specific information

about most significant issues related to waste management. Workers engaged in the handling and

management of the hazardous waste shall be properly trained (hazardous material handling) and

competency assurance shall be guaranteed.

11.10.5 Inspection and Audit

Environment Department will undertake periodic waste management site inspections. All sites shall

be duly inspected with reference to the generation, storage, transportation and disposal of all waste

types.

An Inspection schedule (Daily, Weekly and Monthly) will be implemented and proper check lists will

be prepared. Weekly inspection shall be undertaken on Temporary Waste Storage Areas.

Periodic Audit will be undertaken, and proper schedule will be prepared before commencement of

construction activities. Internal Audit will be performed monthly while annual corporate audit will be

also scheduled.

11.10.6 Reporting

Contactor and its subcontractors shall keep records or logs of waste produced, generation process

and amounts generated and transported to the waste treatment/storage facility. The records shall

include:

Full description of wastes showing their dangers and their physical and chemical characteristics

• Quantities

• Sources

• Collection rates and periods

• Transport means

• Treatment method

• The name of the contractor to which these wastes are delivered

The Environment department shall prepare a weekly waste management report and send it to the

Projects’ Corporate function, as required in the Contract. The report should include the following:

• Total quantities/volumes of hazardous and non-hazardous wastes sent to each disposal

facility;

• Total quantities/volumes of separated/recycled wastes;

• Sewage liquid quantity sent for disposal;

• Complaints received from the nearby sensitive receptors on odor or other nuisances as a

result of generated wastes; and

• A summary of any waste incidents/spills reported during the year.



11-54

Contractor and its subcontractors shall prepare the monthly report

11.11 Muck Disposal Plan

This plan provides the disposal plan for the Muck which will be generated from the project activities.

It is expected that 1 million cubic meter of muck will be excavated for the project activities. The

details of the Muck excavation are provided in the Section 3. The plan should be considered in

accordance with the other plans which include:



• Air pollution control plan




• Traffic management plan



Key issues related to the muck disposal plan to be submitted by the contractor should include

• According to the waste management plan the producer has the responsibility of safe

disposal of any waste which makes the contractor responsible for the disposal of Muck.

• The muck disposal should be carried out in accordance with the client’s environmental policy

and legal requirement.

• The extent of possible reuse as fill material of the muck for the construction activity

• The location of the disposal point. The disposal point should be downwind to the habituation

and water bodies

• All the relevant permits and documentary proof be obtained from the relevant authorities

• Clear route for transportation of muck to the identified and approved sites be identified and

discussed in the plan

• Dust control measure identified in air pollution control plan be implemented and

documented

• Proper roles and responsibilities of the concerned be identified

11.12 Traffic Management Plan

Construction related traffic may pose a threat for the social receptors alongside the project area.

Section 3 has discussed in detail the proposed project activities which will result in in the increase of

the traffic on the existing road. A new access road is also included as the scope of the project to

overcome the local stress on the roads.

This traffic management plan should be considered in accordance with the other plans which

include:



11-55




• Muck disposal plan





Every contractor should submit the traffic management plan and get a prior approval from the client

before the commencement of any activity on the site.

The traffic management plan should:

• Be in line with the client requirement on the traffic management

• Adhere to the local rules and regulation



The plan at minimum should include the following mitigation measures

• Contractor’s vehicle will follow strict speed limits within city and all applicable local traffic

rules and regulations

• Contractor’s personnel will only use access routes assigned to them for project activities

which will be finalized during the kickoff meeting with representatives of client,

subcontractor and social receptors

• Movement of contractor’s vehicles for transportation of material and wastes from and to

the site will be restricted to low traffic timings.

• Contractor’s vehicles and equipment will be parked at identified designated area. Vehicles

and machinery should be appropriately parked/ placed to provide ample access to local

commuters/pedestrians

• Diversion plans will be developed to minimize disturbance to local population during

occasional high activity timings / days. These plans will be communicated to residents well in

advance and proper diversion signs will be placed to inform locals.

• Prior communication to residents and safety signs will be installed well before the

commencement of any activity at site

11.13 Health and Safety Plan

Contractor will submit a detailed Health and Safety Plan. The plan is to be prepared in accordance

with client’s requirement, IFC Performance Standard 4 Community Health and Safety (Section 2.3),

which require that a plan is in place to effectively respond to emergencies associated with project

hazards and that local communities are involved in the planning process and World Bank Group

General EHS Guidelines, Volume 3 and other relevant of the EHS Guidelines relevant to the Project.



11-56

11.14 Emergency Preparedness and Response Plan

The contractor will prepare and submit an Emergency Preparedness, Response and Recovery Plan

(EPRRP). The EPRRP will be prepared in accordance with IFC Performance Standard 4 Community

Health and Safety (Section 2.3), which require that a plan is in place to effectively respond to

emergencies associated with project hazards and that local communities are involved in the planning

process and World Bank Group General EHS Guidelines, Volume 3 and other relevant of the EHS

Guidelines relevant to the Project.

The EPRRP will at minimum contain the following elements:

• Planning and management commitment (Scope, Policy and regular update);

• Roles and Responsibilities;

• Internal Communication Protocol;

• Resources;

• Monitoring;

• Contingency Plan (in addition to shared SCP);

• Emergency response procedures for each emergency scenario;

• Mock emergency scenarios and drills schedule; and

• Review (to identify missing or weak elements, consistency with any regional and national

disasters plans and compliance with relevant legislation and codes).



11-57

References and

Annexures

Volume 3





References and Annexures

of



Volume 3

September, 2013



1

REFERENCES

AJK-EPA (2008): Environmental Statistics of AJK

Asian Development Bank (2009): Policy Paper. Safeguard Policy Statement. Manila Philippines

Azad Government of the State of Jammu and Kashmir (2000): Azad Jammu and Kashmir

Environmental Protection Act, Muzaffarabad. 11 October 2000.

Ahmad, K. S., Kayani, W. K., Hameed, M., Ahmad, F., & Nawaz, T. (2012). FLORISTIC DIVERSITY AND

ETHNOBOTANY OF SENHSA, DISTRICT KOTLI, AZAD JAMMU & KASHMIR (PAKISTAN). Pakistan Journal

of Botany, 44, 195-201.

Ahmed, M.F. and S.A. Ghalib. (1979). A checklist of Mammals of Pakistan. Records of Zoological

Survey of Pakistan. 7:1-34.

Akaike, H. 1974. A new look at the statistical model identification. IEEE Transactions on Automatic

Control 19 (6): 716–723.

Akbar, G. and M. Anwar (Eds.). 2011. Wildlife of Western Himalayan Region of Pakistan (Northern

Mountains). ISBN:978-969-8283-67-4. 378 Pages.

AKHTAR, S. A. 1958-1960. The rodents of West Pakistan. Pakistan J. Sci., Pt. I, 10. (1): 5-18; Pt. II, 10

(2): 79-90; Pt. III, 10 (6): 269-290; Pt. IV, 12(1): 17-37.

Ali, S. (1978). The flora of Pakistan: Some general and analytical remarks. Notes Royal Botanical

Gardens Edinburgh, 36(2), 427-439.

Ali, S.R. 1967. The Mayflies (Order: Ephemeroptera) of Rawalpindi District. Pak. J. Sci. 19 (3): 73-86.

Ali, S.R. 1967. The Mayflies (Order: Ephemeroptera) of Rawalpindi District. Pak. J. Sci. 19 (3): 73-86.

Ali, S.R. 1970. Certain Mayflies of West Pakistan. Pak. J. Sci. 22 (3 & 4): 118-124.

Ali, S.R. 1971. Certain Mayflies of Swat and Azad Kashmir. Pak. J. Sci. 23 (5 & 6): 209-214.

Ali, S.R. 1982. Hydro biological studies of the Lakes of Punjab. Project Number: PSF/RES/PGC/ENVR

(23), Pakistan Science Foundation, Islamabad. 16pp & 39 tables.

Ali, S.R. and S.I. Hussain. 1968. Aquatic organisms used as food by freshwater fishes. Agriculture

Pakistan.. 19: 4, 725-732.

Anthony, H.E.,1950. The capture and preservation of small mammals for study. American Museum

of Natural History Science Guide No. 61, New York.

ASTER, G. (2009). Validation Team (2009) ASTER global DEM validation. Summary report. Prepared

by METI/ERSDAC, NASA/LPDAAC, USGS/EROS, June.



2

Baidya AK, TB Gurung, B Shrestha (2000) Study on the propagation ot sahar (Tor putitora) in relation

to. hormones and nutritional management. In: Annual Technical Report ARS (Fishery), Pokhara 1999-

2000. Edited by TB Gurung, pp. 44-48.

Baig, K.J., Mehmood, A. & Arslan, M. 1986. Seasonal changes in reproductive organs and androgen

levels of the Musk Shrew, Suncus murinus. Pak. J. Zool., 18 (3): 229 237.

Banerji, Aruna (1955) ‘The family life of a Five-striped Squirrel (Funambulus pennanti),’JBNHS, Vol.

53, No 2, Misc. Notes No. 10, pp. 261-4.

Beg, M. A., S. Kausar, M. M. Hassan & A. A. Khan (1986) ‘Some Demographic and Reproductive

Parameters of the House Shrews in Punjab, Pakistan.’ Pak. Jour. Zool. Vol. 8, No. 2, pp. 201-208.

Beg, M.A., A. A. Khan, and R. Zaman (1975). ‘Age Determination in Indian Gerbil. Pakistan Jour.

Zool., Vol. 7 No. 1, pp. 93-96

Beg, Mirza, A. & Shahnaz, A. Rana. (1978) ‘ Ecology of Field Rat, Rattus meltada pallidior in Central

Punjab, Pakistan. Pakistan Jour, Zool., Vol. 10, No. 2 pp. 163-168.

Bouchard, R.W. Jr. 2004. Guide to Aquatic Macroinvertebrates of Upper Midwest. Water Resources

Center, University of Minnesota, St. Paul, Minnesota. 208pp.

Burnham, K. P. and Anderson, D. R. 2002. Model selection and inference – a practical information-

theoretic approach. Pp. 496

CAMP, IUCN (2003) Status and Red List of Pakistan’s Mammals

Camp Summeries, 1998. Camp summaries 1995-1998, Conservation assessment and Management

plan workshops. Zoo outreach organization and conservation breeding specialists

group, India.

Champion, S. H., Seth, S. K., & Khattak, G. (1965). Forest types of Pakistan. Forest types of Pakistan.

Chondar SL (1994) Induced carp breeding. CBS publishers and distributors, New Delhi, India. pp 1-

133.

Crist, E. P., & Cicone, R. C. (1984). Application of the tasseled cap concept to simulated Thematic

Mapper data. Photogrammetric Engineering & Remote Sensing, 50, 343-352.

Dar, Iftikhar Naeem. (2005): Implementation of International Convention on Biodiversity and

Habitat Conservation in Azad Jammu and Kashmir (AJK). Proceedings of National Consultative

Workshop on Implementation of C BD, C MS and Ramsar Convention in Pakistan, Islamabad.

Das, S.M. (1979) : CSIR Mahaseer Project Report, CSIR, New Delhi

Das, S.M. 1994. On the systematics and bioecology of Mahaseer fishes of India, with a discussion of

the problem of their rapid decline in western and central Himalaya, In: (Nath,S. ed.), Recent

advances in fish ecology, limnology and Eco-conservation. Daya Publishing House, Dehli.

Das, S.M.& S .S. Pathani (1978) : Proc. DST. Nat. Seminar on Natural Resources ,Dev, & Em’ 498499.



3

Dasti, A., & Malik, S. (2000). A transect of vegetation and soils on the Indus Valley Slope, Pakistan.

Pakistan J. Pl. Sci, 4, 73-84.

Desai VR (1994) Ecostatus of Mahseer in river Narmada (Madhya Pradesh). In: Mahseer The game

tish (Natural History, status and conservation practices in India and Nepal, compiled and edited by P.

Nautiyal. Published by Rachna, Garhwal UP, India.

Dickoré, W. B. (1991). Zonation of flora and vegetation of the Northern declivity of the

Karakoram/Kunlun mountains (SW Xinjiang China). GeoJournal, 25(2), 265-284.

Dickore, W. B., & Miehe, G. (2002). Cold spots in the highest mountains of the world–diversity

patterns and gradients in the flora of the Karakorum. Mountain Biodiversity. A global assessment.–

London, New York, 129-147.

Dickoré, W. B., & Nüsser, M. (2000). Flora of Nanga Parbat (NW Himalaya, Pakistan): An Annotated

Inventory of Vascular Plants with Remarks on Vegetation Dynamics. Englera(19), 3-253.

Doležal, J., & Šrůtek, M. (2002). Altitudinal changes in composition and structure of mountain-

temperate vegetation: a case study from the Western Carpathians. Plant Ecology, 158(2), 201-221.

Dubey, G. P., 1985. Conservation of dying King Mahseer the mighty game fish and its future role in

reservoir fisheries. Punjab Fisheries Bulletin 9, No. 182.

Edmondson, W.T. 1959. Freshwater Biology. 2nd Edition. Jhon Wiley & Sons Inc., 1248pp.

EIAO Guidance Note No. 10/2004. Methodologies for Terrestrial and Freshwater Ecological Baseline

Surveys

ESRI. (1992). ArcView-GIS, ver. 3.1: Environmental Systems Research Institute Inc. (ESRI) Redlands,

CA, USA.

EUAD-IUCN (1991): Pakistan National Conservation Strategy. Government of Pakistan

Fielding, A. H., & Bell, J. F. (1997). A review of methods for the assessment of prediction errors in

conservation presence/absence models. [null]. Environmental Conservation, 24(01), 38-49.

Frantz, Stephen C. (1973) ‘Behavioural Ecology of the Lesser Bandicoot Rat, Bandicota bengalensis

(Gary) in Calcutta, John Hopkins University, Ph. D. Thesis, Baltimore, Maryland.

Fulk, G. W. and A. R. Khokhar. (1981) ‘ Movements of Bandicota bengalensis and Nesokia indica in

Rice Fields in SInd.’ JBNHS. Vol. 78 No. 1, pp. 107-112.

Fulk, G. W., S. B. Lathiya & A. R. Khokhar. (1981) ‘Rice Field Rate of Lower SInd: Abundance,

Reproduction and Diet.’ Journ. Zool. P. 193.

Geological Survey of Pakistan (1997) Atlas of Pakistan

GoP (1997a) Guidelines for the Preparation of Environmental Reports. Government of Pakistan,

November 1997 (http://www.environment.gov.pk/eia_pdf/D_rev_enReprt.pdf)



4

GoP (1997b) Pakistan Sectoral Guidelines for Major Thermal Power Stations. Government of

Pakistan (http://www.environment.gov.pk/eia_pdf/h_Power.pdf)

GoP (2005) Pakistan Social and Living Standards Measurement (PSLM) Survey, 2004-5, Federal

Bureau of Statistics

GoP (2006) Pakistan Millennium Development Goals (PMDG) Report 2006. Government of Pakistan

GoP (2008) Labour Force Survey (2007 – 2008) Twenty seventh issue Government of Pakistan

Statistics Division, Federal Bureau of Statistics. December 2008.

GoP (2008) Quality Drinking Water Standards for Pakistan. Government of Pakistan

(http://www.environment.gov.pk/act-rules/DWQStd-MAY2007.pdf )

GoP (2011): Economic survey of Pakistan 2010-2011

Hammer, Ø., Harper, D.A.T., and P. D. Ryan, 2001. PAST: Paleontological Statistics Software

Packagefor Education and Data Analysis. Palaeontologia Electronica 4(1): 9pp. http://palaeo-

electronica.org/2001_1/past/issue1_01.htm

Hara, H. (1966). The flora of Eastern Himalaya: results of the Botanical Expedition to Eastern

Himalaya organized by the University of Tokyo 1960 and 1963 (Vol. 1): The University of Tokyo Press.

Hartmann, A., O. Moog, T. Ofenböck, T. Korte, S. Sharma and D. Hering. Deliverable No. 10.

ASSESS-HKH Methodology Manual describing fundamentals a& application of three approaches to

evaluate river quality based on benthic macroinvertebrates: HKH screening, HKH score

bioassessment & HKH multimatric bioassessment. 80pp. www.assess-hkh.at

Hines, J. E. 2006. PRESENCE version 5.7 – Software to estimate patch occupancy and related

parameters. USGS-PWRC. http://www.mbr-pwrc.usgs.gov/software/presence.html.

HMSO. 1996. Biodiversity Assessment. A Guide to Good Practice. HMSO, London

Hora, S.L. 1939b. The game fishes of India. VIII. The Mahseers or the large¬~scaled Barbels of India.

1. The Putitor mahseer, Barbus (Tor) putitora (Hamilton). J. Bombay nat. Hist. Soc., 41(2): 272-285.

Hora, S.L. and Mukeiji, D.D. 1936. Fish of the Eastern Doons, United Provinces. Rec. Indian Mus.,

38(2): 133-146.

IFC (2012): Performance Standards on Environmental and Social Sustainability

(http://www.ifc.org/wps/wcm/connect/115482804a0255db96fbffd1a5d13d27/PS_English_2012_Ful

l-Document.pdf?MOD=AJPERES)

IPIECA Report Series (2004) Guidelines for Oil Spill Waste Minimization and Management “Volume-

12”

IUCN Red List (2010) International Union for Conservation of Nature and Natural Resources Red List

of Threatened Species (http://www.iucnredlist.org/ )

Jhingran, V.G. (1975): “Fish and Fisheries of India” Hindustan Publ. Corp., Delhi.



5

Jhingran, V.G. (1979): “Fish and Fisheries of India (3rd edition)” Hindustan Publ. Corp., Delhi.

Joshi CB (1994) Conservation of Tor putitora: Hatchery Practices Dl 5-D25. In: Mahseer, the game

fish (Natural History, status and conservation practices in India and Nepal, compiled and edited by P.

Nautiyal. Published by Rachna, Garhwal UP, India. Kashmir. Sci. Int. (Lahore), 6:187-189.

Khatoon S. & S.R. Ali. 1975 a. Aquatic Diptera of Pakistan-1. Bull. Hydrobiolo. Res. Gordon College.

Ser.1 (2): 6-14.

Khatoon S. & S.R. Ali. 1975 b. Aquatic Coleoptera of Pakistan-1. Bull. Hydrobiolo. Res. Gordon

College Ser. 1(8): 65-72.

Khatoon S. & S.R. Ali. 1975 c. Aquatic Hemiptera of Pakistan-1. Bull. Hydrobiolo. Res. Gordon

College Ser. 1(9): 83-94.

Khatoon S. & S.R. Ali. 1976 a. Aquatic Coleoptera of Pakistan-2. Bull. Hydrobiolo. Res. Gordon

College Ser. 1(12): 187-199.

Khatoon S. & S.R. Ali. 1976 b. Stonefly nymphs of Pakistan-1. Bull. Hydrobiolo. Res. Gordon College

Ser. 1(12): 151-162.

Khatoon S. & S.R. Ali. 1977 a. Aquatic Coleoptera of Pakistan-3. Bull. Hydrobiolo. Res. Gordon

College Ser. 1(14): 228-246.

Khatoon S. & S.R. Ali. 1977 b. Trichoptera (Caddiesfly) of Pakistan-1. Ibid No. 18: 386-417.

Kulkarni CV (1980) Eggs and early deyelopment of Tar tor mahseer. i. Born ‘Nat fist Soc 77: 70-75

Lehmann, A., Overton, J. M., & Leathwick, J. R. (2002). GRASP: generalized regression analysis and

spatial prediction. Ecological Modelling, 157(2-3), 189.

Lu, D., Ge, H., He, S., Xu, A., Zhou, G., & Du, H. (2008). Pixel-based Minnaert correction method for

reducing topographic effects on a Landsat 7 ETM+ image. Photogrammetric Engineering and Remote

Sensing, 74(11), 1343-1350.

MacDonald A. St. J (1948) Simple natural History of the Mahaseer. In: Circumventing the mahaseer

and other sporting fish in India and Burma, Natraj Publishers, Dehradun India. pp 16.

MacKenzie, D. I. and J. D. Nichols. 2004. Occupancy as a surrogate for abundance estimation.

Animal Biodiversity and Conservation. 27(1): 461-467.

MacKenzie, D. I., Nichols, J. D., Lachman, G. B., Droege, S., Royle, J. A. and Langtimm, C. A. 2002.

Estimating site occupancy rates when detection probabilities are less than one. Ecology. 83(8): 2248-

2255. Mahaseer Tor putitora, in Nayar river. J. Bombay Nat. Hist. Soc., 81: 642-647.

Malik, N., & Malik, Z. (2004). Present status of subtropical Chir-Pine vegetation of Kotli Hills, Azad

Jammu and Kashmir. Journal of Research Science, 5(1), 85-90.

Manzoor, M., A. Riaz, Z. Iqbal and A. Mian. 2013. Biodiversity of Pir Lasura National Park, Azad

Jammu and Kashmir, Pakistan. Sci., Tech. and Dev., 32 (2): 182-196.



6

Masuda K, KR Bastola (1987) Breeding of Sahar (Tor pulitora. I Iamilton) using naturally matured

broods in Tadi River of Central Nepal. A report submitted to the Fisheries Development Division,

HMG/ Nepal.

Mehmood,A., Baig, K.J. & Arslan, M. 1986. Studies on seasonal changes in the reproductive tract of

female Musk Shrew, Suncus murinus. Pak. J. Zool., 18 (3) : 263 272.

Menon, A.G.K. 1974. A checklist of the fishes of himalayan and Indogangetic Plains. Inland Fisheries

Society of India, Special Publication No. 1.

Meusel, H. (1972). Semiarid elements in the flora and vegetation of Western Himalayas. In Rodin, L.

(Ed.), Ecophysiological foundation of ecosystems productivity in arid zone, Nauka, Moscow (pp. 226-

232). Nauka, Moscow.

Mian, Afsar (1986) Some Notes on Field Biology of Rhombomys opimus, Meriones persicus and Mus

musculus bartrianus with Reference to Orchards of Baluchistan, Pakistan. JBNHS. Vol. 83, No. 3, pp.

654-656.

Mirza, M.R. and Alam, M.K., 1994. A Checklist of the freshwater fishes of Pakistan and Azad

Mirza, Z. B. (1969) The Small Mammals of West Pakistan, Vol. 1, Rodentia, Chiroptera, Insectivora,

Lagomorpha, Primates and Pholidota, Central Urdu Board, Lahore (in urdu).

Morimoto N, K Sakai and S R Basnet (1995) Basic research study of mahaseer (Tar putitora) in

Pokhara Fisheries Research Center, Nepal, Natural Water Fisheries Development project, FRC,

Pokhara, ARCC, Pokhara, Nepal. pp. 1-30.

Muhammad, S., ZH, M., Malik, N., & Sadia, M. (2012). The position of Pinus roxburghii in the forests

of Kotli hills, Azad Jammu and Kashmir. African Journal of Plant Science, 6(3), 106-112.

MJV (2003): “Evaluation of PMF Mangla Dam Raising Project”, Mangla Joint Venture Report, August.

MJV (2004): “Sedimentation Studies - Mangla Dam Raising Project”, Mangla Joint Venture Report,

January.

Nasir, E., Ali, S., & Qaiser, M. (1970). Flora of west Pakistan. Karachi: Nazeer Printing Works.

Nasir, E., Ali, S., & Stewart, R. R. (1972). Flora of West Pakistan: an annotated catalogue of the

vascular plants of West Pakistan and Kashmir. Karachi: Fakhri Printing Press.

Nautiyal P (1994) Mahseer the game fish (Natural history, status and conservation practices in India

and Nepal. compiled and edited by Nautiyal P. Akashdcep Printers, Dehradun, India.

Nautiyal, P and Lal, M.S., 1982. Food and feeding habits of fingerlings and juveniles of

Nazir, A., Malik, R. N., & Ajaib, M. (2012). Phytosociological Studies of the vegetation of Sarsawa

Hills District Kotli, Azad Jammu & Kashmir. BIOLOGIA (PAKISTAN), 58(1&2), 123-133.

Negi, S. S., 1994. Himalayan fishes and fisheries, carps or cyprinoids.



7

Ohashi, H. (1975). Flora of eastern Himalaya. University Mcaeum Bulletin, University of Tokyo, 8, 1-

458.

Parrack, D. W. (1966) ‘The Activity Cycle of the Lesser Bandicoot Rat (Bandicota bengalensis)’,

Current Sci., Vol. 35, No. 21.

Pathani 55 (1983) Studies on the spawning ecology of Kurnaun Mahsccr Tor tar and Tor putitora

(Ham), i Born Nat fist Soc 79 (3), 525-530.

Pathani S.S (1981) Fecundity of mahseer 7’orputitora. Proceeding ot the Indian Academy ot.

Sciences 90:253-260.

Polunin, O., Stainton, A., & Farrer, A. (1987). Concise flowers of the Himalaya: Oxford University

Press Oxford, United Kingdom:.

Rafiq, R. A. (1996). Taxonomical, Chlorological and Phytosociological studies on the vegetation of

Palas valley: Pakistan Agriculture Research Centre, Islamabad, Pakistan.

Planning & Development Department AJK (2011): AJK at a Glance, Figures and Statistics.

Population Census Organization - Islamabad (1998): 1998 Census Publications- Azad Kashmir and

Districts

Population Census Organisation (1998) District Census Report of Muzaffarabad, Statistics Division,

Government of Pakistan, Islamabad.

Roberts, T. J. (1972) ‘A brif Examination of Ecological changes in the province of Sind and their

consequences on the Wildlife Resources of the region’, Pakistan Journal of Forestry, Vol. 22, April,

pp. 33-6.

Roberts, T. J. (1973) ‘Conservation problems in Baluchistan with particular reference to wildlife

preservation’, Pakistan Journal of Forestry, Vol. 23, No. 2, pp. 117-27

Roberts, T. J. 2005. Field Guide to the Large and Medium-Sized Mammals of Pakistan. Oxford

University Press, 259 Pages.

Roberts, T. J. (1991) The Mammals of Pakistan. Oxford University Press, London, England.

Seeber, L., Jacob K.H. (1976) Micro earthquake survey of northern Pakistan, Preliminary results and

tectonic implications; Proc. Symp. on Himalayan Geology, CNRS, Paris

Sehgal. K. L., 1991. Artificial propagation of the golden mahseer Tar putitora (Ham.) in the

Himalayas. Sp. Publ. No. 2.

Shannon, C. E., & Weaver, W. (1948). The mathematical theory of communication. Bell Systems

Technical Journal, 27(1948), 379-423,623.

Shrestha 1K (1994) Development of Mahseer culture towards ranching D26-D4 I. In: Mahsccr The

game fish (Natural History, and conservation practices in India and Nepal, compiled and edited by P.

Nautiyal. Published by Rachua, Garhwal UP, India.



8

Shrestha BC, AK Rai, TB Gurung and K. Mon (1990) Successful artificial induced spawning of

limalayan Mahascer (Thr putitora) in Pokhara Valley. Nepal. Edited by R II irano and II-Ianyu. The

Second Asian Fisheries Forum 99 I p. Asian Fisheries Society, Manila, Philipines.

Shrestha, T. K., 1997. Prospects of propagating the Mahseer in Phewa Lake of the Pokhara Valley.

The Mahseer: 70-71.

Shrestha, T.K. 1990. Rare fishes of Himalayan waters of Nepal. Journal of Fish Biology, London. 37

(supplement A), 213-216. pp. 213-216.

Siddiqui, M. S. U. (1970) ‘Notes on a Collection of some Shrews from West Pakistan) and Kashmir’,

Records-Zool. Survey of Paksitan, Vol. 2, No.1, Karachi.

Southwood, T.R.E. 1978. Ecological Methods with Particular Reference to the Study of Insect

Populations. Chapman & Hall, London.

Talwar,P.K and Jhingran, A. 1991. Inland fishes of India and adjacent countries. Oxford and IBH

publishing Co. New Delhi.

Thomas, O. (1920A) ‘Some new mammals from Baluchistan and north-west India’, Scientific Results

from the Mammal survey No. 21, JBNHS, Vol. 26, No.4, pp. 933-8.

Thomas, O. (1920B) ‘ A New Murine Genus and Species from Sind,’ JBNHS, Vol. 20, No. 4, pp 996-

1001.

Thomas, O. (1923) ‘The Distribution and Geographical Races of the Golundi Bush Rats (Golunda

ellioti)’, JBNHS, Vol. 29, No. 2, pp. 372-6.

Tripathi YR (1978) Artificial breeding of Tor putitora (Ham). J. Inland Fish Soc India 9:161.

The World Bank, Environment Department (1991): Environmental Assessment Sourcebook, Volume

I: Policies, Procedures and Cross-Sectoral Issues; Volume II: Sectoral Guidelines, Washington DC,

USA.

Ur-Rehman, E. (2006). Indigenous knowledge on medicinal plants, village Barali Kass and its allied

areas, District Kotli Azad Jammu & Kashmir, Pakistan. Ethnobotanical Leaflets, 2006(1), 27.

UN-Habitat (2010) Seismic Zoning Map Paksitan - UN-HABITAT Pakistan

(http://www.unhabitat.org.pk/Maps-updated/UNH-PAKOV_SZ_A3_02122010.pdf)

World Commission on Dams (2000): The Report of World Commission on Dams. Earth Scan

Publications Ltd, 120 Pentonville Road, London.

WBG (2007/2008) Environmental, Health and Safety General and Industry Sector Guidelines of the

World Bank Group. 2007 and 2008.

(http://www.ifc.org/ifcext/sustainability.nsf/Content/EHSGuidelines )



9

WHO (1991) Guideline levels for methylmercury in fish. CAC/GL-7-1991. FAO/WHO Food tandards.

World Health Organization CODEX alimentarius.

(http://www.codexalimentarius.net/download/standards/21/CXG_007e.pdf )

WAPDA Pakistan (2012): Annual Report on River and Climatology Data of Pakistan

Wagle, P. V. (1927) ‘The Rice Rats of Lower Sind and their control’, JBNHS, Vol. 32, No. 2 pp. 330-8

Walton, G. M. & D. W. Walton (1973) ‘Notes on Hedgehogs of the Lower Indus Valley.’ Korean

Journ. Zoology. Vol. 16, pp. 161-170.

Wilson, D.E., F.R. Cole, J.D. Nichols, R. Rudran and M.S. Foster. 1996. Measuring and Monitoring

Biological Diversity: Standard Methods for Mammals. Smithsonian Institution Press, Washington.

Woods, C.A. and Kilpatrick (1997) Biodiversity of small mammalsin the mountains of Pakistan (high

or low): 437-467. In: Mufti, S. A., Woods, C.A. & S.A. Hasan (eds), Biodiversity of Pakistan. PMNH,

Islamabad (Pakistan) & FMNH, Gainesville (USA).

Woods, C.A., Kilpatrick, C.W., Rafique, A, Shah, M. and Khan, W. (1997) Biodiversity and

conservation of Deosai Plateau, northern areas, Pakistan: 33-61. In: Mufti, S. A., Woods, C.A. & S.A.

Hasan (eds), Biodiversity of Pakistan. PMNH, Islamabad (Pakistan) & FMNH, Gainesville (USA).

Wroughton, R. C. (1920) ‘Mammal Survey Report,’ No. 32, Baluchistan, JBNHS, Vol. 27, No 2, pp.

314-22 .

Wroughton, R.C. (1911) ‘ On a Small Collection of Rodents from Lower Sind.’ JBNHS. Vol. 20, No. 4,

pp. 1000-1001.

Zulfiqar, S., R. A. Minhas, M. S. Awan and U. Ali. 2011. Population and Conservation Status of

Barking Deer (Muntiacus muntjac) in Pir Lasorha National Park and Other Areas of District Kotli, Azad

Jammu and Kashmir, Pakistan. Pakistan J. Zool., 43(5): 993-997.



I

ANNEXURES

Annexure 1: Seismic Hazard Study

General

The proposed Project site is located on the foothill of Himalayan range. It lies close to the Riasi thrust

which is a branch of Main Boundary Thrust (MBT). Numerous large earthquakes with magnitude

greater than VIII are believed to be associated with MBT in Himalayan range East of the Project site.

As the Project site is located in active seismic region, evaluation of realistic seismic design

parameters is therefore necessary to design the Project structures so that these can withstand the

expected ground motions due to earthquakes.

Methodology

The methodology adopted for the seismic hazard evaluation of Gulpur Hydropower Project is as

follows:

• Collection and review of the regional geology and tectonic setting in an area of 150 km

radius from the site. For this, the data available with WAPDA, Geological Survey of Pakistan,

Oil and Gas Development Corporation and various universities were collected and analyzed.

• Study of all available historical and instrumental earthquake data including data from

regional network as well as Mangla local network and development of comprehensive

earthquake catalogue.

• Study of existing faults of the area through satellite images and available geologic literature

and maps.

• On the basis of synthesis of tectonic and siesmological data obtained from the above

mentioned studies, development of a siesmotectonic map and evaluation of the active faults

for their capability to generate earthquakes.

• Carry on seismic hazard analysis by using probabilistic and deterministic approaches. EZ-

FRISK software was used for the probabilistic hazard analysis. For the deterministic analysis,

several faults and attenuation relationship were used to calculate the maximum horizontal

ground acceleration.

• Evaluation of OBE and MCE accelerations and selection of appropriate seismic design

parameters for the design of the Project structures.

Tectonic Setting

Regional Tectonic Setting

The geodynamic of Pakistan is characterized by the collision and coalescence of Eurasian and Indian

Continental Plates (Figure 1), which were once separated by oceanic domains. This process started

in the late Eocene to early Oligocene with formation of the Himalayan ranges18. It is however, also

18

Farah, A., De Jong, K.A; Geodynamics of Pakistan: An introduction; Geodynamics of Pakistan, Geological Survey of Pakistan (1979).



II

understood that the recent collision of Indo-Pakistan subcontinent has succeeded a similar collision

immediately north of Pakistan19 or throughout southern Asia20 that took place in Paleozoic era.

The Himalayas are believed to form a sharp frontal thrust belt as the southern edge of a wide

collision zone extending north to include Hindukush, Pamir, Tien Shan, Tibetan Plateau, and other

collisional features of Central Asia.

Figure 1: Regional Plate Tectonic Setting

Relative to Eurasia, the Indian Plate is still moving northwards at a rate of about 3.7 cm/yr near 73

degree longitude east21. Indus suture line that coincides with upper Tsengpo river valley represents

the original site of the continental collision along which linear and well-developed ophiolite suites

are found. These ophiolites are interpreted as the remnants of the oceanic crust of the Tethys ocean

trapped during the collision between Indian and Eurasian continental blocks. The major portion of

this convergence was taken up by deformation along the northern collision boundary involving

folding and thrusting of the upper crustal layers22 in the shape of MKT (Main Karakorum Thrust),

MMT (Main Mantle Thrust), MBT (Main Boundary Thrust) and SRT (Salt Range Thrust), as shown in

Figure 2.

19

Kravchenko, K.N.; Tectonic evolution of the Tien Shan, Pamia and Karakorum; Geodynamics of Pakistan,

Geological Survey of Pakistan (1979) 20

Talent, J.A.; Mawson, R.; Paleozoic – Mesozoic biostratigraphy of Pakistan in relation to biogeography and

the coalescence of Asia; Geodynamics of Pakistan, Geological Survey of Pakistan (1979) 21

Minster, J.B., et el..; Numerical modeling of instantaneous plate tectonics, Royal Astron. Soc. Geophys. Jour.

Vol.36 (1974). 22

Seeber, L., Jacob K.H.; Micro earthquake survey of northern Pakistan, Preliminary results and tectonic

implications; Proc. Symp. on Himalayan Geology, CNRS, Paris (1976).



III

Figure 2: Generalized Tectonic Map Northern Pakistan

The MKT separates rocks of Asian landmass from Kohistan island arc complex. The Kohistan island

arc is separated from the Indian plate by MMT. The MBT separates pre-collisional Paleozoic and

Mesozoic sedimentary rocks of the Indian plate from the younger post-collisional Himalayan molasse

sediments. A single detachment surface is believed to exist beneath the entire rocks south of MMT.

This surface extends southwards till it emerges out in the shape of Salt Range Thrust23.

Local Tectonic Setting

Project site is located close to Riasi thrust, which runs more than 200 km along the Himalayan range

and is considered as a main branch of the MBT. Towards East it joins MBT and towards West it

merges again into MBT at the axis of Hazara-Kashmir Syntaxial Bend, which is quite sharp near

Muzaffarabad towards North and becomes less sharp towards South. On the East of the Hazara-

Kashmir Syntaxial Axis, the geological features show predominantly northwest trend while their

trend change to northeast towards the West of the axis. The main tectonic features West of

Syntaxial Axis are Salt Range Thrust, Dil Jabba Thrust, Kahuta Fault and Riwat Fault (Fig-4.8). The

Syntaxial Axis itself is believed to run along a north-south running strike-slip fault called Jhelum

Fault. As many active tectonic features are present close to the Project site, therefore it is located

within highly active geotectonic environment.

23

Seeber L. et al; Seismicity and continental subduction in the Himalayan arc, in Zagros – Hindukush Himalayas; Geodynamics Evolution, A.G.U. Geodynamics Services, Vol.3 (1981).



IV

Figure 3: Regional Geological Map

Quittmeyer et al.24 have classified whole of the area of Pakistan into fifteen seismotectonic

provinces (Figure 4). Gulpur Hydropower project is located near the following four distinct provinces

being discussed below:

a. Himalayas Province

b. Hazara Region Province

c. Salt Range Province and

d. Indus Basin Province

a) Himalayas Province

The Himalayas represent one of the primary compressional features that have resulted from the

collision of the Indo-Pakistan Continental Plate with Eurasian Plate. This zone of deformation is the

result of folding and thrusting associated with the development of large nappe structures and deep

crustal shortening25. The Himalayas trends in a southeasterly direction just east of the Hazara-

Kashmir syntaxis (Fig-4.7) where the project site is located.

Seismicity within this seismotectonic province is characterized as moderate to high level. Most

events are associated with the frontal zone of deformation. They are located parallel to and

northeast of the surface trace of the Main Frontal Thrust. One great earthquake, the 1905 Kangra

event with Ms=8.0 occurred within this zone, probably rupturing a 300 km portion along the Main

24

Quittmeyer, R.C., et al; Seismicity of Pakistan and its relation to surface faults; Geodynamics of Pakistan (1979). 25

Ganser, A.; Geology of the Himalayas: New York, Inter Science Publications (1964).



V

Frontal Thrust26. Riasi thrust is a branch of MBT and runs almost parallel to MBT upto the syntaxial

bend.

In the vicinity of the Hazara-Kashmir syntaxis, the mapped surface trace of the frontal thrust bends

around from a southeast trend to a southwest orientation. The seismically defined fault zone,

however, does not follow the mapped surface faults; it continues for an additional 100 km to the

northwest of the Hazara-Kashmir syntaxis27.

Figure 4: Seismotectonic Provinces of P[Pakistan

b) Hazara Region Province

The Hazara seismotectonic province encompasses mostly eastward trending folds and faults of the

Hazara region in Northern Pakistan. The deformation within this zone is primarily the result of

thrusting and a deep crustal decollement process associated with the collision between the Indian

and Eurasian plates28.

26

Quittmeyer, R.C., et al; Seismicity of Pakistan and its relation to surface faults; Geodynamics of Pakistan

(1979). 27

Armbruster, J., et al.; Tectonics of the lower Himalayas in north Pakistan based on micro earthquake

observations, Jour. Geophys. Res., Vol.83 (1978). 28

Ganser, A.; Geology of the Himalayas: New York, Inter Science Publications (1964).



VI

Seismic activity within this province has occurred at a low level29. Historical data however do indicate

moderate events causing significant damage in this region.

Shallow seismicity within the Hazara region occurs on perpendicular, steeply dipping faults

characterized by reverse and strike-slip faulting. The microseismicity data suggest that the Hazara

Thrust Fault may be related to a decollement surface identified at depth30. However, as the mapped

faults are dominantly of thrust nature, a narrow alignment of epicenters along these faults is not to

be expected. Furthermore, some activity is also associated with faults that are located below the

decollement surface, which do not have any surface expression. The broad band of activity following

the dominant structural trend, however, suggests that at least some of these earthquakes may be

related to the major mapped structures31.

c) Salt Range Province

The Salt Range is situated south of the Hazara seismotectonic province and extends from the

Sulaiman Range on the West to the Himalayas in the East (Fig-4.9). General orientation of this range

is east northeast, but prominent southeast trending transverse features offset parts of it (Fig-4.7). It

is composed of folded and faulted thrust sheets and represents thin-skinned internal deformation

within the Indian Plate resulting from its collision with Eurasia.

Although it is the frontal zone of deformation in this region, the Salt Range is characterized by a low

level seismic activity, in contrast to other parts of the frontal zone in Pakistan. It has limited known

history of moderate or large magnitude earthquake. Micro-earthquake studies, however, indicate

that at low magnitude levels (m<4), the entire Salt Range is active, especially along transverse faults

at points where it is offset. Cambrian salt deposits may provide an explanation for this aseismic

character of the Salt range. Deformation may result from aseismic slip along a decollement surface

mechanically detached by the salt32. The micro seismic activity may represent small readjustments

within the decollement sheets.

d) Indus Basin Province

The Indus Basin is located within the Indo-Pakistan Plate South and Southwest of the Himalayas and

Salt Range, and East of the predominantly northward trending mountain ranges of Pakistan (Fig-4.8).

This feature is a foredeep basin. The seismicity occurring within this zone is generally of low level.

Although infrequent, some events have caused considerable damage. Southwest of the Himalayas,

the events occur along a discontinuous, but nevertheless, linear trend about 200 km from the Main

Frontal Thrust33. This same trend parallels the Salt Range, but not at as great a distance. This activity

29

Seeber, L., Jacob K.H.; Micro earthquake survey of northern Pakistan, Preliminary results and tectonic

implications; Proc. Symp. on Himalayan Geology, CNRS, Paris (1976). 30

Seeber L. et al; Seismicity and continental subduction in the Himalayan arc, in Zagros – Hindukush

Himalayas; Geodynamics Evolution, A.G.U. Geodynamics Services, Vol.3 (1981). 31

Quittmeyer, R.C., et al; Seismicity of Pakistan and its relation to surface faults; Geodynamics of Pakistan

(1979). 32

Seeber, L., et al; Seismicity of the Hazara arc in northern Pakistan; Decollement vs. basement faulting;

Geodynamics of Pakistan (1979). 33

Menke, W., and Jacob, K.H.; Seismicity Patterns in Pakistan and north western India associated with

continental Collision: Seismol. Soc. America Bull; Vol.66 (1976).



VII

within the Indus Basin may be related to bending of the lithosphere34, active basement faults

transverse to the fold and thrust belts35, and/or development of a new frontal thrust36. A focal

mechanism for one event near New Delhi showed normal faulting on one of two nodal planes

parallel to the Himalayas37.

Surface faults have not been mapped in the Indus Basin; the extensive alluvial cover has buried any

structural evidence of faulting on the surface. Inferences based on gravity data, however, indicate

basement faults may exist in some portions of the Indus Basin38.

Seismicity

General

Earthquakes pose a multitude of hazard to dams, either by direct loading of the structures or by

initiating a sequence of events that may lead to dam failure. For example, strong ground shaking or

fault offset at the dam foundation is a direct load on the structure while an upstream failure, seiche

or landslide into the reservoir are earthquake generated events that can lead to overtopping and

failure. Effects of ground shaking by earthquakes are also documented in terms of loss of free board

due to differential tectonic ground movements, slope failure, piping failure through cracks induced

by ground shaking, failure of spillway and outlet works39.

Earthquakes are generated by tectonic process in the upper part of the earth called lithosphere that

is divided into several rigid parts called as “Plates”. Due to movements along these plates, stress

build up takes place and results in the deformation of the crystal mass. This energy accumulation

gives birth to seismic events. The contact zones between adjacent plates are, therefore, considered

as most vulnerable parts from the seismic hazard point of view.

The project site is located near one of these contacts between Indian plate and Eurasian plate. This

contact represented by the Himalayas has always been generating moderate to large earthquakes

including Kangra (1905), Bihar-Nepal (1934) and Assam (1897) earthquakes that caused widespread

destruction and huge loss of life.

34

Molnar, P., et al; Fault plane solutions of shallow earthquakes and contemporary tectonics in Asia, Earth and

Planetary Science Letters, Vol.19 (1973). 35

Valdiya, K.S.; Himalayan Transverse faults and folds and their parallelism with subsurface structures of north

Indian plains, Tectonophysics, Vol.32 (1976). 36

Le Fort, P., Himalayas: The collided range. Present knowledge of the continental Arc: A.M. Jour Sci., Vol.275-

A (1975). 37

Molnar, P., et al; Fault plane solutions of shallow earthquakes and contemporary tectonics in Asia, Earth and

Planetary Science Letters, Vol.19 (1973). 38

Farah, A., et .el; Gravity field of the buried shield in the Punjab plain, Pakistan: Geol. Soc. America Bull.,

Vol.88 (1977). 39

Seed, H.B. “Earthquake resistant design of earth dams:, International Conference on Recent Advances in

Geotechnical Earthquake, Engineering and Soil Dynamics, Missouri, (1981).



VIII

Historical Seismicity

The earthquakes originated before the advent of seismic recording instruments that have been

mentioned in the literature and were located within the Project region give mainly information

about the level of damage that this region has undergone historically. Though this information does

not give a conclusive account of their epicentral location, these do give an understanding about the

extent of structural damages and probable life loss in return. This non-instrumental data is solely

dependent upon human observation. In order to perform a quantitative analysis of the effects of an

earthquake, it is convenient to reduce the raw data to a more manageable form. For this purpose

intensity scales have been established which categorize the effects experienced by human being into

well defined level ranging from minimum sensations to catastrophic extremes. The historical / pre-

instrumental earthquake data was collected from Oldham40, Heuckroth et al.41, Ambraseys et al.42

and Quittmeyer et al.43 catalogues as the same source of information has been used in the

seismotectonic studies of other large projects in Pakistan (Tarbela dam, Mangla dam, etc.).

A brief description of the main historic events in the region under study is given below:

a) 4th Century B.C

The first known historical account of seismicity in this region was described in 4th Century B.C by

Aristobulus of Cassanderia. He accompanied Alexander on his expedition to India and pointed out

that the country above river Jhelum was subjected to earthquakes which caused the ground to open

up so much that even the river bed was changed.

b) Year 25 A.D

Another historical record of a destructive earthquake is available of Taxila event. This event was

located in the Hazara area and occurred in 25 A.D. Seismic intensity at Taxila was about X and felt

throughout the country. The damage effects are still witnessed in the remains of Jandial, Sirkap and

Dharmarajika around Taxila. After the earthquake, building methods had to be changed and height

of the buildings was reduced. It was also started to ensure that foundations of the new buildings are

more secure.

c) June 23, 1669

An earthquake with as much intensity as IX was felt at the city of Attock.

d) September 24, 1827

A destructive earthquake was felt in Lahore Region. The Fort Kolitaran near the city was destroyed.

About 1000 lives were lost. A hill was shaken down which fell into the River Ravi. Its maximum

intensity was estimated as VIII-IX.

40

Oldham, T.; A catalogue of Indian earthquakes, Mem. Geol. Survey India, Vol. 19 (1893) 41

Heuckroth, L. and Karim, R.: Earthquake history, seismicity and tectonics of the regions of Afghanistan, Seism. Centre, Kabul University (1970). 42

Ambraseys A. Lensen G., and Monifer A.; The Pattan earthquake of 28 December 1974, UNESCO Publication (1975) 43

Quittmeyer R.C and Jacob K.H; Historical and modern seismicity of Pakistan, Afghanistan, northwestern India and southeastern Iran ; Bull. Siesm. Soc. Am. Vol. 69, No.3 (1979)



IX

e) May 30, 1885

A destructive earthquake in Kashmir, which inflicted heavy destruction in Sopor, Gulmarg and

Srinagar area, 3,000 people were killed. Radius of perceptibility was about 650 km. Many aftershocks

were recorded. The maximum intensity in the epicentral region was VIII.

The intensities of the felt earthquakes recorded in this region are shown in Figure 5.

Figure 5: Felt Earthquake Intensities

A chronological list of available intensity data of the earthquakes occurred in the Project region

before the present instrumental recordings started in 1904 is given in Table 1.

Table 1: Historical Earthquakes in the Project Region

Sr.

No. Year Date Description

Estimated

Intensity MM Source

1

4th

Century

BC

Aristobulus of Cassandreia, who accompanied

Alexander on his expedition to India, points out

that the country above the river Hydaspes

(Jhelum) is subjected to earthquakes which cause

the ground to open up so that even the beds of

river are changed.

IX-X Ambraseys

2 25 AD

A destructive earthquake in north-western

Pakistan laid Taxila in ruins and caused wide

spread havoc throughout the country side. The

effects of this earthquake can still be seen among

the excavated remains at Jandial, Sirkap and

Dharmarajika. As result of the earthquake new

methods of buildings were introduced and the

height of buildings was reduced from four to two

storeys with special precautions to make the

IX-X Q&J



X

Sr.


Estimated

Intensity MM Source

foundation secure.

3 1669 4-

Jun Strongly felt in Mandra VI-X Q&J

4 1669 23-

Jun

An earthquake at Attock, a fissure 50 yards long

was formed in the ground. VIII-IX Q&J

5 1827 24-

Sep

Destructive in Lahore region. Fort Kolitaran near

city destroyed, about 1000 perished in ruins. A hill

shaken down, which fell into river Rowee (Ravi)

produced an inundation of 100 coss of land.

VIII-IX Q&J

6 1831

Peshawar & valley of Indus – Severe, extended

from Peshawar to Dera Ghazi Khan, felt most at

Dera bank (Darban); men and camels unable to

stand, rocks fell in many places, water forced

from crevices in the plains.

Daraban VIII-IX

Peshawar & D.G.

Khan IV-VI

Q&J

7 1832 22-

Jan

Near Lahore-violent, people all rushed out of

houses. V-VI

8 1832 21-

Feb

Lahore, valley of Badakhshan, N.W. India huge

masses of rock was thrown from the cliffs at many

places chocking up valleys. Great part of

population destroyed.

Lahore V-VI

Mangla V

9 1842 19-

Feb

Kabul, Peshawar. At Kabul said to have lasted for

3 minutes, several shocks, rocked the fouth in a

frightful manner. At Peshawar very destructive,

“earth-trembled like aspen leaf” several killed. At

Ferozpur severe. At Ludhiyana north south, the

hot springs of South (temp. 140 deg-110 deg)

become as cold as the ordinary wells, water

diminished greatly and at times the springs were

completely dry. These appearances continued for

25 days.

Kabul Q&J

VI-VII Peshawar VI

Ferozpur VI

10 1851 4-

Feb Lahore, appears to have extended all over Punjab. Lahore V-VI

11 1851 6-

Feb Lahore, appears to have extended all over Punjab. Lahore V-VI

12 1851 17-

Feb Strongly felt in Lahore, Multan Lahore V-VI

13 1853 Nov. Strongly felt in Attock VI Q&J

14 1858 29-

Aug Lahore-sharp shocks Lahore IV-V

15 1865 22-

Jan

Slight damage and great panic in Peshawar, long

duration. V-VII

16 1865 4-

Dec Lahore – tow smart shocks III-V

17 1867 10-

Nov Damaging in Bannu VII-VIII Q&J

18 1868 11-

Aug

Damaging in Peshawar, a portion of the fort was

shaken down (official record). VII-VIII Q&J

19 1868 12-

Nov

Violent shock felt in Lahore, Dera Ismail Khan and

Attock, followed by many aftershocks which were

felt throughout the Punjab.

Attock IV-VI & D.I.

Khan IV-VI Q&J

20 1869 24- Severe shock in the upper reaches of Jhelum V-VII Q&J



XI

Sr.


Estimated

Intensity MM Source

Mar

21 1869 25-

Mar

A large earthquake in the Hindukush, strongly felt

at Kohat, Lahore, Peshawar and at Khojend and

Tashkent; shocking lasting 20 seconds.

Kohat, Lahore &

Peshawar V NESPAK

22 1869 April Peshawar – Part of fort shaken down (official

record). VII-VIII Q&J

23 1869 20-

Dec

Rawalpindi – Shock said to have lasted for 1/2 a

minute; cracked walls and caused all people to

run out of houses. Attock – A series of shocks at

intervals of about 20 sec. Lawrencepur – Ist

shocks 15 sec others at 5 sec. interval.

Campbellpur – For half an hour; building much

damaged. Talagang – Not felt

VII-VIII Q&J

24 1871 April Severe at Rawalpindi and Murree; originating

from Kashmir

Rawalpindi &

Murree VI Q&J

25 1875 12-

Dec

Damaging in villages between Lahore and

Peshawar where a number of people were killed. VII-VIII Q&J

26 1878 2-

Mar

Damaging earthquake in the Punjab. At Kohat

several houses, public buildings and portion of the

wall of the fort fell. At Peshawar, it caused

damage to houses and city walls. Damaging at

Attock, Abbottabad, Rawalpindi, Jhelum, Murree.

Strongly felt at Bannu, Nowshera, Mardan, Lahore

and Simla. Many aftershocks.

Peshawar & Kohat

VII-VIII, Attock VI-

VII, Lahore VI

27 1883 April Damaging shock at Peshawar. VI-VIII Q&J

28 1885 30-

May

Destructive shock in Kashmir, Sopor, Gulmarg and

Srinagar about totally ruined and 3,000 people

killed. Heavy damage at Gurias and Punch:

Muzaffarabad heavily damaged. Felt in Peshawar,

Lahore, Simla, Leh, Kanpalu, and Gilgit. Radius of

perceptibility about 650 km. Many aftershocks.

Kashmir VIII,

Muzaffarabad VI-

VII, Peshawar IV

Q&J

29 1893 3-

Nov

Slight damage at Peshawar, Nowshera, felt

throughout the Punjab VI-VII Q&J

30 1905 4-

Apr

Kangra earthquake, in Rawalpindi few lofty

buildings cracked, some damage in Lahore.

Kangra VIII

Rawalpindi V-VI Q&J

31 1929 1-

Feb

Destructive earthquake, perhaps shallower than

calculated, ruin Skorzor and Drosh. Damage was

equally heavy in the USSR at Kulyab. It caused

substantial damage in Abbottabad, Peshawar,

Cherat, Gurez, Chitral and Dushambe. It was felt

within a radius area of 1,000 km.

Abbottabad &

Peshawar VI-VII NESPAK

32 1939 21-

Nov

Destructive in the Badakhshan area, the damage

extending to Srinagar, Rawalpindi and Kargil.

Drosh was seriously damaged. Felt within a radius

of 600 km.

Rawalpindi V-VI NESPAK

33 1945 27-

Jun Felt in Peshawar IV NESPAK

34 1945 22-

Jun

Destructive at Chamba and parts of Kahsmir.

Strongly felt at Rawalpindi, Peshawar, Lahore and

Simla.

Rawalpindi V NESPAK

35 1953 1-

Mar Slight damage in Cambellpur VI-VII Q&J

36 1956 16- Destructive in the Ghazi district in Afghanistan Rawalpindi V NESPAK



XII

Sr.


Estimated

Intensity MM Source

Sep where many villages were destroyed and animals

lost. The damage was equally serious at Said

Karem. Cause panic at Kohat. Strongly felt at

Parachinar, Parwan, Loger, Ghaiz, Nazerajat,

Beshud, Makur, Rawalpindi and Rawalpindi

Srinagar. Radius of perceptibility about 450 km.

37 1962 2-

Aug Felt at Rawalpindi IV-VI Q&J

38 1966 11-

Jan Felt at Risalpur IV NESPAK

39 1966 2-

Feb

Strongly felt around Abbottabad where it caused

minor damage at Havelian. Felt at Rawalpindi,

Islamabad, Abbottabad, Taxila. The shock was felt

at Muzaffarabad and Gujar Khan.

Abbottabad VI

Islamabad V Taxila

VI

Q&J

40 1977 14-

Feb

About 7 km northeast of Rawalpindi caused

damage in 20 villages. In villages Kuri, Malot and

Pindi Begwal around Nilour most of the “Katcha”

houses either collapsed or damaged. A few

houses built with dressed blocks of sandstone and

sand-cement mortar also developed extensive

cracks.

VII NESPAK

41 1978 7-

May

Felt widely at Punjab and NWFP Provinces. Some

damage at Peshawar and Chitral.

Mangla IV Tarbela

VI WAPDA

42 1980 12-

Feb Felt widely in the areas of Punjab and NWFP.

Mangla IV Tarbela

V WAPDA

43 1983 31-

Dec

Felt widely in the areas of Punjab and NWFP.

Damages at Peshawar, Chitral and many northern

areas. Some damage near Tarbela also. Felt in

parts of Afghanistan also.

Chitral VII

Peshawar VI

Rawalpindi V

Tarbela V Mangla

III

WAPDA

44 1996 4-

Apr

Felt widely in the areas of Punjab and NWFP.

Some damages at Peshawar, Chitral and Northern

Areas. Some damage near Tarbela also. Felt also

in parts of Afghanistan.

Chitral VI

Peshawar V

Rawalpindi IV

Mangla III Lahore

& Jhelum III

WAPDA

45 1999 17-

Feb

Epicenter near Mangla. Felt also in the adjoining

areas. Mangla IV WAPDA

Instrumental Seismicity

The instrumental recording of earthquakes started in 1904 but the number of seismic stations

remained small in South Asian Region until 1960 when the installation of high quality seismographs

under World Wide Standard Seismograph Network (WWSSN) increased the quality of earthquake

recording. In addition, local microseismic networks were also established at important dams and

other projects in Pakistan. In the present seismic studies, two classes of instrumental earthquake

data have been used. The first one is based upon earthquakes recorded by local seismic networks

and the other is compiled from regional data catalogues.

Seismicity Recorded by Local Networks



XIII

Near the Project site, an independent telemetry microseismic network belonging to Mangla Dam

Project is functioning. Initially, it comprised of three stand-alone stations since 1966. However, in

1993, it was replaced with a more modern microseismic network having thirteen field seismic

stations out of which seven have been put to operation. The Central Recording Station (CRS) is

installed near the left abutment of the main embankment of Mangla dam. The microseismicity

recorded by Mangla Dam network is shown in Figure 6.

Figure 6: Microseismicity of the Project Region

Seismicity Recorded by Regional Networks

The regional seismic data catalogue being used in the study is compiled on the basis of seismic

events listed since 1904 by various agencies like British Association for the Advancement of Science

(BAAS), International Seismological Centre (ISC), International seismological summary (ISS), United

States Geological Survey (USGS) and others. It consists of a list of 594 earthquakes among which 331

earthquakes have magnitude more than or equal to 4 within a radius of about 200 km from project

site.

Composite Earthquake Catalogue

A composite list of earthquakes recorded within about 200 km of the Project site was prepared from

the data collected from regional as well as microseismic networks mentioned above. This list

contains all the earthquakes recorded in area between latitude 32.0o-35.0oN and longitude 72.0o-

76.0oE. This list is presented in Table 2. The epicenters of these earthquakes are plotted in Figure 7.



XIV

Figure 7: Seismotectonic Map of the Project Region

Table 2: Composite List of Recorded Earthquake Data

Sr No

Date Time Latitude Longitude Depth Magnitude Source

Year Month Day GMT N E Km mb MS ML

1 1905 4 4 00:50:00.00 33.0000 76.0000 35 6.8 8.0

PAS

2 1928 11 14 04:33:09.00 35.0000 72.5000 110 5.6 6.0

PAS

3 1937 11 7 19:07:40.00 35.0000 73.0000 100 5.5 5.8

PAS

4 1945 6 22 18:00:57.00 32.5000 76.0000 60 5.9 6.5

PAS

5 1964 2 13 05:10:47.20 34.9900 72.7000 68 4.5

ISC

6 1964 7 3 14:10:27.80 34.1500 74.9100 33 4.9

ISC

7 1964 12 31 08:21:11.00 34.9000 73.0000 131 4.4

ISC

8 1965 10 9 04:34:22.00 32.3000 74.0000 79 4.5

USCGS

9 1965 11 8 21:23:09.40 34.6000 73.3000 65 4.6

USCGS

10 1966 2 2 09:20:09.30 33.8900 73.2000 37 5.1

ISC

11 1966 3 16 00:08:17.30 33.2300 75.9100 33 4.7

ISC

12 1966 4 6 01:51:53.20 34.9100 73.0600 54 5.1

ISC

13 1967 2 10 05:46:29.00 33.2800 75.2900 21 4.8

ISC

14 1967 2 20 14:23:48.70 33.6900 75.4200 38 4.8

ISC

15 1967 2 20 15:18:39.00 33.6300 75.3300 20 5.5

ISC

16 1967 2 20 15:39:54.40 33.4800 74.8300 96 4.0

ISC

17 1967 2 21 12:37:43.00 33.6500 75.4400 20 4.9

ISC

18 1967 2 24 00:17:38.80 33.5700 75.3900 32 4.6

ISC

19 1967 7 2 08:32:39.70 33.2100 75.7100 42 4.8

ISC

20 1968 3 3 09:31:21.60 34.7100 72.3600 43 5.0

ISC

21 1968 7 3 19:46:55.00 34.8000 74.6000 88 4.6

ISC

22 1969 1 23 20:01:21.00 32.1900 76.0000 64 3.9

ISC

23 1970 1 2 20:01:02.00 32.5000 76.0000 96 4.1

ISC



XV

Sr No



24 1970 4 28 14:12:32.00 32.8000 74.9000 116 4.5

ISC

25 1970 4 28 15:11:47.70 32.9000 74.7000 126 3.5

ISC

26 1970 4 30 03:24:54.30 33.2600 73.4300 33 4.8

ISC

27 1970 6 11 10:30:39.90 33.1100 75.0000 72 4.5

ISC

28 1970 9 7 21:19:09.00 33.0000 75.2000 54 4.6

ISC

29 1970 12 5 17:51:54.00 33.9000 74.5000 75 4.3

ISC

30 1971 4 28 15:12:42.62 34.4449 73.5973 43 4.8

ISC

31 1971 12 27 20:59:39.26 34.9776 73.0234 55 5.2

ISC

32 1972 1 8 01:30:35.00 34.7000 74.1000 96 4.0

ISC

33 1972 3 10 14:36:16.95 33.9073 72.7158 40 4.9

ISC

34 1972 4 17 02:24:50.14 33.9487 72.8622 52 4.8

ISC

35 1972 9 27 02:03:39.00 33.9910 72.6996 41 5.1

ISC

36 1973 1 16 21:31:25.86 33.2922 75.8320 39 5.1

ISC

37 1973 4 10 00:10:02.88 33.1703 75.7460 61 4.4

ISC

38 1973 7 13 22:03:38.06 33.1732 75.6747 48 4.8

ISC

39 1973 7 13 22:54:27.85 33.1819 75.7057 55 4.4

ISC

40 1973 10 24 05:23:51.34 33.1479 75.9166 37 5.3

ISC

41 1973 10 24 19:57:17.09 33.1167 75.9269 48 4.9

ISC

42 1973 12 16 19:09:46.94 34.2686 74.0466 40 5.1

ISC

43 1974 3 25 13:44:05.79 33.7003 72.6774 39 4.4

ISC

44 1974 3 26 04:45:54.73 33.8805 72.8457 72 4.1

ISC

45 1974 4 12 10:32:48.23 33.5311 73.8677 50 4.4

ISC

46 1974 5 20 17:39:19.59 34.5632 74.2327 49 4.8

ISC

47 1974 8 1 19:54:11.76 33.4410 74.5294 0 4.5

ISC

48 1974 8 11 17:21:00.02 34.8828 73.2713 33 4.1

ISC

49 1974 12 28 22:38:53.24 34.9946 73.1013 68 4.8

ISC

50 1975 1 20 09:28:00.68 34.9363 73.1054 63 4.6

ISC

51 1975 4 7 06:41:02.95 34.9085 72.9663 53 5.0

ISC

52 1975 10 17 10:46:09.30 34.2535 74.0640 77 4.1

ISC

53 1975 10 30 14:20:54.36 32.8923 75.7092 75 4.7

ISC

54 1975 10 30 14:36:44.40 32.9700 75.9583 45 4.8

ISC

55 1975 12 10 05:03:47.30 32.7871 75.9180 76 4.7

ISC

56 1976 1 9 23:50:16.49 32.7799 75.9813 96 4.5

ISC

57 1976 2 25 07:45:23.79 33.3444 74.8921 51 4.5

ISC

58 1976 5 22 18:32:53.58 33.0491 75.8290 71 4.4

ISC

59 1977 1 21 14:57:46.38 32.7601 75.9826 51 4.5

ISC

60 1977 2 14 00:22:37.80 33.5967 73.2669 27 5.2

ISC

61 1978 4 12 02:10:16.20 33.7184 75.4263 33 3.8

ISC

62 1978 4 27 18:12:24.79 35.0022 73.0280 58 4.9

ISC

63 1978 5 7 10:32:25.57 33.3964 73.6306 25 5.0 4.4

ISC

64 1978 5 16 06:31:57.14 33.1817 75.3309 96 4.1

ISC

65 1978 5 17 08:39:15.29 32.8934 75.7301 96 4.0

ISC

66 1978 11 18 01:35:00.00 32.8740 72.7513 39 4.6

ISC

67 1979 3 4 02:51:47.95 33.9436 73.1959 42 4.7

ISC

68 1979 7 2 16:27:04.29 34.7364 74.9361 74 4.4

ISC

69 1979 7 2 16:30:47.22 34.5062 74.3684 89 4.6

ISC

70 1979 12 4 04:05:42.07 34.1725 74.0963 33 4.7

ISC

71 1979 12 22 22:28:44.99 33.1078 75.8963 18 4.8 4.1

ISC

72 1980 2 5 20:17:56.85 33.2496 75.8083 33 4.2

ISC

73 1980 2 9 18:23:01.17 32.7900 72.5576 27 4.1

ISC

74 1980 3 29 02:02:53.68 32.7961 73.9736 18 4.7

ISC

75 1980 3 29 07:12:56.39 33.1427 73.2231 30 4.5

ISC

76 1980 5 1 05:43:10.65 33.0264 75.9745 18 4.9 3.8

ISC

77 1980 7 27 11:24:00.24 34.6240 72.0444 53 4.0

ISC

78 1980 8 23 21:36:49.04 32.9637 75.7509 3 5.2 4.9

ISC

79 1980 8 23 21:50:01.20 32.9023 75.7974 13 5.2 4.9

ISC

80 1980 10 5 10:47:18.67 34.6882 74.2892 33 4.1

ISC



XVI

Sr No



81 1981 2 6 09:54:01.40 34.3459 72.0258 263 3.8

ISC

82 1981 6 23 19:54:02.10 34.2608 74.8815 33 4.8

ISC

83 1981 7 4 03:49:25.77 34.3555 75.2542 209 3.7

ISC

84 1981 8 17 09:11:15.75 33.4165 75.6202 6 4.9 3.8

ISC

85 1981 9 27 11:10:42.48 33.2954 75.6352 33 4.5

ISC

86 1981 11 9 19:31:02.47 33.3267 75.8524 33 4.5

ISC

87 1981 12 14 18:25:39.23 33.1881 75.7226 21 4.5

ISC

88 1982 1 17 12:17:37.86 34.5236 73.9030 33 3.9

ISC

89 1982 4 3 22:39:21.98 33.3664 73.4204 3 4.1

ISC

90 1982 9 8 17:53:18.54 32.9277 75.4959 33 4.8

ISC

91 1982 10 25 08:16:27.39 34.0589 73.5200 83 4.3

ISC

92 1983 1 18 13:45:30.03 34.3461 74.2660 33 4.8

ISC

93 1983 5 30 08:39:49.37 32.7136 75.4850 41 4.6

ISC

94 1983 10 12 02:44:42.23 33.7596 75.7209 33 4.5

ISC

95 1984 2 18 07:08:56.67 34.3491 72.0208 33 4.1

ISC

96 1984 4 21 20:34:20.58 34.9902 73.6360 10 3.8

ISC

97 1984 5 23 03:14:17.66 33.1703 75.9302 14 4.8

ISC

98 1984 6 4 05:03:50.16 34.8752 73.0254 52 4.6

ISC

99 1984 8 15 05:31:04.62 34.9020 74.4680 53 4.5

ISC

100 1984 12 20 07:32:07.23 32.9495 72.6961 37 4.6

ISC

101 1984 12 27 20:22:05.91 32.9062 72.6691 22 4.6

ISC

102 1984 12 28 16:28:01.63 34.6108 73.6090 47 4.5

ISC

103 1985 2 25 18:56:07.72 34.2191 74.4430 44 4.6

ISC

104 1985 4 23 12:23:56.07 32.8225 73.2092 64 4.6

ISC

105 1985 8 10 12:56:13.90 33.8905 74.8008 41 4.6

ISC

106 1986 4 25 06:30:50.46 34.8207 73.5379 33 3.9

ISC

107 1986 5 16 05:16:13.70 34.0000 72.5800 15 4.3

4.0 ISC

108 1986 7 10 07:56:12.00 34.1500 72.6900 2 4.7

4.5 ISC

109 1986 7 30 04:03:27.18 33.0499 75.8544 61 4.6

ISC

110 1986 9 19 11:15:38.56 34.2749 73.0635 64 4.4

ISC

111 1987 3 16 06:09:36.61 34.8302 72.3380 212 3.7

ISC

112 1987 7 12 12:19:18.59 33.4897 73.5054 22 4.4 3.3

ISC

113 1988 1 9 01:16:12.48 34.4401 73.3257 95 4.4

ISC

114 1988 1 20 11:48:33.40 34.6956 74.6575 33 4.3

ISC

115 1988 1 21 10:26:48.69 34.7349 73.1783 33 3.4

ISC

116 1988 11 25 00:07:07.45 32.8931 75.8088 80 4.8

ISC

117 1988 12 7 21:13:54.99 33.9486 72.9770 50 4.4

ISC

118 1989 4 7 05:43:24.49 33.7463 73.2029 43 4.3

ISC

119 1989 5 7 10:19:33.68 32.2303 72.3548 33 3.9

ISC

120 1989 5 10 20:05:28.01 33.3402 75.6956 33 3.9

ISC

121 1989 5 10 20:19:21.56 33.3270 75.6545 37 4.7 4.0

ISC

122 1989 9 7 07:42:36.94 34.7668 74.2484 147 4.4

ISC

123 1989 12 5 02:46:11.18 34.8303 73.7770 33 4.2

ISC

124 1990 3 3 05:53:37.96 32.8660 74.1490 10 4.3

ISC

125 1990 3 6 14:43:08.50 33.2381 75.3939 10 3.8

ISC

126 1990 3 15 17:33:27.92 34.5038 74.0883 33 4.5

ISC

127 1990 4 26 15:39:18.31 34.5983 73.5383 33 4.2

ISC

128 1990 9 7 01:57:55.58 34.1017 73.1395 33 4.0

ISC

129 1990 10 9 21:56:38.54 34.0921 73.1564 33 4.4

ISC

130 1990 11 12 15:45:19.76 33.2544 75.8220 67 4.8

ISC

131 1990 12 20 05:46:48.57 34.4392 74.6409 33 4.3

ISC

132 1990 12 25 03:56:46.06 33.3059 75.7558 51 5.3 4.5

ISC

133 1991 1 10 01:33:22.37 34.0152 74.8202 33 3.9

ISC

134 1991 3 16 03:57:42.41 34.5221 72.6623 33 4.5

ISC

135 1991 5 17 17:04:30.87 34.9251 73.8863 33 3.9

ISC

136 1991 5 24 15:38:03.11 34.9778 72.2006 210 3.4

ISC

137 1991 12 18 14:17:21.95 32.8030 73.6496 42 4.2

ISC



XVII

Sr No



138 1992 1 6 19:07:13.99 34.0237 74.0587 34 4.3

ISC

139 1992 2 6 18:47:03.05 34.7764 72.7539 33 4.0

ISC

140 1992 3 24 21:01:47.77 33.8365 72.9023 14 4.9 4.4

ISC

141 1992 4 17 12:42:58.71 34.1295 72.7016 13 4.2

ISC

142 1992 6 19 23:02:35.62 32.2247 72.0831 33 3.8

ISC

143 1993 2 17 16:06:07.62 33.5623 72.5114 26 4.9 4.3

ISC

144 1993 5 15 07:27:12.14 34.8269 72.0362 33 3.8

ISC

145 1993 5 15 08:14:04.96 34.9046 72.0295 33 3.8

ISC

146 1993 6 8 14:30:37.83 33.6669 72.7367 32 4.8

ISC

147 1993 7 2 21:03:59.63 34.1576 73.4272 19 4.3

ISC

148 1993 7 12 01:27:51.90 33.3303 75.9049 33 4.0

ISC

149 1993 9 15 15:08:14.79 33.3314 75.7436 44 5.0 4.3

ISC

150 1993 11 13 00:01:40.54 34.3166 73.5060 33 3.9

ISC

151 1994 4 15 09:44:21.37 34.5578 74.1278 58 4.5

ISC

152 1994 5 13 09:19:52.17 32.5496 75.9544 33 4.3

ISC

153 1994 8 4 22:43:10.32 33.8449 72.1197 28 3.8

ISC

154 1994 12 19 03:22:18.05 34.0508 72.0483 33 3.9

ISC

155 1995 9 26 20:31:54.64 32.2679 74.8940 0 4.2

ISC

156 1995 12 8 21:00:25.17 33.4263 72.6422 10 4.1

ISC

157 1995 12 30 23:40:16.95 34.8482 72.0314 33 3.8

ISC

158 1996 2 14 01:52:22.94 34.9863 73.0220 30 3.9

ISC

159 1996 2 20 02:55:52.66 34.0396 72.6740 46 4.7 4.2

ISC

160 1996 3 25 06:31:20.76 33.1437 73.5821 16 4.6 3.5

ISC

161 1996 4 21 01:09:48.70 34.7841 73.5142 34 4.0

ISC

162 1996 5 5 10:21:23.30 33.5900 72.7600 0 3.7

EIDC

163 1996 5 15 15:02:06.43 33.1462 75.8056 58 3.5

ISC

164 1996 5 24 16:23:44.70 34.4198 72.4188 55 4.1

ISC

165 1996 8 8 14:58:19.85 34.0425 72.9533 21 4.8 4.2

ISC

166 1996 8 17 15:48:02.76 33.4550 75.4542 78 3.2

ISC

167 1996 8 25 05:13:25.20 34.1200 75.6900 0 3.8

EIDC

168 1996 9 8 10:47:15.70 33.8220 72.3103 33 3.6

ISC

169 1996 9 23 11:13:11.52 33.3954 75.6388 33 3.5

ISC

170 1996 11 28 22:56:33.30 32.2700 72.9400 85 3.6

EIDC

171 1996 12 14 09:48:39.36 34.2335 74.7044 33 4.0

ISC

172 1996 12 16 17:59:35.16 33.1416 75.9892 46 3.4

ISC

173 1997 1 19 13:59:24.10 33.6811 75.0662 33 3.6

ISC

174 1997 4 12 05:35:24.18 33.4529 75.7405 33 3.4

ISC

175 1997 5 19 22:21:49.17 34.6110 72.4376 16 3.8

ISC

176 1997 5 31 19:20:21.03 34.8346 73.6131 57 4.4 3.9

ISC

177 1997 7 2 12:01:58.75 34.4141 73.7255 33 3.8

ISC

178 1997 7 21 17:24:49.30 32.9030 72.3950 0 3.8

EIDC

179 1997 7 29 09:43:35.67 32.8482 73.7897 7 4.0 3.1

ISC

180 1997 8 28 01:15:41.20 33.7600 73.2600 15 4.5

4.3 BJI

181 1997 9 5 15:41:52.39 33.9647 73.0764 24 4.0

ISC

182 1997 10 25 12:20:34.30 34.2825 73.3834 0 3.6

EIDC

183 1997 12 7 18:59:50.80 32.9700 75.0200 33 3.2

2.7 NDI

184 1997 12 23 04:15:04.96 33.8045 75.2336 33 4.0

ISC

185 1997 12 27 12:38:20.70 33.9600 75.8800 26 4.1

3.8 BJI

186 1998 3 18 13:35:22.56 35.0082 74.3500 102 3.7

ISC

187 1998 3 24 04:25:43.89 32.3976 74.0587 54 4.0 3.6

ISC

188 1998 5 10 09:42:23.20 34.3737 72.5867 0 3.8

EIDC

189 1998 5 18 12:29:31.78 33.1574 75.8387 65 3.5

ISC

190 1998 5 24 13:22:28.84 34.5864 74.3820 33 3.6

ISC

191 1998 5 29 19:11:05.14 34.1016 73.1230 33 3.9

ISC

192 1998 6 7 08:20:35.68 34.0109 73.0408 33 3.5

ISC

193 1998 6 8 12:22:07.70 34.5535 74.1551 0 3.6 3.3

EIDC

194 1998 7 6 22:50:49.32 33.0806 75.9018 23 3.7

ISC



XVIII

Sr No



195 1998 7 6 10:24:06.24 32.9384 75.7640 59 3.8

ISC

196 1998 7 12 05:45:02.41 34.0217 72.7723 66 4.5

ISC

197 1998 8 17 17:55:01.86 33.1524 75.7102 33 3.5

ISC

198 1998 8 21 01:58:36.26 34.3694 73.7272 64 4.0

ISC

199 1998 9 28 15:28:01.46 34.1280 74.7807 33 3.7

ISC

200 1998 9 28 18:10:55.53 34.0470 74.6599 33 3.5

ISC

201 1998 11 9 17:52:55.24 34.9465 72.0533 122 3.6

NDI

202 1999 1 5 03:06:05.90 33.1180 75.7970 10 2.7

NDI

203 1999 1 11 00:35:08.90 32.3080 75.9890 5 1.7

NDI

204 1999 1 13 15:01:36.90 34.6720 73.8730 272 3.4

NDI

205 1999 2 12 16:30:49.90 32.9333 73.5163 0 3.6

NDI

206 1999 2 17 03:02:13.22 33.1290 73.7990 3 4.0

ISC

207 1999 2 21 15:14:56.50 32.8330 75.8980 10 2.1

NDI

208 1999 2 23 06:56:13.89 34.0570 74.5920 25 4.8 3.9

ISC

209 1999 2 24 09:59:18.50 33.9850 75.3320 33 2.9

NDI

210 1999 2 28 00:38:02.90 32.6860 73.4220 10 2.7

NDI

211 1999 2 28 10:53:26.30 32.9550 75.8090 10 2.2

NDI

212 1999 2 28 23:28:09.60 32.8690 75.7980 10 2.1

NDI

213 1999 3 1 01:00:06.93 33.5470 75.1620 10 3.9

ISC

214 1999 4 2 10:48:07.90 33.1760 73.6940 81 3.0

NDI

215 1999 4 7 00:43:50.00 32.9220 75.8390 0 2.9

NDI

216 1999 4 9 17:59:22.40 33.1690 75.5170 5 2.7

NDI

217 1999 4 12 04:11:30.40 33.0150 75.7520 6 2.0

NDI

218 1999 4 21 06:32:17.50 32.8310 75.6600 15 3.8

3.4 NDI

219 1999 4 22 05:22:04.80 32.9960 75.7680 7 4.9

NDI

220 1999 4 22 07:19:30.40 33.1750 75.2610 6 3.7

3.3 NDI

221 1999 4 24 04:38:33.80 32.4710 72.2880 1 4.3

NDI

222 1999 4 28 13:00:43.80 33.4810 72.7930 15 5.0

5.2 NDI

223 1999 4 28 13:00:47.25 33.1900 73.2910 17 4.9 3.6

ISC

224 1999 5 8 20:59:17.40 33.4420 75.9120 15 2.7

NDI

225 1999 5 14 09:05:56.70 34.6520 73.7420 2 4.1

NDI

226 1999 5 14 09:06:00.60 33.1750 73.1360 33 3.7

ISC

227 1999 5 17 17:45:40.30 32.5590 75.5030 33 2.0

NDI

228 1999 7 12 17:43:53.30 34.4450 74.4590 33 3.0

NDI

229 1999 7 12 21:45:50.80 33.6120 75.6740 18 4.1

3.8 NDI

230 1999 7 12 21:45:58.71 33.1560 75.8170 66 3.7

ISC

231 1999 7 13 03:17:29.40 32.7760 75.5810 33 3.7

NDI

232 1999 7 15 04:29:33.45 32.6610 72.9510 36 4.2 3.5

ISC

233 1999 7 15 04:29:35.50 32.8460 72.8610 33 4.5

4.1 NDI

234 1999 7 30 19:55:08.90 33.1120 75.5240 38 2.0

NDI

235 1999 8 24 05:39:18.00 32.4200 73.5670 17 3.1

NDI

236 1999 9 18 16:30:02.50 32.9630 75.8670 9 4.1

3.8 NDI

237 1999 10 25 18:12:17.60 32.4340 75.3610 15 2.9

NDI

238 1999 10 29 01:23:03.60 33.4770 75.5290 10 3.1

NDI

239 1999 10 29 23:31:37.10 34.1880 74.0940 15 4.2

3.9 NDI

240 1999 10 31 19:03:05.90 34.9870 72.9250 33 4.2

3.8 NDI

241 1999 11 29 14:31:19.48 33.0040 75.6470 33 4.2

ISC

242 2000 1 16 12:00:57.95 33.2650 75.8240 39 4.0

ISC

243 2000 2 22 17:53:43.31 33.4280 75.7760 15 3.5

ISC

244 2000 2 25 22:23:37.70 33.2340 75.7450 33 2.2

NDI

245 2000 3 17 07:41:42.20 33.3520 75.4380 5 2.5

NDI

246 2000 4 8 12:47:00.30 33.7010 75.0800 6 2.9

NDI

247 2000 4 26 12:15:21.26 34.0390 75.2200 43 3.5

ISC

248 2000 5 28 14:52:01.31 33.7340 74.8650 58 3.7

ISC

249 2000 7 8 14:22:41.60 34.4050 73.5070 33 3.0

NDI

250 2000 7 10 23:32:27.40 33.3340 74.3460 15 2.7

NDI

251 2000 7 12 07:51:40.40 33.0640 75.8710 5 2.3

NDI



XIX

Sr No



252 2000 7 15 00:45:12.20 33.3180 75.5730 20 2.8

NDI

253 2000 7 17 05:26:11.45 34.9320 72.9900 52 4.8 3.8

ISC

254 2000 7 23 23:13:40.50 32.7990 75.2530 33 2.5

NDI

255 2000 7 24 12:53:30.20 32.1380 75.8910 18 2.4

NDI

256 2000 7 27 01:47:06.70 33.6090 73.8450 0 2.8

NDI

257 2000 8 11 03:46:44.40 32.6050 75.5110 48 2.9

2.3 NDI

258 2000 8 14 14:46:11.80 33.0770 75.4000 14 2.7

NDI

259 2000 8 23 14:32:44.70 34.0750 74.3830 33 4.7

NDI

260 2000 8 24 01:29:08.60 33.3190 75.4200 33 3.0

NDI

261 2000 8 28 00:32:11.20 33.4440 75.2430 7 2.7

NDI

262 2000 8 31 22:46:36.70 34.1240 73.4810 33 3.2

NDI

263 2000 9 5 14:04:28.90 33.9730 75.0360 33 2.9

NDI

264 2000 9 6 02:53:03.49 34.3400 75.0920 33 3.7

ISC

265 2000 9 7 21:58:41.80 33.3240 74.8350 26 3.4

NDI

266 2000 9 26 19:39:24.95 33.4090 75.6960 9 4.4

ISC

267 2000 10 2 05:41:54.00 35.0000 76.0000 0 5.1

NDI

268 2000 10 28 16:47:01.90 32.6010 74.9060 35 2.4

NAO

269 2000 10 28 23:53:13.10 32.9040 75.1710 33 2.6

NAO

270 2000 12 22 16:55:58.20 33.3190 75.9430 5 2.9

NAO

271 2000 12 27 00:40:16.40 33.2670 75.9950 0 2.7

NAO

272 2001 1 2 04:49:27.00 32.0000 75.0000

3.7

NAO

273 2001 1 3 21:35:23.00 32.0000 75.0000

4.1

NAO

274 2001 1 5 21:35:23.00 34.0000 76.0000

4.0

NAO

275 2001 1 8 09:01:51.60 33.6910 75.6250 33 3.9

3.5 NAO

276 2001 1 8 09:01:53.85 33.4260 75.9610 38 4.0

ISC

277 2001 1 8 09:06:19.40 33.2470 75.5730 15 2.9

NDI

278 2001 1 9 03:12:27.80 33.7670 75.9670 33 2.8

NDI

279 2001 1 9 07:19:37.00 32.0000 75.0000

3.8

NAO

280 2001 1 14 04:19:20.00 33.0000 76.0000

4.3

NAO

281 2001 1 16 10:36:58.00 33.0000 75.0000

4.3

NAO

282 2001 1 20 01:15:36.00 34.0000 72.0000

3.7

NAO

283 2001 1 21 01:24:50.00 33.0000 75.0000

4.0

NAO

284 2001 1 21 08:13:25.14 34.9500 73.4590 33 3.7

ISC

285 2001 1 23 12:01:07.00 33.0000 73.0000

4.2

NAO

286 2001 1 24 12:23:53.30 32.6310 75.6330 5 2.7

NDI

287 2001 1 24 19:49:44.50 32.7720 75.8240 33 2.7

NDI

288 2001 1 25 19:23:58.00 33.0000 74.0000

3.5

NAO

289 2001 1 31 04:18:05.00 34.0000 74.0000

2.7

NAO

290 2001 2 2 21:22:59.00 32.0000 72.0000

4.0

NAO

291 2001 2 4 10:14:08.44 33.2860 75.8310 19 4.3 3.6

NAO

292 2001 2 9 03:00:56.80 34.5520 73.9600 45 3.8

ISC

293 2001 2 9 18:17:51.00 33.0000 72.0000

3.9

NAO

294 2001 2 10 01:27:06.00 34.0000 76.0000

3.9

NAO

295 2001 2 10 03:46:16.00 32.0000 75.0000

4.5

NAO

296 2001 2 10 18:57:34.00 32.0000 75.0000

3.7

NAO

297 2001 2 12 10:20:37.00 32.0000 72.0000

4.5

NAO

298 2001 2 15 21:17:09.00 33.0000 72.0000

3.7

NAO

299 2001 2 18 07:42:25.00 32.0000 72.0000

3.8

NAO

300 2001 2 18 19:35:56.00 33.0000 74.0000

4.1

NAO

301 2001 2 20 17:33:33.50 33.1240 75.9510 40 4.5 3.8

ISC

302 2001 3 1 20:56:55.00 32.0000 72.0000

3.8

NAO

303 2001 3 1 21:29:52.10 32.4150 74.9170 33 2.6

NDI

304 2001 3 6 04:24:12.00 34.0000 72.0000

4.7

NAO

305 2001 3 6 17:59:39.60 32.9070 74.7640 28 2.8

NDI

306 2001 3 11 03:19:32.00 33.0000 75.0000

3.6

NAO

307 2001 3 11 19:09:52.00 32.0000 73.0000

3.5

NAO

308 2001 3 11 20:19:06.00 32.0000 74.0000

4.4

NAO



XX

Sr No



309 2001 3 12 09:35:22.00 32.0000 75.0000

3.8

NAO

310 2001 3 17 18:34:54.00 34.0000 75.0000

3.9

NAO

311 2001 3 17 19:37:03.00 35.0000 75.0000

3.6

NAO

312 2001 3 19 00:35:10.00 33.0000 73.0000

4.5

NAO

313 2001 3 22 04:03:28.00 33.0000 76.0000

3.8

NAO

314 2001 3 24 14:39:10.48 33.3790 75.6720 33 3.8

ISC

315 2001 3 28 12:33:32.00 35.0000 74.0000

4.6

NAO

316 2001 4 2 19:08:50.00 32.0000 76.0000

3.5

NAO

317 2001 4 8 18:33:54.00 34.0000 73.0000

3.9

NAO

318 2001 4 9 15:00:37.74 32.6205 73.0157 0 3.8

IDC

319 2001 4 9 15:19:07.00 35.0000 74.0000

4.3

NAO

320 2001 4 13 03:25:27.10 32.7360 75.0530 76 2.5

NDI

321 2001 4 18 23:32:26.50 32.6200 74.8150 33 2.6

NDI

322 2001 4 19 22:06:50.00 32.0000 72.0000

3.8

NAO

323 2001 4 22 20:29:28.00 32.0000 75.0000

3.7

NAO

324 2001 4 22 22:47:10.00 32.0000 75.0000

3.6

NAO

325 2001 4 29 13:52:46.00 34.0000 76.0000

3.6

NAO

326 2001 4 30 00:32:15.00 33.0000 75.0000

3.8

NAO

327 2001 4 30 15:37:12.20 33.1510 75.7770 8 2.6

NDI

328 2001 5 4 06:26:42.50 34.6210 74.2410 33 3.9

ISC

329 2001 5 7 22:08:00.00 35.0000 73.0000

3.6

NAO

330 2001 5 9 03:47:52.00 33.0000 75.0000

4.3

NAO

331 2001 5 11 14:59:21.00 32.0000 73.0000

4.3

NAO

332 2001 5 18 03:06:16.00 34.0000 72.0000

3.7

NAO

333 2001 5 21 22:16:00.00 34.0000 76.0000

4.5

NAO

334 2001 5 23 18:06:39.30 32.7290 74.9190 38 2.5

NDI

335 2001 6 2 04:39:00.70 34.1203 74.2258 200 4.3

DMN

336 2001 6 3 19:47:28.00 35.0000 72.0000

3.5

NAO

337 2001 6 5 22:50:34.00 32.0000 75.0000

3.8

NAO

338 2001 6 7 04:48:12.00 32.0000 72.0000

4.0

NAO

339 2001 6 8 22:10:31.90 34.9961 73.3194 10 4.8

DMN

340 2001 6 11 14:36:12.20 34.6762 73.5251 10 4.9

DMN

341 2001 6 13 07:33:45.00 32.0000 75.0000

4.1

NAO

342 2001 6 13 19:43:28.20 33.3090 75.4900 5 3.1

NDI

343 2001 6 13 19:49:18.80 32.6960 74.8840 11 2.5

NAO

344 2001 6 15 03:56:30.00 33.0000 75.0000

3.6

NDI

345 2001 6 15 11:13:13.60 32.8870 72.1500 33 3.6

NAO

346 2001 6 16 07:43:38.00 34.0000 73.0000

4.6

NAO

347 2001 6 17 17:18:43.00 34.0000 76.0000

3.8

NAO

348 2001 6 18 14:04:50.00 35.0000 73.0000

4.0

NAO

349 2001 6 20 04:36:56.00 34.0000 73.0000

3.8

LDG

350 2001 6 23 07:49:16.00 32.0000 73.0000

3.7

NDI

351 2001 6 27 03:50:32.00 35.0000 76.0000

3.5

NDI

352 2001 6 28 23:25:09.00 32.7520 74.7670 10 3.1

NAO

353 2001 7 1 00:12:51.00 33.0000 75.0000

3.5

IDC

354 2001 7 2 20:33:05.75 34.7376 73.3292 0 3.8

NAO

355 2001 7 4 05:35:45.00 35.0000 76.0000

4.3

NAO

356 2001 7 6 15:52:38.00 33.0000 75.0000

5.1

NAO

357 2001 7 7 21:24:36.00 33.0000 76.0000

4.6

NAO

358 2001 7 11 23:52:04.00 34.0000 72.0000

4.3

NAO

359 2001 7 14 01:54:56.00 32.0000 76.0000

3.8

NAO

360 2001 7 15 05:01:38.00 32.0000 73.0000

4.0

NAO

361 2001 7 16 16:07:16.20 32.9420 73.1480 33 5.2

MOS

362 2001 7 17 02:55:32.00 33.0000 75.0000

4.0

NAO

363 2001 7 17 14:10:33.00 32.0000 72.0000

3.9

NAO

364 2001 7 18 12:22:11.60 33.4074 75.1596 345 4.5

NAO

365 2001 7 20 05:21:24.00 33.0000 73.0000

4.3

NAO



XXI

Sr No



366 2001 7 20 13:27:28.00 33.0000 75.0000

4.0

NAO

367 2001 7 21 00:17:17.00 33.0000 75.0000

4.7

NAO

368 2001 7 25 21:47:09.00 35.0000 73.0000

3.5

NAO

369 2001 8 7 08:31:39.00 34.0000 75.0000

3.9

NAO

370 2001 8 9 01:30:01.00 32.0000 74.0000

3.8

NAO

371 2001 8 9 19:32:32.80 33.4444 75.5545 336 4.2

DMN

372 2001 8 15 00:45:06.00 33.0000 72.0000

3.7

NAO

373 2001 8 24 18:57:02.00 33.0000 73.0000

4.0

NAO

374 2001 8 25 19:54:09.00 33.0000 75.0000

4.6

NAO

375 2001 8 26 17:05:28.00 33.0000 75.0000

4.2

NAO

376 2001 8 26 17:52:17.00 32.0000 75.0000

3.7

NAO

377 2001 8 27 01:57:26.20 33.6622 74.9070 200 4.1

DMN

378 2001 8 27 03:42:48.00 33.0000 75.0000

4.8

NAO

379 2001 8 28 11:33:44.00 33.0000 74.0000

4.7

NAO

380 2001 8 30 09:02:14.00 35.0000 76.0000

4.7

NAO

381 2001 8 31 15:36:21.00 35.0000 73.0000

2.8

NAO

382 2001 9 1 05:59:51.00 33.0000 72.0000

4.3

NAO

383 2001 9 6 00:40:49.00 33.0000 75.0000

4.8

NAO

384 2001 9 8 15:48:53.00 33.0000 75.0000

4.5

NAO

385 2001 9 9 01:04:37.00 33.0000 72.0000

3.7

NAO

386 2001 9 9 01:06:26.00 32.5326 75.9245 324 4.5

DMN

387 2001 9 9 23:39:35.50 34.5198 73.1259 133 4.4

DMN

388 2001 9 14 15:18:19.00 35.0000 73.0000

4.7

NAO

389 2001 9 14 15:39:10.80 34.5967 74.6998 300 4.7

DMN

390 2001 9 14 16:28:24.00 33.0000 73.0000

3.9

NAO

391 2001 9 14 18:29:53.00 33.0000 75.0000

3.7

NAO

392 2001 9 20 20:22:53.00 34.0000 76.0000

3.8

NAO

393 2001 9 24 05:30:53.00 34.0000 73.0000

3.6

NAO

394 2001 9 24 20:15:35.00 32.0000 76.0000

3.7

NAO

395 2001 9 26 15:29:57.00 33.0000 75.0000

3.8

NAO

396 2001 9 28 04:37:57.50 33.4010 75.8300 33 5.1

MOS

397 2001 9 30 00:54:15.90 34.6835 74.0036 133 4.7

DMN

398 2001 9 30 11:29:15.00 32.0000 74.0000

4.5

NAO

399 2001 9 30 11:31:02.80 34.5649 74.8615 320 4.8

DMN

400 2001 10 5 02:36:56.00 33.0000 75.0000

4.8

NAO

401 2001 10 6 19:21:07.30 34.1863 73.4330 10 4.9

IDC

402 2001 10 7 13:57:05.00 34.0000 74.0000

3.6

NAO

403 2001 10 11 06:01:41.72 34.6092 72.4553 0 4.0

IDC

404 2001 10 14 10:35:51.00 33.0000 73.0000

3.7

NAO

405 2001 10 15 20:18:09.00 33.0000 72.0000

3.8

NAO

406 2001 10 18 17:54:26.00 35.0000 76.0000

4.3

NAO

407 2001 10 18 17:55:59.00 34.3970 75.0860 268 5.0

DMN

408 2001 10 21 13:23:29.00 34.0000 76.0000

4.2

NAO

409 2001 10 21 14:29:12.00 34.0000 72.0000

3.7

NAO

410 2001 10 21 20:17:15.10 34.9918 72.0489 10 4.7

DMN

411 2001 10 27 03:53:51.00 32.0000 75.0000

3.9

NAO

412 2001 10 28 23:16:24.00 32.0000 72.0000

3.8

NAO

413 2001 11 3 04:50:45.71 33.1522 72.6066 0 4.2

IDC

414 2001 11 6 02:19:36.00 32.0000 72.0000

3.8

NAO

415 2001 11 6 10:50:06.00 32.0000 73.0000

4.1

NAO

416 2001 11 7 05:13:08.00 33.0000 76.0000

3.9

NAO

417 2001 11 12 22:21:40.00 32.0000 73.0000

4.2

NAO

418 2001 11 13 16:35:04.00 32.0000 72.0000

4.9

NAO

419 2001 11 13 19:29:13.00 33.0000 75.0000

3.9

NAO

420 2001 11 16 12:34:21.00 32.0000 75.0000

4.1

NAO

421 2001 11 19 17:58:08.00 32.0000 72.0000

3.8

NAO

422 2001 11 23 20:42:29.00 34.0000 74.0000

6.7

NAO



XXII

Sr No



423 2001 11 24 14:43:57.00 33.0000 74.0000

3.7

NAO

424 2001 12 9 12:08:57.00 33.0000 75.0000

4.0

NAO

425 2001 12 9 16:01:32.00 35.0000 73.0000

4.0

NAO

426 2001 12 16 05:32:32.00 33.0000 75.0000

3.5

NAO

427 2001 12 16 05:34:02.50 34.1263 73.7819 147 4.3

DMN

428 2001 12 21 20:06:41.00 33.0000 75.0000

4.2

NAO

429 2001 12 21 21:56:41.50 32.8733 74.4470 33 5.0

DMN

430 2001 12 22 03:39:13.00 34.0000 75.0000

5.0

NAO

431 2001 12 22 11:26:25.90 34.8174 72.3052 10 4.8

DMN

432 2001 12 22 12:06:59.10 34.6710 73.1330 33 4.3

MOS

433 2001 12 24 09:42:50.40 32.6147 75.2520 305 4.0

NAO

434 2001 12 28 20:58:48.75 34.6099 73.5547 0 3.8

3.1 IDC

435 2001 12 30 18:39:14.00 33.0000 75.0000

4.2

NAO

436 2001 12 31 22:20:24.00 33.0000 75.0000

5.1

NAO

437 2002 1 6 14:34:22.00 33.0000 74.0000

3.8

NAO

438 2002 1 7 13:04:18.24 33.6575 74.6155 61 3.6

IDC

439 2002 1 7 20:32:47.00 33.0000 74.0000

4.4

NAO

440 2002 1 11 01:24:49.00 34.0000 76.0000

4.4

NAO

441 2002 1 13 12:08:10.60 32.4450 75.9370 33 5.1

NAO

442 2002 1 13 12:08:35.19 34.9422 74.0524 33 4.6

MDD

443 2002 1 13 13:39:30.82 33.9197 75.5453 33 4.6

MDD

444 2002 1 19 04:38:04.00 33.0000 75.0000

3.8

NAO

445 2002 1 24 15:34:32.00 35.0000 72.0000

4.3

NAO

446 2002 2 5 05:35:56.00 32.0000 73.0000

5.1

NAO

447 2002 2 7 03:29:20.00 34.0000 72.0000

4.2

NAO

448 2002 2 8 04:02:14.00 32.0000 76.0000

3.8

NAO

449 2002 2 9 18:10:03.00 33.0000 76.0000

3.8

NAO

450 2002 2 12 23:13:56.00 33.0819 75.9476 0 3.4

2.9 IDC

451 2002 2 12 23:14:22.36 33.6144 75.8236 0 3.9

3.7 IDC

452 2002 2 14 23:44:02.00 32.0000 72.0000

4.6

NAO

453 2002 2 17 05:22:59.70 33.0400 75.8800 31 4.3

4.1 BJI

454 2002 2 18 22:33:31.00 32.0000 74.0000

4.4

NAO

455 2002 2 19 07:22:47.00 33.0000 72.0000

4.1

NAO

456 2002 2 20 01:37:50.00 35.0000 74.0000

4.0

NAO

457 2002 2 22 10:01:31.00 33.0000 75.0000

4.5

NAO

458 2002 2 22 17:27:02.00 33.0000 73.0000

4.0

NAO

459 2002 2 26 14:04:26.00 34.0000 76.0000

4.6

NAO

460 2002 3 3 12:07:11.00 32.0000 74.0000

4.7

NAO

461 2002 3 3 13:04:48.00 33.0000 75.0000

5.0

NAO

462 2002 3 3 16:31:37.00 32.0000 73.0000

3.9

NAO

463 2002 3 3 21:03:38.00 32.0000 75.0000

4.3

NAO

464 2002 3 5 14:15:03.00 33.0000 74.0000

4.0

NAO

465 2002 3 6 19:56:13.00 33.0000 75.0000

4.7

NAO

466 2002 3 7 16:59:46.00 33.0000 73.0000

3.9

NAO

467 2002 3 9 20:58:43.00 32.0000 75.0000

3.9

NAO

468 2002 3 14 10:45:36.00 33.0000 75.0000

3.8

NAO

469 2002 3 14 18:44:03.80 34.1600 75.9800 48 3.9

3.8 BJI

470 2002 3 18 04:29:14.40 32.9700 75.8900 57 4.1

4.5 NAO

471 2002 3 21 21:57:31.00 33.0000 72.0000

4.9

NAO

472 2002 3 24 10:18:09.70 32.2564 75.8423 0 3.7

3.8 IDC

473 2002 3 29 01:58:18.00 33.0000 73.0000

4.2

NAO

474 2002 3 30 21:13:21.00 32.0000 74.0000

3.8

NAO

475 2002 3 31 17:09:17.00 33.0000 75.0000

3.5

NAO

476 2002 4 3 02:23:09.00 34.0000 72.0000

4.6

NAO

477 2002 4 5 20:30:42.00 33.0000 74.0000

4.7

NAO

478 2002 4 11 16:05:58.00 33.0000 75.0000

3.9

NAO

479 2002 4 13 23:13:57.00 32.0000 75.0000

3.8

NAO



XXIII

Sr No



480 2002 4 14 14:48:20.00 33.0000 75.0000

3.5

NAO

481 2002 4 16 08:14:07.00 32.0000 75.0000

3.5

NAO

482 2002 4 16 23:45:39.00 33.0000 73.0000

4.3

NAO

483 2002 4 17 06:32:53.00 32.0000 75.0000

3.5

NAO

484 2002 4 18 22:12:41.90 32.9470 74.7260 33 4.8

BER

485 2002 4 21 10:41:16.00 35.0000 76.0000

4.0

MDD

486 2002 4 30 23:01:19.00 33.0000 73.0000

4.0

NAO

487 2002 5 6 09:32:10.10 34.2600 73.7000 70 3.9

BJI

488 2002 5 6 16:27:25.00 33.0000 74.0000 0 3.6

NAO

489 2002 5 8 06:30:40.00 35.0000 73.0000

4.1

NAO

490 2002 5 9 08:11:38.00 32.0000 73.0000

3.6

NAO

491 2002 5 10 06:00:49.27 33.0359 75.9810 0 3.8

3.7 IDC

492 2002 5 13 18:41:11.00 32.0000 73.0000

4.0

NAO

493 2002 5 15 15:32:54.00 35.0000 74.0000

3.8

NAO

494 2002 5 18 22:47:22.30 32.1414 73.1310 0 3.8 4.2 3.2 IDC

495 2002 5 18 22:47:44.00 35.0000 74.0000

3.5

NAO

496 2002 5 19 03:56:51.81 34.1667 74.9971 0 4.0

3.1 IDC

497 2002 5 19 08:39:52.00 35.0000 76.0000

4.1

NAO

498 2002 5 21 05:48:26.00 34.0000 74.0000

3.8

NAO

499 2002 5 23 09:19:48.00 34.0000 72.0000

3.1

NAO

500 2002 5 27 00:05:01.00 32.0000 72.0000

3.8

NAO

501 2002 6 2 05:15:16.00 33.0000 75.0000

3.6

NAO

502 2002 6 4 00:12:04.00 33.0000 72.0000

4.0

NAO

503 2002 6 6 00:32:15.00 35.0000 73.0000

3.5

NAO

504 2002 6 9 02:51:14.00 33.0000 72.0000

3.5

NAO

505 2002 6 10 23:19:47.00 33.0000 72.0000

2.8

NAO

506 2002 6 10 23:26:00.00 32.0000 75.0000

4.1

NAO

507 2002 6 16 19:47:09.48 33.5874 72.9457 0 3.8

3.2 IDC

508 2002 6 24 20:41:39.00 34.0000 72.0000

3.8

NAO

509 2002 6 25 03:21:42.00 33.0000 75.0000

3.7

NAO

510 2002 7 1 07:35:09.00 33.0000 75.0000

3.9

NAO

511 2002 7 2 05:36:33.99 33.0653 75.8859 0 3.8

3.6 IDC

512 2002 7 2 07:01:11.00 32.0000 74.0000

3.8

NAO

513 2002 7 9 02:56:47.32 32.9866 73.4734 0 3.8

2.9 IDC

514 2002 7 11 03:32:11.00 33.0000 76.0000

4.5

NAO

515 2002 7 14 21:03:28.00 34.0000 73.0000

3.6

NAO

516 2002 7 18 20:29:19.00 34.0000 72.0000

4.1

NAO

517 2002 7 22 07:55:59.00 32.0000 73.0000

3.0

NAO

518 2002 7 22 09:57:23.00 32.0000 72.0000

3.8

NAO

519 2002 8 3 15:26:12.80 33.8840 72.8450 33 4.4

MOS

520 2002 8 4 05:02:28.00 35.0000 74.0000

3.5

NAO

521 2002 8 8 20:50:27.00 33.0000 75.0000

4.2

NAO

522 2002 8 8 22:45:11.00 33.0000 72.0000

4.0

NAO

523 2002 8 14 12:06:34.00 35.0000 73.0000

3.9

NAO

524 2002 8 14 16:15:17.00 33.0000 75.0000

3.8

NAO

525 2002 8 16 01:33:08.00 35.0000 74.0000

4.0

NAO

526 2002 8 17 23:23:28.00 33.0000 72.0000

3.6

NAO

527 2002 8 18 00:32:06.60 34.0550 72.8600 33 4.5

MOS

528 2002 8 20 14:53:38.00 34.0000 73.0000

4.1

NAO

529 2002 8 20 22:51:26.00 34.0000 76.0000

3.4

NAO

530 2002 9 3 17:26:14.00 33.0000 72.0000

5.5

NAO

531 2002 9 3 21:01:06.00 33.0000 76.0000

3.9

NAO

532 2002 9 4 11:37:46.00 33.0000 76.0000

4.4

NAO

533 2002 9 9 23:46:49.00 35.0000 74.0000

3.9

NAO

534 2002 9 11 06:39:20.00 33.0000 75.0000

3.8

NAO

535 2002 9 13 04:27:22.00 32.0000 74.0000

3.7

NAO

536 2002 9 13 18:20:12.00 33.0000 72.0000

4.0

NAO



XXIV

Sr No



537 2002 9 16 06:09:40.00 32.0000 73.0000

4.0

NAO

538 2002 9 18 04:46:38.00 32.0000 72.0000

3.9

NAO

539 2002 9 22 19:57:07.00 33.0000 74.0000

4.3

NAO

540 2002 10 1 02:50:51.00 33.0000 72.0000

5.3

NAO

541 2002 10 2 23:28:30.00 35.0000 75.0000

4.3

NAO

542 2002 10 4 14:59:54.00 33.0000 73.0000

3.9

NAO

543 2002 10 5 11:47:16.00 35.0000 73.0000

4.2

NAO

544 2002 10 10 15:27:00.00 32.0000 76.0000

4.6

NAO

545 2002 10 10 17:25:05.00 33.0000 73.0000

3.8

NAO

546 2002 10 17 04:29:45.00 32.0000 73.0000

4.4

NAO

547 2002 10 17 14:24:03.00 34.0000 72.0000

4.6

NAO

548 2002 10 21 13:49:10.00 33.0000 72.0000

3.7

NAO

549 2002 10 29 11:00:58.00 34.0000 76.0000

5.1

NAO

550 2002 10 30 03:12:30.00 35.0000 76.0000

3.6

NAO

551 2002 11 1 22:55:05.00 33.0000 76.0000

3.9

NAO

552 2002 11 1 22:55:18.56 34.7529 73.6430 0 3.8

2.9 IDC

553 2002 11 1 22:57:44.73 34.9448 73.6945 0 4.1

2.9 IDC

554 2002 11 2 04:55:07.00 35.0000 76.0000

4.0

NAO

555 2002 11 2 15:23:17.00 33.0000 76.0000

4.6

NAO

556 2002 11 3 04:47:17.00 33.0000 76.0000

4.0

NAO

557 2002 11 3 06:11:11.00 34.0000 76.0000

4.1

NAO

558 2002 11 3 14:48:07.00 33.0000 75.0000

3.8

NAO

559 2002 11 3 18:53:05.00 32.0000 72.0000

3.8

NAO

560 2002 11 4 05:18:47.00 35.0000 76.0000

4.1

NAO

561 2002 11 4 22:03:36.00 34.0000 76.0000

3.9

NAO

562 2002 11 5 11:59:20.00 33.0000 76.0000

4.2

NAO

563 2002 11 8 02:22:05.00 33.0000 76.0000

4.2

NAO

564 2002 11 8 02:51:22.00 33.0000 76.0000

3.7

NAO

565 2002 11 11 09:17:04.06 34.1842 75.3474 0 4.0

IDC

566 2002 11 13 18:40:45.00 35.0000 72.0000

3.4

NAO

567 2002 11 13 21:17:12.00 33.0000 72.0000

3.7

NAO

568 2002 11 16 14:18:36.00 35.0000 72.0000

3.9

NAO

569 2002 11 19 04:30:09.00 34.0000 76.0000

3.8

NAO

570 2002 11 20 19:22:26.00 32.0000 75.0000

3.9

NAO

571 2002 11 20 22:28:31.80 34.8068 74.3212 0 3.9

2.9 IDC

572 2002 11 20 22:50:17.00 34.0000 74.0000

4.0

NAO

573 2002 11 21 00:02:01.00 34.0000 76.0000

4.1

NAO

574 2002 11 21 03:10:22.00 34.0000 75.0000

3.8

NAO

575 2002 11 22 07:10:30.00 34.0000 76.0000

4.3

NAO

576 2002 11 22 09:12:12.60 33.4080 73.5240 33 4.5

MOS

577 2002 11 24 09:35:25.34 32.4224 73.1631 0 4.0

2.9 IDC

578 2002 11 24 12:56:47.00 34.0000 76.0000

4.5

NAO

579 2002 11 24 14:57:52.20 34.9015 73.7414 0 3.8

3.0 IDC

580 2002 11 25 11:06:18.00 33.0000 76.0000

4.2

NAO

581 2002 11 28 14:07:19.00 33.0000 72.0000

4.7

NAO

582 2002 11 30 19:19:49.00 35.0000 75.0000

3.9

NAO

583 2002 12 2 00:56:51.00 33.0000 72.0000

4.2

NAO

584 2002 12 4 10:29:35.00 33.0000 75.0000

4.3

NAO

585 2002 12 11 04:54:33.00 35.0000 75.0000

4.1

NAO

586 2002 12 17 10:28:08.00 33.3288 75.8066 46 3.6 3.0 3.2 IDC

587 2002 12 19 15:22:50.00 32.0000 75.0000

4.0

NAO

588 2002 12 19 16:13:32.21 33.4550 73.2430 0 3.9

3.5 IDC

589 2002 12 20 18:57:33.00 33.0000 75.0000

4.0

NAO

590 2002 12 23 00:12:41.00 33.0000 72.0000

5.2

NAO

591 2002 12 23 02:19:32.00 32.0000 73.0000

4.2

NAO

592 2002 12 29 07:29:17.00 33.0000 76.0000

3.7

NAO

593 2002 12 29 20:15:48.57 34.8821 73.8705 0 4.0

2.6 IDC



XXV

Sr No



594 2002 12 31 01:07:45.00 33.0000 75.0000

3.7

NAO

Seismicity Pattern

The microseismic data of the region indicate that the region is very active on a microseismic level

with frequent earthquakes of magnitude greater than 4.

The largest earthquake recorded by regional network is the Kangra earthquake of magnitude Ms=8.0

occurred on 4th April 1905 about 200 km southeast of the project. Two earthquakes of magnitude

greater than 6 have also been recorded in this area.

Figure 8 shows distribution of seismicity with depth in the region as recorded by Mangla

microseismic network. Major concentration of earthquakes is within upper 20 km. It is important to

note that all the events having magnitude 5 or greater are originated within shallow depth (< 20 km).

This aspect of seismicity depicts that seismic forces are active at shallow depth, which increases

earthquake hazard within this region. Majority of the events falls within focal depths less than 30

km. Though, events with magnitude greater than 5 do not seem to occur beyond 30 km depth,

nevertheless, events with magnitude 4 to 5 do occur at depths upto as much as 60 km. There is only

one earthquake that was located at focal depth of 79.3 km.

From the spatial point of view, number of earthquakes is quite less south of latitude 32.5o. This low

level of seismicity may be true as no prominent causative seismotectonic feature is recognized in the

plain areas of Punjab due to thick alluvial cover. However, another factor for this reduced level could

be the fact that no local seismic network properly covers this area. Generally the spread of

earthquake epicentres seems to be random for magnitudes less than 4. However, for the events

having magnitudes more than 4, most of these show association with local tectonic features except

in Potwar and Punjab plain (Figure 8). The concentration of events in zone near latitude 34.0o and

longitude 72.75o may be associated with Tarbela reservoir induced effect. The concentration of

events west of Abbotabad appears to be partially associated with HLSZ (Hazara Lower Seismic Zone)

as suggested by Seeber et al.44 extending northwest-southeast from Hazara thrust system of faults

except the event of February 25, 1996 of magnitude 5.2 with focal depth of five kilometers located

only four kilometers downstream of Tarbela dam, which was an induced event. Lot of seismicity is

associated with MBT and other faults of the Hazara thrust system, which indicates that these faults

are active. In Salt Range, a lot of seismicity appears to be associated with Kahuta fault and Dil Jabba

thrust, therefore indicating these faults as seismically active. A concentration of seismic activity is

seen along river Jhelum north of Mangla. This could probably be associated with the mapped portion

of the Jhelum fault, which is also considered as a possible extension of Dil Jabba thrust along the axis

of the syntaxial bend, as suggested by the study of fault plane solutions of a few earthquakes in this

area. This association of seismicity suggests that this portion of Jhelum fault upto Kahuta may be

considered as active tectonic feature. Another concentration of epicenters is seen northeast of

Mangla, which could be associated with Riasi fault and a possible associated fault closer to Mangla.

44

Seeber, L., et al; Seismicity of the Hazara arc in northern Pakistan; Decollement vs. basement faulting; Geodynamics of Pakistan (1979).



XXVI

Further towards northeast, lot of seismicity is associated with Riasi thrust, MBT and other tectonic

features of the Himalayan range.

Figure 8: Microseismicity of the Project Region Depth plot

Seismotectonic Setting

Seismotectonic Model

Based on the synthesis of geological and seismicity data described above, a seismotectonic model of

the project region is presented below which provides the basis for seismic hazard analysis for the

Project.

The Project site is located near the base of Himalayan range where major tectonic features of this

gigantic range are present. The other prominent tectonic feature is the presence of Hazara-Kashmir

syntaxial bend which is very sharp near Muzaffarabad and gradually dies out southwards. All

geological features show NW-SE trend towards east of the syntaxial bend while these have NE-SW

trend on the western side of the syntaxial bend.

The seismotectonic features that have been considered critical for the seismic hazard to the Project

include:

i. Himalayan Frontal Thrusts i.e. Main Boundary Thrust (MBT) and Riasi Thrust and associated

parallel faults, having NW-SE trend and located east of the syntaxial axis;



XXVII

ii. Jhelum Fault, trending N-S, and running along the axis of the syntaxial bend; and

iii. Dil Jabba thrust, Kahuta Fault and Salt Range Frontal Thrust, all have NE-SW trend and

located west of the axis of the syntaxis.

The entire region is dominated mainly by thrust type of faults that do have some strike- slip

component at places also. These faults are considered active because of association of observed

seismicity with these faults (Figure 7). The faults critical to the project are discussed below:

Project Area Faults

The main tectonic features controlling the seismic hazard for the Project are as follows:

a) Main Boundary Thrust

Main Boundary thrust is the main frontal thrust of the Himalayan range which runs along the

Himalayan arc for about 2500 km from Assam in the east to Kashmir in the west. Near the Project

site, it takes a northwest trend due to the syntaxial bend. Near it surface trace, it dips towards

northeast at steep angle but becomes sub-horizontal in the subsurface away from the surface trace.

Seeber et al.45 have shown that the series of large earthquakes which occurred along the Himalayan

range are probably related to slip along this sub-horizontal surface, termed as detachment. The MBT

is seismically active and have seismic potential to generate large earthquakes. The closest distance

of MBT from project site is 40 km towards northeast.

b) Riasi Thrust

Another important fault of the Himalayan front is the Riasi Thrust which is a branch of the MBT and

runs almost parallel to MBT for a distance of about 220 km. Lot of observed seismicity can be

associated with this fault. This fault passes at a distance of only 8 km northeast of the Project site.

Near the site, it has a trend of NW-SE, dipping towards northeast away from the site. Because of its

close association with the MBT and recorded seismicity, this fault is considered as an active tectonic

feature.

c) Jhelum Fault

This is a north-south trending left lateral strike-slip fault with steep dip towards east. Kazmi46 has

shown that this fault may extend from north of Muzaffarabad to near Jhelum towards south along

the axis of the syntaxial bend. The mapped length of this fault is, however, limited to about 20 km

only between Mangla and Kahuta (Figure 4). The alignment of observed seismicity along this fault

suggests that this fault may extend towards south up to the northeastern termination of Dil Jabba

thrust. A 50 km length of this fault is taken as active with nearest trace at 30 km west of the project

site.

45

Seeber L. et al; Seismicity and continental subduction in the Himalayan arc, in Zagros – Hindukush

Himalayas; Geodynamics Evolution, A.G.U. Geodynamics Services, Vol.3 (1981). 46

Farah, A., De Jong, K.A; Geodynamics of Pakistan: An introduction; Geodynamics of Pakistan, Geological

Survey of Pakistan (1979).



XXVIII

d) Dil Jabba Thrust:

Dil Jabba Thrust is a north east trending fault present near the eastern side of Salt Range with a

surface trace 86 km long. This thrust dips towards northwest and terminates on the western side of

River Jhelum. Some disturbance of Quaternary deposits has been reported near the surface trace of

this fault and epicenters of many earthquakes can be associated with this fault, therefore indicating

that this fault is seismically active. Its eastern termination is at a distance of about 35 km from the

Project site.

e) Kahuta Fault:

This fault is present north of Dil Jabba Thrust and runs parallel to it. This fault starts northwest of GT

Road and terminates near the axis of the syntaxis. It length is about 50 km. Because of its similarity

with Dil Jabba Thrust and observed seismicity of the area, this fault is also taken as active.

Seismic Hazard Evaluation

Both probabilistic as well as deterministic hazard evaluation procedures were employed for seismic

hazard analysis of the project in accordance with the ICOLD guidelines47.

Probabilistic Approach

Methodology

In probabilistic hazard evaluation method, the seismic activity of seismic source (line or area) is

specified by a recurrence relationship, defing the cumulative number of events per year versus the

magnitude. Distribution of earthquake is assumed to be uniform within the source zone and

independent of time48.

The principle of the analysis is to evaluate at the site of interest the probability of exceedence of a

ground motion parameter (e.g. acceleration) due to the occurrence of a strong event, at a certain

distance from the site. This approach combines the probability of exceedence of the earthquake size

(recurrence relationship), and probability on the distance from the epicenter to the site.

Each source zone is split into elementary zones at a constant distance from the site. Integration is

carried out within each zone by summing the effects of the various elementary zones taking into

account the attenuation effect with distance. Total hazard is obtained by adding the influence of

various sources. The results are expressed in terms of a ground motion parameter associated to the

total number of expected events per year (i.e. the inverse of the return period), or in terms of annual

hazard.

A seismic hazard model is developed based on findings of the seismotectonic synthesis. The seismic

hazard model relies upon the concept of seismotectonic zones. Each zone is defined as a zone with

homogenous seismic and tectonic features, inferred from geological, tectonic and seismic data.

47

International Commission on Large Dams (ICOLD); Guidelines for selecting seismic parameters for large dams, Paris (1989). 48

Cornell, C.A.; Engineering seismic risk analysis, Bull. Seism. Soc .Am., Vol.58, No.5 (1968).



XXIX

These zones are first defined, then a maximum earthquake and an earthquake recurrence equation

is elaborated for each of these source zones.

The seismic parameters attached to the various seismic zones are a recurrence relationship relating

the number of events for a specific period of time to the magnitude, the maximum earthquake

giving an upper bound of potential magnitude in the zone, and an attenuation relationship

representing the decrease of acceleration with distance.

Seismic Source Modeling

For the definition of seismic sources, either line (i.e. fault) or area sources can be used for modeling.

Because of uncertainty in the epicentral locations, it is difficult to relate the recorded earthquakes to

the faults present in the area and to develop recurrence relationship for each fault. The area around

the site was therefore divided into six seismic zones (area sources) based on their homogeneous

tectonic and seismic characteristics. These zones are MBT, Riasi, Hazara, Potwar, Salt Range and

Punjab seismic zones (Figure 9).

Figure 9: Seismic Source Zones

Each of these areas was assigned a maximum magnitude potential. As the shallow earthquakes are

of more concern to seismic hazard, the minimum depth of the earthquakes is taken as 5 km for all



XXX

sources except Punjab seismic zone where the minimum depth of earthquakes is taken as 30 km.

The source parameters used in probabilistic hazard analysis are given in Table 3.

Table 3: Source Parameters for Probabilistic Analysis

Source Zone Minimum

Magnitude M0

No. of Earthquakes

of Mb >= M0

Activity Rate

No. /Year

b-

valu

e

Maximum Potential

Magnitude Mb

Main Boundary

Thrust (MBT) 4.0 146 1.5052 0.81 8.3

Riasi 4.0 40 0.4124 1.03 7.5

Hazara 4.2 55 0.5670 1.28 7.0

Potwar 4.0 33 0.3402 0.93 7.0

Salt Range 4.2 7 0.0722 0.82 7.0

Punjab 4.0 35 0.3608 0.85 6.0

Magnitude–Frequency Relationship

A general equation that described earthquake recurrence may be expressed as follows:

N (m) = f (m, t) (1)

Where N (m) is the number of earthquakes with magnitude equal to or greater than m, and t is time

period

The simplest form of equation (1) that has been used in most engineering applications is the well

known Richter’s law which states that the cumulated number of earthquakes occurred in a given

period of time can be approximated by the relationship

log N(m) = a – b m (2)

Equation (2) assumes spatial and temporal independence of all earthquakes, i.e. it has the properties

of a Poisson model. Coefficient a is related to the total number of events occurred in the source zone

and depends on its area, while coefficient b represents the coefficient of proportionality between

log N(m) and the magnitude. Coefficients a and b can be derived from seismic data relative to the

source of interest.

The composite list of earthquakes given in Table 2 for the window 32.0oN to 35.0oN and 72.0oE to

76.0oE covering an area within about 200 km radius of the project provided the necessary data base

for the computation of b-value for each seismic source zone.

The seismic data from 1904-2002 contain magnitude values in the form of surface wave, body wave

or local magnitude scales. Since attenuation relationships are based on magnitudes of given type, a

single scale must be selected. All the magnitudes above 4 were therefore converted to body wave

(mb) by using the following equations as suggested by Ambraseys and Bommer49:

0.87 (mb) – 0.50 (Ms) = 1.91

49

Ambraseys N.N. & Bommer J.J.; Uniform magnitude re-evaluation for the strong motion database of Europe

and adjacent areas, European Earthquake Engineering, Vol.4 No.2 (1990).



XXXI

0.82 (Ml) – 0.58 (Ms) = 1.20

Where mb is body–wave magnitude, Ms is surface-wave magnitude and Ml is local magnitude.

The converted body wave magnitudes values are given is Table 2. Separate list of earthquakes

occurring within each seismic zone was extracted from the composite list through GIS software.

Magnitude-frequency plot was then drawn and b-values were calculated for each zone through

regression analysis of data. The b–values and activity rate for the six seismic zones used in the

probabilistic analysis are shown in Table 3.

Attenuation Relationships

Because of lack of sufficient strong–motion data covering a larger range of magnitudes and

distances, attenuation relationships for the South Asian region could not be developed. For

probabilistic hazard analysis, the attenuation equations of Boore et al.50, Idriss51, Sadigh52 and

Abrahamson-Silva53 have been used. As the Project is founded on rock, the average shear wave

velocity up to 30 meters depth was taken as 800 m/sec, which was observed at proposed Kalabagh

damsite for similar rock formations.

Results of Peak Ground Acceleration (PGA)

The probabilistic hazard analysis was carried out by using EZ-FRISK software developed by Risk

Engineering Inc. of Colorado, USA. The parameters for all the six seismic zones (area sources) given

in Table 3 were fed to the software. The results of the hazard analysis are presented in Figure 10 in

the form of total hazard at the Project site in terms of annual frequency of exceedence of peak

horizontal ground acceleration.

50

Boore et al.; Equations for estimating horizontal response spectra and peak acceleration from western north

American earthquakes: A summary of recent work, Seism. Res. Letters, Vol. 68 (1997). 51

Idriss, I. M.; Procedure for selecting earthquakes ground motions at rock sites, National Institute of

Standards and Technology, NIST GCR 93-625 (1993). 52

Sadigh K. et al.; Attenuation relationships for shallow crustal earthquakes based on California strong motion

data, Seism. Res. Letters, Vol. 68 (1997). 53

Abrahamson, N.A. and Silva W.J.; Empirical response spectral attenuation relations for shallow crustal

earthquakes, Seism. Res. Letters, Vol. 68 (1997).



XXXII

Figure 10: Total Hazard Plot

Deterministic Approach

Methodology

In the deterministic procedure, critical seismogenic sources, like capable fault, representing a threat

to the Project are identified and a maximum magnitude assigned to each of these faults. The

capability of the faults is ascertained through observation of historical and instrumental seismic data

and geological criteria such as the rupture length – magnitude relationship or fault movement -

magnitude relationship. The maximum seismic design parameter is obtained by considering the most

severe combination of maximum magnitude and minimum distance to the Project site,

independently of the return period.

Maximum Earthquake Potential

Table 4 gives the various active faults present around the Project site and their lengths. The

maximum rupture length of the faults has generally been taken as 50% of the total length. The Main

Boundary Thrust (MBT) is a long active feature extending all along the Himalayan front from Assam

to Kashmir, its maximum rupture length has been taken same as that observed in Kangra earthquake

of 1905.

The maximum potential magnitude of each of these faults (Table 4) was calculated on the basis of

fault rupture length and rupture area using various available relationships54 and a maximum

magnitude was selected accordingly for each of these active tectonic features as shown in Table 4.

54

Slemmons, D.B., Bodin, P., and Zhang Xiaoyi ; Determination of earthquake size from surface faulting events,

Proc . Seminar on Seismic Zonation, Guangzhou, China, State Seismological Bureau (Beijing) (1987).



XXXIII

Table 4: Maximum Potential Magnitudes of Critical Faults

Tectonic

Feature

Fault

Length

(Km)

Fault

Ruptur

e

Length

(Km)

Rupture Length Basis Rupture Area Basis

Selecte

d Max.

Mag.

Slem

mons

1982

Patwar

dhan et

al. 1975

Tocher,

Seed &

Housne

r

Wells

Coppe

rsmith

1994

Rupture Area Wells &

Coppers

mith

1994

Wyss

1979 Lgt.

(Km)

Wdt.

(Km)

Main

Boundar

y Thrust

(MBT)

1200 300 8.0 8.0 8.1 8.2 300 150 8.6 8.8 8.3

Riasi

Thrust 220 110 7.4 7.4 7.3 7.5 100 40 7.6 7.7 7.5

Jhelum

Fault 50 25 6.6 6.6 6.7 6.6 25 15 6.6 6.7 6.6

Dil Jabba

Thrust 86 43 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 43 15 6.8 7.0 7.0

Kahuta

Fault 50 25 6.6 6.6 6.7 6.6 25 15 6.6 6.7 6.6

Results of PGA

Horizontal Peak Ground Acceleration (PGA) at the project site induced by each seismic source was

computed considering that maximum earthquake can occur at the closest distance from the site. The

computed accelerations using several attenuation relationships of common use in engineering

practice are summarized in Table 5. This table shows that the maximum accelerations at the site are

caused by Riasi thrust being at a closest distance of 8 km from the site.

Table 5: Peak Horizontal Accelerations

Tectonic Feature

Max.

Magnitu

de

Closest

Distance

to Fault

(Km.)

Computed Accelerations (g) Median (50-percentile)

Boore,

Joyner &

Fumel

1997

Ambrasey

s et al.

1996

Idriss

1993

Sadigh et

al. 1997

Ambrasey

s &

Bommer

1991

Campbell

&

Bozorgnia

1993

Main Boundary

Thrust (MBT) 8.3 40 0.21 0.24 0.27 0.26 0.18 0.24

Riasi Thrust 7.5 8 0.41 0.59 0.53 0.57 0.49 0.43

Jhelum Fault 6.6 30 0.09 0.11 0.12 0.11 0.10 0.13

Dil Jabba Thrust 7.0 35 0.12 0.12 0.16 0.12 0.10 0.14

Kahuta Fault 6.6 40 0.08 0.08 0.11 0.09 0.07 0.09

Seismic Design Parameters

Design seismic parameters are selected herein on the basis of the results provided by probabilistic

and deterministic approaches, and in compliance with the recommendations of ICOLD55.

OBE Acceleration

According to ICOLD guidelines, “Operating Basis Earthquake (OBE) represents the level of ground

motion at the dam site at which only minor damage is acceptable. The dam, appurtenant structures

and equipment should remain functional and damage easily repairable from the occurrence of

55

International Commission on Large Dams (ICOLD); Guidelines for selecting seismic parameters for large dams, Paris (1989).



XXXIV

earthquake shaking not exceeding the OBE”. Because of its definition, the OBE is best determined by

using probabilistic procedures, for instance, such as specifying a 50% probability of not being

exceeded in 100 years, the corresponding return period is equal to 144 years. In any case the OBE

accelerations are significantly lower than those for MCE.

Figure 10 shows the results of probabilistic analysis for Gulpur Hydropower project obtained through

EZ-FRISK software as total hazard in terms of annual frequency of proximity exceedence of peak

ground accelerations. The source contribution analysis shows that maximum contribution to total

hazard is from Riasi source zone. Keeping in view the proximity of the most critical tectonic feature,

the recommended OBE acceleration for the project structures is 0.24g with a return period of 1000

years.

MCE Acceleration

According to ICOLD guidelines, “the MCE is the largest reasonable conceivable earthquake that

appears possible along a recognized fault or within a geographically defined tectonic province, under

the presently known or presumed tectonic framework”. This definition is inspired by that of Seed56:

“the largest rationally conceivable event that could occur in the tectonics environment in which the

project is located”. The MCE can be evaluated through a deterministic or a probabilistic procedure. If

the probabilistic seismic hazard evaluation is used, the MCE is linked to a very long return period for

this event.

For Gulpur Hydropower Project, the most critical tectonic feature controlling the MCE is the Riasi

thrust which is causing maximum accelerations at the project site (Table 5). Various attenuation

relationships give peak horizontal accelerations ranging from 0.41g to 0.59g. For the peak horizontal

acceleration associated with MCE, an average value of 0.50g is selected. This value is conservative

but selected in view of the proximity of the most critical tectonic structure from the project.

Conclusions and Recommendations

The seismic hazard evaluation for Gulpur Hydropower Project was carried out on the basis of

understanding of local tectonic environment, desk studies of faults in the vicinity of the Project and

synthesis of available seismological and tectonic data to evaluate the capability of active tectonic

features and assigning ground motion associated with them. The main conclusions based on the

present study are as follows:

• The project site is located close to the Riasi Thrust which is a branch of MBT, the main source

of destructive earthquakes in the Himalayan region.

• The critical surface tectonic features around the Project site are MBT and Riasi thrusts

towards east and Dil Jabba Thrust, Kahuta Fault and Jhelum Fault towards west of the

Project.

• Historical record shows that earthquakes in this region have caused maximum intensity of

VIII-IX several times in the past. The instrumentally recorded seismicity shows that faults in

this area are seismically active. Several epicenters of recorded earthquakes can be

associated with the known faults of the area.

56

Seed, H. B.; The selection of design earthquake for critical structures. Bull. Seis. Soc. Am., Vol.72 (1982)



XXXV

• Seismic hazard evaluation was carried out in accordance with the ICOLD guidelines for

selecting seismic design parameters using both probabilistic as well as deterministic

approaches.

• The probabilistic approach was used to select the Operating Basis Earthquake (OBE) using

the instrumentally recorded earthquake data for the last century. For the project life of 100

years, recommended OBE acceleration is 0.24g.

• Based upon the deterministic evaluation, peak horizontal ground acceleration of 0.50g

associated with Maximum Credible Earthquake (MCE) is recommended for the Project.



I

Annexure 2: Hydrometeorological Data

There are number of meteorological stations within and in the vicinity of the catchment area where

data is available for meteorological parameters. These include Sehr Kakota, Plandari, Mangla, Bagh,

Rawalakot and Khandar. However, Kotli is the representative station for which meteorological

parameters like temperature, precipitation, humidity and evaporation are available since 1952.

These climatic parameters are narrated in the following paragraphs.

Temperature

Record of maximum and minimum temperatures at Kotli starting from 1952 are available with

Pakistan Meteorological Department. Monthly mean maximum and minimum temperatures are

presented in Tables 1 and 2 respectively. These tables show that average of monthly mean

maximum temperature varies between 17.6°C in January to 38.4°C in June, whereas monthly mean

minimum temperature ranges between 4.8°C in January and 24.9°C in June.

Table 1: Monthly Mean Maximum Temperature at Kotli (oC)


1952 - - - - - - - 32.6 34.3 32.0 26.9 20.1 29.18

1953 16.1 21.2 27.1 31.9 37.2 39.6 33.9 32.5 32.2 30.4 25.0 22.5 29.13

1954 15.2 17.3 24.2 31.8 37.8 39.2 36.1 35.0 32.7 28.3 24.0 20.3 28.49

1955 17.4 22.6 25.5 29.3 32.6 40.8 36.2 30.7 32.2 29.4 26.1 19.1 28.49

1956 17.2 21.9 22.8 30.8 40.1 37.7 31.7 30.0 33.4 27.8 24.3 19.1 28.07

1957 14.6 18.3 22.5 25.6 31.7 37.1 37.4 33.1 32.2 29.4 23.1 17.3 26.86

1958 18.3 20.7 25.3 33.6 35.3 39.3 34.0 32.6 31.7 30.3 25.7 18.8 28.80

1959 16.7 16.7 25.7 30.8 33.7 39.7 32.4 32.5 31.6 30.2 23.2 20.2 27.78

1960 17.7 24.2 21.6 28.8 37.3 40.6 35.6 32.7 33.7 31.9 25.4 20.7 29.18

1961 17.6 16.8 24.8 28.4 35.5 38.8 34.0 33.4 32.3 29.6 22.6 18.4 27.68

1962 18.3 19.9 24.6 30.8 35.9 39.6 36.1 33.9 31.3 30.4 24.8 19.3 28.74

1963 20.3 23.9 23.6 27.7 33.2 39.3 36.1 33.1 32.4 31.8 24.1 21.7 28.93

1964 14.4 19.2 26.9 30.6 34.5 38.2 33.3 32.9 31.7 32.2 26.7 18.9 28.29

1965 18.6 16.4 23.8 24.4 32.8 38.2 35.5 32.9 34.6 31.6 25.5 20.9 27.93

1966 21.2 21.0 24.1 27.8 35.5 37.4 35.3 32.8 30.9 29.6 25.8 20.3 28.48

1967 18.7 21.8 23.4 28.7 34.6 39.4 34.3 32.2 32.8 29.5 23.9 18.4 28.14

1968 15.1 18.2 25.1 31.1 32.9 39.6 34.6 32.8 35.6 29.4 25.0 19.2 28.22

1969 17.4 18.8 28.4 29.4 32.8 40.1 35.0 33.2 33.2 30.6 27.4 23.4 29.14

1970 18.8 20.7 23.4 34.4 38.2 38.1 35.9 32.8 32.2 31.4 25.0 22.5 29.45

1971 18.7 21.3 27.4 32.2 35.2 35.3 32.7 32.3 33.3 31.7 25.7 21.3 28.93

1972 19.1 16.6 24.9 28.9 35.7 39.5 35.5 33.1 32.1 29.7 25.6 18.6 28.28

1973 16.3 20.9 23.2 32.5 36.1 37.2 33.3 37.6 32.6 30.2 26.1 20.0 28.83

1974 16.8 17.6 26.5 32.7 35.6 37.0 34.5 33.9 34.3 32.3 27.0 17.9 28.84

1975 17.3 18.2 23.6 31.0 35.4 37.9 33.2 32.7 32.1 32.2 26.1 21.5 28.43

1976 18.6 16.9 23.2 28.8 35.4 37.3 34.1 30.5 32.2 30.9 27.3 20.7 27.99

1977 16.5 22.9 30.3 30.1 32.8 36.3 32.5 32.3 33.4 31.2 27.2 20.2 28.81

1978 17.6 19.5 21.5 31.1 39.7 38.1 31.5 32.6 32.9 32.1 25.0 22.8 28.70

1979 20.3 19.3 22.1 32.7 33.1 38.8 34.6 33.7 33.6 33.0 27.2 21.4 29.15

1980 17.4 19.2 22.2 32.9 38.3 38.4 33.7 33.7 33.9 31.7 26.0 20.3 28.98

1981 16.4 18.9 21.2 30.9 35.6 38.0 32.7 33.0 32.6 30.5 25.3 21.4 28.04

1982 17.8 15.9 19.1 28.3 30.7 37.1 36.1 32.1 33.3 30.1 23.9 18.3 26.89

1983 16.0 18.6 21.0 25.7 32.2 36.0 34.5 32.5 32.5 29.4 26.2 20.4 27.08

1984 18.8 17.5 27.0 30.2 39.8 39.4 32.6 32.3 31.2 30.7 24.2 18.9 28.55

1985 17.4 23.3 28.5 32.2 39.1 40.7 33.4 33.0 33.1 29.4 23.3 18.6 29.33

1986 18.7 19.2 22.1 29.9 32.3 37.7 32.8 31.7 32.8 29.2 25.2 18.9 27.54

1987 20.4 21.0 23.5 30.8 29.3 37.1 37.3 34.9 34.1 29.8 28.5 22.8 29.13

1988 20.2 22.4 23.2 32.8 38.7 38.0 29.4 32.1 32.3 30.0 25.7 20.2 28.75

1989 17.4 19.0 23.5 29.1 35.7 38.3 34.2 32.5 34.3 31.6 25.2 19.2 28.33



II


1990 19.3 18.7 21.5 28.4 37.1 38.7 33.9 32.1 32.5 29.6 26.4 18.8 28.08

1991 17.0 18.5 23.6 26.6 34.1 37.8 36.7 33.0 31.8 30.3 25.3 19.6 27.86

1992 16.2 19.2 22.5 29.1 33.2 37.7 33.8 32.5 31.5 30.3 24.9 20.5 27.62

1993 16.0 22.7 21.8 31.2 37.6 38.5 33.2 36.1 32.8 33.2 27.1 22.9 29.43

1994 18.5 19.0 27.2 29.0 36.5 39.2 32.7 31.7 32.8 30.2 25.8 17.8 28.37

1995 16.6 18.5 23.4 27.0 35.9 40.1 32.1 31.6 32.6 29.5 24.8 17.6 27.48

Average 17.65 19.64 24.11 30.00 35.27 38.44 34.15 32.85 32.76 30.56 25.44 20.04 28.42

Table 2: Monthly Mean Minimum Temperature at Kotli (oC)


1952 - - - - - - - 22.6 22.4 17.9 10.2 5.2 15.66

1953 4.8 9.6 15.3 18.7 24.1 26.4 24.8 23.1 21.6 16.7 10.1 7.3 16.88

1954 4.9 8.8 12.4 18.7 23.7 26.2 24.4 24.3 22.6 15.5 10.8 4.9 16.43

1955 4.8 7.8 14.8 16.4 20.7 27.0 24.2 23.3 22.1 17.0 9.8 6.3 16.18

1956 5.6 7.5 12.7 18.3 26.1 25.8 23.6 22.7 22.8 17.0 8.9 5.7 16.39

1957 5.0 6.3 11.6 15.2 19.7 24.0 25.8 23.6 21.3 16.9 11.4 6.8 15.63

1958 6.6 7.0 13.1 19.8 22.6 26.2 24.8 22.9 22.3 16.9 8.9 7.1 16.52

1959 5.4 6.6 12.8 17.8 22.0 26.2 23.2 - 23.2 18.3 10.2 5.9 15.60

1960 4.4 9.6 11.3 16.1 23.2 26.8 24.7 24.5 22.2 16.7 9.4 4.3 16.10

1961 5.7 6.1 12.6 16.9 21.9 25.7 24.9 24.3 23.2 16.1 9.5 4.0 15.91

1962 3.8 8.3 12.7 18.5 22.8 25.9 25.7 23.7 21.1 16.1 9.8 5.1 16.13

1963 2.5 9.1 12.1 16.7 20.7 25.4 24.8 24.0 21.3 18.6 11.9 5.2 16.03

1964 3.8 6.9 13.2 17.6 20.7 25.8 24.2 24.6 21.8 16.3 8.5 6.2 15.80

1965 6.5 7.6 11.4 15.0 19.8 24.9 24.6 22.5 21.9 18.4 12.1 4.2 15.74

1966 4.1 9.6 12.5 16.2 21.6 26.1 24.2 23.3 20.6 16.7 9.6 3.2 15.64

1967 3.6 9.2 11.3 16.4 20.9 26.4 24.6 23.5 21.8 16.0 10.8 7.1 15.97

1968 5.1 6.1 11.8 17.2 20.3 25.9 24.7 23.1 22.7 16.2 10.2 5.6 15.74

1969 4.3 7.8 14.5 17.1 20.9 25.1 24.4 24.2 21.4 17.9 11.4 4.3 16.11

1970 4.7 7.7 12.4 20.1 24.2 25.2 24.9 23.9 21.9 18.2 9.3 5.1 16.47

1971 2.9 7.2 13.7 18.9 22.2 24.4 23.9 23.7 20.6 16.7 10.1 4.0 15.69

1972 5.1 5.8 12.8 16.5 22.1 25.6 24.2 23.0 20.6 16.4 11.2 6.9 15.85

1973 4.9 8.9 11.7 18.6 23.8 26.1 24.8 23.9 22.5 16.3 10.1 4.7 16.36

1974 4.3 6.3 13.5 19.7 22.2 22.3 24.5 23.9 21.6 15.7 9.2 6.4 15.80

1975 6.0 6.6 11.6 17.8 21.3 24.5 23.3 23.5 20.9 17.3 8.3 4.9 15.50

1976 5.6 7.7 11.5 16.0 21.7 23.5 24.8 22.4 21.3 16.8 9.7 4.4 15.45

1977 4.5 6.4 14.0 17.8 20.0 24.2 24.2 23.7 21.3 17.9 12.3 7.3 16.13

1978 5.1 7.7 10.7 17.7 24.6 26.1 24.1 23.7 21.1 17.1 11.2 4.9 16.17

1979 5.5 7.6 10.5 19.0 20.3 24.9 25.3 23.0 20.0 16.7 12.6 7.5 16.08

1980 6.5 8.8 11.4 18.3 23.7 25.1 24.1 23.5 20.8 17.3 10.8 6.3 16.38

1981 5.7 8.7 11.5 17.6 22.4 24.5 24.5 23.8 20.5 16.5 9.9 3.6 15.77

1982 5.2 6.6 9.8 15.9 18.8 23.5 24.5 23.4 20.2 16.9 11.2 7.4 15.28

1983 4.4 6.6 10.3 14.6 19.9 22.2 22.5 23.8 22.1 15.0 8.7 4.4 14.54

1984 2.4 5.7 13.5 17.2 24.1 26.3 23.5 23.8 19.8 14.7 9.3 5.1 15.45

1985 6.1 7.2 13.2 16.8 21.0 24.3 23.3 20.9 17.6 11.6 6.2 3.6 14.32

1986 0.2 3.2 6.5 12.7 15.3 20.6 20.0 20.8 20.5 16.1 10.7 5.6 12.68

1987 4.6 7.4 12.2 16.7 18.1 23.0 24.1 23.6 21.6 15.6 8.6 4.6 15.01

1988 6.7 7.9 12.0 19.1 24.5 25.2 24.3 23.6 21.8 15.7 9.9 5.4 16.34

1989 4.2 6.3 11.5 15.3 21.0 24.0 23.9 22.6 21.5 15.7 10.5 6.3 15.23

1990 7.2 7.5 9.9 15.7 22.7 25.1 23.9 23.6 22.8 15.2 10.1 5.2 15.74

1991 4.4 7.8 11.5 14.8 20.3 23.6 24.5 23.6 21.5 14.0 7.9 6.4 15.03

1992 6.0 6.3 10.8 14.4 18.8 23.0 23.8 24.2 20.6 15.4 9.3 6.6 14.93

1993 4.2 8.0 9.2 16.6 - - 23.4 23.6 21.1 14.7 9.7 4.2 13.47

1994 5.8 6.5 9.5 11.7 15.3 25.1 24.4 24.4 20.3 14.6 9.5 6.4 14.46

1995 3.3 6.6 10.6 14.8 21.3 25.5 24.2 23.8 20.8 16.1 8.3 6.1 15.12

Average 4.80 7.37 11.90 16.90 21.46 24.94 24.20 23.44 21.40 16.35 9.96 5.49 15.63



III

Precipitation

Monthly rainfall data at Kotli is given in Table 3 which shows an average precipitation of 1,237

mm/year over the period of 1952-2012. Minimum rainfall occurs in November with an average of 24

mm while the maximum rainfall months are July and August with the average values of 266 mm and

270 mm respectively.

Table 3: Mean Monthly Rainfall at Kotli (mm)

Year Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Total

1960 62.0 1.5 194.3 47.2 7.6 12.4 349.8 301.8 47.8 0.0 5.3 51.6 1081.3

1961 152.7 94.7 49.0 142.5 34.0 74.2 366.5 250.7 229.6 96.8 29.0 28.2 1547.9

1962 16.0 118.4 60.2 82.5 20.3 56.6 202.7 286.5 129.8 3.6 70.1 70.4 1117.1

1963 0.0 26.2 109.2 136.1 59.4 90.4 238.5 156.0 99.3 7.6 49.5 45.7 1017.9

1964 233.9 29.5 28.7 90.7 44.2 26.9 338.3 278.4 105.9 0.0 10.9 75.2 1262.6

1965 111.0 189.5 77.0 165.4 123.7 29.5 281.7 131.1 10.2 14.0 58.2 7.1 1198.4

1966 0.0 181.6 107.9 57.7 118.4 83.1 321.1 272.3 178.6 120.9 0.5 48.8 1490.9

1967 0.0 127.5 169.9 93.2 30.0 21.8 265.7 317.5 127.8 51.1 11.4 196.1 1412.0

1968 140.2 106.2 80.3 69.3 119.1 54.1 195.3 292.0 104.3 79.0 47.5 39.1 1326.4

1969 26.4 83.1 105.4 108.7 63.0 45.5 267.2 239.0 63.2 40.1 0.0 0.0 1041.6

1970 69.6 48.0 56.1 16.0 29.2 165.4 146.6 356.9 203.5 32.3 0.0 8.1 1131.7

1971 13.7 91.2 11.4 99.8 72.6 243.3 219.2 337.6 17.3 7.9 40.6 5.8 1160.4

1972 84.3 119.4 82.3 51.1 37.6 62.0 326.9 333.5 110.7 31.2 21.3 73.7 1334.0

1973 110.7 100.1 101.6 41.4 69.3 91.7 341.4 466.6 133.4 27.2 0.0 42.9 1526.3

1974 95.4 78.2 50.0 25.4 16.3 125.0 234.8 201.4 43.0 4.9 0.0 53.4 927.8

1975 65.0 97.4 78.5 35.2 62.6 53.5 305.4 370.9 160.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 1228.6

1976 116.9 231.3 124.1 95.7 35.3 83.7 481.5 547.5 149.9 55.4 0.0 8.0 1929.3

1977 175.8 5.9 0.0 96.8 119.7 171.1 279.7 305.8 80.2 54.2 50.1 67.4 1406.7

1978 82.1 31.1 256.6 38.3 16.7 204.0 350.7 510.4 80.2 2.5 52.3 0.0 1624.9

1979 86.3 97.5 203.1 35.8 45.9 62.8 81.5 316.1 55.8 11.4 35.3 33.8 1065.3

1980 65.5 68.4 67.4 17.8 21.3 180.0 105.4 107.1 103.2 55.0 32.2 30.5 853.8

1981 152.4 161.4 328.0 14.0 53.6 21.0 291.4 112.6 49.9 10.2 4.6 0.0 1199.1

1982 106.6 128.9 270.6 252.2 86.0 48.2 189.6 269.4 73.4 33.0 85.6 50.7 1594.2

1983 108.5 101.3 179.7 274.0 53.9 37.6 323.5 490.2 121.9 93.8 0.8 4.6 1789.8

1984 2.0 88.0 67.5 53.6 28.9 85.0 244.6 476.2 86.6 0.0 45.5 39.2 1217.1

1985 71.7 16.3 14.0 65.1 55.4 4.8 453.8 186.0 117.0 72.1 0.0 200.7 1256.9

1986 14.0 125.4 198.6 122.1 30.9 52.2 240.2 216.2 55.0 64.3 93.7 115.8 1328.4

1987 8.6 111.9 100.0 42.1 133.2 41.9 94.2 156.4 59.4 46.8 0.0 0.0 794.5

1988 18.6 102.9 175.0 25.6 6.5 126.0 711.0 301.8 81.6 12.2 0.0 115.2 1676.4

1989 116.8 27.3 141.9 47.4 26.9 45.8 345.2 142.7 47.2 46.2 45.9 61.5 1094.8

1990 35.7 185.5 266.5 36.3 11.4 69.9 247.1 352.7 66.4 28.2 15.7 309.3 1624.7

1991 23.9 127.5 98.3 171.8 20.3 86.7 212.1 263.2 168.8 2.4 0.0 59.3 1234.3

1992 211.4 121.5 236.8 61.6 73.5 45.5 176.5 228.1 212.1 42.0 46.1 9.0 1464.1

1993 63.2 60.0 187.4 33.0 3.0 61.0 169.4 94.0 77.2 1.0 47.0 0.0 796.2

1994 56.2 73.6 56.6 79.9 65.0 161.6 500.0 305.0 25.0 30.0 0.0 152.0 1504.9

1995 66.6 154.0 87.6 77.2 14.0 103.0 387.0 412.5 41.9 45.0 59.0 1.3 1449.1

1996 81.6 126.0 130.7 35.0 71.0 144.2 78.0 337.6 40.8 49.0 2.0 5.0 1100.9

2003 13.7 279.3 85.1 26.6 18.5 104.3 178.8 149.2 99.8 7.1 26.9 26.9 1016.2

2004 137.8 23.2 5.6 78.5 75.2 67.4 165.3 197.5 23.4 38.9 24.9 43.7 881.4

2005 98.1 151.7 96.8 3.8 18.1 21.1 193.5 89.9 51.7 15.8 2.0 0.0 742.5

2006 91.9 50.5 67.1 17.8 63.4 139.5 381.0 308.3 72.6 32.8 57.3 128.7 1410.9

2007 1.3 160.3 247.7 21.1 47.2 100.8 161.3 188.2 64.3 0.0 7.1 4.1 1003.4

2008 156.7 60.2 10.7 120.7 55.6 244.9 265.2 134.4 76.7 68.8 2.5 101.6 1298.0

2009 62.2 97.8 52.6 46.0 5.8 34.5 132.3 142.0 9.7 2.8 33.5 5.6 624.8

2010 21.6 122.2 69.6 15.2 65.8 65.3 304.5 182.1 53.1 55.1 4.3 18.3 977.1

2011 8.9 120.1 152.4 97.8 78.2 132.6 140.2 196.1 217.4 13.2 1.3 0.0 1158.2



IV

Year Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Total

2012 97.3 50.8 11.7 79.0 17.5 39.9 217.4 417.1 168.9 7.6 12.2 91.5 1210.9

Average 75.2 101.2 113.9 73.3 49.5 85.6 266.0 270.8 93.5 32.2 24.1 51.7 1236.9

Evaporation

Evaporation data for a number of stations is available including Kotli, Mangla, Sehr Kakota, Khandar,

Plandri, Bagh and Palak. However, reservoir evaporation given in Mangla Dam Raising Study is

preferred because it has been worked out from the existing reservoir and as such includes all the

losses and gains including evaporation. The data is therefore considered representative of the

proposed Gulpur Reservoir and hence adopted in the Study. This data is presented in Table 4. This

table depicts that mean monthly evaporation varies between 46 mm in December to 229 mm in

June, while mean annual evaporation is 1,427 mm.

Table 4: Mangla Reservoir Observed Lake Evaporation (mm)

Year Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Annual

1983 - - - - - - - - 108 86 65 48 -

1984 59 68 150 187 327 242 110 108 91 93 57 43 1,534

1985 41 82 137 167 287 281 153 113 117 90 62 45 1,575

1986 45 59 93 157 198 244 142 109 118 82 55 33 1,333

1987 44 55 79 154 144 205 186 156 124 94 70 44 1,354

1988 56 80 108 197 275 232 142 117 106 91 46 37 1,487

1989 46 71 100 157 234 224 156 113 121 110 62 36 1,432

1990 52 52 91 151 215 224 154 120 99 85 61 39 1,341

1991 41 58 91 115 190 227 210 142 130 104 70 51 1,428

1992 57 66 131 144 194 211 177 153 76 0 45 40 1,294

1993 60 74 94 126 178 191 165 152 123 94 66 58 1,382

1994 62 65 125 157 209 260 134 103 108 92 46 29 1,391

1995 39 56 102 116 221 235 128 112 133 107 62 44 1,357

1996 60 64 94 181 230 175 180 105 115 103 70 52 1,427

1997 37 71 119 125 197 220 178 121 123 85 53 86 1,415

1998 45 114 91 152 235 272 170 125 104 100 66 38 1,511

1999 38 57 117 203 277 252 156 117 104 90 160 45 1,614

2000 39 62 116 201 226 196 130 119 92 92 65 54 1,390

Average 48 68 108 158 226 229 157 123 111 89 66 46 1,427

Streamflow and Sediment Data

A stream gauging station on Punch River is being maintained at Rehman Bridge by SWHP of WAPDA

since 1960. Measurements include stream flows and suspended sediment concentrations. Rehman

Bridge Gauging Station is located just downstream of Bann Nullah about 5 Km south east of Kotli

Town. Figure 1 shows that between Rehman Bridge gauge site and proposed weir site, there are no

major tributary/nallahs joining the main river, thus discharge and sediment data available at Rehman

Bridge gauge is considered directly applicable for the Project. The data have been collected up to the

year 2002 and used in the present study.



V

Figure 1: Catchment and Drainage of Poonch River



I

Annexure 3: Water Availability Study

The objective of water availability study is to assess the magnitude of water for power generation

during different periods of the year. This is done by formulating a 10 daily/ monthly time series from

the daily mean flow data recorded at Rehman Bridge for the period of record from 1960 to 2002.

Consistency of Data

Before a data set is used for formulation of a time series, it is required that consistency of the record

is checked. For this purpose, Basic Screening Procedure of Hydrological Data recommended by

Dahmen and Hall57 has been adopted using a statistical approach to test for absence of trend and for

stability of mean and variance of the mean annual flows. From the analysis, it was found that there is

no trend and mean as well as variance of annual flows are stable. This shows that the time series of

flows recorded at Rehman Bridge is consistent and homogeneous with no obvious trend on mean

annual basis.

Inflow Time Series

Streamflow record of Punch River at Rehman Bridge for the period 1960 to 2011 available in the

form of mean daily flows has been used for formulation of inflow time series. Mean monthly

discharges computed from the mean daily flows are given in Table 1, which shows a minimum value

of 12 cumecs observed in January 1966 and maximum value of 830 cumecs in September 1992.

Mean monthly flows (in cumecs) are graphically shown in Figure 1 and monthly runoff (in MCM) in

Figure 2. These figures depict that mean monthly flows vary between 41 cumecs (106 MCM) in

November to 264 cumecs (963 MCM) in August.

Table 1: Summary of Mean Monthly Flows of Punch River at Rehman Bridge (1960-2002)



1960 38 39 161 113 81 56 330 233 74 30 20 16 100 3,160 2.56

1961 48 97 85 208 75 111 297 238 324 73 51 40 137 4,327 3.51

1962 22 53 78 159 83 70 155 143 122 45 33 32 83 2,617 2.12

1963 23 35 123 138 142 122 212 267 85 19 20 30 102 3,220 2.61

1964 156 85 107 138 87 77 331 361 126 43 21 33 131 4,146 3.36

1965 55 159 129 293 194 146 224 147 61 26 21 15 122 3,851 3.12

1966 12 94 153 143 141 138 239 286 354 120 35 29 145 4,587 3.72

1967 23 69 216 191 127 104 226 254 124 49 29 104 127 4,002 3.24

1968 115 145 160 140 91 103 171 272 68 55 42 26 116 3,666 2.97

1969 27 71 165 137 166 107 189 254 62 52 27 18 107 3,365 2.73

1970 26 33 76 73 53 76 114 297 257 54 23 17 92 2,898 2.35

1971 14 30 42 67 70 186 206 289 84 30 28 21 89 2,817 2.28

1972 27 85 137 106 98 72 181 196 121 60 36 43 97 3,067 2.49

1973 110 144 267 157 97 116 196 456 149 53 26 24 150 4,727 3.83

1974 35 74 101 76 53 119 158 111 45 26 15 17 69 2,180 1.77

1975 17 69 138 132 109 98 213 490 239 55 30 20 135 4,255 3.45

1976 52 190 217 197 151 147 355 665 177 60 31 25 190 5,996 4.86

1977 68 57 61 101 119 119 409 281 141 84 51 66 131 4,120 3.34

1978 74 95 362 201 163 166 452 456 155 67 75 35 193 6,086 4.93

1979 24 68 280 144 91 107 120 219 137 62 52 44 113 3,555 2.88

1980 59 98 168 110 97 147 133 150 75 44 45 33 97 3,054 2.48

57

Dahmen E.R. & M.J. Hall (1990): “Screening of Hydrologic Data”, International Institute for Land Reclamation

and Improvement (ILRI), Publication 49.



II



1981 74 181 315 217 130 80 293 202 52 36 26 20 136 4,274 3.47

1982 23 53 270 265 190 120 197 324 59 41 53 42 137 4,321 3.50

1983 65 83 283 396 221 143 226 303 194 57 46 25 171 5,380 4.36

1984 20 30 57 104 68 100 130 375 234 63 40 35 105 3,320 2.69

1985 49 54 56 80 78 69 231 219 63 63 45 98 93 2,923 2.37

1986 46 99 304 257 169 148 224 319 86 72 114 171 168 5,302 4.30

1987 70 94 169 160 214 164 110 119 58 79 38 33 109 3,441 2.79

1988 33 50 234 127 71 75 633 353 112 65 45 51 155 4,910 3.98

1989 75 46 142 169 110 91 271 198 84 54 44 42 111 3,508 2.84

1990 54 108 338 180 142 106 162 271 115 49 29 164 144 4,535 3.68

1991 91 193 256 339 120 113 163 124 161 49 30 31 139 4,372 3.54

1992 113 140 277 325 217 149 183 364 830 220 162 144 260 8,215 6.66

1993 143 93 246 189 162 193 324 128 102 36 43 26 141 4,440 3.60

1994 36 68 81 180 141 133 485 427 190 69 41 110 165 5,192 4.21

1995 71 132 180 209 136 134 484 352 103 46 33 35 160 5,051 4.10

1996 77 186 357 203 173 263 193 378 115 70 33 25 173 5,469 4.43

1997 25 26 104 172 100 125 213 482 198 112 86 88 145 4,579 3.71

1998 67 282 380 340 161 94 194 98 72 35 24 22 147 4,621 3.75

1999 54 61 92 84 59 58 108 168 122 54 39 25 77 2,430 1.97

2000 50 73 64 76 75 80 195 277 102 44 31 29 92 2,901 2.35

2001 22 21 27 56 65 133 231 219 93 39 28 20 80 2,524 2.05

2002 33 63 94 80 77 103 81 210 123 39 25 21 79 2,490 2.00

2003 17 293 268 176 63 73 122 106 111 36 26 30 109 3,428 2.78

2004 67 83 53 53 84 70 80 113 59 52 36 42 66 2,086 1.69

2005 64 250 284 191 124 112 199 90 74 53 43 32 126 3,958 3.21

2006 64 89 108 106 116 89 206 346 161 44 68 187 133 4,187 3.40

2007 49 80 402 234 161 156 167 127 74 32 22 19 127 4,018 3.26

2008 77 73 92 145 104 203 193 283 103 48 34 84 120 3,794 3.08

2009 61 135 95 155 107 71 121 140 90 37 30 22 88 2,782 2.26

2010 19 157 140 97 121 98 241 355 128 61 30 24 123 3,868 3.14

2011 25 138 210 203 147 111 109 187 266 105 74 43 134 4,239 3.44

Maximum 156 293 402 396 221 263 633 665 830 220 162 187 260 8215 6.66

Minimum 12 21 27 53 53 56 80 90 45 19 15 15 66 2086 1.69

Runoff 144 272 375 343 168 207 553 575 785 201 147 172 194 6129 4.97

Mean 53 100 177 165 119 116 225 264 141 57 41 47 126 3966 3.22

Remarks: Cumecs: Cubic Meters per Second MCM: Million Cubic Meters MAF:Million Acre-Foot

Figure 1: Mean Monthly Flows of Punch River at Rehman Bridge (1960-2011)

0

50

100

150

200

250

300


Dis

char

ge (

cum

ecs

)

Month



III

Figure 2: Mean Monthly Runoff of Punch River at Rehman Bridge (1960-2011)

Figure 3: Mean Annual Flows of Punch River at Rehman Bridge (1960-2011)

Mean annual flows also presented in Table 1 and Figure 3 show mean annual value of 128 cumecs

with corresponding runoff of 4,044 MCM (3.28 MAF). The minimum mean annual flow of 69 cumecs

(2,180 MCM) was recorded in 1974 while the maximum mean annual flow of 260 cumecs (8,215

MCM) observed in 1992.

Flow Duration Curve

For possible capacity sizing of a power plant a flow duration data is required to represent time

variability of water discharge. A flow duration curve represents relationship between magnitude and

frequency of daily, 10 daily or monthly stream flows for a particular river basin at a particular

0

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900


Ru

no

ff (

cum

ecs

)

Month

0

50

100

150

200

250

300

19

60

19

62

19

64

19

66

19

68

19

70

19

72

19

74

19

76

19

78

19

80

19

82

19

84

19

86

19

88

19

90

19

92

19

94

19

96

19

98

20

00

20

02

20

04

20

06

20

08

20

10

Year

ly F

low

(C

um

ecs)

Annual Flow Mean Flow for Last 50 Years Maximum Minimum



IV

location. This provides estimation of cumulative percentage of time a given streamflow was equaled

or exceeded over the given period of time.

In the present study, a flow duration curve has been prepared using 10 daily mean flow time series.

The flow duration curve thus developed is presented in Figure 4. It can be seen from the curve that

flow has following distribution:

Time Exceeded 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90%

Flow m3/s 279 180 142 115 92 71 55 40 26

Figure 4: Flow Duration Curve of Punch River at Rehman Bridge (1960-2002)

0100200300400500600700800900

100011001200130014001500

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

Dis

char

ge (

cum

ecs)

Percentage Time Flow Equelled or Exceeded



I

Annexure 4: Environmental Monitoring Report

1. Introduction

Sustainable Solutions Pvt. Ltd hired the services of SGS Pakistan (Pvt.) Ltd. to conduct an

environmental monitoring at its project sites Azad Jammu & Kashmir. A comprehensive

environmental monitoring was conducted at mutually agreed sampling points in the project area.

This report is prepared on the basis of assessment conducted at project site. Field survey was carried

out on August 26-30, 2013 for ambient air quality monitoring, meteorological conditions, noise level

monitoring, lux monitoring and sampling & analysis of drinking water & soil samples from mutually

agreed sampling points.

1.1 Study Objectives

The objective of the study is to:

• Comply with the regulatory requirements of the project;

• Monitor air, water, soil, noise level and lux at periodic intervals in project area;

• Ensure effective implementation of EMP.

1.2 Scope of Services

Scope of services covered following main components:

• Ambient Air Quality Monitoring

• Weather Conditions

• Noise Level Monitoring

• Lux Monitoring

• Drinking Water & Soil Sampling & Analysis

1.2.1 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring

In accordance to USEPA National Ambient Air Quality standards (NAAQS) the following priority

pollutants were monitored in the ambient air.

• Carbon Monoxide (CO)

• Oxides of Nitrogen (NOX)

• Sulphur Dioxide (SO2)

• Particulate Matter (PM10)

In addition to above mentioned parameters, the meteorological conditions were also monitored in

order to interpret ambient air quality. For the purpose following parameters would be monitored:

• Ambient Temperature

• Relative Humidity

• Barometric Pressure

• Wind Direction

• Wind Velocity



II

1.2.2 Noise Level Monitoring

Noise level using portable digital sound meter was monitored at same location where the ambient

air quality was monitored. The duration of monitoring was according to the standard at sampling

points.

1.2.3 Instant Lux Monitoring

Light monitoring was conducted at only one point i.e near community area.

1.2.4 Drinking Water & Soil Sampling

Twenty five drinking water and five soil samples were collected from mutually agreed sampling

points and submitted to SGS labs for analysis according to parameters as per contract.

Analysis Parameters and Analysis Methods:

The collected drinking water samples were microbiologically and chemically analyzed according to

APHA and USEPA methods.

Table 1a: Drinking Water Analysis Parameters & Methods (Microbiological Analysis)

Sr.# Parameters Procedure Reference

01 Total Coli form APHA-9222 B

02 Total Colony Count APHA-9215 B

03 Faecal E. Coli APHA-9222 D

04 Faecal Streptococci/Enterococci APHA-9230 C

Table 1b: Drinking Water Analysis Parameters & Methods (Chemical Analysis)

Sr.# Parameter Method

Technique Reference

01 pH Electrometric APHA-4500H+ B

02 Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) Gravimetric APHA-2540 C

03 Total Hardness Gravimetric APHA-2540 C

04 Chloride (Cl) Titration APHA-4500CI- B

05 Alkalinity, Total as CaCO3 Titration APHA-2320 B

06 Sulphate (SO4) Gravimetric APHA-4500-SO4 C

07 Sodium (Na) AAS/ICP-OES APHA-3111/3120 B

08 Potassium (K) AAS/ICP-OES APHA-3111/3120 B

09 Iron (Fe) as Total AAS/ICP-OES APHA-3111/3120 B

10 *Arsenic (As) AAS/ICP-OES APHA-3111/3120 B

11 Lead (Pb) AAS/ICP-OES APHA-3111/3120 B

Table 2: Soil Analysis Parameters & Methods (Chemical Analysis)


Technique Reference

01 Sulphate (SO4)2-

Gravimetric In-House

02 Solids, Total dissolved (TDS) Gravimetric In-House

03 Cadmium (Cd) AAS/ICP-OES USEPA 3050 B

04 Total Phosphorous Colorimetric Based on APHA-4500 P C

05 Chromium Total (Cr) AAS/ICP-OES USEPA 3050 B



III


Technique Reference

06 Iron (Fe) as Total AAS/ICP-OES USEPA 3050 B

07 Aluminium (Al) AAS/ICP-OES USEPA 3050 B

08 Lead (Pb) AAS/ICP-OES USEPA 3050 B

09 Total Nitrogen Instrumental Based on APHA-4500 Norg B

Test conducted at Sub Contracted Lab SGS Karachi.

APHA= American Public Health Association

1.3 Schedule

Detailed Environmental monitoring was conducted at the mutually agreed sites in the project area

from August 26-30, 2013.



IV

2. Methodology

Following is the brief description of methodology adopted for this environmental assessment:

2.1 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring

Ambient air quality of the selected locations was monitored for the estimation of carbon monoxide,

nitrogen dioxide, sulphur dioxide and particulate matter concentrations.

2.1.1 Carbon Monoxide

Carbon monoxide at the project site was monitored using automatic portable analyzer.

Measurement range of the analyzer is 1-100 ppm. Continuous data was recorded for duration of 8

hrs and hourly average is reported.

2.1.2 Nitrogen Dioxide

A measured volume of air is bubbled through a solution sample for duration of 8 hrs. The nitrogen

dioxide absorbed in the solution is analyzed by colorimeter for NO2 concentration in ambient air.

2.1.3 Sulphur Dioxide

A measured volume of air is bubbled through a solution sample for 8 hrs duration. The solution after

bubbling is analyzed by spectrophotometer and amount of SO2 is calculated.

Table 3: Methodology of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring

Air Pollutant Monitoring Technique Method Measurement Range

Lowest

Detection

Limit

Carbon monoxide (CO)

Automatic Potable Analyzer 40 CFR 50, App. C (US-

EPA) 1 -100 ppm 1 ppm

Sulfur Dioxide (SO2)

Calorimetric Improved West & Gaeke (Sod. Tetrachloro Mercurate) Method

40 CFR 50, App. A (US-

EPA)

0.01-0.4 ppm 25 ug/m

3 to 1000 ug/m

3

0.01 ppm

Nitrogen Dioxide (NO2)

Griess Saltzman Method ISO 6768 0.01-0.4 ppm 25

ug/m3 to 1000 ug/m3

0.01 ppm

Particulate Matter (PM10)

High Volume PM10 Sampler 40 CFR 50, App. J (US-

EPA) 2 - 750 ug/m

3 2 ug/m

3

2.1.4 Particulate Matter (PM10)

Particulate matter concentration in terms of PM10 was monitored in the ambient air with the help

of high Volume PM10 sampler. Measurement range of the equipment is 2-750 u.g/m3 with lowest

detection limit of 2 ug/m3. PM 10 sampling was conducted for 24 hours at mutually agreed sampling

locations with the help of fibreglass filters. The filters were properly stored and placed in the vacuum

desiccators and transported to SGS Pakistan (Pvt) Limited Environmental Laboratory for estimation

of PM10.

2.2 Meteorological Conditions



V

In addition to the mutually agreed parameters for ambient air quality, weather conditions were also

monitored continuously for 24 hours with the help of mobile weather station. Selection of sampling

points was made considering the wind direction at the mutually agreed sampling site.

2.3 Noise Level Monitoring

24 hours noise level monitoring was conducted at mutually agreed locations using portable Digital

Sound Meter. Sound Pressure Level (SPL) measurements (in dB) were performed utilizing Sound

Level Meter (European Class 1 Standard) complying with standards IEC60051 TYPE 1 IE60804 TYPE 1

JIS C 1505 in accordance to SGS Standard Operating Procedures (SOP).The Noise level monitoring

was conducted at mutually agreed monitoring points.

2.4 Instant Lux Monitoring

Instant Lux level using digital lux meter was monitored at mutually agreed sampling point Instant Lux

level measurement was performed according to standard operating procedures and obtained results

are attached as Annexure-IV of the report.

2.5 Water

Following methodology was adopted for water sampling and analysis:

2.4.1 Sample Collection and Preservation

The water samples were collected from mutually agreed sampling points based on the sampling

technique in accordance to the SOP based on the recognized methods of United State

Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA) and American Public Health Association (APHA) for water

sampling and analysis. The collected water samples were preserved in appropriate containers as per

APHA Guidelines. A shipping container (Ice box with eutectic cold packs instead of ice) with

maintained temperature of 4° C ±5 °C was used for transporting the samples from the collection site

to the SGS environmental laboratory.

2.4.2 Sample Identification and Chain of Custody

The collected samples were labelled and assigned a unique sample identification number, sampling

date and time of collection. All the relevant information (sample location, time of collection, sample

identification, temperature, pH, collected by, preservation techniques etc) was recorded

immediately on the Chain of Custody form signed by SGS field Analyst.

2.4.3 Analysis Methods

Water & soil samples were collected from mutually agreed locations and were analyzed for

parameters using APHA and USEPA methods for water analysis. Detail of parameters and analysis

methods are described in 1.2.4 section of the report.



VI

3. Results and Discussion

SGS Pakistan (Pvt.) Ltd. conducted a comprehensive environmental monitoring at mutually agreed

sampling points. Scope of this assessment covered monitoring of ambient air quality, weather

conditions, noise level monitoring, lux monitoring and sampling and analysis of drinking water & soil

from mutually agreed sampling points. The monitoring and analysis results are given as Annexure I

to VI.

The results of ambient air quality monitored are given in Annexure-ll of the report. National

Environmental Quality Standards (NEQS) for Ambient Air given in Table 4 are used for comparison.

Table 4: National Environmental Quality Standards (NEQS) for Ambient Air

Pollutants Time-Weighted

Average

Effective from 1st July

2010

Effective from 1st January

2013

SO2 Annual Average* 80 ug/m

3 80 ug/m

3

24 hrs** 120 ug/m3 120 ug/m

3

NO2 Annual Average* 40 ug/m

3 40 ug/m

3

24hrs** 80 ug/m3 80 ug/m

3

Respirable Particulate Matter (PM10)

Annual Average* 200 ug/m3 120 ug/m

3

24 hrs** 250 ug/m3 150 ug/m

3

24 hrs** 40 ug/m3 35 ug/m

3

Carbon Monoxide (CO) 8hrs** 5 mg/m

3 5 mg/m

3

1 hr 10 mg/m3 10 mg/m

3

*Annual arithmetic mean of minimum 104 measurements in a year, taken twice a week 24 hourly at

uniform interval.

**24 hourly/ 8 hourly values should be met 98% of the year 2% of the time. It may exceed but not

on two consecutive days.

The average concentration of carbon monoxide (CO) for 08 hrs according to the National

Environmental Quality Standards (NEQS) for Ambient Air should not exceed from 5.0 mg/m3. The

values obtained are in compliance with National Environmental Quality Standards (NEQS). Graph 1,

2, 3 and 4 shows prevailing concentrations of CO in mg/m3 at project site during 24 hrs of

monitoring.

Graph 1: CO Concentration during 24 Hrs. Monitoring at Proposed Power House Site



VII

Graph 2: CO Concentration during 24 Hrs. Monitoring at Proposed Camp Area

Graph 3: CO Concentration during 24 Hrs. Monitoring at Weir Site

Graph 4: CO Concentration during 24 Hrs. Monitoring at Proposed Batching Plant Site

Average 24 hrs concentrations in Environmental Quality Standards (NEQS) for Ambient Air for

Nitrogen Dioxide (NO2) is 80 ug/m3 and average concentrations of Nitrogen Dioxide (NO2) measured

during monitoring were found in compliance with National Environmental Quality Standards.

According to standard the 24 hrs concentration of Sulphur Dioxide (SO2) in ambient air should not

exceed from 120 ug/m3, while concentration obtained was found within limit of National

Environmental Quality Standards (NEQS).



VIII

The ambient particulate matter PM10 was found 97.14 ug/m3 at proposed power house site,

87.90ug/m3 at proposed camp area, 75.19 ug/m3 at proposed weir site and 66.77ug/m3 at proposed

batching plant are within standard value of 150 ug/m3.

Table 5: Average Obtained Concentrations of Priority Pollutants

Parameter Unit LDL Proposed Power

House Site

Proposed

Camp Area

Proposed

Weir Site

Proposed

Batching Plant

Nitrogen Dioxide

(NO2) ug/m

3 5.0 <5.0 <5.0 <5.0 <5.0

Sulphur Dioxide (SO2)

ug/m3 5.0 <5.0 <5.0 <5.0 <5.0


mg/m3 0.01 0.85 0.82 0.72 0.93

Particulate Matter (PM10)

ug/m3 2.00 97.14 87.90 75.19 66.77

Noise level monitoring was conducted at the same location where the ambient air quality was

monitored. Results were attached as Annexure-lll of the report. The noise level was found in range

of 59.7 to 68.1 (dB.A) at proposed power house site, 37.0 to 57.0 (dB.A) at proposed camp site, 37.3

to 54.8 (dB.A) at proposed weir site and 35.9 to 48.9 (dB.A) at proposed batching plant. Graph 5, 6, 7

and 8 shows the values obtained during noise level monitoring at project sites respectively.

Graph 5: Variation of Noise with Time at Proposed Power house Site

Graph 6: Variation of Noise with Time at Proposed Camp Area



IX

Graph 7: Variation of Noise with Time at Proposed Weir Site

Graph 8: Variation of Noise with Time at Proposed Batching Plant

Lux monitoring was also monitored from mutually agreed source. The monitoring results are

tabulated as Annexure-IV.

Twenty five drinking water & five soil samples were also collected and submitted to SGS labs for the

analysis as per contract. The analysis results are attached as Annexure -V & Annexure VI of the

report.



X

4. Meteorological Data

4.1 Meteorological Data

• Client : Sustainable Solutions Pvt. Ltd

• Sampling Point : Proposed Power House Site

• Date of Intervention : August 26 & 27, 2013

Time Temperature Wind Direction Wind Speed Humidity Barometric Pressure

°C m/s % mm of Hg

15:00 34 W 5.4 63 742.1

16:00 34 W 4.3 60 742.3

17:00 33 W 4.7 58 741.4

18:00 32 WE 5.9 68 741.8

19:00 30 WE 5 70 741.3

20:00 30 WE 3.8 72 741

21:00 29 W 3 78 742.2

22:00 28 W 4.7 79 742.7

23:00 28 W 5.8 80 742.8

24:00 27 W 5.3 84 742.6

01:00 26 W 4.8 80 742.5

02:00 25 W 4.6 78 742.9

03:00 24 W 4.2 65 742.4

04:00 24 WE 4 63 742

05:00 26 WE 4.8 62 742.1

06:00 26 WE 5.3 60 742.5

07:00 26 WE 4.9 58 742.7

08:00 27 W 4.5 57 742.3

09:00 28 W 3 55 742.4

10:00 30 W 3.8 53 742.7

11:00 30 WE 3.1 52 742.8

12:00 30 WE 3 50 742.6

13:00 33 W 2.9 48 742.8

14:00 33 W 3.8 45 742.9



XI



• Sampling Point : Proposed Camp Area



°C m/s % mm of Hg

15:00 36 W 2.7 52 740.3

16:00 36 W 2.8 55 740.8

17:00 34 W 4.5 54 740.1

18:00 34 WE 4.9 57 741.0

19:00 32 E 5.2 58 741.8

20:00 30 E 5.0 58 741.6

21:00 28 W 4.6 59 741.2

22:00 27 E 3.8 63 742.0

23:00 26 E 2.0 64 742.8

24:00 26 E 1.8 66 741.6

01:00 24 WE 1.8 67 741.5

02:00 24 E 1.3 69 741.1

03:00 23 E 1.0 75 741.7

04:00 22 E 0.8 74 741.3

05:00 20 WE 2.4 78 740.6

06:00 20 W 2.8 78 740.4

07:00 20 W 3.7 82 740.9

08:00 21 W 2.2 80 741.2

09:00 22 WE 4.0 64 741.7

10:00 24 WE 4.3 62 742.0

11:00 26 WE 5.3 60 742.3

12:00 27 W 5.0 55 742.9

13:00 30 W 5.1 52 742.1

14:00 32 W 4.7 50 742.8



XII



• Sampling Point : Proposed Weir Site



°C m/s % mm of Hg

15:00 36 N 5.3 40 742.7

16:00 36 N 4.6 45 742.1

17:00 37 N 5.5 48 742.0

18:00 34 NW 4.0 52 742.5

19:00 33 N 3.8 52 742.9

20:00 30 N 1.0 53 742.8

21:00 27 N 3.2 55 742.7

22:00 26 N 1.8 57 742.6

23:00 25 N 1.4 60 742.3

24:00 24 NW 2.4 61 742.2

01:00 24 NW 2.2 63 742.8

02:00 23 NW 2.0 64 742.4

03:00 23 N 1.7 68 742.6

04:00 22 N 2.8 67 742.0

05:00 22 N 2.2 65 742.3

06:00 22 N 5.0 64 742.8

07:00 24 N 4.2 63 743.3

08:00 28 N 3.9 61 743.2

09:00 31 NE 3.5 59 743.6

10:00 32 NE 3.0 58 743.8

11:00 33 N 4.6 57 743.9

12:00 34 N 5.1 55 744.0

13:00 35 NE 5.4 53 744.5

14:00 36 NE 4.8 52 744.4



XIII



• Sampling Point : Proposed Batching Plant



°C m/s % mm of Hg

15:00 37 E 2.8 42 740.8

16:00 36 E 2.4 43 740.0

17:00 36 E 4.5 45 740.4

18:00 33 E 4.3 46 741.0

19:00 30 E 4.0 48 741.3

20:00 29 E 5.2 53 741.9

21:00 28 NE 5.4 56 740.7

22:00 26 NE 4.8 58 740.8

23:00 25 NE 3.1 59 740.6

24:00 24 E 2.0 60 740.9

01:00 23 E 1.9 62 740.2

02:00 22 E 1.4 63 740.5

03:00 21 E 0.9 65 742.8

04:00 20 E 1.8 68 742.3

05:00 22 E 1.2 69 742.7

06:00 24 NE 1.1 66 742.0

07:00 25 NE 2.6 64 741.9

08:00 28 NE 2.8 63 741.8

09:00 29 NE 3.5 60 741.6

10:00 29 E 4.8 57 741.7

11:00 30 E 4.6 56 741.5

12:00 32 E 4.0 55 741.9

13:00 34 E 4.4 54 741.4

14:00 34 E 4.1 52 741.8



XIV

5. Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Data

5.1 Ambient Air Quality

• Client : Sustainable Solutions Pvt. Ltd.

• Sampling Point : Proposed Power House Site

• Date of Intervention : August 26-27, 2013

Parameter Unit Duration LDL Average Obtained Concentration

Carbon Monoxide (CO) mg/m3 24 Hours 0.01 0.85

Nitrogen Dioxide(NO2) ug/m3 24 Hours 5.0 <5.0

Sulfur Dioxide (SO2) ug/m3 24 Hours 5.0 <5.0

Particulate Matter (PM10) ug/m3 24 Hours 2.00 97.14

ug/m3: micrograms per cubic meter mg/m3: milligram per cubic meter LDL: Lowest Detection Limit





• Parameter Unit Duration LDL Average Obtained Concentration


















XV













XVI

6. Noise Level Monitoring Data



• Sampling Point : Proposed Powerhouse Site

• Date of Intervention : September 26-27, 2013

Sr.# Time (Hrs) Reading 1 (dBA) Reading 2 (dBA) Reading 3 (dBA)

1. 15:00 44.2 44.8 45.3

2. 16:00 52.5 52.9 53.3

3. 17:00 45.4 46.0 46.3

4. 18:00 49.1 49.6 49.8

5. 19:00 56.3 56.8 57.1

6. 20:00 40.1 40.4 40.6

7. 21:00 41.3 41.5 41.9

8. 22:00 39.5 40.2 40.6

9. 23:00 38.0 38.3 39.1

10. 24:00 40.3 40.5 40.9

11. 01:00 39.1 39.4 39.8

12. 02:00 39.5 39.9 40.3

13. 03:00 38.0 38.4 39.0

14. 04:00 37.8 38.1 38.0

15. 05:00 40.3 40.6 41.1

16. 06:00 39.5 39.9 40.4

17. 07:00 43.4 43.9 44.3

18. 08:00 52.5 52.9 53.3

19. 09:00 54.1 54.5 54.8

20. 10:00 46.3 46.9 47.4

21. 11:00 42.1 42.5 43.9

22. 12:00 53.5 54.1 54.8

23. 13:00 50.3 50.9 51.4

24. 14:00 44.5 44.8 45.3



XVII






1. 15:00 52.4 53.0 53.2

2. 16:00 45.1 45.3 45.8

3. 17:00 42.0 42.5 42.6

4. 18:00 43.1 43.8 44.0

5. 19:00 42.5 42.6 43.2

6. 20:00 39.8 40.2 40.4

7. 21:00 42.3 42.6 42.8

8. 22:00 38.1 38.4 38.6

9. 23:00 38.0 38.6 38.7

10. 24:00 39.3 39.4 39.8

11. 01:00 37.0 37.3 37.5

12. 02:00 38.2 38.4 38.6

13. 03:00 38.4 38.5 38.9

14. 04:00 39.0 39.1 39.3

15. 05:00 38.4 38.6 38.8

16. 06:00 39.4 39.5 39.8

17. 07:00 41.2 41.5 41.7

18. 08:00 53.4 53.9 54.1

19. 09:00 56.3 56.9 57.0

20. 10:00 46.4 46.8 46.9

21. 11:00 52.4 52.7 53.0

22. 12:00 47.8 48.3 48.5

23. 13:00 44.3 44.6 44.7

24. 14:00 42.3 42.5 42.9



XVIII






1. 15:00 40.5 40.7 41.0

2. 16:00 42.3 42.8 43.1

3. 17:00 44.1 44.5 44.6

4. 18:00 50.7 50.9 51.3

5. 19:00 54.4 54.5 54.8

6. 20:00 44.3 44.6 44.7

7. 21:00 41.0 41.4 41.6

8. 22:00 40.4 40.8 41.2

9. 23:00 39.8 40.3 40.5

10. 24:00 38.1 38.6 38.9

11. 01:00 49.1 49.4 49.6

12. 02:00 39.5 39.9 40.3

13. 03:00 38.4 38.5 38.7

14. 04:00 38.0 38.4 38.6

15. 05:00 36.7 37.2 37.3

16. 06:00 38.3 38.5 38.8

17. 07:00 42.3 42.4 42.7

18. 08:00 46.7 46.9 47.2

19. 09:00 53.4 53.6 53.9

20. 10:00 47.2 47.3 47.7

21. 11:00 53.4 53.7 54.0

22. 12:00 46.2 46.8 47.1

23. 13:00 44.3 44.9 45.3

24. 14:00 42.1 42.5 42.8



XIX






1. 15:00 40.3 40.7 41.0

2. 16:00 40.5 40.6 40.8

3. 17:00 38.1 38.7 39.2

4. 18:00 38.5 38.9 39.4

5. 19:00 38.3 38.5 39.1

6. 20:00 42.3 42.5 42.7

7. 21:00 36.4 36.8 37.1

8. 22:00 36.5 36.9 37.0

9. 23:00 36.3 36.5 37.0

10. 24:00 35.9 36.2 36.5

11. 01:00 36.2 36.8 37.1

12. 02:00 37.1 37.2 37.5

13. 03:00 36.5 36.7 36.8

14. 04:00 36.4 36.6 36.8

15. 05:00 36.0 36.4 36.7

16. 06:00 38.2 38.5 38.9

17. 07:00 39.4 39.7 39.9

18. 08:00 41.2 41.4 41.5

19. 09:00 47.2 47.9 47.9

20. 10:00 42.4 42.6 42.8

21. 11:00 48.4 48.5 48.9

22. 12:00 44.2 44.2 44.7

23. 13:00 47.3 47.5 47.8

24. 14:00 41.2 41.3 41.6



XX

7. Instant Lux Monitoring

7.1 Light Monitoring Report


• Monitoring Date : August 30, 2013

• Place of Intervention : Kotli Azad Jammu & Kashmir

Sr. # Sampling Point Method / Technique Unit Results

01. Near Community Area Illuminance Meter LUX 1165



XXI

8. Water Analysis Report

8.1a Microbiological Analysis Report

• Job No: ENV- LHR - 495 / 2013

• Client Name / Address: Sustainable Solutions Pvt. Ltd Peshawar

• Description Of Sample: Drinking Water

• Marking (If Any): M.Asif S/O M. Sadiq (Gulhar Colony)

• No. of sample: 01

• Sample Condition upon Receipt: Satisfactory

• Sample Collection Date: 30-08-13

• Environmental Conditions: Temperature: NA Humidity: NA

Sr.# Parameter Procedure Permissible Limits Results

01 Total Colony Count APHA: 9215 B < 500 cfu / ml 2.9x105

02 Total Coli Forms APHA: 9222 B 0 cfu / 100ml 8

03 Faecal Coli Forms (E.Coli) APHA: 9222 D 0 cfu / 100ml Absent

04 Faecal Streptococci/ Enterococci APHA: 9230 C 0 cfu / 100ml 4

cfu: colony forming unit

NOTE:

WHO/USEPA Guidelines for Drinking Water states that Total or Faecal Coli forms must be absent and

are not tolerated in Potable water.



XXII

8.1b Chemical Laboratory Test Report

• Job No: ENV - LHR - 495 / 2013


• Description of Sample: Drinking Water

• Marking (If Any): M.Asif S/O M. Sadiq (Gulhar Colony)





Sr. #

Parameters Method Unit LDL Test Results

Limits As Per NEQS

01 pH @ 25 °C APHA-4500H+ B - 0.1 7.57 6.5-8.5

02 Solids, Total dissolved (TDS)

APHA-2540 C mg/L 5.0 427.0 <1000

03 Hardness, Total as CaCO3 APHA-2340 B & C

mg/L 0.5 346.5 <500

04 Alkalinity, Total as CaCO3 APHA-2320 B mg/L 0.5 324.0 NS

05 Chloride (Cl)-1 APHA-4500CI- B mg/L 0.5 29.35 <250

06 Sulfate (SO4)-2 APHA-4500-SO4 C

mg/L 5.0 27.16 NS

07 Lead ( Pb )+2 APHA-3111 B mg/L 0.01 <0.01 ≤0.05

08 Arsenic (As)+3 APHA-3120 B mg/L 0.005 < 0.005 0.01

09 Total Iron as (Fe)+3/+2 APHA-3111 B mg/L 0.02 0.022 NS

10 Sodium (Na)+1 APHA-3111 B mg/L 1.0 31.10 NS

11 Potassium (K)+1 APHA-3111 B mg/L 0.2 2.52 NS

REMARKS: LDL: Lowest Detection Limit NS: Not Specified



XXIII


• Job No: ENV- LHR - 495 / 2013



• Marking (If Any): Mr. Abdullah S/O M. Hussain (Gulhar Colony)









04 Faecal Streptococci/ Enterococci APHA: 9230 C 0 cfu / 100ml Absent


NOTE:





XXIV


• Job No: ENV - LHR - 495 / 2013



• Marking (If Any): Mr. Abdullah S/O M. Hussain (Gulhar Colony)





Sr. #


Limits As Per NEQS

01 pH @ 25 °C APHA-4500H+ B - 0.1 7.61 6.5-8.5


APHA-2540 C mg/L 5.0 410.0 <1000


mg/L 0.5 356.4 <500




mg/L 5.0 23.87 NS

07 Lead ( Pb )+2 APHA-3111 B mg/L 0.01 0.037 ≤0.05








XXV


• Job No: ENV- LHR - 495 / 2013



• Marking (If Any): Mr. Waseem S/O Abdul Karim (Gulhar Colony)











NOTE:





XXVI


• Job No: ENV - LHR - 495 / 2013



• Marking (If Any): Mr. Waseem S/O Abdul Karim (Gulhar Colony)





Sr. #


Limits As Per NEQS

01 pH @ 25 °C APHA-4500H+ B - 0.1 7.64 6.5-8.5


APHA-2540 C mg/L 5.0 424.0 <1000


mg/L 0.5 366.3 <500




mg/L 5.0 27.16 NS

07 Lead ( Pb )+2 APHA-3111 B mg/L 0.01 0.061 ≤0.05








XXVII


• Job No: ENV- LHR - 495 / 2013



• Marking (If Any): Mr. lrshad S/O M. Nazir (Gulhar Colony)











NOTE:





XXVIII


• Job No: ENV - LHR - 495 / 2013



• Marking (If Any): Mr. lrshad S/O M. Nazir (Gulhar Colony)





Sr. #


Limits As Per NEQS

01 pH @ 25 °C APHA-4500H+ B - 0.1 7.58 6.5-8.5


APHA-2540 C mg/L 5.0 726.0 <1000


mg/L 0.5 514.8 <500




mg/L 5.0 53.50 NS

07 Lead ( Pb )+2 APHA-3111 B mg/L 0.01 0.061 ≤0.05


09 Total Iron as (Fe)+3/+2 APHA-3111 B mg/L 0.02 <0.02 NS






XXIX


• Job No: ENV- LHR - 495 / 2013



• Marking (If Any): Mr. Afaq S/O Mr. Haider (Gulhar Colony)











NOTE:





XXX


• Job No: ENV - LHR - 495 / 2013



• Marking (If Any): Mr. Afaq S/O Mr. Haider (Gulhar Colony)





Sr. #


Limits As Per NEQS

01 pH @ 25 °C APHA-4500H+ B - 0.1 7.55 6.5-8.5


APHA-2540 C mg/L 5.0 701.0 <1000


mg/L 0.5 475.2 <500




mg/L 5.0 61.17 NS

07 Lead ( Pb )+2 APHA-3111 B mg/L 0.01 <0.01 ≤0.05








XXXI


• Job No: ENV- LHR - 495 / 2013



• Marking (If Any): Barali Spring








03 Faecal Coli Forms (E.Coli) APHA: 9222 D 0 cfu / 100ml 41



NOTE:





XXXII


• Job No: ENV - LHR - 495 / 2013



• Marking (If Any): Barali Spring





Sr.

#

Parameters Method Unit LDL Test

Results

Limits As Per

NEQS

01 pH @ 25 °C APHA-4500H+ B - 0.1 7.66 6.5-8.5

02 Solids, Total dissolved

(TDS)

APHA-2540 C mg/L 5.0 640.0 <1000


mg/L 0.5 405.9 <500




mg/L 5.0 41.57 NS

07 Lead ( Pb )+2 APHA-3111 B mg/L 0.01 0.027 ≤0.05








XXXIII


• Job No: ENV- LHR - 495 / 2013



• Marking (If Any): Barali (Spring Neeara)











NOTE:





XXXIV


• Job No: ENV - LHR - 495 / 2013



• Marking (If Any): Barali (Spring Neeara)





Sr.

#


Results

Limits As Per

NEQS

01 pH @ 25 °C APHA-4500H+ B - 0.1 7.70 6.5-8.5


(TDS)

APHA-2540 C mg/L 5.0 618.0 <1000


mg/L 0.5 425.7 <500




mg/L 5.0 47.33 NS

07 Lead ( Pb )+2 APHA-3111 B mg/L 0.01 <0.01 ≤0.05








XXXV


• Job No: ENV- LHR - 495 / 2013



• Marking (If Any): Dharang Spring











NOTE:





XXXVI

8.8b CHEMICAL LABORATORY TEST REPORT

• Job No: ENV - LHR - 495 / 2013



• Marking (If Any): Dharang Spring





Sr.

#


Results

Limits As Per

NEQS

01 pH @ 25 °C APHA-4500H+ B - 0.1 7.68 6.5-8.5


(TDS)

APHA-2540 C mg/L 5.0 832.0 <1000


mg/L 0.5 356.4 <500




mg/L 5.0 171.63 NS

07 Lead ( Pb )+2 APHA-3111 B mg/L 0.01 0.021 ≤0.05

08 Arsenic (As)+3 APHA-3120 B mg/L 0.005 0.034 0.01







XXXVII


• Job No: ENV- LHR - 495 / 2013



• Marking (If Any): M. Shafiq S/O M. Usman (Dharang)











NOTE:





XXXVIII


• Job No: ENV - LHR - 495 / 2013



• Marking (If Any): M. Shafiq S/O M. Usman (Dharang)





Sr. #


Limits As Per NEQS

01 pH @ 25 °C APHA-4500H+ B - 0.1 7.79 6.5-8.5


APHA-2540 C mg/L 5.0 716.0 <1000


mg/L 0.5 504.9 <500




mg/L 5.0 49.39 NS

07 Lead ( Pb )+2 APHA-3111 B mg/L 0.01 0.052 ≤0.05








XXXIX


• Job No: ENV- LHR - 495 / 2013



• Marking (If Any): Mr. Haider S/O M. Abdullah (Dharang)











NOTE:





XL


• Job No: ENV - LHR - 495 / 2013



• Marking (If Any): Mr. Haider S/O M. Abdullah (Dharang)





Sr. #


Limits As Per NEQS

01 pH @ 25 °C APHA-4500H+ B - 0.1 7.81 6.5-8.5


APHA-2540 C mg/L 5.0 698.0 <1000


mg/L 0.5 495.0 <500




mg/L 5.0 51.45 NS

07 Lead ( Pb )+2 APHA-3111 B mg/L 0.01 0.025 ≤0.05








XLI


• Job No: ENV- LHR - 495 / 2013



• Marking (If Any): Mandi Juzvi (Spring Water)











NOTE:





XLII


• Job No: ENV - LHR - 495 / 2013








Sr.

#


Results

Limits As Per

NEQS

01 pH @ 25 °C APHA-4500H+ B - 0.1 7.69 6.5-8.5


(TDS)

APHA-2540 C mg/L 5.0 595.0 <1000


mg/L 0.5 455.4 <500




mg/L 5.0 48.56 NS

07 Lead ( Pb )+2 APHA-3111 B mg/L 0.01 0.040 ≤0.05








XLIII


• Job No: ENV- LHR - 495 / 2013














NOTE:





XLIV


• Job No: ENV - LHR - 495 / 2013








Sr.

#


Results

Limits As Per

NEQS

01 pH @ 25 °C APHA-4500H+ B - 0.1 7.16 6.5-8.5


(TDS)

APHA-2540 C mg/L 5.0 590.0 <1000


mg/L 0.5 455.4 <500




mg/L 5.0 59.68 NS

07 Lead ( Pb )+2 APHA-3111 B mg/L 0.01 <0.01 ≤0.05








XLV


• Job No: ENV- LHR - 495 / 2013














NOTE:





XLVI


• Job No: ENV - LHR - 495 / 2013








Sr.

#


Results

Limits As Per

NEQS

01 pH @ 25 °C APHA-4500H+ B - 0.1 7.17 6.5-8.5


(TDS)

APHA-2540 C mg/L 5.0 600.0 <1000


mg/L 0.5 455.4 <500




mg/L 5.0 59.68 NS

07 Lead ( Pb )+2 APHA-3111 B mg/L 0.01 <0.01 ≤0.05








XLVII


• Job No: ENV- LHR - 495 / 2013



• Marking (If Any): Hill Kalan (Spring Water)











NOTE:





XLVIII


• Job No: ENV - LHR - 495 / 2013








Sr.

#


Results

Limits As Per

NEQS

01 pH @ 25 °C APHA-4500H+ B - 0.1 7.72 6.5-8.5


(TDS)

APHA-2540 C mg/L 5.0 601.0 <1000


mg/L 0.5 485.10 <500




mg/L 5.0 56.38 NS

07 Lead ( Pb )+2 APHA-3111 B mg/L 0.01 0.041 ≤0.05








XLIX


• Job No: ENV- LHR - 495 / 2013














NOTE:





L


• Job No: ENV - LHR - 495 / 2013








Sr.

#


Results

Limits As Per

NEQS

01 pH @ 25 °C APHA-4500H+ B - 0.1 7.80 6.5-8.5


(TDS)

APHA-2540 C mg/L 5.0 580.0 <1000


mg/L 0.5 435.6 <500




mg/L 5.0 52.27 NS

07 Lead ( Pb )+2 APHA-3111 B mg/L 0.01 <0.01 ≤0.05








LI


• Job No: ENV- LHR - 495 / 2013














NOTE:





LII


• Job No: ENV - LHR - 495 / 2013








Sr.

#


Results

Limits As Per

NEQS

01 pH @ 25 °C APHA-4500H+ B - 0.1 7.80 6.5-8.5


(TDS)

APHA-2540 C mg/L 5.0 590.0 <1000


mg/L 0.5 504.9 <500




mg/L 5.0 51.45 NS

07 Lead ( Pb )+2 APHA-3111 B mg/L 0.01 <0.01 ≤0.05








LIII


• Job No: ENV- LHR - 495 / 2013



• Marking (If Any): Hill Khurd (Spring Water)











NOTE:





LIV


• Job No: ENV - LHR - 495 / 2013








Sr.

#


Results

Limits As Per

NEQS

01 pH @ 25 °C APHA-4500H+ B - 0.1 7.45 6.5-8.5


(TDS)

APHA-2540 C mg/L 5.0 589.0 <1000


mg/L 0.5 485.10 <500




mg/L 5.0 46.51 NS

07 Lead ( Pb )+2 APHA-3111 B mg/L 0.01 0.080 ≤0.05








LV


• Job No: ENV- LHR - 495 / 2013














NOTE:





LVI


• Job No: ENV - LHR - 495 / 2013








Sr.

#


Results

Limits As Per

NEQS

01 pH @ 25 °C APHA-4500H+ B - 0.1 7.62 6.5-8.5


(TDS)

APHA-2540 C mg/L 5.0 866.0 <1000


mg/L 0.5 346.50 <500




mg/L 5.0 171.22 NS

07 Lead ( Pb )+2 APHA-3111 B mg/L 0.01 0.023 ≤0.05

08 Arsenic (As)+3 APHA-3120 B mg/L 0.005 0.018 0.01







LVII


• Job No: ENV- LHR - 495 / 2013














NOTE:





LVIII


• Job No: ENV - LHR - 495 / 2013








Sr.

#


Results

Limits As Per

NEQS

01 pH @ 25 °C APHA-4500H+ B - 0.1 7.67 6.5-8.5


(TDS)

APHA-2540 C mg/L 5.0 602.0 <1000


mg/L 0.5 485.10 <500




mg/L 5.0 51.45 NS

07 Lead ( Pb )+2 APHA-3111 B mg/L 0.01 0.040 ≤0.05








LIX


• Job No: ENV- LHR - 495 / 2013



• Marking (If Any): Jamal Pur







02 Total Coli Forms APHA: 9222 B 0 cfu / 100ml TNTC



cfu: colony forming unit TNTC: Too Numerous To Count

NOTE:





LX


• Job No: ENV - LHR - 495 / 2013








Sr.

#


Results

Limits As Per

NEQS

01 pH @ 25 °C APHA-4500H+ B - 0.1 7.83 6.5-8.5


(TDS)

APHA-2540 C mg/L 5.0 498.0 <1000


mg/L 0.5 386.10 <500




mg/L 5.0 25.51 NS

07 Lead ( Pb )+2 APHA-3111 B mg/L 0.01 0.021 ≤0.05








LXI


• Job No: ENV- LHR - 495 / 2013














NOTE:





LXII


• Job No: ENV - LHR - 495 / 2013








Sr.

#


Results

Limits As Per

NEQS

01 pH @ 25 °C APHA-4500H+ B - 0.1 7.52 6.5-8.5


(TDS)

APHA-2540 C mg/L 5.0 494.0 <1000


mg/L 0.5 405.9 <500




mg/L 5.0 22.63 NS

07 Lead ( Pb )+2 APHA-3111 B mg/L 0.01 0.101 ≤0.05








LXIII


• Job No: ENV- LHR - 495 / 2013














NOTE:





LXIV


• Job No: ENV - LHR - 495 / 2013








Sr.

#


Results

Limits As Per

NEQS

01 pH @ 25 °C APHA-4500H+ B - 0.1 7.67 6.5-8.5


(TDS)

APHA-2540 C mg/L 5.0 508.0 <1000


mg/L 0.5 366.30 <500




mg/L 5.0 24.28 NS

07 Lead ( Pb )+2 APHA-3111 B mg/L 0.01 0.021 ≤0.05








LXV


• Job No: ENV- LHR - 495 / 2013



• Marking (If Any): Aghar Colony











NOTE:





LXVI


• Job No: ENV - LHR - 495 / 2013








Sr.

#


Results

Limits As Per

NEQS

01 pH @ 25 °C APHA-4500H+ B - 0.1 7.63 6.5-8.5


(TDS)

APHA-2540 C mg/L 5.0 508.0 <1000


mg/L 0.5 396.0 <500




mg/L 5.0 23.87 NS

07 Lead ( Pb )+2 APHA-3111 B mg/L 0.01 0.041 ≤0.05








LXVII


• Job No: ENV- LHR - 495 / 2013














NOTE:





LXVIII


• Job No: ENV - LHR - 495 / 2013








Sr.

#


Results

Limits As Per

NEQS

01 pH @ 25 °C APHA-4500H+ B - 0.1 7.80 6.5-8.5


(TDS)

APHA-2540 C mg/L 5.0 506.0 <1000


mg/L 0.5 386.10 <500




mg/L 5.0 20.58 NS

07 Lead ( Pb )+2 APHA-3111 B mg/L 0.01 0.041 ≤0.05








LXIX


• Job No: ENV- LHR - 495 / 2013














NOTE:





LXX


• Job No: ENV - LHR - 495 / 2013








Sr.

#


Results

Limits As Per

NEQS

01 pH @ 25 °C APHA-4500H+ B - 0.1 7.81 6.5-8.5


(TDS)

APHA-2540 C mg/L 5.0 494.0 <1000


mg/L 0.5 386.10 <500




mg/L 5.0 23.46 NS

07 Lead ( Pb )+2 APHA-3111 B mg/L 0.01 <0.01 ≤0.05








LXXI

9. Analysis Report

9.1 Chemical Laboratory Test Report

• Job No: ENV - LHR - 495 / 2013

• Client Name / Address : Sustainable Solutions Pvt. Ltd Peshawar

• Description Of Sample : Soil Sample

• Marking (If Any): (Barali)


• Sample Condition Upon Receipt: Satisfactory



Sr. # Parameters Method Unit LDL Test Results

1. Total Nitrogen (TKN) Based on APHA-4500 Norg B mg/kg 0.1 1.53

2. Total Phosphorous Based on APHA-4500 P C mg/kg 0.05 2.0

3. Cadmium (Cd)+2 USEPA 3050 B mg/kg 0.50 3.55

4. Total Chromium (Cr) USEPA 3050 B mg/kg 0.50 19.32

5. Lead (Pb)+2 USEPA 3050 B mg/kg 0.50 75.16

6. Total Iron as (Fe)+3/+2 USEPA 3050 B mg/kg 0.02 27153.91

7. Aluminium (Al)+2 USEPA 3050 B mg/kg 0.5 <0.5

8. Sulfate (SO4)-2 In-House /Gravimetric mg/kg 5.0 *

9. Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) In-House /Gravimetric mg/kg 5.0 *

Remarks: LDL: Lowest Detection Limit <: Less Than. *: Result Will Follow Soon



LXXII


• Job No: ENV - LHR - 495 / 2013



• Marking (If Any): (Gulhar)








3. Cadmium (Cd)+2 USEPA 3050 B mg/kg 0.50 <0.50










LXXIII


• Job No: ENV - LHR - 495 / 2013



• Marking (If Any): (Mandi Juzvi)


















LXXIV


• Job No: ENV - LHR - 495 / 2013



• Marking (If Any): (Jamal Pur)


















LXXV


• Job No: ENV - LHR - 495 / 2013



• Marking (If Any): (Weir Site)


















LXXVI

10. Standards

10.1 National Environmental Quality Standards (NEQS) for Ambient Air

Concentration in Ambient Air

Pollutants Time-

Weighted

Average

Effective

from 1st July

2010

Effective from

1st January

2013

Method of measurement

SO2 Annual Average*

80 ug/m3 80 ug/m3 -Ultraviolet Fluorescence Method

24 hrs** 120 ug/m3 120 ug/m3

NO Annual Average*

40 ug/m3 40 ug/m3 Gas Phase Chemiluminescence

24 hrs** 40 ug/m3 40 ug/m3

NO2 Annual Average*

40 ug/m3 40 ug/m3 Gas Phase Chemiluminescence

24 hrs** 80 ug/m3 80 ug/m3

O3 1 hr 180 ug/m3 130 ug/m3 Non Dispersive UV Absorption Method

Suspended Particulate Matter (SPM)

Annual Average*

400 ug/m3 360 ug/m3 High Volume Sampling (average flow rate not less than 1.1 m3/minute) 24 hrs** 550 ug/m3 500 ug/m3

Respirable Particulate Matter (PM10)

Annual Average*

200 ug/m3 120 ug/m3 -β Ray Absorption Method

24 hrs** 250 ug/m3 150 ug/m3

Respirable Particulate Matter (PM2.5)

Annual Average*

25 ug/m3 15 ug/m3 -β Ray Absorption Method

24 hrs** 40 ug/m3 35 ug/m3

1 hr 25 ug/m3 15 ug/m3

Lead (Pb) Annual Average*

1.5 ug/m3 1 ug/m3 ASS Method after sampling using EPM 2060 or equivalent Filter paper 24 hrs** 2 ug/m3 1.5 ug/m3


8hrs** 5 ug/m3 5 ug/m3 Non Dispersive Infra Red (NDIR) Method 1 hr 10 ug/m3 10 ug/m3

*Annual arithmetic mean of minimum 104 measurements in a year, taken twice a week 24 hourly at

uniform interval.

**24 hourly/ 8 hourly values should be met 98% of the in a year 2% of the time. It may exceed but

not on two consecutive days.



LXXVII

Standards for Drinking Water (Bacterial)

Properties/

parameters

Standard values for

Pakistan

Who Standards Remarks

All water intended for

drinking (e. Coli or

Thermo tolerant

Coliform Bacteria)

Must not be

detectable in any 100

ml sample

Must not be

detectable in any 100

ml sample

Most Asian countries

also follow WHO standards

Treated water entering the distribution system (e. Coli or Thermo tolerant Coliform and total Coliform Bacteria)

Must not be detectable in any 100 ml sample

Must not be detectable in any 100 ml sample

Most Asian countries also follow WHO standards

Treated water in the distribution system (e. Coli or Thermo tolerant Coliform and total Coliform Bacteria)

Must not be detectable in any 100 ml sample. In case of large supplies where sufficient samples are examined, must not be present in 95% of the samples taken through out any 12-month period

Must not be detectable in any 100 ml sample. In case of large supplies where sufficient samples are examined, must not be present in 95% of the samples taken through out any 12-month period

Most Asian countries also follow WHO standards



LXXVIII

National Standards for Drinking Water

Properties/

parameters

Standard values for

Pakistan

Who Standards Remarks

Physical

Colour < 15 TCU < 15 TCU

Taste Non objectionable

/Acceptable

Non objectionable

/Acceptable

Odour Non objectionable /Acceptable

Non objectionable /Acceptable

Turbidity <5NTU <5NTU

Total Hardness as CaCO3

< 500mg/l

TDS <1000 <1000

pH 6.5-8.5 6.5-8.5

Chemical

Essential Inorganic

mg/Litre mg/Litre

Aluminium (Al) <0.2 0.2

Antimony (Sb) < 0.005 (P) 0.2

Arsenic (As) < 0.05 (P) 0.01 Standards for Pakistan similar to most Asian developing countries

Barium (Ba) 0.7 0.7

Boron (B) 0.3 0.3

Cadmium (Cd) 0.01 0.003 Standards for Pakistan similar to most Asian developing countries

Chloride (Cl) <250 250

Chromium (Cr) <0.05 0.05

Copper (Cu) 2 2

Toxic inorganic

Cyanide (CN) <0.05 0.07 Standards for Pakistan similar to most Asian developing countries

Fluoride (F)* <1.5 1.5

Lead (Pb) <0.05 0.01

Manganese (Mn) <0.5 0.5

Mercury (Hg) < 0.001 0.001

Nickel (Ni) <0.02 0.02

Nitrate (NO3) <50 50

Nitrite (NO2) <3(P) 3

Selenium (Se) 0.01 (P) 0.01

Residual Chlorine 0.2-0.5 at consumer end 0.5-1.5 at source

Zinc (Zn) 5.0 3 Standards for Pakistan similar to most Asian developing countries

Organic



LXXIX

Pesticides mg/L PSQCA No. 4639-2004.

Page No. 4 Table No. 3

Serial No. 20-58 may

be Consulted***

Annex II

Penolic

Compounds (as

Phenols) mg/L

< 0.002

Polynuclear

aromatic

hydrocarbons (as

PAH) g/L

0.01 (by GC/MS

method)

Radio Active

Alpha Emitters

bq/L or pCi

0.1 0.1

Beta Emitters 1 1



I

Annexure 5A: Species Checklist and Auxiliary Data

Exhibit 5A.1: The Chorotypes assigned to the respective species and their symbols

Kingdom Origin Symbol Used

Ho

larc

tic/

Cir

cum

po

lar

Eurasian EURAS

Irano-Turanian

Pamir High mountain sub-group of IRAN

IRAN

PAMIR

Centralasiatic CAS

Eastasiatic or Sino-Japanese EAS

Southeast Asiatic SE.AS

Himalayan HIMAL

West Himalayan W.HIM

Endemic ENDEM

Tibetan TIBET

Tro

pic

al Indian INDIAN

Indo-Malayan INMAL

Subtropical SUBTR

Tropical TROP

-- Introduced or Cultivated INTR

Cosmopolitan COSMO

Exhibit 5A.2: The number of GCPs used to map the respective landcover class

S. No Landcover Code No of GCPs

1 Agriculture AGR 300

2 Riverine RIV 80

3 Open areas OPA 68

4 Settlements SET 87

5 Broadleave (Sparse) BLS 182

6 Broadleave (Medium) BLM 78

7 Broadleave (Dense) BLD 39

8 Conifer (Sparse) CNS 123

9 Conifer (Medium) CNM 34

10 Conifer (Dense) CND 29

Grand Total 1020

Exhibit 5A.3: List of plant species found in the area

GROUP

Family

Species

MON

Araceae

Sauromatum venosum (Aiton) Kunth

Cyperaceae



II

Cyperus niveus Retz.

Cyperus rotundus L.

Eriophorum comosum (Wallich) Nees

Liliaceae

Agave cantula Roxb.

Asparagus adscendens Roxb.

Orchidaceae

Harbennaria digitata Lidle.

Poaceae

Apluda mutica var. mutica L.

Arundo donax L.

Bothriochloa pertusa (L.) A. Camus

Brachiaria ramosa (Linn) Stapf

Cenchrus ciliaris L.

Cenchrus pennisetiformis Hochst & Steud

Chrysopogan serrulatus Trin

Cynodon dactylon (L.) Pers.

Desmostachya bipinnata (L.) Stapf

Dichanthium annulatum (Forssk.) Stapf

Digitaria bicornis (Lamk.) Roem & Schult. ex Loud

Echinochloa colona (L.) Link

Eragrostis poaeoides Beauvois

Heteropogon contortus (L.) Beauvois ex Roemer & Schultes

Imperata cylindrica var. cylindrica (L.) Beauvois

Paspalidium flavidum (Retz.) A. Camus

Phragmites karka (Retz.) Trin. ex Steudel

Poa annua L.

Polypogon monspeliensis (L.) Desf.

Setaria glauca (L.) Beauvois

Sorghum halepense (L.) Beauvois

Zea mays L.

ANG

Acanthaceae

Barleria cristata L.

Dicliptera roxburghiana Nees in Wall.

Justicia adhatoda L.

Amaranthaceae

Achyranthes aspera L.

Amaranthus viridis L.

Pupalia lappacea (Linn.) Juss.

Anacardiaceae

Mangifera indica L.

Apiaceae

Unknown 1

Unknown 2

Apocynaceae

Carissa opaca Stapf ex. Haines

Nerium indicum Miller

Asclepiadaceae



III

Calotropis procera (Aiton) Dryand.

Cynanchum atratum Bunge

Periploca aphylla subsp. aphylla Decne.

Tylophora hirsuta (Wall.) Wight

Asteraceae

Artemisia scoparia Besser

Bidens bipinnata L.

Conyza bonariensis (L.) Cronq.

Conyza canadensis (L.) Cronq.

Conyza japonica L.

Conyza stricta Willd.

Erigeron belloides Benth. ex Clarke.

Parthenium hysterophorus L.

Sonchus arvensis L.

Taraxacum officinale Wigg.

Xanthium strumarium L.

Bombacaceae

Bombax ceiba L.

Boraginaceae

Cynoglossum lanceolatum Forssk.

Heliotropium europaeum L

Lithospermum arvense L.

Trichodesma indicum (L.) R. Br.

Brassicaceae

Capsella bursa-pastoris (L.) Medic

Cardamine impatiens L.

Lepidium sativum L.

Cannabiaceae

Cannabis sativa L.

Celasteraceae

Gymnosporia royleana (Wall.) ex Laws

Celtaceae

Celtis australis L.

Chenopodiaceae

Chenopodium album subsp. album L.

Commelinaceae

Commelina benghalensis L.

Convolvulaceae

Convolvulus arvensis L.

Evolvulus alsinoides (Linn.) Linn.

Ipomoea carnea subsp. fistulosa Jacquem

Ipomoea purpurea (L.) Roth.

Cuscutaceae

Cuscuta reflexa var. reflexa Roxb.

Ebenaceae

Diospyros lotus L.

Euphorbiaceae

Euphorbia hirta L.

Euphorbia indica Lam.



IV

Euphorbia prostrata Ait.

Mallotus philippensis (Lam.) Muell.-Arg.

Phyllanthus amarus Schum. & Thonn.

Flacourtiaceae

Flacourtia indica (Burm.) Merrill

Geraniaceae

Geranium nepalense Sweet

Geranium rotundifolium L.

Geranium wallichianum D. Don ex Sweet

Juglandaceae

Juglans regia L.

Labiatae

Ajuga bracteosa var. bracteosa Wall.

Ajuga bracteosa var. densiflora Wall.

Calamintha umbrosa (M. Bieb.) Fisch. & Mey

Colebrookea oppositifolia Smith

Mentha royleana Benth.

Micromeria biflora var. biflora (Buch.-Ham. ex D. Don) Benth.

Otostegia limbata (Benth.) Boiss.

Plectranthus rugosus Wall. ex. Bth.

Salvia sp.

Leguminoseae

Acacia modesta Wall.

Acacia nilotica subsp. indica (L.) Willd.

Albizia lebbeck (L.) Benth.

Astragalus leucocephalus Grah. ex Benth.

Cassia fistula L.

Cassia obtusifolia Linn.

Cassia occidentalis L.

Dalbergia sissoo Roxb. ex DC.

Desmodium monotorium (Houtt) Merril

Dumasia villosa var. villosa DC.

Indigofera linifolia (Linn.f.) Retz.

Lespedeza juncea (L. f.) Pers.

Medicago sativa L.

Melilotus parviflora Desf.

Mimosa himalayana Gamble

Rynchosia minima (L.) DC.

Uraria picta (Jacquin) Desv. ex DC.

Lytheraceae

Woodfordia fruticosa (L.) Kurz.

Malvaceae

Hibiscus trionum Linn.

Malvastrum coromandelianum (L.) Garcke

Sida cordifolia L.

Martyniaceaae

Martynia annua Linn.

Meliaceae

Cedrela serrata Royle.



V

Cedrela toona Roxb. ex Wild

Melia azedarach L.

Menispermaceae

Cissampelos pareira var. hirsuta L.

Tinospora cordifolia (DC.) Miers.

Moraceae

Broussonetia papyrifera (L.) L'H {rit. ex Vent.

Ficus auriculata Lour.

Ficus benghalensis L.

Ficus carica subsp. carica L.

Ficus religiosa L.

Morus alba L.

Morus nigra L.

Morus serrata Roxb.

Muscaceae

Musca sapientum L.

Myrsinaceae

Myrsine africana L.

Myrtaceae

Eucalyptus camaldulensis Dehnh

Nyctaginaceae

Alternanthera pungens Kunth

Boerhavia procumbens (Roxb.) Hk.F

Oleaceae

Olea ferruginea Royle

Onagraceae

Oenothera rosea L’H rit. ex Aiton

Oxalidaceae

Oxalis corniculata L.

Palmaceae

Phoenix sylvestris Roxb.

Polygalaceae

Polygala abyssinica R. Br. ex Fresen.

Polygonaceae

Polygonum plebejum R.Br

Polygonum sp.

Rumex chalepensis D. Don

Punicaceae

Punica granatum L.

Ranunculaceae

Thalictrum javanicum Bl.

Rhamnaceae

Zizyphus jujuba Lam.

Zizyphus mauritiana Lam.

Zizyphus nummularia (Burm. f.) Wight & Arn.

Zizyphus oxyphylla Edgew.

Rosaceae

Duchesnea indica var. microphylla (Andr.) Focke

Fragaria nubicola Lindl. ex Lacaita



VI

Pyrus communis L.

Rubus ellipticus Smith

Rubus ulmifolius Schott.

Rubiaceae

Galium acutum Edgew.

Galium aparine var. aparine L.

Rubia cordata Thunb

Salicaceae

Populus alba L.

Populus caspica Bornm.

Populus ciliata Wall. Ex Royle

Populus nigra L.

Salix acmophylla Boiss.

Sapindaceae

Dodonaea viscosa (L.) Jacq.

Scrophulariaceae

Kickxia ramosissima (Wall) Janchen.

Linaria dalmatica (L.) Mill.

Verbascum thapsus L.

Veronica anagallis-aquatica L

Simarubaceae

Ailanthus altissima (Miller) Swingle

Solanaceae

Datura stramonium L.

Physalis divaricata D. Don

Solanum nigrum L.

Solanum surattense Burm. f.

Withania somnifera (L.) Dun.

Tiliaceae

Corchorus olitorius L.

Grewia optiva J. R. Drumm. ex Burret

Urticaceae

Debregeasia salicifolia (D. Don) Rendle

Verbenaceae

Callicarpa macrophylla Vahl

Vitex negundo L.

Violaceae

Viola sp

Vitaceae

Cissus carnosa (L) Lamk.

GYM

Pinaceae

Pinus roxburghii Sarg.

PTE

Pteridaceae

Adiantum capillus-veneris L.

Adiantum incisum Forssk.

Dryopteris pallida Formin



VII

Exhibit 5A.4: Association of species with different Habitat types in GHP

Habitat Broad leaved forest (Fb) Coniferous forest

(Fc) Mix Forest (Fm) Shrubland (S) Open land (O) Cultivated land (C) Urban (U)

Riverine (R)

Sub-category FBL FBO FBR FBS FCS FCO FCL FMS FMO SI SO SP OS OT OR CK CB CC CP UG UT UW RS RSS RSR

Shannon Diversity

Species ▼

Aca mod

+

Aca nil

+

Ach asp

+ +

+

+

+

+ +

Aga can

+ +

Ail alt

+

Aju bra

+

Aju bra

+

Alb leb

+

+

Ama vir

+ +

+

Apl mut

+

+ +

+

+

Aru don

+

+

+

+

Asp fil

Asp fil

Bar cri

+

+

+

+

+

Bid bip

+

+

+

+

Boe dif

+ +

+

Bom cei

+

Bot per

+

+

+

+

Bra ram

+

+ +

Cal mac

+

+

Cal pro

+

+

+

Can sat

+ +

+ +

+

Cap bur

+

+ +

Car imp

+

+

+

Car car

+ +

+

+

Cas fis

+

+

+

Cas obt

+

+ +

+

+

Cas occ

+

+ +

+

+

Cel aus

+



VIII



Riverine (R)


Shannon Diversity

Species ▼

Che alb

+

+ +

+ +

Cis par

+

+

+

Cis adn +

Col opp

+

+

+

Com ben

+

+ +

+

Con arv

+ + +

+

+

+

Con bon

+ +

+

Con can

+

+

+

Con jap

+

+

+

Con str

+

+ +

Cus ref

+

Cyn aur

+

+

Cyn dac

+ +

+ +

+

Cyn lan

+ +

+

Cyp niv

+

+

+

+

+

Cyp rot

+

+ +

+ +

Dal sis

+

+

Dat str

+

+

+

Deb sal

+

+

+

+

Des ele

+

+

+

+

+

Des bip

+

+

+

Dic ann

+ +

+ +

Dio lot

Dum vil

+

+

Ech col

+

+ +

+

Eri bel

+

+

+

Eri com

+

+

Euc cam

+

Eup hir

+

+

+ + +

+

+



IX



Riverine (R)


Shannon Diversity

Species ▼

Eup pro

+

+

+

+

Evo als

+ +

+

+

+

Fic aur

+

+

Fic ben

+

Fic rel

+

+

Fla ind

Fra nub

+

+

Gal acu

+

Gal apa

+ +

+

+

Ger nep

+

+ +

+

Ger wal

+

+

+ +

+

Gre opt

+

Hab dig

+

Het con

+

+

+ +

+

Imp cyl

+ +

+ +

+ +

+

Ind lin

+ +

+

+

+

Ipo car

+

+

+

Ipo pur

+

+

+

Jug reg

+

+

Jus adh

+

+

+

+

Kic ram

+

Lep sat

+ +

Les jun

+

Lit arv

+

+

Mal phi

+

Man ind

+

Mar ann

+

+

+

+

Med sat

+

+

Mel aze

+ +

+



X



Riverine (R)


Shannon Diversity

Species ▼

Mel alb

+

+ +

Mic bif

+

+

+

Mor alb

+

+

Mor ser

+

+

+

Myr afr

+

+

+

+

Ner ind

+

Oen ros

+

Oxa cor

+ +

+ +

Par hys

+

Pas fla

+ +

+

+

+ + +

Phr kar

+

+ +

+ +

+

Phy ama

+

+

Phy div

+

+

+

Pin rox

+

Ple rug

+

+

+

+

Poa ann

+

+

+

Pol aby

+

+

+

Pol ple

+

+

+ + +

+

Pol mon

+ +

+

Pop cil

+

+

+

Pop nig

+

Pun gra

+

+ +

Rub wal

+

Rub ell

+

+

+

Sau ven

+

Set gla

+

+ + +

Sid cor

+ +

Sid cor

+

Sol nig

+

+ +



XI



Riverine (R)


Shannon Diversity

Species ▼

Sol sur

+ +

+

Sor hal

+

Tha jav

+

+ +

+

+

Tin sin + +

+

Tri ind

+

+

Tyl hir +

+

+

Ura pic

+

Ver tha

+

Ver ana

+ +

+

+

+

+ +

Vit neg

+ +

Woo fru

+

Xan str

+

Zea may

+

Ziz mau

+

+

Ziz num

+ +

+

Broad leaved forest Coniferous forest Mix Forest Shrubland Open land Cultivated land Urban Riverine

0

F

b

F

B

FB

L

FB

O

FB

R

FB

S

F

c

FC

S

FC

O

FC

L

F

m

FM

S

FM

O S

S

I

S

O

S

P O

O

S

O

T

O

R C

C

K

C

B

C

C

C

P U

U

G

U

T

U

W R

R

S

RS

S

RS

R

Aca

mod 5 1 0 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Aca nil 5 1 0 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Ach

asp 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 1 1 0 3 1 0 1 4 0 1 0 0 3 0 0 1 3 1 0 0

Aga

can 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 1 1 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Ail alt 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 1 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Aju bra 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0



XII


0

F

b

F

B

FB

L

FB

O

FB

R

FB

S

F

c

FC

S

FC

O

FC

L

F

m

FM

S

FM

O S

S

I

S

O

S

P O

O

S

O

T

O

R C

C

K

C

B

C

C

C

P U

U

G

U

T

U

W R

R

S

RS

S

RS

R

Aju bra 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Alb leb 5 1 0 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 0

Ama

vir 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 1 1 0 3 0 0 1 3 0 0 0

Apl

mut 5 0 0 1 0 1 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 0 4 0 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Aru

don 5 0 0 1 0 0 3 0 1 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 1 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Asp fil 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Asp fil 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Bar cri 5 0 0 1 0 1 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 1 0 3 1 0 1 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Bid bip 5 0 0 0 0 1 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 1 4 0 0 0 0 3 1 0 0 3 0 0 0

Boe dif 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 1 1 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 0

Bom

cei 5 1 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 0

Bot per 5 0 0 0 0 1 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 0 4 0 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 0

Bra

ram 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 1 0 4 1 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Cal

mac 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 1 0 0 0 0 3 0 1 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Cal pro 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 1 0 0 3 0 0 1 3 0 0 1

Can sat 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 1 0 4 0 1 1 0 3 0 0 1 3 0 0 0

Cap

bur 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 0 4 1 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Car

imp 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 1 0 3 0 0 1 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 0

Car car 5 0 0 0 1 1 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 1 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Cas fis 5 1 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 1 0 3 1 0 0 4 0 0 0 1 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Cas obt 5 0 0 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 1 0 4 0 1 0 0 3 0 0 1 3 0 0 0

Cas occ 5 0 0 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 1 0 4 0 1 0 0 3 0 0 1 3 0 0 0

Cel aus 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 3 1 0 0 3 0 0 0



XIII


0

F

b

F

B

FB

L

FB

O

FB

R

FB

S

F

c

FC

S

FC

O

FC

L

F

m

FM

S

FM

O S

S

I

S

O

S

P O

O

S

O

T

O

R C

C

K

C

B

C

C

C

P U

U

G

U

T

U

W R

R

S

RS

S

RS

R

Che alb 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 0 4 0 1 1 0 3 0 0 1 3 1 0 0

Cis par 5 0 0 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 1 3 0 0 1 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Cis adn 5 0 1 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Col

opp 5 0 0 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 1 0 3 1 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Com

ben 5 0 0 0 0 1 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 1 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 1 0

Con

arv 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 1 1 1 3 0 0 1 4 0 1 0 0 3 0 1 0 3 0 0 0

Con

bon 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 1 0 4 0 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Con

can 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 0 4 0 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 0

Con jap 5 0 0 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 1 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Con str 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 0 4 1 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Cus ref 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 1 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Cyn

aur 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 1 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 1

Cyn

dac 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 1 0 4 1 1 0 0 3 1 0 0 3 0 0 0

Cyn lan 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 1 0 4 0 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Cyp niv 5 0 0 1 0 1 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 1 4 0 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Cyp rot 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 1 0 4 1 1 0 0 3 0 0 1 3 1 0 0

Dal sis 5 1 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 1 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 0

Dat str 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 1 0 4 0 1 0 0 3 0 0 1 3 0 0 0

Deb sal 5 1 0 1 0 0 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 1 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Des ele 5 1 0 1 0 0 3 0 1 0 0 0 0 3 0 1 0 3 1 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 1

Des bip 5 0 0 0 0 1 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 1 0 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 0

Dic ann 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 1 0 4 1 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Dio lot 5 1 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Dum 5 0 0 1 0 1 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0



XIV


0

F

b

F

B

FB

L

FB

O

FB

R

FB

S

F

c

FC

S

FC

O

FC

L

F

m

FM

S

FM

O S

S

I

S

O

S

P O

O

S

O

T

O

R C

C

K

C

B

C

C

C

P U

U

G

U

T

U

W R

R

S

RS

S

RS

R

vil

Ech col 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 0 4 1 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 0

Eri bel 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 1 4 0 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Eri com 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 1 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Euc

cam 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 3 1 0 0 3 0 0 0

Eup hir 5 0 0 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 1 4 1 1 0 0 3 0 1 0 3 0 0 1

Eup

pro 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 1 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 1 0 3 1 0 0

Evo als 5 0 0 0 0 1 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 1 0 3 1 0 1 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Fic aur 5 1 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 1 4 0 0 0 1 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Fic ben 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 1 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Fic rel 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 1 3 0 1 0 3 0 0 0

Fla ind 5 1 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Fra

nub 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 1 0 3 1 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Gal acu 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Gal apa 5 0 0 0 0 1 3 1 0 0 1 1 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Ger

nep 5 0 0 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 1 0 4 0 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Ger

wal 5 0 0 1 0 0 3 0 1 0 2 1 1 3 0 1 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Gre

opt 5 1 0 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Hab

dig 5 0 0 0 0 1 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Het

con 5 0 0 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 1 4 1 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 0

Imp cyl 5 0 0 0 0 1 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 1 0 4 1 1 0 0 3 1 0 0 3 0 0 0

Ind lin 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 1 1 4 0 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 1

Ipo car 5 0 0 0 0 1 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 1 3 0 0 1 3 0 0 0



XV


0

F

b

F

B

FB

L

FB

O

FB

R

FB

S

F

c

FC

S

FC

O

FC

L

F

m

FM

S

FM

O S

S

I

S

O

S

P O

O

S

O

T

O

R C

C

K

C

B

C

C

C

P U

U

G

U

T

U

W R

R

S

RS

S

RS

R

Ipo pur 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 1 0 0 3 1 0 1 3 0 0 0

Jug reg 5 1 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 1 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 0

Jus adh 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 1 0 3 1 0 0 4 0 0 0 1 3 0 0 1 3 0 0 0

Kic ram 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Lep sat 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 1 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Les jun 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 0

Lit arv 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 1 4 0 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Mal

phi 5 1 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 1 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Man

ind 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Mar

ann 5 0 0 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 1 0 3 0 1 0 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 0

Med

sat 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 1 0 1 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Mel

aze 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 1 3 1 0 0 3 1 0 0

Mel alb 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 0 4 1 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Mic bif 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 1 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 0

Mor

alb 5 0 0 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 1 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Mor

ser 5 1 0 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 1 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 0

Myr afr 5 0 0 1 0 1 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 1 0 3 1 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Ner ind 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 1 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Oen

ros 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Oxa

cor 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 1 1 0 0 3 0 1 1 3 0 0 0

Par hys 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 1 3 0 0 0

Pas fla 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 2 1 1 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 0 4 0 1 0 0 3 0 1 1 3 1 0 0



XVI


0

F

b

F

B

FB

L

FB

O

FB

R

FB

S

F

c

FC

S

FC

O

FC

L

F

m

FM

S

FM

O S

S

I

S

O

S

P O

O

S

O

T

O

R C

C

K

C

B

C

C

C

P U

U

G

U

T

U

W R

R

S

RS

S

RS

R

Phr kar 5 0 0 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 1 0 4 1 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 0

Phy

ama 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 0 4 0 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Phy div 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 1 0 4 0 1 0 0 3 0 0 1 3 0 0 0

Pin rox 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Ple rug 5 0 0 1 0 1 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 1 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Poa

ann 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 0 4 0 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Pol aby 5 0 0 0 0 1 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 1 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Pol ple 5 0 0 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 1 4 1 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 0

Pol

mon 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 1 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 0

Pop cil 5 1 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 1 1 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 1 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 0

Pop nig 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 1 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Pun

gra 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 1 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 1 3 1 0 0 3 0 0 0

Rub

wal 5 0 0 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Rub ell 5 0 0 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 1 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Sau

ven 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 1 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Set gla 5 0 0 0 0 1 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 1 4 1 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Sid cor 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 1 0 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Sid cor 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Sol nig 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 1 0 0 3 0 1 1 3 0 0 0

Sol sur 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 1 1 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 1 3 0 0 0

Sor hal 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 1 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Tha jav 5 0 0 1 0 1 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 0

Tin sin 5 0 1 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 1 3 0 0 0

Tri ind 5 0 0 1 0 1 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Tyl hir 5 0 1 0 0 0 3 0 0 1 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 1 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0



XVII


0

F

b

F

B

FB

L

FB

O

FB

R

FB

S

F

c

FC

S

FC

O

FC

L

F

m

FM

S

FM

O S

S

I

S

O

S

P O

O

S

O

T

O

R C

C

K

C

B

C

C

C

P U

U

G

U

T

U

W R

R

S

RS

S

RS

R

Ura pic 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 1 0 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Ver tha 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 1 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 1 4 0 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Ver

ana 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 0

Vit neg 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 1 0 0 3 0 0 1 3 0 0 0

Woo

fru 5 0 0 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 1 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Xan str 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 1 0 4 0 1 0 0 3 0 0 1 3 0 0 0

Zea

may 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 1 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0

Ziz

mau 5 0 0 1 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 1 0 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 0

Ziz

num 5 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 3 1 0 0



XVIII

Exhibit 5A.5: Landuse at Project Facilities

R#1 Thalla road Bridge to Spoil Tip #2, R#2 Rehman Bridge to Spoil Tip #1 and mouth of headrace tunnel, R#3 Rehman Bridge to Weir, R#4

Kotli-Mirpur road to Spoil Tip #3, R#5 Kotli-Mirpur road to Weir, R#6 Kotli-Mirpur road to Batching Plant

Component Code Area (Hectare) UCL AGR RIV OPA SET BLS BLM BLD CNS CNM CND

Study area (Polygon) SA 25707.695 799.541 5562.344 303.515 1269.516 4294.065 3484.192 800.600 28.612 5292.298 3500.617 372.395

Project components

318.330 38.573 59.368 54.947 9.413 43.570 94.043 16.588 0.101 0.000 0.000 0.000

1.238% 4.824% 1.067% 18.104% 0.741% 1.015% 2.699% 2.072% 0.355% 0.000% 0.000% 0.000%

Reservoir RES 298.216 37.972 52.808 54.486 8.831 42.123 86.277 15.631 0.088

Weir

2.242 0.424

0.333

0.212 1.152 0.121

Camping Site (P) CSP 2.738

2.296

0.088

0.353

Camping Site (T) CST 0.353

0.088 0.265

Camping Site (W) CSW 2.119

1.325

0.177

0.530 0.088

Batching Plant BCH 1.060 0.088 0.971

M&E Yard MEY 2.031

0.353 1.678

Switch Yard SWY 0.265

0.265

Spoil Tip #1 ST1 0.000


1.678

0.088


0.088 0.265 0.088 0.530 0.088

Spoil Tip #4 ST4 2.119 0.088

0.530 1.501

Length (km)

Road #1 R#1 1.618

0.119 0.040

0.079 0.343 0.066

Road #2 R#2 1.766

0.026 0.461 0.198 0.013

Road #3 R#3 0.667

0.013 0.079 0.171 0.013

Road #4 R#4 1.588

0.105

0.013 0.026 0.369 0.119

Road #5 R#5 0.397

0.026 0.026 0.105

Road #6 R#6 0.566

0.066

0.026 0.132



XIX

Exhibit 5A.6: List of field equipment and supplies used to collect benthic macor invertebrates fauna from Poonch River

Field equipment / supplies

� Kick-net (500 µ opening mesh)

� Standard D-frame dip nets, 500 µ opening mesh, 0.3 m width (~ 1.0 ft frame width and

handle stick at least 2meters)

� Sieve bucket, with 500 µ opening mesh (for sieving)

� 2.5 liters 95% ethanol will be converted to 70 % (750 mL of 95% ethanol topped up to 1 L

with water = 70% ethanol)

� Sample containers (air tight & leak proof plastic jars of 500 ml capacity)

� Leak proof glass vials 35ml for sample preservation

� Sample container sticking labels

� Forceps (tweezers)

� Waders (chest-high or hip boots)

� Rubber gloves (arm-length)

� Global Positioning System (GPS) Unit

Exhibit 5A.7: Benthic macro invertebrate collection stations along with date, sampling equipment and co-ordinates

Stations (Locality Name) Date Sampling Method Co-ordinates

S1 (Agar Jamalpur) 13th August 2013 D frame dip net 33° .50168 N, 73°.88085 E &

33° .49997 N, 73°.88346 E

S2 (Gheri Mandi) 13th August 2013 D frame dip net 33° .50185 N, 73°.87933 E

S3 (Mandian) 14th August 2013 D frame dip net 33° .51896 N, 73°.88577 E

S4 (Sarsawa Rangar

Nullah) 14th August 2013 D frame dip net 33° .50528 N, 73°.87213 E

S5 (Barali Bridge) 15th August 2013 Surber Net 33° .50528 N, 73°.87213 E

S6 (Bhan Nullah) 16th August 2013 Surber Net 33° .483115 N, 73°.883593 E

Exhibit 5A.8: Different Models tested for Jackal and their AIC values, likelihood and number of parameters.

Model AIC deltaAIC AIC wgtModel Likelihood no.Par. -2*LogLike

psi(road-

qd),p(terr) 138.78 0 0.3852 1 4 130.78

psi(.),p(terr) 140.4 1.62 0.1713 0.4449 3 134.4

psi(slop),p(terr) 141.24 2.46 0.1126 0.2923 5 131.24

psi(.),p(habt+terr) 141.88 3.1 0.0818 0.2122 6 129.88

psi(road),p(terr) 142.06 3.28 0.0747 0.194 5 132.06

psi(ndvi),p(terr) 142.36 3.58 0.0643 0.167 5 132.36

psi(sett-

qd),p(terr) 142.38 3.6 0.0637 0.1653 4 134.38

psi(.),p(.) 143.01 4.23 0.0465 0.1206 2 139.01

Exhibit 5A.9: Different Models tested for Fox and their AIC values, likelihood and number of parameters.


psi(.),p(terr) 60.01 0 0.3183 1 3 54.01

psi(.),p(terr+dist) 60.57 0.56 0.2406 0.7558 6 48.57



XX


psi(sett-qd),p(terr) 61.76 1.75 0.1327 0.4169 4 53.76

psi(ndvi),p(terr) 62.2 2.19 0.1065 0.3345 5 52.2

psi(slop),p(terr) 62.53 2.52 0.0903 0.2837 5 52.53

psi(elev),p(terr) 63.4 3.39 0.0584 0.1836 5 53.4

psi(.),p(.) 63.59 3.58 0.0531 0.167 2 59.59

Exhibit 5A.10: Evidence of goat poisoning and common leopard killing in forests adjacent to the project area. Information was provided by a local game guard.

a. Poisoned goat b. Killed cubs

c. Killed animal d. Face of killed one

e. Killed cubs f. With wildlife gaurd



XXI

Exhibit 5A.11: List of Mammals observed and/ or collected from the Study area Exhibit

Sr.

No.

Scientific

Name Order/ Family

English

Names Local name

IUCN

Status Abundance

1. Mus

booduga Rodentia/ Muridae

Little

Indian field

mouse

Choohi

Least

Concern

(LC)

Common

(C)

2. Rattus rattus Rodentia/ Muridae Common

Rat Chooha LC C

3. Rattus

pyctoris Rodentia/ Muridae

Turkestan

Rat Chooha LC C

4. Funambulus

pennantii Rodentia/Petromidae

Palm

Squirrel Gulehri LC C

5. Lepus

nigricollis

Lagomorpha/

Leporidae Indian Hare Siah LC C

6. Herpestes

edwardsii

Carnivora/

Herpestidae

Common

India

Mongoose

Neola LC C

7. Herpestes

javanicus

Carnivora/

Herpestidae Mongoose Neola LC C

8. Lutrogale

perspicillata Carnivora/ Mustelidae

Common

Otter Ludhar Vulnerable Rare

9. Hemiechinus

collaris

Insectivora/ Erinaceidae

Long-eared hedgehog

Kundyara Chooha

LC C

10. Hystrix

indica Rodentia/ Hystricidae

Indian crested porcupine

Seh LC C

11. Vulpes

bengalensis Carnivora/ Canidae Bengal Fox Loomri LC C

12. Canis aureus Carnivora/Canidae Asiatic Jackal

Gidar LC C

13. Suncus

murinus Insectivora/Soricidae

Common Shrew

Kees LC C

14. Rousettus

leschenaultii Chiroptera/Pteropidae

Fulvous Fruit Bat

Chamgadar LC C

15. Scotophilus

heathii

Chiroptera/ Vespertilionidae

Common Yellow-bellied Bat

Chumgadar LC C

16. Pipistrellus

kuhlii

Chiroptera/ Vespertilionidae

Kuhl’s Pipistrelle

Chumgadar LC C

17. Pipistrellus

tenuis Chiroptera/ Vespertilionidae

Least pipistrelle

Chumgadar LC C



XXII

Exhibit 5A.12: Reptile and Amphibian Species Found in the Study Area

Sr.

No. Zoological Name Common Name

Observation Records

Direct Indirect

1 Bufo stomaticus Indus valley toad √ -

2 Bufo melanostictus Hazara toad √ -

3 Microhyla ornata Ant Frog √ -

4 Euphlyctis cyanophlyctis Skittering frog √ -

5 Fejevarya limnocharis Alpine cricket frog √ -

6 Hoplobatrachus tigerinus Bullfrog √ -

7 Lissemys punctata andersoni Indian flap-shell turtle - Interviews

8 Laudakia agrorensis Agrore valley agama √ -

9 Laudakia himalayana Himalayan agama √ -

10 Eublepharis macularius Fat-tailed gecko √ -

11 Hemidactylus flaviviridis House gecko √ -

12 Hemidactylus brookii Spotted house gecko √ -

13 Indogekko rohtasfortai Rohtas gecko √ -

14 Ophisops jerdonii Rugose spectacled lacerta √ -

15 Eutropis dissimilis Striped grass skink √ -

16 Varanus bengalensis Bengal monitor √ -

17 Typhlops ductuliformes Slender blind snake - Interviews

18 Eryx johnii Common sand boa - Interviews

19 Xenochrophis piscator Checkered keel-back - Interviews

20 Bungarus caeruleus Common krait √ -

21 Naja oxiana Brown cobra - Interviews



XXIII

Exhibit 5A.13: Checklist of Avian Fauna

Order Family Common Name Scientific Name IUCN Status

Passeriformes Laniidae Bay backed shrike Lanius vittatus - SB

Rufous-backed or long tailed shrike Lanius schach - YRR

Corvidae Tree pie Dendrocitta vagabunda - YRR

House crow Corvus splendens - YRR

Large billed crow Corvus macrorhynchos - YRR

Common raven Corvus corax - YRR

Black headed jay Garrulus lanceolatus - YRR

Dicruridae Black drongo Dicrurus macrocercus - YRR

Sturnidae Indian myna Acridotheres tristis - YRR

Pycnonotidae White cheeked bulbul Pycnonotus leucogenys - YRR

Red vented bulbul Pycnonotus cafer - YRR

Asian Black Bulbul Hypsipetes leucocephalus - YRR

Motacillidae White wagtail Motacilla alba - WV

White browed wagtail Motacilla madaraspatensis - YRR

Paddy field pipit Anthus rufulus - YRR

Tree pipit Anthus trivialis - SB

Nectaribiidae Purple sun bird Cinnyris asiaticus - YRR

Muscicapidae Pied bush chat Saxicola caprata - YRR

- Common bush chat Saxicola torquata - PM

- Indian robin Luscinia brunnea - YRR

Oriental magpie robin Copsychus saularis - YRR

- Blue caped redstart Phoenicurus caeruleocephala - SB

- White-tailed Stonechat Saxicola leucurus - YRR

Timaliidae Jungle babbler Turdoides striatus - YRR

- Common babbler Turdoides caudatus - YRR

- Striated laughing thrush Garrulax striatus - YRR

Sylviidae Lesser whitethroat Sylvia curruca - WV

Alaudidae Indian bush lark Mirafra erythroptera - YRR

Passeridae House sparrow Passer domesticus - YRR

Cisticolidae Striated prinia Prinia crinigera - YRR

Grey brested prinia Prinia hodgsonii - YRR

Rufous- fronted prinia Prinia buchanani - YRR



XXIV

Order Family Common Name Scientific Name IUCN Status

Graceful prinia Prinia gracilis - YRR

Sylviidae Blunt winged warbler Acrocephalus concinens - SB

Oriental white eye Zosterops palpebrosus - YRR

Turdidae Blue whistling thrush Myophonus caeruleus - SB

Monarchidae Asian paradise flycatcher Terpsiphone paradisi - SB

Sturnidae Brahminy Starling Sturnia pagodarum - YRR

Estrildidae Scaly-breasted munia Lonchura punctulata - YRR

Paridae Great tit Parus major - YRR

Galiformes Phasianidae Black partridge Melanoperdix niger V YRR

Columbiformes Columbidae Oriental turtle dove Streptopelia orientalis - YRR

Coraciiformes Alcedinidae White throated kingfisher Halcyon smyrnensis - YRR

Coraciidae Indian roller Coracias benghalensis - YRR

Upupidae Common hoopoe Upupa epops - SB

Meropidae Green bee eater Merops orientalis - YRR

Falconiformes Accipitridae White rumped vulture Gyps bengalensis CE YRR

Himalayan griffon Gyps himalayensis Lc YRR

Egyptian vulture Neophron percnopterus End W

Shikra or Indian sparrow hawk Accipiter badius LC YRR

Eurasian sparrow hawk Accipiter nisus - SB

Tawny eagle Aquila rapax - YRR

Black kite Milvus migrans - YRR

Falconidae Common kestrel Falco tinnunculus - YRR

Apodiformes Apodidae House swift Apus affinis - YRR

Piciformes Picidae Scaly billed woodpecker Picus squamatus - YRR

Brown fronted woodpecker Dendrocopos auriceps - YRR

Cuculiformes Cuculidae Pied cuckoo Clamator jacobinus - SB

- - Asian koel Eudynamys scolopaceus - SB

Psittaciformes Psittacidae Rose ringed parakeet Psittacula krameri - SB

Strigiformes Strigidae Spotted owlet Athene brama - YRR

Key: LC= Least Concern; NT= Near Threatened; YRR+= Year Round Resident; WV= Winter Visitor; SB=Summer Breeding; PM= Passage Migrant (Data Source

of residential status: Grimmett et al., 2008)



I

Annexure 5B: Description of Species of Concern

Fish Species

Species Bearing IUCN Status and having Commercial

Importance

Tor Putitora (Golden Mahasher)

Status: Endangered (Year of assessment, 2010)

Justification: Tor putitora is a widely distributed species in south and Southeast Asia, with a

restricted area of occupancy. However, the species is under severe threat from overfishing, loss of

habitat, decline in quality of habitat resulting in loss of breeding grounds, and from other

anthropogenic effects that have directly resulted in declines in its harvest. In addition, with several

dams planned for construction in future in the Himalayan region, they could have a more drastic

effect on tor populations blocking their migrations and affecting their breeding. Inferring population

declines from observed cases with that of the trends across the entire distribution range, the species

is estimated to have declined by more than 50% in the past and if the current trends continue and

with the new dams being built, the population may decline even up to 80% in the future. The species

is therefore assessed as Endangered and is in need of urgent conservation efforts to save it from

becoming locally extinct in several locations.

Geographic Range: The species has been reported from across the Himalayan region and elsewhere

in south Asia and southeast Asia, ranging from Afghanistan, Pakistan, India, Nepal, Bangladesh,

Bhutan, Sri Lanka, Myanmar, western Iran to eastern Thailand.

Population: It is the most common and popular fish of the Himalaya and is also sometimes known as

the golden, yellow-finned, grey-hound or the thick-lipped Mahasher. It grows up to 2.7 m. Since it is

a heavily fished species, population declines in the entire range is inferred to be anywhere between

40-50% over the last ten years. Catches have declined in most of the areas due to overfishing.

Habitat and Ecology: The fish inhabits the montane and submontane regions, in streams and rivers.

T. putitora is distributed in mid hills stretches of Himalayan region. It inhabits rapid streams with

rocky bottom, riverine pools and lakes. The fish is a column feeder in freshwater found in pH ranges

7.4-7.9 and in subtropical condition 15°C-30°C. It is omnivorous in nature during their adult stage



II

and feed on periphytic algae and diatoms in juvenile stage. The feeding and breeding habitats are

lost almost throughout their distributional range.

Major Threat(s): The population of the fish is fast depleting and at present is chiefly localized to

certain major river systems (Poonch River and Lower Swat River in Pakistan) and is fast approaching

extinction in the streams and lakes of Himalayas. Large fishes are only found in some of the

perennial pools. This species is declining from its natural habitat due to urbanization, illegal

encroachment, over fishing and chemical and physical alterations of their natural habitats. The stress

on the population is not only due to its over exploitation, but also due to the rise in developmental

activities, especially the growing number of hydroelectric and irrigation projects which have

fragmented and deteriorated its natural habitat.

Commercial Importance: It is the most common Mahasher of the Himalayas. It has afforded lucrative

source of sport for the anglers all along the Himalayas since long. It grows up to 2.7m and weighs up

to 54 Kg. The commercial fishery of Putitor Mahasher consists largely of individuals either ascending

streams for breeding or the spent ones returning to perennial reservoirs. The population of this fish

is fast depleting and at present is chiefly localized to certain rivers only. This most attractive sport

fish with excellent food value is fast approaching extinction in the streams and lakes of Pakistan and

India.

Cyprinus carpio (Common Carp)

Status: Vulnerable A2ce (Year of assessment, 2008)

Justification: The native populations are slowly but continuously declining due to river regulation.

Also hybridization with domesticated introduced stocks, East Asian congeners and their hybrids is a

serious long term threat for the species. However, superficially pure carp are still abundant in the

lower parts of rivers within its native range. Very few stocks remain genetically unpolluted as a result

of this long lasting process. The average age of the spawners is estimated to be between 20-25

years, as they are a long lived species (up to 50 years). Although no population data exists, it is

suspected that in the past 60 to 75 years within the species native range, a population decline of

over 30% has occurred due to hybridization with introduced stock and river channelization and dams

impacting the species as they need flooded areas at very specific times to successfully spawn.



III

Distribution: Afghanistan, Armenia, Austria, Azerbaijan, Bulgaria, China, Croatia, Georgia, Germany,

Hungary; Iran, Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan, Moldova, Pakistan, Romania, Russian Federation, Serbia,

Slovakia, Tajikistan, Turkey, Turkmenistan, Ukraine, and Uzbekistan.

Habitat and Ecology: Warm, deep, slow-flowing and still waters, such as lowland rivers and large,

well vegetated lakes. It has been introduced in all types of water bodies. Spawns along shores or in

backwaters. Successful survival of larvae only takes place in very warm water, among shallow

submerged vegetation.

Biology: Males reproduce for the first time at 3-5 years, females at 4-6. The fish lives up to 50 years

and usually spawns every year. Age of maturity is related to latitude and altitude. It spawns in May-

June at temperatures above 18°C. Adults often make considerable spawning migrations to suitable

backwaters and flooded meadows. Individual females spawn with a few males in dense vegetation.

The sticky eggs are attached to water plants or other submerged objects. Larvae and juveniles

inhabit warm and shallow flooded river margins or backwaters, feeding mostly on very small

zooplankton (rotifers). Reproductive success is restricted to years when the water level starts rising

in May and when high temperatures and flooding of terrestrial vegetation last for a long period

during May and June. Juveniles and adults feeds on a wide variety of benthic organisms and plant

material. It is most active during dusk and dawn. The fish is very tolerant of low oxygen

concentrations.

Major Threat(s): River regulation (they require flooded areas to spawn) and hybridization with

introduced stocks is a major threat.

Commercial Importance: The carp is a bottom dwelling fish and mostly found at the bottom of

water bodies. The growth of the carp is very rapid, particularly in favorable habitats. It can attain an

enormous size of 110 cm and can weigh up to 40 kg. Its rapid growth tasty flesh, good reproductive

ability and modest requirements have led to the carp’s becoming the stable fish of warm water

fisheries. It surpasses all other fishes in breeding ability, resistance to disease, and high quality of its

flesh; these characteristics, as its cleverness, adroitness and gameness on the hook also make it very

popular among anglers.



IV

Botia rostrata (Twin-banded Loach)

Status: Vulnerable A2cd (Year of assessment, 2010)

Justification: Botia rostrata is widespread in the hill streams across its range but faces threats such

from destructive fishing practices and from the ornamental trade and habitat destruction due to

sand and boulder mining. Population estimates of this species records a decline of more than 60% in

five years. In some other areas, it is inferred that the species may have undergone more than 30%

decline in its entire population. It is therefore assessed as Vulnerable.

Range Description: The species is recorded from the Brahmaputra basin in India and Bangladesh and

the Indus drainage from Pakistan.

Population: Population estimates of this species were carried out in different parts of its distribution

range. Catch frequency of Botia rostrata was 60% during 2004 but during 2009 it came down to 20%

probably because it is a much sought after species firstly due to its good taste and secondly due to

its ornamental value.

Habitat and Ecology: This species is reported to live in medium to fast current waters.

Commercial Importance: This fish carries no any importance as food fish but it is an ornamental fish

and being exploited for aquarium trade.



V

Ompok bimaculatus (Butter catfish)

Status: Near Threatened (Year of assessment, 2010)

Justification: A widespread species that has undergone significant decline due to overexploitation as

a food fish. The data shows declines throughout its range from overfishing and the species is

assessed as Near Threatened with urgent need for taxonomic, harvest and population studies.

Range Description: Ompok bimaculatus is widely distributed in Pakistan, India, Sri Lanka, Bangladesh

and Myanmar. However, given the uncertainties surrounding the identity of this species, it is

possible that its range is more geographically circumscribed.

Population: This species is relatively abundant throughout its distribution. No empirical data on

declines in its entire range is available, however, there are reports showing an average population

decline of 29.3% over a period of four decades (1960-2000) for this species in some areas of its

distribution. The average decline per decade since 1980 is about 60%. However, the difficulty in

extrapolating data from a localized study and the taxonomic uncertainties surrounding the

populations from throughout the subcontinent make it difficult to definitively consider this species

to be in decline.

Habitat and Ecology: Inhabits plains and submontane regions, and is found in rivers, lakes, tanks and

ponds.

Major Threat(s): Overexploitation of this species for food is a major threat and has resulted in

marked population declines. The effects of other potential anthropogenic threats such as habitat

destruction and competition from alien species need to be further ascertained.

Commercial Importance: It is considered a very tasty fish and is highly priced. It attains a length of

50 cm and weighs up to 200 grams.

Species not Bearing IUCN status but of Commercial

Importance:

The species Tor putitora, Sperata seenghala, Clupisoma garua, Schizothorax plagiostomus

(richardsonii), Cyprinus carpio and Mastacembelus armatus are commercially important species. Size

and weights of these species are given in Table 2. Brief description of the commercially important

species viz., Tor putitora, Cyprinus carpio, Schizothorax plagiostomus has already given above. Brief

description of some of the other commercially important species is given below:



VI

Clupisoma garua (Garua Bachwa)

Brief Description: Body elongate and compressed, abdominal edge keeled between pelvic fin and

vent. Mouth is subterminal and teeth in villiform bands on jaws. Barbels in four pairs, the nasal

barbells not reaching the eye while maxillary barbells extending o base of pelvic fins. Adipose fin is

absent in adults.

Commercial importance: This fish is common in the rivers of Indus plain and grows to 60 cm and

having a weight up to 500 grams. It is considered a good tasty food fish throughout its range. It is

popular among the people who relish fishes without bones and so it fetches a good price. It is,

however, not a good game fish as it is animal feeder.

Distribution: It is found in Pakistan, India, Bangladesh, and Nepal.

Biology: It inhabits large fresh water and tidal rivers. Feeds on insects, shrimps, other crustaceans

and small fish.

Labeo dyocheilus (Dhi, Torki)

Brief Description: Body elongated and snout projecting beyond mouth with distinct lateral lobes.

Mouth is wide and inferior with thick lips. Lower lip with an interrupted fold joined to isthmus by a

narrow bridge. Barbels one short maxillary pair.

Commercial importance: This is a medium sized fish. It grows up to 90 cm and attains a weight of 5

kg. It is common species of Himalayas.

Distribution: Found in Pakistan, India, Bangladesh, Nepal, and Mekong basins.

Biology: Lives in clear active currents of large rivers. A migratory species spending winters in lower

reaches of the Himalayan rivers while migrates upstream for breeding and feeding.



VII

Mastacembelus armatus (Tire-track Spiny Eel)

Brief Description: The fish has dorsal spines from 33- 40 and dorsal soft rays from 67-82, anal soft

rays 67 – 83. Body dull is brown with 1-3 darker longitudinal zigzag lines. These lines are more or less

connected to form a reticulated pattern.

Commercial importance: This species attains a length of 90 cm and weighs up to 500 grams and is

the largest spiny eel. It is very popular and a tasty food fish.

Distribution: Pakistan to Viet Nam and Indonesia.

Biology: A fish of economic importance species, both as food and aquarium trades. Lives in highland

streams to lowland wetlands. Usually found in streams and rivers with sand, pebble, or boulder

substrate. Seldom leaves the bottom except when disturbed. Also occurs in still waters, both in

coastal marshes and dry zone tanks. Reported to occur in areas with rocky bottoms but enter canals,

lakes and other floodplain areas during the flood season. It forages on benthic insect larvae, worms

and some submerged plant material.

Endemic Fish Fauna of the Gulpur Hydropower Project Area

Schistura punjabensis (Hillstream Loach)

Brief Description: The dorsal and the ventral profiles in this hill stream loach run almost parallel to

each other. The head is sub-triangular and depressed; its lower surface is greatly flattened. The

caudal fin is longer than the head. The eyes are not visible from below and for a greater part lie in

the anterior half of the head. There are six barbells, the inner maxillary are almost as long as the



VIII

diameter of the eye while the others are much longer. Well-developed lips, which are continuous at

the angles, border the mouth; the lower lip is provided with a free labial fold, which is widely

interrupted, and the lip itself is divided in the middle. The lateral line is complete and the body is

devoid of scales. There are from eleven to thirteen dark bands on the body but not meeting on the

abdomen.

Distribution: Endemic in Pakistan and distributed in Punjab and Kashmir

Biology: Occurs in small streams and rivers with gravelly bottom. Apparently non-migratory and

widespread in hill streams



Barilius pakistanicus (Pakistani Chilwa)

Brief Description: A small sized fish, body laterally compressed and both the profiles arched. Head is

triangular and pointed. Snout short and point¬ed, eyes lateral and situated in the anterior half of

head. Mouth large and antero-superior; its gape extending below the level of middle of the eye; its

lower jaw longer than the upper jaw and symphysial knob present, lower jaw with a pair of

longitudinal hard folds, covered with hard papillae running on the ventral side but not meeting each

other in front. Groove present around the angle of mouth. Nostrils are much nearer to the eye than

to the tip of snout. Barbels two pairs, rostral pair much longer than maxillary one which may extend

up to the posterior margin of eye. Dark brown on the dorsal side, 9-15 vertical dark bands extending

below lateral line. Sometimes number of bands on one side is more than on the other side.

Distribution: Endemic to Pakistan. Found in hilly areas of Punjab, Azad Kashmir, Hazara, Vale of

Peshawar, Kohi Sulaeman and Indus drainage of Balochistan.

Biology: Lives in hill streams with gravelly and rocky bottom. It is carnivorous fish living on aquatic

insects. It breeds during Monsoon season.



Reptile Species Account



IX

Out of the 21 recorded herps at the project site, six species (Agrore valley agama, Himalayan agama,

Rohtas gecko, Bengal monitor, slender blind snake and Checkered keel-back snake) were found

important being the CITES species as well as from conservation point of view whereas; two species

were found important due to being problem species in the area. The two problem species are the

venomous snakes including Common Krait (Bungarus caeruleus) and Brown Cobra (Naja oxiana).

These two snake species are also important because these can be life threat to human as well as the

livestock in the area due to their bites. A brief description of the important species is given below.

Bungarus caeruleus (Schneider, 1801), (Common Krait)

This snake is locally known as Sang Choor and considered a deadly poisonous snake. It belongs to the

Family Elapidae that includes all deadly poisonous snakes. During the survey, one specimen was

collected at one of the study site. Different local residents, wildlife watchers and farmers

interviewed during the survey also pointed out its existence in the area.

Diagnostic Characters: Dorsal color is jet black to

deep blue. A series of 3-9 light vertebral spots on

anterior part of the body followed by a 38-56

narrow transverse bands usually in pairs. Ventral

side of the body is white. This snake frequents

open grass lands, semi deserts with alluvial soil. It is

common in the marginal vegetation along tilled

fields and extends into barns, farms, grooves and

gardens. It lives in holes and crevices in the ground,

piles of cut vegetation, bricks and debris etc. It is a

nocturnal snake active just after sunset until dawn.

Its food consists of toads, frogs, snakes, lizards and

mice. A deadly poisonous snake in the area and killed by local residents whenever seen.

Naja oxiana (Echwald, 1831) (Brown Cobra)

This snake is locally known as Bhoora Naag and

considered a deadly poisonous snake. This snake

also belongs to the Family Elapidae that includes

all deadly poisonous snakes. Different local

residents, wildlife watchers and farmers

interviewed during the survey pointed out its

existence.

Diagnostic Characters: Dorsal color is light yellow

to light brown and with or without a hood mark.

Ventrum is clouded with dark. The brown cobra

inhabits dry wastelands where it lives in holes

and crevices in uneven ground. In mountainous

areas it lives in caverns and holes in rocks. It feeds on rodents, birds, snakes and lizards and often

enters inhabited houses attracted by rodents.

Fig. 3: Common Krait (Bungarus caeruleus) © M. Younus, SLF

Fig. 4: Brown Cobra (Naja oxiana) © Waseem, PWF



X

Xenochrophis piscator (Schneider, 1799) Checkered Keeled back Snake

Diagnostic Characters: Head is slightly flattened and distinct from neck, supra-labials are 8-10 with

4th and 5th in eye and infra-labials are 9-10. Ventrals are 135-152 and sub-caudals 62-78. Dorsum is

light green, grey or light reddish brown with five rows of blackish blotches. These blotches are

smaller than inter-spaces and often fused with each other to form a reticulation. This pattern is

more marked in the anterior half of the body and fades posteriorly. Ventrum is white or cream color.

It is quite common in all major drainage systems in the upper and lower indus valley.

Habitat: This snake is more common in large ponds with thick emergent vegetation. It confines itself

to side pools avoiding the main stream. In winter when most of the water bodies are dry, this snake

is helpless and is killed in large numbers by people and other animals like mongoose and kites.

Water visiting birds are said to take a high toll on young snakes. The snakes that have survived

attacks usually have broken tails which is common in this species.

Habits: This semi aquatic snake is strong and

active moving briskly both on land and in water.

It is reported to move in jumps on land. It is

known to be bad tempered; when cornered it

rears up and flattens its body ready to bite. It

strikes with great determination and rapidity,

bites viciously holding on with such tenacity that

it is difficult to dislodge and leaves nasty wounds.

During winter it is diurnal whereas in summer, it

becomes crepuscular and nocturnal. It is often

seen swimming close to the upper warmer layers

of pond in winter and basks on dry ground.

Food: It feeds on fishes, frogs, and tadpoles. The

prey is ambushed with the large teeth of the

snake that play an important role in retaining a

firm hold on slippery prey and subduing it.

Breeding: This snake breeds from February to

May. Around 50-80 eggs measuring 27-31 mm by

15-18 mm in dimensions are laid in adhering clusters in holes away from water.

Himalayan Rock Agama Laudakia himalayana (Steindachner, 1869)

Five specimens of Himalayan Rock

Agama (Laudakia himalayana) were

collected from the study area. Laudakia

himalayana is distributed from western

Himalayas to Tajikistan. In Pakistan the

species has been recorded from northern

areas around Gilgit and Chitral (Khan M.

S., 2006). Khan W. A., (2006) recorded it

Fig. 5: Checkered Keeled back Snake © Waseem, PWF

Fig. 6: Himalayan Rock Agama © Waseem, PWF



XI

from Qarchenai, Dhee and Shimshal valleys and also from Aagh, Zoi Saam, Toghraqeen, Padekishk

and Arbab Kook nullahs at different elevations from 3000 m to 4000 m in Karakorum mountain

ranges.

Diagnostic Characters: Laudakia himalayana is a diurnal and herbivore lizard. It breeds during May

and June and juveniles can be seen by July and August. During the present study apart from adult

individuals several juveniles were also observed. A grayish dorsal color was observed with light spots

in large numbers without any specific sequence. Posterior side of head and neck was bearing small

spinose scales. Tail was dorso-ventrally flattened at its base while rounded along rest of the part.

Environmental and Social Impact Assessment (Draft) - Asian ...

Documents

Transcript of Environmental and Social Impact Assessment (Draft) - Asian ...